YASKAWA CIMR-G7A4055 Instruction manual

PDF

Документ

YASKAWA
Varispeed G7
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GENERAL PURPOSE INVERTER (ADVANCED VECTOR CONTROL)
MODEL: CIMR-G7A
200V CLASS 0.4 to 110kW (1.2 to 160kVA)
400V CLASS 0.4 to 300kW (1.4 to 460kVA)
Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation, read these instructions
thoroughly, and retain for future reference.
YASKAWA
MANUAL NO. TOE-S616-60.1E
Preface
This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable
application of Varispeed G7-Series Inverters. Read
this manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect an Inverter and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference. Be sure you
understand all precautions and safety information
before attempting application.
General Precautions
• The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details.
Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according to the
instructions described in this manual.
• Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only
and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable.
• The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the
manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/or the manual.
• When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front
cover.
• If nameplates become warn or damaged, order new ones from your Yaskawa representatives or
the nearest Yaskawa sales office.
i
Safety Information
The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual. Failure to heed precautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to
the products or to related equipment and systems.
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury.
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates precautions that, if not heeded, could result in relatively serious or minor injury, damage
to the product, or faulty operation.
Failure to heed a precaution classified as a caution can result in serious consequences depending
on the situation.
Indicates important information that should be memorized.
IMPORTANT
ii
Safety Precautions
Confirmations upon Delivery
CAUTION
• Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components.
Doing so can result in injury.
Installation
CAUTION
• Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter.
If the Inverter is held by the front cover, the main body of the Inverter may fall, possibly resulting in injury.
• Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material.
Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material.
• Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Inverter in the same
enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45&deg;C.
Overheating can result in fires or other accidents.
Wiring
WARNING
• Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work.
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Be sure to ground the ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V Class:
Ground to 10 Ω or less)
Otherwise, an electric shock or fire can occur.
• Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired.
Otherwise, there is the possibility of injury. (Wiring is the responsibility of the user.)
• Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into contact with the Inverter case. Never short the output circuits.
Otherwise, an electric shock or ground short can occur.
• If the power supply is turned ON during the FWD (or REV) Run Command is given, the motor will
start automatically.
Turn the power supply ON after verifying that the RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal constant is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
CAUTION
• Check to be sure that the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the
Inverter.
Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct.
• Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter.
Otherwise, semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged.
• Connect braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units as shown in the I/O wiring
examples.
Otherwise, a fire can occur and the Inverter, braking resistors, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units can be damaged.
iii
CAUTION
• Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Otherwise, a fire may occur.
• Do not connect AC power to output terminals U, V, and W.
The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals.
• Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits.
The Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt if these devices are connected.
• Do not connect magnetic contactors to the output circuits.
If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating, surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the
Inverter to operate.
Setting User Constants
CAUTION
• Disconnect the load (machine, device) from the motor before performing rotational autotuning.
The motor may turn, possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment. Also, motor constants cannot be correctly set
with the motor attached to a load.
• Stay clear of the motor during rotational autotuning.
The motor repeats running and stopping until autotuning has been completed, possibly resulting in injury.
• In stationary autotuning 1, when the motor is first operated in the drive mode after tuning, the
remaining motor constants E2-02 (Motor rated slip) and E2-03 (Motor no-load current) are set automatically. To perform an operation immediately after stationary autotuning 1, use the following procedure under the recommended conditions.
(1) Check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode.
(2) Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions.
• The Inverter and the motor are connected.
• The motor shaft is not locked with a mechanical brake or other stopping mechanism (or function).
• A motor-load ratio of 30% or less is maintained.
• A speed of 30% or more of the base frequency set at E1-06 (default = highest frequency) is maintained at
a constant speed for one second or more.
(3) After stopping the motor, check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 again in verify mode or advanced programming mode. If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differ from the ones before the first operation was carried out,
the settings have been successfully completed. Next, check if the values are suitable or not.
If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or the instruction
manual (TOE-S616-60.1), hunting, motor vibrations, insufficient motor torque, or an overcurrent may occur because the
motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after stationary autotuning 1. For elevators, failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury. If so, perform stationary autotuning 1 again and
run the motor using the aforementioned procedure under the recommended conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2
or rotational autotuning.
Usually the standard setting for E2-02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz, and that for E2-03 is 30% to 65% of the rated current for a generalpurpose motor. Generally, the larger the motor capacity is, the smaller the rated slip and the ratio of the no-load current to
the rated current become. Use the data given in Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04) of Chapter 5 User Constants as a reference.
Trial Operation
WARNING
• Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply.
An electric shock may occur.
• Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used. If the alarmed is cleared,
the machine may start moving suddenly.
Also, design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted.
Injury may occur.
• Provide a separate emergency stop switch; the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its
function is set.
Injury may occur.
iv
WARNING
• Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal is OFF.
Injury may occur.
CAUTION
• Don't touch the radiation fins (heatsink), braking resistor, or Braking Resistor Unit. These can
become very hot.
Otherwise, a burn injury may occur.
• Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation.
Otherwise, an injury may occur.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event
of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the Inverter.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator
from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
• Don't check signals while the Inverter is running.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
• Be careful when changing Inverter settings. The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings. For the
Inverters in the 400 V class of 55 kW or more, however, select the correct power supply voltage
jumper according to the input voltage.
Otherwise, the equipment may be damaged.
Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING
• Do not touch the Inverter terminals. Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely
dangerous.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter. When
attaching the cover, always turn OFF power to the Inverter through the MCCB.
Doing so can result in electric shock.
• After turning OFF the main circuit power supply, wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out
before performing maintenance or inspections.
The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous.
• Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel.
Remove all metal objects, such as watches and rings, before starting work. Always use grounded tools.
Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock.
• For 400-V class Inverters of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC: E or later, take safety measures such as
the installation of an emergency-stop switch before adjusting constants.
Failure to do so may result in injury caused by the motor accidentally rotating during stationary autotuning performed by
the Inverter when the constants are adjusted.
• Provide a separate holding brake if necessary.
Always make any adjustments other than those involving the operation of the Inverter with the holding brake released.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator
from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution can result in injury.
v
CAUTION
• A CMOS IC is used in the control board. Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully.
The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly.
• Do not change the wiring, or remove connectors or the Digital Operator, during operation.
Doing so can result in personal injury.
Other
WARNING
• Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter.
Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury.
CAUTION
• Do not subject the Inverter to halogen gases, such as fluorine, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, at any
time even during transportation or installation.
Otherwise, the Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt.
vi
Warning Information and Position
There is warning information on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration.
Always heed the warnings.
Warning
information
position
Warning
information
position
Illustration shows the CIMR-G7A20P4
Illustration shows the CIMR-G7A2018
Warning Information
! WARNING
Risk of electric shock.
yRead manual before installing.
yWait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge
after disconnecting power supply.
! AVERTISSEMENT
Risque de d&eacute;charge &eacute;lectrique.
yLire le manuel avant l' installation.
yAttendre 5 minutes apr&eacute;s la coupure de
l' allmentation. Pour permettre la
d&eacute;charge des condensateurs.
!
y
y
vii
Warranty Information
Free Warranty Period and Scope
Warranty Period
This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa’s customer or if
applicable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa’s factory whichever comes
first.
Scope of Warranty
Inspections
Periodic inspections must be conducted by the customer. However, upon request, Yaskawa or
one of Yaskawa’s Service Centers can inspect the product for a fee. In this case, if after conferring with the customer, a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period, then this fee will be waived
and the problem remedied free of charge.
Repairs
If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the
defect occurs during the warranty period, Yaskawa will provide a replacement, repair the defective product, and provide shipping to and from the site free of charge.
However, if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center determines that the problem with a
Yaskawa product is not due to defects in Yaskawa’s workmanship or materials, then the customer will be responsible for the cost of any necessary repairs. Some problems that are outside
the scope of this warranty are:
• Problems due to improper maintenance or handling, carelessness, or other reasons where the
customer is determined to be responsible.
• Problems due to additions or modifications made to a Yaskawa product without Yaskawa’s
understanding.
• Problems due to the use of a Yaskawa product under conditions that do not meet the recom-
mended specifications.
• Problems caused by natural disaster or fire.
• Or other problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or materials.
Warranty service is only applicable within Japan.
However, after-sales service is available for customers outside of Japan for a reasonable fee.
Contact your local Yaskawa representative for more information.
Exceptions
Any inconvenience to the customer or damage to non-Yaskawa products due to Yaskawa's
defective products whether within or outside the warranty period are NOT covered by this warranty.
Restrictions
• The Varispeed G7 was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may
directly affect or threaten human lives or health.
• Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems
relating to transportation, health care, space aviation, atomic or electric power, or underwater
use must contact their Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office beforehand.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality-control guidelines. However, if this
product is to be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve or result
in a life-and-death situation or loss of human life or in a facility where failure may cause a
serious accident or physical injury, safety devices must be installed to minimize the likelihood
of any accident.
viii
Registered Trademarks
The following registered trademarks are used in this manual.
• DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendors Association,
Inc.).
• InterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co.
• ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.
• LONWORKS is a registered trademark of the Echelon.
Before Reading This Manual
There are places in this manual where the constants and explanations depend on the software
version. Explanations for both old and new versions are provided. Parts that are shaded and
parts where “PRG: 102 only” appears apply to G7-series Inverters with software version
PRG: 102 and later. Parts where “PRG: 103 only” appears apply only to G7-series Inverters
with software version PRG: 103.
Be sure to confirm the PRG number on the Inverter’s nameplate. An example is given below.
Inverter
specifications
G
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output
specifications
Serial number
O/N :
S/N :
UL file number
FILE NO.: E131457
Lot number
Mass
1020
Version of software
ix
Contents
Safety Information ............................................................................................ii
Safety Precautions ..........................................................................................iii
Warning Information and Position ..................................................................vii
Warranty Information..................................................................................... viii
Registered Trademarks...................................................................................ix
Before Reading This Manual...........................................................................ix
1
Handling Inverters ...................................................................1-1
Varispeed G7 Introduction............................................................................ 1-2
Varispeed G7 Models ..................................................................................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery ........................................................................ 1-3
Checks ........................................................................................................................... 1-3
Nameplate Information ................................................................................................... 1-3
Component Names ........................................................................................................ 1-5
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .............................................................. 1-6
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00) ....................................................................................... 1-6
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)] ..................................................... 1-7
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site.............................................. 1-9
Installation Site ............................................................................................................... 1-9
Controlling the Ambient Temperature............................................................................. 1-9
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter ................................................................... 1-9
Installation Orientation and Space.............................................................. 1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............................................. 1-11
Removing the Terminal Cover ...................................................................................... 1-11
Attaching the Terminal Cover ....................................................................................... 1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover ........................ 1-13
Inverters of 15 kW or Less ........................................................................................... 1-13
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More........................................................................................ 1-16
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover .......................................... 1-17
Removing the Protection Cover ................................................................................... 1-17
Attaching the Protection Cover..................................................................................... 1-18
2
Wiring .......................................................................................2-1
Connections to Peripheral Devices .............................................................. 2-2
Connection Diagram .................................................................................... 2-3
Terminal Block Configuration ....................................................................... 2-5
x
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals .......................................................................2-6

Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ...................................................... 2-6
Main Circuit Terminal Functions ...................................................................................2-13
Main Circuit Configurations...........................................................................................2-14
Standard Connection Diagrams.................................................................................... 2-15
Wiring the Main Circuits ................................................................................................2-16
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals .................................................................2-22

Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors ......................................................................2-22
Control Circuit Terminal Functions ...............................................................................2-24
Control Circuit Terminal Connections ...........................................................................2-28
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions................................................................................2-29
Wiring Check ..............................................................................................2-30
Checks..........................................................................................................................2-30
Installing and Wiring Option Boards ...........................................................2-31

3
Option Board Models and Specifications ......................................................................2-31
Installation..................................................................................................................... 2-32
PG Speed Control Board Terminals and Specifications................................................2-33
Wiring............................................................................................................................2-35
Wiring Terminal Blocks .................................................................................................2-38
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses ............................................................2-39
Digital Operator and Modes................................................... 3-1
Digital Operator ............................................................................................3-2
Digital Operator Display.................................................................................................. 3-2
Digital Operator Keys...................................................................................................... 3-2
Modes...........................................................................................................3-5

4
Inverter Modes................................................................................................................ 3-5
Switching Modes............................................................................................................. 3-6
Drive Mode .....................................................................................................................3-7
Quick Programming Mode .............................................................................................. 3-8
Advanced Programming Mode .....................................................................................3-10
Verify Mode...................................................................................................................3-13
Autotuning Mode...........................................................................................................3-14
Trial Operation ........................................................................ 4-1
Overview of Trial Operation Procedure ........................................................4-2
Trial Operation Procedures...........................................................................4-3

Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or Higher). 4-3
Power ON .......................................................................................................................4-3
Checking the Display Status........................................................................................... 4-4
Basic Settings .................................................................................................................4-5
Settings for the Control Methods .................................................................................... 4-7
Autotuning....................................................................................................................... 4-9
Application Settings ......................................................................................................4-16
xi
No-load Operation ........................................................................................................ 4-16
Loaded Operation......................................................................................................... 4-16
Check and Recording User Constants ......................................................................... 4-17
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................................................ 4-18
5
User Constants ........................................................................5-1
User Constant Descriptions.......................................................................... 5-2
Description of User Constant Tables .............................................................................. 5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels........................................... 5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode.................................................. 5-4
User Constant Tables ................................................................................... 5-8

6
A: Setup Settings............................................................................................................ 5-8
b: Application Constants............................................................................................... 5-10
C: Autotuning Constants .............................................................................................. 5-21
d: Reference Constants................................................................................................ 5-27
E: Motor Constant Constants ....................................................................................... 5-33
F: Option Constants ..................................................................................................... 5-39
H: Terminal Function Constants................................................................................... 5-46
L: Protection Function Constants ................................................................................. 5-58
N: Special Adjustments ................................................................................................ 5-69
o: Digital Operator Constants ....................................................................................... 5-73
T: Motor Autotuning...................................................................................................... 5-77
U: Monitor Constants.................................................................................................... 5-78
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02) ................................... 5-87
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)................................. 5-90
Constant Settings by Function...............................................6-1
Frequency Reference................................................................................... 6-2
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source................................................................... 6-2
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation................................................................................. 6-5
Varispeed G7 Function Block......................................................................................... 6-8
Run Command ........................................................................................... 6-10
Selecting the Run Command Source ........................................................................... 6-10
Stopping Methods ...................................................................................... 6-12
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent .................................. 6-12
Using the DC Injection Brake ....................................................................................... 6-16
Using an Emergency Stop............................................................................................ 6-17
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics .......................................... 6-18
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times............................................................... 6-18
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function) .................................... 6-22
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration
(Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function)........................................................... 6-23
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration
(Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function) .......................................................... 6-25
xii
Preventing Overvoltage by Automatically Reducing the Regenerative Torque Limit
(Overvoltage Inhibit Function, PRG: 102 only) ..........................................................6-26
Adjusting Frequency References ...............................................................6-28
Adjusting Analog Frequency References .....................................................................6-28
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) ....................................... 6-31
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs ...........................................6-33
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) ...................................6-34
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency ...........................................................................6-34
Limiting Minimum Frequency........................................................................................6-34
Improved Operating Efficiency ...................................................................6-36
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function) ..............................6-36
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation
(Torque Compensation) ................................................................................................6-38
Hunting-prevention Function......................................................................................... 6-40
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function) ............................................ 6-41
Machine Protection.....................................................................................6-42

Reducing Noise and Leakage Current..........................................................................6-42
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)............................................................. 6-46
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation .................................................................6-49
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input ..................6-50
Using Frequency Detection: L4-01 to L4-05 .................................................................6-50
Detecting Motor Torque ................................................................................................6-53
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input .......6-56
Motor Overload Protection............................................................................................6-57
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time......................................................................6-59
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs........................................6-60
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction..................................................................................6-62
Continuing Operation..................................................................................6-63

Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored........................................................ 6-63
Speed Search ...............................................................................................................6-64
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost............6-71
Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function).............................6-72
Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault ................................................................6-73
Inverter Protection ......................................................................................6-74
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors .............................6-74
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels..........................................6-75
Input Terminal Functions ............................................................................6-76
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and

Control Circuit Terminals............................................................................................... 6-76
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands) ......................................................6-77
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) .......6-78
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN)..... 6-79
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References
(+/- Speed)....................................................................................................................6-82
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing............................................................6-83
xiii
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Board and
Control Circuit Terminals .............................................................................................. 6-83
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG) . 6-84
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter
(External Fault Function) .............................................................................................. 6-85
Output Terminal Functions ......................................................................... 6-86
Monitor Constants ...................................................................................... 6-88
Using the Analog Monitor Constants ............................................................................ 6-88
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents............................................................................. 6-90
Individual Functions ................................................................................... 6-92

Using MEMOBUS Communications ............................................................................. 6-92
Using the Timer Function ........................................................................................... 6-105
Using PID Control....................................................................................................... 6-106
Energy-saving ............................................................................................................ 6-115
Setting Motor Constants ............................................................................................. 6-117
Setting the V/f Pattern ................................................................................................ 6-120
Torque Control ........................................................................................................... 6-127
Speed Control (ASR) Structure .................................................................................. 6-136
Increasing the Speed Reference Response (Feed Forward Control) ........................ 6-142
Droop Control Function .............................................................................................. 6-143
Zero-servo Function ................................................................................................... 6-145
Digital Operator Functions........................................................................ 6-148

Setting Digital Operator Functions ............................................................................. 6-148
Copying Constants ..................................................................................................... 6-151
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator ............................................. 6-156
Setting a Password .................................................................................................... 6-156
Displaying User-set Constants Only........................................................................... 6-157
Options..................................................................................................... 6-158

Performing Speed Control with PG ............................................................................ 6-158
Using Digital Output Boards ....................................................................................... 6-162
Using an Analog Reference Board............................................................................. 6-164
Using a Digital Reference Board ................................................................................ 6-165
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines.................................................... 6-170

xiv
Brake ON/OFF Sequence .......................................................................................... 6-170
Stall Prevention during Deceleration .......................................................................... 6-172
Autotuning .................................................................................................................. 6-172
Braking Resistor Overheating Protection ................................................................... 6-172
Momentary Power Loss Restart ................................................................................. 6-172
Torque Limit................................................................................................................ 6-172
I/O Open-phase Protection and Overtorque Detection .............................................. 6-173
External Baseblock Signal.......................................................................................... 6-173
Acceleration/Deceleration Time.................................................................................. 6-173
Magnetic Contactor on the Inverter’s Output-side...................................................... 6-173
Control-related Adjustments....................................................................................... 6-174
Reducing Shock during Elevating Machine Start, Stop, Acceleration,
and Deceleration.........................................................................................................6-176
Confirming Startup Current and Reducing Carrier Frequency....................................6-179
Overvoltage Inhibit Function ....................................................................................... 6-180
Current Alarm Function ............................................................................6-181
Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function ...................................................6-182
Maintenance Timer Display Function .......................................................6-183
Settings Required to Use Maintenance Timer Display Function.................................6-183
Settings Required After Replacement of Cooling Fan or Electrolytic Capacitor ......... 6-184
7
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 7-1
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ............................................................7-2

Fault Detection................................................................................................................7-2
Alarm Detection ............................................................................................................7-15
Operation Errors ...........................................................................................................7-20
Errors During Autotuning .............................................................................................7-22
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function................................................7-23
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................7-25

If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set ...........................................................................7-25
If the Motor Does Not Operate......................................................................................7-26
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ........................................................ 7-29
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow ..................................7-29
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference .......................................................7-29
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision......................................7-30
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in
Open-loop Vector Control Method ................................................................................7-30

If Motor Deceleration is Slow ........................................................................................7-30
If the Motor Overheats ..................................................................................................7-31
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio ..........................7-32
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run..............................7-32
If There is Mechanical Oscillation .................................................................................7-32
If the Torque Generated for the Motor is Insufficient (Insufficient Power) .....................7-34
If the Torque Reference (U1-09) at Low Speeds in Open-loop Vector 2 Control is
Large Compared to That at Medium and High Speeds ................................................7-34
If Shock Occurs Near the Speed Estimator Switching Frequency in
Open-loop Vector 2 Control (PRG: 102 only) ............................................................7-34
If Torque Ripple Occurs at Very Low Speeds in Open-loop Vector 2 Control
(PRG: 102 only).........................................................................................................7-35

If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped........................................7-35
If OV is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls .............................................7-35
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference ......................................7-35
Acoustic Noise From the Motor .................................................................................... 7-36
xv
8
Maintenance and Inspection ..................................................8-1
Maintenance and Inspection ........................................................................ 8-2

9
Outline of Warranty......................................................................................................... 8-2
Daily Inspection .............................................................................................................. 8-2
Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................... 8-2
Periodic Maintenance of Parts ....................................................................................... 8-3
Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board ....................... 8-3
Types and Number of Cooling Fans Used in the Drive .................................................. 8-5
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline ................................................................................. 8-6
Circulation Fan Replacement Outline........................................................................... 8-16
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board ....................................... 8-21
Specifications ..........................................................................9-1
Standard Inverter Specifications................................................................... 9-2
Specifications by Model.................................................................................................. 9-2
Common Specifications.................................................................................................. 9-4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices........................................ 9-6
10
Appendix ................................................................................10-1
Varispeed G7 Control Methods .................................................................. 10-2
Control Methods and Features..................................................................................... 10-2
Control Methods and Applications................................................................................ 10-4
Inverter Application Precautions ................................................................ 10-6

Selection....................................................................................................................... 10-6
Installation .................................................................................................................... 10-7
Settings ........................................................................................................................ 10-7
Handling ....................................................................................................................... 10-8
Motor Application Precautions ................................................................... 10-9
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor........................................................ 10-9
Using the Inverter for Special Motors ......................................................................... 10-10
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) ................... 10-10
Conformance to UL Standard................................................................... 10-11
Conformance to CE Markings .................................................................. 10-13
CE Markings ............................................................................................................... 10-13
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings........................................................ 10-13
Wiring Examples ...................................................................................... 10-20

xvi
Using a Braking Resistor Unit .................................................................................... 10-20
Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit......................................................... 10-21
Using Braking Units in Parallel ................................................................................... 10-22
Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel............................ 10-23
Using a VS Operator .................................................................................................. 10-24
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an
Internal Power Supply ................................................................................................ 10-25
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a +24-V Common in Sourcing Mode............10-26
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode with an
External Power Supply ...............................................................................................10-27
Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs................................................................10-28
User Constants .........................................................................................10-29
INDEX
Revision History
xvii
1
Handling Inverters
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter.
Varispeed G7 Introduction ........................................... 1-2
Confirmations upon Delivery........................................1-3
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions ..............................1-6
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site .............1-9
Installation Orientation and Space .............................1-10
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover ............ 1-11
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front
Cover .........................................................................1-13
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover ..........1-17
Varispeed G7 Introduction
Varispeed G7 Models
The Varispeed-G7 Series of Inverters included two Inverters in two voltage classes: 200 V and 400 V. Maximum
motor capacities vary from 0.4 to 300 kW (41 models).
Table 1.1 Varispeed G7 Models
Voltage
Class
200 V Class
400 V Class
1-2
Maximum
Motor
Capacity
kW
Varispeed G7
Specifications
(Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.)
Output
Capacity
kVA
Basic Model Number
Open Chassis
(IEC IP00)
CIMR-G7
0.4
1.2
CIMR-G7A20P4
20P41
0.75
2.3
CIMR-G7A20P7
20P71
Enclosed Wall-mounted
[IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)]
CIMR-G7A
1.5
3.0
CIMR-G7A21P5
21P51
2.2
4.6
CIMR-G7A22P2
22P21
3.7
6.9
CIMR-G7A23P7
5.5
10
CIMR-G7A25P5
7.5
13
CIMR-G7A27P5
11
19
CIMR-G7A2011
2011
15
25
CIMR-G7A2015
20151
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmounted model.
23P71
25P51
27P51
18.5
30
CIMR-G7A2018
20180
20181
22
37
CIMR-G7A2022
20220
20221
30
50
CIMR-G7A2030
20300
20301
37
61
CIMR-G7A2037
20370
20371
45
70
CIMR-G7A2045
20450
20451
55
85
CIMR-G7A2055
20550
20551
75
110
CIMR-G7A2075
20750
20751
90
140
CIMR-G7A2090
20900
-
110
160
CIMR-G7A2110
21100
0.4
1.4
CIMR-G7A40P4
40P41
40P71
-
0.75
2.6
CIMR-G7A40P7
1.5
3.7
CIMR-G7A41P5
41P51
2.2
4.7
CIMR-G7A42P2
42P21
3.7
6.9
CIMR-G7A43P7
5.5
11
CIMR-G7A45P5
7.5
16
CIMR-G7A47P5
11
21
CIMR-G7A4011
40111
15
26
CIMR-G7A4015
40151
Remove the top and bottom covers from the Enclosed Wallmount model.
43P71
45P51
47P51
18.5
32
CIMR-G7A4018
40180
40181
22
40
CIMR-G7A4022
40220
40221
30
50
CIMR-G7A4030
40300
40301
37
61
CIMR-G7A4037
40370
40371
45
74
CIMR-G7A4045
40450
40451
55
98
CIMR-G7A4055
40550
40551
75
130
CIMR-G7A4075
40750
40751
90
150
CIMR-G7A4090
40900
40901
110
180
CIMR-G7A4110
41100
41101
132
210
CIMR-G7A4132
41320
41321
41601
160
250
CIMR-G7A4160
41600
185
280
CIMR-G7A4185
41850
-
220
340
CIMR-G7A4220
42200
-
300
460
CIMR-G7A4300
43000
-
Confirmations upon Delivery
Confirmations upon Delivery
Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered.
Table 1.2 Checks
Item
Method
Has the correct model of Inverter been
delivered?
Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter.
Is the Inverter damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or
other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components
loose?
Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or
your Yaskawa representative immediately.
Nameplate Information
There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Inverter.
Example Nameplate
The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic (Japan) Inverter: 3-phase, 200 VAC, 0.4 kW,
IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 (Type 1) standards
Inverter
specifications
G
Inverter model
Input specifications
Output
specifications
Serial number
O/N :
S/N :
UL file number
FILE NO.: E131457
Lot number
Mass
1020
Version of software
Fig 1.1 Nameplate
1-3
Inverter Model Numbers
The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum
motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
CIMR - G7 A 2 0P4
Inverter
Varispeed G7
No.
A
No.
2
4
Specification
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
Standard domestic model
Voltage Class
AC input, 3-phase, 200 V
Max. Motor Capacity
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW *
&quot;P&quot; indicates the decimal point.
AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
Fig 1.2 Inverter Model Numbers
Inverter Specifications
The Inverter specifications (“SPEC”) on the nameplate indicate the voltage class, maximum motor capacity,
the protective structure, and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes.
2 0P4 1 A
Voltage Class
No.
2
4
AC input, 3-phase, 200 V
No.
0P4
0P7
to
300
Max. Motor Capacity
0.4 kW
0.75 kW
to
300 kW *
Design revision order
AC input, 3-phase, 400 V
No.
0
1
Protective Structure
Open chassis (IEC IP00)
Enclosed wall-mounted [IEC IP20,
NEMA 1 (Type 1)]
&quot;P&quot; indicates the decimal point.
Fig 1.3 Inverter Specifications
Open Chassis Type (IEC IP00)
Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the
Inverter is mounted in a control panel.
TERMS
Enclosed Wall-mounted Type [IEC IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)]
The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted to the
interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms to the standards of NEMA 1 (Type 1) in the USA. The protective covers (see Fig. 1.4) are required for
an IEC IP20 or NEMA 1 (Type 1) protective structure.
1-4
Confirmations upon Delivery
Component Names
The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1.4. The Inverter with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig 1.5.
Top protective cover
Mounting
hole
Inverter cover
Front
cover
Mounting hole
Digital
Operator
Diecast case
Terminal
cover
Nameplate
Cooling
fan
Front cover
Digital
Operator
Terminal
cover
Nameplate
Bottom protective cover
15 kW or Less
18.5 kW or More
Fig 1.4 Inverter Appearance
Charge indicator
Control circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
18.5 kW or More
15 kW or Less
Fig 1.5 Terminal Arrangement
1-5
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Open Chassis Inverters (IP00)
Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below.
H
t1
H2
H1
H
4-d
W1
4-d
H1
W1
D1
W
H2
t1
W
(5)*
(5)
D
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW
200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 to 110 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 to 160 kW
6-d
W1
H
H2
H1
W2
W3
t1
W1
W
D1
D
400 V Class Inverters of 185 to 300 kW
Fig 1.6 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters
1-6
D
* (10) for 200 V Class Inverters of 30 to 110 kW or
400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 160 kW.
D1
3
(5)*
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)]
Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters [NEMA1 (Type 1)] are shown below.
H
Max.10
H1
H0
H2
H
H0
4-d
H3
W1
4-d
H1
W1
t1
4
H3
W
H2
t1
D1
(5)*
W
(5)*
D1
(5)
D
Grommet
3
200 V/400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW
D
* (7.5) for 200 V Class Inverters of 30 to 75 kW or 400 V
Class Inverters of 55 to 160 kW.
200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 to 75 kW
400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 to 160 kW
Fig 1.7 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters
1-7
Table 1.3 200 VAC and 400 VAC (0.4 kW to 300 kW) Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Max.
AppliVoltage cable
Class Motor
Output W
[kW]
Heat Generation (W)
Dimensions (mm)
Open Chassis (IP00)
H
D
W1 H1
H2
Enclosed Wall-mounted [NEMA1 (Type 1)]
D1
t1
Approx.
Mass
W
H
D
W1 H0
H1
H2
H3
D1
t1
Mounting
Approx.
Mass Holes
d*
Total Cooling
Heat Method
Exter InterGennal
nal
eration
0.4
0.75
1.5
157
140 280
2.2
7.5
11
200 V
(3-phase)
15
22
275 450
45
55
75
90
110
375 600
8
298
328
78
100
100
250 575
12.5
130
575 885 378 445 855
140 280
2.2
15
140
4.5
39
126 266
21
254 535
24
279 615
63
86
380
7
380 809
8
258
298
328
7.5
220 450 435
250 600 575
5.5
11
15
18.5
400 V
(3-phase)
22
140 280
4.5
8
75
90
110
132
160
53
136
64
186
6
187
87
274
7
263 112 375
11
473 174 647
679 257 936
62
878 362 1240
3.2
393
68
94
M10
95
4.5
10
240 350 207 216 350 335
275 450 258 220 435
7.5
100
2.3
26
279 535 258 220 450 435
325 550 283 260 535
105
37
329
635
450 725 348 325 700 12.5
3.2
130
500 850 358 370 820
109
15
4.5
575 916 378 445 855
46
91
140
127
165
175
Fan
1080 434 1514
1291 510 1801
1474 607 2081
114
2009 823 2832
2389 1194 3583
3.5
5
7
8
7.5
M5
4.5
65.5
7
78
10
100
2.3
105
453 1027 348 325 725 700 12.5 302
3.2
130
15
4.5
579 1324 378 445 916 855
46
408 140
44
49 Natural
65
33
46
79
41
49
90
76
64
140
132
79
211
311 135 446
M6 354 174 528
516 210 726
633 246 879
929 340 1269
98
1239 488 1727
99
137
175
Fan
737 285 1022
40
M10
127
393
39
21
246 116 362
39
165
504 1243 358 370 850 820
29
10
198 106 304
85
283 260 550 535
715
90
Natural
357 136 493
M6
599 242 839
59
78
240 350 207 216 335
105
M12 1660 871 2531
126 280 266
200 300 197 186 300 285
47
27
177
7
85
58
165 100
39
65.5
57
83
0
200 300 197 186 285
42
24
302 130
15
36
43
135
157
45
55
2.3
21
122
---
30
37
78
M5
4
209
3.7
7.5
30
12.5
453 1027 348 325 725 700
3.5
59
59
65.5
207 216 350 335
150
5
177
5
0
195 400 385
3
7
108 504 1243 358 370 850 820
157
0.75
240
87
500 850 358 370 820
350
11
57
3.2
126 280 266
200 300 197 186 300 285
7
2.3
39
177
6
7.5
220 435
140 280
4
65.5
450 725 348 325 700
0.4
1.5
258
195 385
157
5
240 350 207 216 335
250 400
37
7
3
59
200 300 197 186 285
18.5
30
126 266
177
3.7
5.5
39
1554 596 2150
1928 762 2690
M12
185
2299 928 3227
2612 1105 3717
3614 1501 5115
185
220
See Table 1.4
300
* Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Inverters.
Table 1.4 400 VAC (185 to 300 kW) Inverter Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg)
Voltage
Class
Max.
Applicable
Motor
Output
[kW]
Dimensions (mm)
Open Chassis (IP00)
W
H
D
W1
W2
W3
H1
H2
D1
t1
710
1305
413
540
240
270
1270
15
125.5
4.5
185
400 V
(3-phase)
1-8
Approx.
Mass
W H D W1
W2
W3
H1
H2
D1
t1
Approx.
Mass
Mounting
Holes
d*
260
220
300
Heat Generation (W)
Enclosed Wall-mounted [NEMA (Type1)]
280
916
1475
413
730
365
365
1440
15
125.5
4.5
415
---
M12
External
Internal
Total
Heat
Generation
4436
1994
6430
5329
2205
7534
6749
2941
9690
Cooling
Method
Fan
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Checking and Controlling the Installation Site
Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter under the following conditions and a pollution level of 2 or less (UL standard).
Table 1.5 Installation Site
Type
Ambient Operating Temperature
Humidity
Enclosed wall-mounted
-10 to + 40 &deg;C
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Open chassis
-10 to + 45 &deg;C
95% RH or less (no condensation)
Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter. Be sure to remove the protection covers
before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 15 kW or less in a panel. Refer to Page 1-17
on how to remove the protection covers.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter.
• Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. It can be installed in a totally enclosed
panel that is completely shielded from floating dust.
• When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other
foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.
• Do not install the Inverter on combustible material, such as wood.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
• Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation.
• Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides.
• Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight.
Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme
temperature increases. If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment, such as a box, use a cooling fan
or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45&deg;C.
Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter
Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal powder produced by drilling.
Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation. Otherwise, ventilation will be
reduced, causing the Inverter to overheat.
1-9
Installation Orientation and Space
Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Inverter, always
provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation.
B mm min.
A mm min.
Air
30 mm min.
30 mm min.
120 mm min.
Air
Horizontal Space
Vertical Space
200 V Class Inverters of 110 kW or 400 V Class Inverters of 160 to 220 kW*: A = 120, B = 120
400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW*: A = 300, B = 300
All other Inverters*: A = 50, B = 120
*If, however, there is a fan in the top of the control panel with sufficient exhaust capacity, the following
dimensions may be used: A = 50, B = 120.
Fig 1.8 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space
IMPORTANT
1-10
1. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted [IP20, NEMA 1 (Type 1)] Inverters.
2. Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of
15 kW or less in a panel. Refer to Page 1-17 on how to remove the protection covers.
Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or
400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or more in a panel.
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover
Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals.
Removing the Terminal Cover
Inverters of 15 kW or Less
Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 1, and then lift the terminal cover up to an angle of about 30 degrees in the direction
indicated by arrow 2.
Remove the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 3.
1
2
Approx. 30&deg;
1
3
Fig 1.9 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7A23P7 Shown Above)
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2.
1
2
Fig 1.10 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7A2018 Shown Above)
1-11
Attaching the Terminal Cover
When wiring the terminal block has been completed, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure.
For Inverters with an output of 15 kW or less, insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the grove on
the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place.
1-12
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and
Front Cover
The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover are described in this section.
Inverters of 15 kW or Less
To attach optional boards or change the terminal board connector, remove the Digital Operator and front cover
in addition to the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing
the terminal cover.
The removal and attachment procedures are given below.
Removing the Digital Operator
Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator
and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the following illustration.
2
1
Fig 1.11 Removing the Digital Operator (Model CIMR-G7A43P7 Shown Above)
1-13
Removing the Front Cover
Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in
the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.
1
1
2
Fig 1.12 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7A43P7 Shown Above)
Mounting the Front Cover
After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order to the steps to
remove the front cover.
1. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover; otherwise, Digital
Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of
the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut.
Mounting the Digital Operator
After attaching the front cover, mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverting using the following procedure.
1. Hook the Digital Operator at A (two locations) on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in
the following illustration.
2. Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B (two locations).
1-14
Removing/Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
A
1
B
2
Fig 1.13 Mounting the Digital Operator
IMPORTANT
1. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than
those described above, otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact.
2. Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover. Imperfect
contact can result.
Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operator to the front
cover.
1-15
Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
For Inverter with an output of 18.5 kW or more, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
Removing the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18.5 kW or less.
Removing the Front Cover
Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal board in the direction of arrow 2.
2
1
Fig 1.14 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7A2018 Shown Above)
Attaching the Front Cover
After completing required work, such as mounting an optional board or setting the control circuit terminal
board, attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it.
1. Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover. Contact faults can occur if the cover is
attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it.
2. Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it
clicks into place on the Inverter.
Attaching the Digital Operator
Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 15 kW or less.
1-16
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover
Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover
Inverters of 15 kW or less have protection covers on the top and bottom as shown in Fig. 1.4.Always
remove the protection covers before installing an Inverter of 15 kW or less in a panel. Use the following
procedure to remove and attach a protection cover.
Removing the Protection Cover
Top Protection Cover
Insert the tip of the straightedge screwdriver in the slot. Then, lift the cover up in the direction shown by the
arrow to remove it.
Slot
Fig 1.15 Removing the Top Protection Cover (Model CIMR-G7A43P7 Shown Above)
Bottom Protection Cover
1. Remove the terminal cover as described on Page 1-11.
2. Loosen the two screws, and remove the protection cover.
3. Return the screws to their original position and tighten (them).
4. Reattach the terminal cover as described on Page 1-12.
Terminal Cover
Screws
Bottom Protection
Cover
Fig 1.16 Removing the Bottom Protection Cover (Model CIMR-G7A43P7 Shown Above)
1-17
Attaching the Protection Cover
Top Protection Cover
The protection cover has four hooks: two hooks on the bottom and two on the sides. Fit the bottom hooks into
the holes, bend the cover slightly, and press the cover down until the hooks on the side snap.
Holes for bottom hooks
Fig 1.17 Attaching the Top Protection Cover (Model CIMR-G7A43P7 Shown Above)
Bottom Protection Cover
To attach the bottom protection cover, reverse the procedure used to remove it.
1-18
2
Wiring
This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications.
Connections to Peripheral Devices..............................2-2
Connection Diagram ....................................................2-3
Terminal Block Configuration .......................................2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals ......................................2-6
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals ................................ 2-22
Wiring Check .............................................................2-30
Installing and Wiring Option Boards ..........................2-31
Connections to Peripheral Devices
Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2.1.
Power supply
Molded-case
circuit breaker
or ground fault
interrupter
Magnetic contactor (MC)
AC reactor for power
factor improvement
Zero phase reactor
Braking resistor
Input noise filter
Inverter
DC reactor for power
factor improvement
Varispeed F7
Ground
Output noise filter
Zero phase reactor
Motor
Ground
Fig 2.1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices
2-2
Connection Diagram
Connection Diagram
The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2.2.
When using the Digital Operator, the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits.
Thermal switch contact
Braking Unit
3
(optional)
+1
MC
ON
Thermal relay trip contact
for Braking Resistor Unit
1
2
Thermal relay trip contact
for motor cooling fan
Forward Run/Stop
S1
Reverse Run/Stop
S2
CIMR-G7A2018
IM
FW
U
V
V/T2
IM
W
W/T3
PG-B2
(optional)
Thermal switch contact
for Braking Unit
THRX
External fault
SA
TA1
1
C
H
B
G
A
F
2
3
3
4
5
S3
4
6
TA3
S4
TRX
SA
2
S6
Jog frequency
selection
S7
Multi-function
contact inputs
Factory
settings
External
baseblock command
S8
MP
Multi-step speed
reference 3
S9
AC
Multi-step speed
reference 4
S10
Acc/dec time 1
S11
Emergency stop (NO)
S12
Pulse monitor output
30 mA max.
Pulse A
3
MA
Fault contact
D
1
S5
Multi-step speed
reference 2
4
Pulse B
Wiring distance:
d
:
30 m max.
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
Default: Output
frequency
Ammeter adjustment
20 kΩ
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
AM
CN5 (NPN setting)
Default: Output current
0 to +10 V
AM
+24V 8mA
Ammeter adjustment
20 kΩ
FM
SC
AC
+24V
E (G)
Pulse train input
RP
Frequency setting
2 k Ω adjustment
3
2kΩ
0 to 10 V
2
1
4 to 20 mA P
0 to 10 V
Shield wire
connection terminal
Master speed
pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
P
P
+V
Frequency setting power
+15 V, 20 mA
A1
A2
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
A3
Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
AC
0V
MA
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
(
M1
M2
P1
Default: Output frequency
0 to +10 V
MCC
Error contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min.
Min. load
1 A max.
30 VAC, 10 mA min. 5 VDC, 10 mA
1 A max.
Multi-function contact oputput
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. Min. load
30 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. 5 VDC, 10 mA
Open collector 1
Default: Zero
speed
PC
R+
R-
P3
S+
C3
S-
P4
IG
Multi-function analog output 1
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
Default: Running
signal
P2
Terminating
resistance
MAA
MB
Factory setting:
Auxiliary frequency
command
-V (15V 20mA)
FM
E(G)
MC
Frequency
setter
PG
Shieded twisted-pair
wires
TA2
Multi-step speed reference 1
(Main speed switching) g))
TRX
External
frequency
references
Cooling fan
(Ground to 100 max.)
SA
2
MCC
Motor
FV
MC
Fault reset
MC
B
Braking Resistor Unit
(optional)
FU
U/T1
T/L3
MC
1
Inverter
S/L2
2
P
-
+3
R/L1
OFF
-0
-
3-phase power R
200 to 240 V
S
50/60 Hz
T
2MCCB THRX
1
+0
Level
detector
FU
FV
FW
1MCCB
4
+
2MCCB
Thermal relay
trip contact
C4
Open collector 2
Default: Frequency
agree signal
Open collector 3
Multi-function
open-collector outputs
48 VDC 50 mA max.
Factory setting:
Inverter operation
ready
Open collector 4
Factory setting:
minor fault
Fig 2.2 Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-G7A2018 Shown Above)
2-3
1. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below.
IMPORTANT
2. The output current capacity of the +V and −V terminals are 20 mA. Do not short-circuit between the +V, −V,
and AC terminals. Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter.
3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set constant L3-04 to 0) when using a Braking Resistor
Unit. If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention, the system may not stop during deceleration.
4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single
circles.
5. The wiring for a motor with a cooling fan is not required for self-cooling motors.
6. PG circuit wiring (i.e., wiring to the PG-B2 Board) is not required for control without a PG.
7. Sequence input signals S1 to S12 are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode)
for no-voltage contacts or NPN transistors. These are the default settings.
For PNP transistor sequence connections (+24V common and sourcing mode) or to provide a 24-V external power supply, refer to Table 2.13.
8. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose.
9. DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters for 18.5 to 110 kW and
400 V Class Inverters for 18.5 to 300 kW. A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 15 kW or
less.
10.Set constant L8-01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor (model ERF). When using a Braking Resistor Unit,
a shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip.
11.The minimum permissible load of a multi-function contact output and an error contact output is 10 mA. Use
a multi-function open-collector output for a load less than 10 mA.
12.Do not ground nor connect the AC terminal on the control circuit to the unit. Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter.
13.If turning off the power only for the main circuit but leaving the power ON for the control circuit, use a separate power supply for the control circuit and a specially designed Inverter, which are sold as options.
14.
2-4
indicates shield wire and
P
indicates twisted-pair shield wire.
Terminal Block Configuration
Terminal Block Configuration
The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2.3 and Fig 2.4.
Control circuit terminals
Main circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Ground terminal
Fig 2.3 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW Shown Above)
Control circuit terminals
Charge indicator
Main circuit terminals
Ground terminal
Fig 2.4 Terminal Arrangement (200 V Class Inverter for 18.5 kW Shown Above)
2-5
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from to Table 2.3. Refer to instruction manual
TOBPC72060000 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units.
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A20P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A23P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A2011
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
,
1,
2-6
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
5.5
(10)
M5
2.5
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
2.5
14
(6)
14
(6)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
22
(4)
M5
2.5
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M5
2.5
22 to 30
(4 to 3)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
22
(4)
30 to 60
(3 to 1)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, U/T1,
2, U/T1,
B1, B2
3
3
2
(14)
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A2022
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A2018
1.2 to 1.5
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2, B1, B2,
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
V/T2, W/T3
G7A2015
1,
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Terminal
Screws
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
Possible
Wire Sizes
22
(4)
30
(3)
22
(4)
30
(3)
22
(4)
50
(1)
22
(4)
Wire Type
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A2030
3
r/ 1,
/ 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1 U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A2037
3
r/ 1,
,
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
/ 2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
1
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
/ 2
,
1
3
/ 2
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
T1/L31
3
r/ 1,
17.6 to 22.5
M8
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
G7A2090
M10
17.6 to 22.5
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21,
T1/L31
r/ 1,
8.8 to 10.8
M10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
G7A2075
M8
1.3 to 1.4
3
r/ 1,
17.6 to 22.5
M4
/ 2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A2055
M10
17.6 to 22.5
3
r/ 1,
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M10
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
, 1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A2045
Terminal
Screws
/ 2
M12
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
30 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 125
(3/0 to 250)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(1 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
30 to 60
(3 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 125
(3/0 to 250)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
80 to 200
(2/0 to 400)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
150 to 200
(250 to 350)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
200 to 325
(350 to 600)
M12
31.4 to 39.2
150 to 325
(300 to 600)
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
150
(300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Wire Type
60
(2/0)
30
(2)
1.25
(16)
80
(3/0)
38
(1)
1.25
(16)
50 &times; 2P
(1/0 &times; 2P)
50
(1/0)
1.25
(16)
80 &times; 2P
(3/0 &times; 2P)
80 &times; 2P
(3/0 &times; 2P)
80
(2/0)
1.25
(16)
150 &times; 2P
(250 &times; 2P)
100 &times; 2P
(4/0 &times; 2P)
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
60 &times; 2P
(2/0 &times; 2P)
1.25
(16)
200 &times; 2P, or
50 &times; 4P
(350 &times; 2P,
or 1/0 &times; 4P)
150 &times; 2P, or
50 &times; 4P
(300 &times; 2P,
or 1/0 &times; 4P)
150 &times; 2P
(300 &times; 2P)
1.25
(16)
2-7
Table 2.1 200 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
G7A2110
,
1
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/
L31
3
r/ 1,
/ 2
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75&deg;C.
2-8
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2(AWG)
M12
31.4 to 39.2
200 to 325
(350 to 600)
M12
31.4 to 39.2
150 to 325
(300 to 600)
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
5.5 to 60
(10 to 2/0)
150
(300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
200 &times; 2P, or
50 &times; 4P
(350 &times; 2P,
or 1/0 &times; 4P)
150 &times; 2P, or
50 &times; 4P
(300 &times; 2P,
or 1/0 &times; 4P)
150 &times; 2P
(300 &times; 2P)
1.25
(16)
Wire Type
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A40P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A41P5
,
G7A42P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A43P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A45P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A47P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
,
G7A4011
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
V/T2, W/T3
G7A4015
G7A4018
G7A4022
,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
1,
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
2
(14)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
3.5
(12)
M4
1.2 to 1.5
3.5 to 5.5
(12 to 10)
5.5
(10)
M5
2.5
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8
(8)
M5
2.5
M5
(M6)
2.5
(4.0 to 5.0)
M5
4.0 to 5.0
M5
2.5
M5
(M6)
4.0 to 5.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
8
(8)
5.5
(10)
8
(8)
8
(8)
8
(8)
14
(6)
14
(6)
22
(4)
22
(4)
38
(2)
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
5.5 to 14
(10 to 6)
8 to 14
(8 to 6)
8
(8)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
14 to 22
(6 to 4)
14 to 38
(6 to 2)
22
(4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
22 to 60
(4 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
30 to 60
(2 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
2, B1, B2,
Possible
Wire Sizes
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, B1, B2,
2, U/T1,
B1, B2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1,
3, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
3
3
2 to 5.5
(14 to 10)
M4
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A4037
1.2 to 1.5
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
2, B1, B2,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A4030
mm2 (AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Terminal
Screws
Wire Type
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
22
(4)
38
(2)
22
(4)
2-9
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A4045
3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A4055
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A4075
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
G7A4090
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
G7A4110
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A4132
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
,
1, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3, R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
G7A4160
3
r/ 1,
2-10
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M6
4.0 to 5.0
M8
9.0 to 10.0
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M10
17.6 to 22.5
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M8
8.8 to 10.8
M12
31.4 to 39.2
M4
1.3 to 1.4
Possible
Wire Sizes
mm2 (AWG)
50 to 60
(1 to 1/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
22 to 38
(4 to 2)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
5.5 to 22
(10 to 4)
38 to 60
(2 to 2/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 100
(3/0 to 4/0)
8 to 22
(8 to 4)
50 to 100
(1 to 4/0)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
50 to 100
(1/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
60 to 150
(2/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
60 to 100
(2/0 to 4/0)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
100 to 150
(4/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
80 to 200
(3/0 to 400)
8 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 200
(4/0 to 400)
80 to 60
(8 to 2/0)
50 to 150
(1/0 to 300)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Wire Type
50
(1)
22
(4)
50
(1/0)
38
(2)
1.25
(16)
100
(4/0)
50
(1)
1.25
(16)
50 &times; 2P
(1/0 &times; 2P)
60
(2/0)
1.25
(16)
80 &times; 2P
(3/0 &times; 2P)
100
(4/0)
1.25
(16)
80 &times; 2P
(3/0 &times; 2P)
50 &times; 2P
(1/0 &times; 2P)
1.25
(16)
100 &times; 2P
(4/0 &times; 2P)
50 &times; 2P
(1/0 &times; 2P)
1.25
(16)
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes (Continued)
Inverter
Model
CIMR-
G7A4185
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
M16
78.4 to 98
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
Terminal Symbol
,
1,
3
M16
78.4 to 98
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
M16
78.4 to 98
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
r/ 1,
G7A4220
,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
1,
3
mm2 (AWG)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
M16
78.4 to 98
M4
1.3 to 1.4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
M16
78.4 to 98
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L33
M16
78.4 to 98
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
M16
78.4 to 98
M16
78.4 to 98
r/ 1,
G7A4300
Possible
Wire Sizes
,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
1,
3
r/ 1,
200/ 2200,
400/ 2400
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
M16
78.4 to 98
100 to 325
(4/0 to 600)
M4
1.3 to 1.4
0.5 to 5.5
(20 to 10)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
Wire Type
150 &times; 2P
(300 &times; 2P)
125 &times; 2P
(250 &times; 2P)
200 &times; 2P
(400 &times; 2P)
150
(300)
1.25
(16)
200 &times; 2P
(400 &times; 2P)
150 &times; 2P
(350 &times; 2P)
250 &times; 2P
(500 &times; 2P)
200
(400)
1.25
(16)
325 &times; 2P
(600 &times; 2P),
125 &times; 4P
(250 &times; 4P)
325 &times; 2P
(600 &times; 2P),
125 &times; 4P
(250 &times; 4P)
200 &times; 4P
(400 &times; 4P)
Power cables,
e.g., 600 V
vinyl power
cables
125 &times; 2P
(250 &times; 2P),
325
(600)
1.25
(16)
* The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75&deg;C.
2-11
Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Wire Thickness (mm2)
Terminal Screws
Size
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
M4
1.25 to 4
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
M4
1.25 to 4
M3.5
1.25 to 3.5
M4
1.25 to 4
M3.5
2 to 3.5
M4
2 to 4
M5
2 to 5
M6
2 to 6
M8
2 to 8
M4
5.5 to 4
M5
5.5 to 5
M6
5.5 to 6
M8
5.5 to 8
M5
8 to 5
M6
8 to 6
M8
8 to 8
M6
14 to 6
M8
14 to 8
M6
22 to 6
M8
22 to 8
M8
38 to 8
M8
60 to 8
M10
60 to 10
0.5
0.75
1.25
2
3.5/5.5
8
14
22
30/38
50/60
80
M10
100
100
100 to 10
100 to 12
150
M12
200
325
80 to 10
150 to 12
200 to 12
M12 x 2
325 to 12
M16
325 to 16
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:
IMPORTANT
2-12
Line voltage drop (V) =
3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10-3
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2.4. Wire the terminals
correctly for the desired purposes.
Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (200 V Class and 400 V Class)
Purpose
Main circuit power input
Inverter outputs
DC power input
Terminal Symbol
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
R1/L11, S1/L21, T1/L31
2018 to 2110
4018 to 4300
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
20P4 to 2015
40P4 to 4015
20P4 to 2015
40P4 to 4015
2018 to 2110
4018 to 4300
20P4 to 2110
40P4 to 4300
1,
Braking Resistor Unit connecB1, B2
tion
DC reactor connection
1,
Braking Unit connection
3,
Ground
Note The
1 and
Model: CIMR-G7A
200 V Class
400 V Class
2
input terminals for the DC power do not conform to UL/cUL standards.
2-13
Main Circuit Configurations
The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2.5.
Table 2.5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations
200 V Class
400 V Class
CIMRG7A40P4 to 4015
CIMR-G7A20P4 to 2015
B1 B2
B1 B2
+1
+1
+2
+2
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
V/T2
W/T3
−
−
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Power
supply
Cooling fan is provided for
Inverters of 2.2 kW or more.
Control
circuits
Cooling fan is provided for
Inverters of 1.5 kW or more.
CIMR-G7A2018, 2022
CIMR-G7A4018 to 4045
+3
+3
+1
+1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
−
Power
supply
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
V/T2
W/T3
Power
supply
Control
circuits
CIMR-G7A2030 to 2110
Control
circuits
CIMR-G7A4055 to 4300
+3
+1
a
b
a
b
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
−
r/ l 1
a
b
Power
supply
200/ l 2200
Control
circuits
400/ l 2400
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
*
a
b
Power
supply
Control
circuits
Note Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-phase rectification.
* These terminals are wired before shipment. When using DC power for the main circuit power supply, remove the wires between R-r/
for 200 V Class Inverters, input 200 VAC to r/ 1400/ 2400.
2-14
/ 2, or, for 400 V Class Inverters, input either 200 VAC to r/ 1-
1
and S- / 2, then,
200/ 2200 or 400 VAC to r/ 1-
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Standard Connection Diagrams
Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2.5. These are the same for both 200 V Class and
400 V Class Inverters. The connections depend on the Inverter capacity.
CIMR-G7A20P4 to 2015 and 40P4 to
4015
CIMR-G7A2018, 2022, and 4018 to 4045
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
DC reactor
(optional)
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
− + 1 + 2 B1 B2
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Braking Unit
(optional)
IM
3-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Be sure to remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC
reactor.
+1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
+3 −
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
IM
The DC reactor is built in.
When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR), connect the B1 terminal of the
Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the − terminal of the Inverter to the − terminal of the
Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used in this case.
IMPORTANT
CIMR-G7A2030 to 2110
3-phase
200 VAC
+1
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
CIMR-G7A4055 to 4300
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Resistor
Unit (optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
Braking Unit
(optional)
+3 −
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
IM
3-phase
400 VAC
r/l1
/l2
+1
+3 −
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
r/l1
200/l2200
400/l2400
IM
Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models.
Fig 2.5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections
IMPORTANT
If a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor Unit is connected to a wrong terminal, the Inverter, Braking Unit, or
Braking Resistor Unit can be damaged.
Refer to FOR VARISPEED-600 SERIES INVERTER BRAKING UNIT BRAKING RESISTOR UNIT
INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC720600000) for connecting the Inverter with a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor
Unit.
2-15
Wiring the Main Circuits
This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs.
Wiring Main Circuit Inputs
Observe the following precautions for wiring the main circuit power supply inputs.
Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker
Always connect the power input terminals (R, S, and T) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker
(MCCB) suitable for the Inverter.
• Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1.5 to 2 times the Inverter's rated current.
• For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter's overload protection (one minute at
150% of the rated output current).
• If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the
power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Fig 2.6.
Inverter
Power
supply
R/L1
20P4 to 2030:
3-phase,
200 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
2037 to 2110:
3-phase,
200 to 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz
40P4 to 4300:
3-phase,
380 to 460 VAC, 50/60 Hz
S/L2
T/L3
Fault output
(NC)
* For 400 V Class Inverters, connect a 400/200 V transformer.
Fig 2.6 MCCB Installation
Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter
Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. At the Inverter primary side, use a ground fault interrupter for Inverters with a countermeasure against high frequency to detect
only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and to ignore high-frequency leakage current. Use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumulative sensitivity amperage of at
least 30 mA per Inverter.
Using a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure against high frequency may result in a malfunction
caused by high-frequency leakage current. If a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure malfunctions, replace it with a ground fault interrupter with a countermeasure against high frequency or reduce the
carrier frequency of the Inverter. Alternatively, use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumulative sensitivity amperage of at least 200 mA per Inverter.
2-16
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Installing a Magnetic Contactor
If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used.
When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter,
however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop.
• The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.
Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down.
Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes.
• When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after
recovery from a power interruption.
• If the Braking Resistor Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by
the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay.
Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block
Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R, S or T on the terminal block; the phase sequence of
input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence.
Installing an AC Reactor or DC Reactor
If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (600 kW or more) or the phase advancing
capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down.
To prevent this, install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reactor connection terminals.
This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.
Installing a Surge Absorber
Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes.
Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side
Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter.
• Correct Noise Filter Installation
Power
supply
MCCB
Noise
filter
Inverter
IM
MCCB
Other
controllers
Use a special-purpose noise filter for Inverters.
Fig 2.7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation
2-17
• Incorrect Noise Filter Installation
Power
supply
MCCB
Inverter
MCCB
Power
supply
Generalpurpose
noise filter
IM
Other
controllers
MCCB
Generalpurpose
noise filter
Inverter
IM
MCCB
Other
controllers
Do not use general-purpose noise filters. No generalpurpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise
generated from the Inverter.
Fig 2.8 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation
Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit
Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits.
Connecting the Inverter and Motor
Connect output terminals U, V, and W to motor lead wires U, V, and W, respectively.
Check that the motor rotates forward with the Forward Run Command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the Forward Run Command.
Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals
Never connect a power supply to output terminals U, V, and W. If voltage is applied to the output terminals,
the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged.
Never Short or Ground Output Terminals
If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires.
Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter
Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC/RC noise filter to an output circuit. The high-frequency
components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage
to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.
Do Not Use a Magnetic Contactor
Never connect a magnetic contactor between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during operation.
If the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the Inverter is operating, a large inrush current will be created
and the overcurrent protection in the Inverter will operate.
When using a magnetic contactor to switch to a commercial power supply, stop the Inverter and motor before
operating the magnetic contactor. Use the speed search function if the magnetic contactor is operated during
2-18
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
operation. If measures for momentary power interrupts are required, use a delayed release the magnetic contactor.
Installing a Thermal Overload Relay
This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however,
more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal
relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set L1-01 to 0 (no motor protection). The sequence
should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the
main circuit inputs.
Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side
Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise.
Power
supply
MCCB
Noise
filter
Inverter
IM
Radio noise
Signal line
Inductive
noise
AM radio
Controller
Inductive Noise:
Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.
Radio Noise:
Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make
noise.
Fig 2.9 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side
Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
As described previously, a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise.
Power
supply
Metal pipe
MCCB
Inverter
IM
30 cm min.
Signal line
Controller
Fig 2.10 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise
2-19
Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise,
install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.
The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.
Power
supply
Steel box
Metal pipe
MCCB
Noise
filter
Inverter
Noise
filter
IM
Fig 2.11 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference
Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Inverter output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust
the carrier frequency (set in C6-02) as shown in Table 2.6. (For details, refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.)
Table 2.6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor
Cable length
50 m max.
100 m max.
More than 100 m
Carrier frequency
15 kHz max.
10 kHz max.
5 kHz max.
Ground Wiring
Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line.
• Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω and that
of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Ω.
• Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power tools.
• Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the
length of the ground wire.
Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the
ground terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.
• When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
OK
NO
Fig 2.12 Ground Wiring
2-20
Wiring Main Circuit Terminals
Connecting the Braking Resistor (ERF)
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs
from 0.4 to 3.7 kW.
Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2.13.
Table 2.7
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor)
1 (Enables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
Inverter
Braking resistor
Fig 2.13 Connecting the Braking Resistor
The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect to any other terminals. Connecting
to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat, resulting in damage to the equipment.
IMPORTANT
Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR)
Use the following settings when using a Braking Resistor Unit. Refer to Wiring Examples on page 10-20 for
connection methods for a Braking Resistor Unit.
A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can also be used with Inverters with outputs from 0.4 to
3.7 kW.
Table 2.8
L8-01 (Protect selection for internal DB resistor)
0 (Disables overheat protection)
L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration)
(Select either one of them.)
0 (Disables stall prevention function)
3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor)
L8-01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts (ERF type mounted to
Inverter) is connected.
The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Inverter if L304 is set to 1 (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration).
2-21
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connectors
For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or operation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or
relay sequence circuits) to reduce induction from peripheral devices.
When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded
twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram.
Shield terminal
E(G)
㧗V Speed setting power supply, +15 V 20 mA
2kΩ
A1 Master speed reference 0 to 10 V (-10 to 10 V)
2kΩ
A2 Master speed reference 4 to 20 㨙A
(0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V)
2kΩ
2kΩ
A3 Auxiliary reference 0 to 10 V (-10 to 10 V)
RP Pulse train input 32 kHz max.
P P
P
P
AC Analog common
-V Speed setting power supply -15 V 20 mA
Fig 2.14
Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2.9.
Table 2.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models)
Terminals
Terminal
Screws
FM, AC, AM, P1, P2,
PC, SC, A1, A2, A3, +V,
-V, S1, S2, S3, S4, S5, S6,
S7, S8, MA, MB, MC,
M1, M2
M3.5
P3, C3, P4, C4, MP, RP,
R+, R-, S9, S10, S11,
S12, S+, S-, IG
E (G)
Tightening
Torque
(N•m)
0.8 to 1.0
Possible Wire
Sizes
mm2(AWG)
Recommended
Wire Size
mm2(AWG)
0.5 to 2*2
(20 to 14)
0.75
(18)
*3:
Phoenix
0.5 to 0.6
type
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
Single wire
0.14 to 2.5
Stranded wire:
0.14 to 1.5
(26 to 14)
0.75
(18)
0.5 to 2*2
(20 to 14)
1.25
(12)
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire*1
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electrical Wire or equivalent)
* 1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external frequency reference.
* 2. Refer to Table 2.3 Closed-loop Connector Sizes (JIS C2805) (200 V Class and 400 V Class) for suitable closed-loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires.
* 3. We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
2-22
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines
Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the following table.
Table 2.10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wire Size mm2 (AWG)
Model
d1
d2
L
0.25 (24)
AI 0.25 - 8YE
0.8
2
12.5
0.5 (20)
AI 0.5 - 8WH
1.1
2.5
14
0.75 (18)
AI 0.75 - 8GY
1.3
2.8
14
1.25 (16)
AI 1.5 - 8BK
1.8
3.4
14
2 (14)
AI 2.5 - 8BU
2.3
4.2
14
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
L
d1
d2
Fig 2.15 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes
Wiring Method
Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block.
1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slot screwdriver.
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly.
Thin-slot screwdriver
Blade of screwdriver
Control
circuit
terminal block
Strip the end for
7 mm if no solderless terminal is
used.
Solderless terminal or wire
without soldering
Wires
3.5 mm max.
Blade thickness: 0.6 mm max.
Fig 2.16 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block
2-23
Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.11. Use the appropriate terminals for the
correct purposes.
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals
Type
Sequence
input
signals
Analog
input
signals
No.
Function
Signal Level
S1
Forward Run/Stop Command Forward run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S2
Reverse Run/Stop Command Reverse run when ON; stopped when OFF.
S3
Multi-function input 1*1
Factory setting: External fault when ON.
S4
Multi-function input 2*1
Factory setting: Fault reset when ON.
S5
Multi-function input 3*1
Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 1
effective when ON.
S6
Multi-function input 4*1
Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 2
effective when ON.
S7
Multi-function input 5*1
S8
Multi-function input 6*1
S9
Multi-function input 7*1
Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 3
effective when ON.
S10
Multi-function input 8*1
Factory setting: Multi-speed reference 4
effective when ON.
S11
Multi-function input 9*1
Factory setting: Acceleration/deceleration
time selected when ON.
S12
Multi-function input 10*1
Factory setting: Emergency stop (NO contact) when ON.
SC
Sequence input common
+V
+15 V power output
+15 V power supply for analog references
+15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
-V
-15 V power output
-15 V power supply for analog references
-15 V
(Max. current: 20 mA)
A1
Master speed frequency reference
-10 to +10 V/-100 to 100%
0 to +10 V/100%
-10 to +10 V, 0 to +10 V
(Input impedance:
20 kΩ)
Multi-function analog input
4 to 20 mA/100%, -10 to +10 V/-100 to
+100%, 0 to +10 V/100%
Factory setting: Added to terminal A1
(H3-09 = 0)
4 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 250 Ω)
-10 to +10 V, 0 to +10 V
(Input impedance:
20 kΩ)
A3
Multi-function analog input
-10 to +10 V/-100 to +100%, 0 to +10 V/
100%
Factory setting: Auxiliary speed frequency
reference 1 (H3-05 = 2)
-10 to +10 V, 0 to +10 V
(Input impedance:
20 kΩ)
AC
Analog reference common
0V
A2
E(G)
2-24
Signal Name
Shield wire, optional ground
line connection point
Factory setting: Jog frequency selected when
ON.
24 VDC, 8 mA
Photocoupler isolation
Factory setting: External baseblock when
ON.
-
-
-
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Table 2.11 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Type
Photocoupler
outputs
No.
Signal Name
Function
P1
Multi-function PHC output 1
Factory setting: Zero-speed
Zero-speed level (b2-01) or below when ON.
P2
Factory setting: Frequency agreement detection
Multi-function PHC output 2
Frequency within 2 Hz of set frequency
when ON.
PC
Photocoupler output common
for P1 and P2
P3
C3
P4
C4
MA
MB
Relay
outputs
MC
M1
M2
Analog
monitor outputs
Pulse
I/O
RS485/
422
Multi-function PHC output 3
-
Signal Level
50 mA max. at 48 VDC*2
Factory setting: Ready for operation when
ON.
Multi-function PHC output 4 Factory setting: Minor fault.
Fault output signal (NO contact)
Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC
Fault output signal (NC con- Fault when OPEN across MB and MC
tact)
Relay contact output common
-
Multi-function contact output Factory setting: Operating
(NO contact)
Operating when ON across M1 and M2.
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
10 mA min. 1 A max. at
250 VAC
10 mA min. 1 A max. at
30 VDC
Minimum permissible
load: 5 VDC, 10 mA*4
FM
Multi-function analog monitor 1
Factory setting: Output frequency
0 to 10 V/100% frequency
AM
Multi-function analog monitor 2
Factory setting: Current monitor
5 V/Inverter's rated current
AC
Analog common
RP
Multi-function pulse input*3
Factory setting: Frequency reference input
(H6-01 = 0)
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
MP
Multi-function pulse monitor
Factory setting: Output frequency
(H6-06 = 2)
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
R+
MEMOBUS communications input
RS+
S-
MEMOBUS communications output
IG
Communications shield wire
-10 to +10 VDC &plusmn;5%
2 mA max.
-
For 2-wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well
as R- and S-.
-
Differential input, photocoupler isolation
Differential output, photocoupler isolation
-
* 1. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting 1 for S6 and multi-step speed setting 2 for S7, and jog
frequency command for S8.
* 2. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2.17.
* 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table.
* 4. Use the photocoupler outputs when the minimum permissible load is 5 VDC or less and 10 mA or less.
Low level voltage
0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage
3.5 to 13.2 V
H duty
30% to 70%
Pulse frequency
0 to 32 kHz
2-25
Flywheel diode
External power:
48 V max.
The rating of the flywheel diode
must be at least as high as the
circuit voltage.
Coil
50 mA max.
Fig 2.17 Flywheel Diode Connection
Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The shunt connector CN 5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section.
CN5
O
F
F
S1
1
2
OFF
ON
Terminating resistance
V
I
Analog input switch
: Factory settings
Note: Refer to Table 2.12 for S1
functions and to Table
2.13 for CN5 functions.
Fig 2.18 Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1
The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table.
Table 2.12 DIP Switch S1
Name
Function
Setting
S1-1
RS-485 and RS-422 terminating resistance
OFF: No terminating resistance
ON: Terminating resistance of 110 Ω
S1-2
Input method for analog input A2
OFF: 0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 kΩ)
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 Ω)
Sinking/Sourcing Mode
The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0-V common) and sourcing mode (+24-V
common) if shunt connector CN5 is used. An external 24-V power supply is also supported, providing more
freedom in signal input methods.
2-26
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Table 2.13 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals
Internal Power Supply
CN5
External Power Supply
CN5
CN5 (NPN set) Factory setting
Shunt
position
Sinking
Mode
IP24V (24 V)
CN5 (EXT set)
SC
External +24 V
SC
S1
S1
S2
S2
CN5
CN5
CN5 (PNP set)
SC
Sourcing
Mode
IP24V (24 V)
IP24V (24 V)
CN5 (EXT set)
External + 24 V
SC
S1
S1
S2
S2
IP24V (24 V)
2-27
Control Circuit Terminal Connections
Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2.19.
Inverter
CIMR-G7A2018
Forward Run/Stop
S1
Reverse Run/Stop
S2
Thermal switch contact
for Braking Unit
3
4
External fault
S3
Fault reset
S4
Multi-step command 1
(Main speed switching)
Multi-function
contact input
Defaults
S5
Multi-step speed
setting 2
S6
Jog frequency
selection
S7
External
baseblock command
S8
MP
Multi-step speed
setting 3
S9
AC
Multi-step speed
setting 4
S10
Acc/dec time 1
Default: Output
frequency
Ammeter adjustment
AM
S11
Emergency stop (NO)
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
20 kΩ
−
CN5 (NPN setting)
+24V 8mA
AM
+
20 kΩ
−
AC
Pulse train input
+24V
Frequency setting
2 kΩ adjustment
Frequency
setter
External
frequency
references
2 kΩ
0 to 10 V
0 to 10 V
MB
MC
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
A2
Master speed reference
M1
M2
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
P
A3
P
Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
AC
-V
0V
P1
Error contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. Min. load
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. 5 VDC, 10 mA
MA
MC
(−15V 20mA)
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max. Min. load
5 VDC, 10 mA
30 DC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Open collector 1
Default: Zero
speed
P2
PC
R+
R-
P3
S+
C3
S-
P4
IG
C4
Open collector 2
Default:
Frequency
agree signal
Open collector 3
Factory setting:
Inverter operation
ready
Open collector 4
Factory setting:
Minor fault
Fig 2.19 Control Circuit Terminal Connections
2-28
Default: Output current
0 to +10 V
Default: Running
signal
Factory setting:
Auxiliary frequency
command
Terminating
resistance
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
MA
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V
input
Master speed reference
A1
4 to 20 mA P
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
E(G)
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
+15 V 20 mA
2
1
+
Frequency setting power
+V
3
Multi-function analog output 1
FM
Shield wire
connection terminal
Master speed pulse train
RP
Default: Output current
0 to +10 V
Ammeter adjustment
FM
SC
E(G)
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
S12
Multi-function
open-collector outputs
48 VDC, 50 mA
Wiring Control Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits.
• Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3,
,
1,
2, and
3) and other high-power lines.
• Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M1, and M2 (contact outputs) from wiring to
other control circuit terminals.
• Use shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Process cable ends as
shown in Fig 2.20.
• Connect the shield wire to terminal E (G).
• Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
• Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals.
Shield sheath
Armor
Do not connect here.
Connect to shield sheath ter- Insulate with tape
minal at Inverter (terminal E
(G))
Fig 2.20 Processing the Ends of Shielded Twisted-pair Cables
2-29
Wiring Check
Checks
Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform
the following checks on the wiring.
• Is all wiring correct?
• Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left?
• Are all screws tight?
• Are any wire ends contacting other terminals?
2-30
Installing and Wiring Option Boards
Installing and Wiring Option Boards
Option Board Models and Specifications
Up to three option boards can be mounted in the Inverter. You can mount up one Board into each of the three
places on the control board (A, C, and D) shown in Fig 2.21.
Table 2.14 lists the type of option boards and their specifications.
Table 2.14 Option Board Specifications
Board
Model
Specifications
Mounting Location
PG-A2
Serial open-collector/complimentary inputs
A
PG-B2
Phase A/B complimentary inputs
A
PG-D2
Single line-driver inputs
A
PG-X2
Phase A/B line-driver inputs
A
AI-14U
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 kΩ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 1 channel
Input resolution: 14-bit
C
AI-14B
Input signal levels
0 to 10 V DC (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 3 channels
Input resolution: 13-bit with sign bit
C
DI-08
8-bit digital speed reference setting
C
DI-16H2
16-bit digital speed reference setting
C
DeviceNet Communications
Board
SI-N1
DeviceNet communications support
C
Profibus-DP Communications Board
SI-P1
Profibus-DP communications support
C
CC-Link Communications
Board
SI-C
CC-Link communications support
C
LONWORKS communications support
C
MECHATROLINK communications support
C
AO-08
8-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
D
AO-12
12-bit analog outputs, 2 channels
D
DO-08
Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs
D
DO-02C
2 relay outputs
D
PG Speed Control Boards
Speed Reference Boards
LONWORKS
Communications Board
SI-J
SI-W1
MECHATROLINK CommuSI-T
nication Board
Analog Monitor Board
Digital Output Board
2-31
Installation
Before mounting an option board, remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the
Inverter is not lit. After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit, remove the Digital Operator and front
cover and then mount the option board.
The side of the front cover of the Inverter for 200/400 V Class 0.4 to 3.7 kW can be cut out as described in Fig
2.22 to make wiring of the option board easy. If the side of the front cover is cut out, the protective structure
will be open chassis (IEC IP00).
Refer to documentation provided with the option board for actual mounting instructions for option slots A, C,
and D.
Preventing C and D Option Board Connectors from Rising
After installing an option board into slot C or D, insert an option clip to prevent the side with the connector
from rising. The option clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the clip and pulling it out.
Remove the option clip before installing an option board into slot C or D. The option board can not be
installed completely and may not function properly if it is installed with the option clip attached.
A option board mounting spacer hole
4CN
A option board connector
2CN
C option board connector
A option board mounting spacer
(Provided with A Option Board.)
C option board mounting spacer
C option board
Option Clip
(To prevent raising of
C and D option boards)
D option board
3CN
D option board connector
D option board mounting spacer
A option board
A option board mounting spacer
Fig 2.21 Mounting Option Boards
Front Cover
Slit
Fig 2.22 Cutting the Front Cover
Cut out the slits on the front cover with nippers. Be careful to avoid injury.
2-32
Installing and Wiring Option Boards
PG Speed Control Board Terminals and Specifications
The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Boards are given in the following tables.
PG-A2
The terminal specifications for the PG-A2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.15 PG-A2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
1
2
3
TA1
4
5
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
+12 V/open collector switching terminal
Pulse input terminal
6
7
8
TA2
(E)
Specifications
12 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
Terminal for switching between12 V voltage input
and open collector input. For open collector input,
short across 3 and 4.
H: +4 to 12 V; L: +1 V max. (Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
Pulse motor output terminal
12 VDC (&plusmn;10%), 20 mA max.
Pulse monitor output common
Shield connection terminal
-
PG-B2
The terminal specifications for the PG-B2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.16 PG-B2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
1
2
3
TA1
Contents
Power supply for pulse generator
A-phase pulse input terminal
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
Pulse input common
5
H: +8 to 12 V
L: +1 V max.
(Maximum response frequency: 30 kHz)
1
2
3
4
TA3
12 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.
4
B-phase pulse input terminal
6
TA2
Specifications
(E)
Pulse input common
A-phase monitor output terminal
B-phase monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
A-phase monitor output common
Open collector output, 24 VDC, 30 mA max.
B-phase monitor output common
-
2-33
PG-D2
The terminal specifications for the PG-D2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.17 PG-D2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
Contents
1
2
12 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.*
Power supply for pulse generator
3
TA1
TA2
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.*
4
Pulse input + terminal
5
Pulse input - terminal
6
Common terminal
7
Pulse monitor output + terminal
8
Pulse monitor output - terminal
(E)
Specifications
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
Shield connection terminal
-
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
PG-X2
The terminal specifications for the PG-X2 are given in the following table.
Table 2.18 PG-X2 Terminal Specifications
Terminal
No.
Contents
1
2
Power supply for pulse generator
3
TA1
TA2
TA3
A-phase + input terminal
5
A-phase - input terminal
6
B-phase + input terminal
7
B-phase - input terminal
8
Z-phase + input terminal
9
Z-phase - input terminal
10
Common terminal
1
A-phase + output terminal
2
A-phase - output terminal
3
B-phase + output terminal
4
B-phase - output terminal
5
Z-phase + output terminal
6
Z-phase - output terminal
7
Control circuit common
Shield connection terminal
* 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time.
2-34
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
5 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.*
4
(E)
Specifications
12 VDC (&plusmn;5%), 200 mA max.*
Line driver input (RS-422 level input)
Maximum response frequency: 300 kHz
0 VDC (GND for power supply)
Line driver output (RS-422 level output)
Control circuit GND
-
Installing and Wiring Option Boards
Wiring
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the option boards.
Wiring the PG-A2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-A2.
Three-phase, 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
PC-A2
+12 V power supply
1
2
4CN
4CN
TA1
E
E
TA2 (E)
3
4
5
6
7
8
0 V power supply
12 V voltage input (A/B phase)
Pulse 0 V
Pulse monitor output
Fig 2.23 Wiring a 12 V Voltage Input
Three-phase,
200 VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
PG-A2
1
2
4CN
4CN
3
TA1
E
4
5
6
E
TA2 (E)
7
8
+12 V power supply
0 V power supply
(Short circuit across
terminals 3-4)
Pulse input (+)
Pulse input (-)
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.24 Wiring an Open-collector Input
PG power
supply
+12 V
Pulse input
Short for
open-collector
input
Pulse
monitor
output
Pulse
input
Fig 2.25 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-A2
2-35
Wiring the PG-B2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-B2.
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Inverter
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
A-phase pulse output (+)
A-phase pulse output (-)
B-phase pulse output (+)
B-phase pulse output (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05. The factory preset if for forward
rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.26 PG-B2 Wiring
A-phase
pulses
A-phase pulse
input
B-phase
pulses
B-phase pulse
input
Division rate circuit
PG power
supply +12 V
A-phase pulse
monitor output
B-phase pulse
monitor output
• When connecting to a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with
a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler (diode).
• The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using constant F1-06 (PG division rate).
A-phase pulses
B-phase pulses
• The pulse monitor emitter is connected to common inside the PG-B2. The emitter common must be used
for external circuits.
Fig 2.27 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B2
2-36
Installing and Wiring Option Boards
Wiring the PG-D2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-D2.
Inverter
Three-phase 200
VAC (400 VAC)
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
Pulse input + (A/B phase)
Pulse input - (A/B phase)
Pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
Fig 2.28 PG-D2 Wiring
Wiring the PG-X2
Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-X2.
Three-phase
200 VAC (400
VAC)
Inverter
R/L1
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
W/T3
Power supply +12 V
Power supply 0 V
Power supply +5 V
A-phase pulse input (+)
A-phase pulse input (-)
B-phase pulse input (+)
B-phase pulse input (-)
A-phase pulse monitor output
B-phase pulse monitor output
Z-phase pulse monitor output
• Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines.
• Do not use the pulse generator's power supply for anything other than the pulse generator (encoder).
Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise.
• The length of the pulse generator's wiring must not be more than 100 meters.
• The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1-05 (PG Rotation). The factory preset if
for motor forward rotation, A-phase advancement.
Fig 2.29 PG-X2 Wiring
2-37
Wiring Terminal Blocks
Use no more than 100 meters of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power
lines.
Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires, and connect the shield to the
shield connection terminal.
Wire Sizes (Same for All Models)
Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2.19.
Table 2.19 Wire Sizes
Terminal
Pulse generator power supply
Pulse input terminal
Pulse monitor output terminal
Shield connection terminal
Terminal
Screws
Wire Thickness (mm2)
-
Stranded wire: 0.5 to 1.25
Single wire: 0.5 to 1.25
M3.5
0.5 to 2
Wire Type
• Shielded, twisted-pair wire
• Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl
sheath cable
(KPEV-S by Hitachi Electric Wire or
equivalent)
Straight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals
We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
Refer to Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes for specifications.
Closed-loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque
The closed-loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2.20.
Table 2.20 Closed-loop Connectors and Tightening Torques
Wire Thickness [mm2]
Terminal
Screws
0.5
0.75
1.25
Crimp Terminal Size
Tightening Torque (N • m)
1.25 - 3.5
M3.5
2
1.25 - 3.5
1.25 - 3.5
0.8
2 - 3.5
Wiring Method and Precautions
The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals. Refer to page 2-23. Observe
the following precautions when wiring.
• Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Board from main circuit lines and power lines.
• Connect the shield when connecting to a PG. The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors
caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long. Refer to Fig 2.20 for details on
connecting the shield.
• Connect the shield to the shield terminal (E).
• Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults.
• When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires to a length of approximately 5.5 mm.
2-38
Installing and Wiring Option Boards
Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses
The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Board being used. Set the
correct number for your model.
PG-A2/PG-B2
The maximum response frequency is 32,767 Hz.
Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor.
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (min−1)
&times; PG rating (p/rev) = 20,000 Hz
60
Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in
Table 2.21.
Table 2.21 PG Pulse Selection Examples
Motor's Maximum Speed (min−1)
PG Rating
(p/rev)
PG Output Frequency for Maximum Frequency Output (Hz)
1800
600
18,000
1500
600
15,000
1200
900
18,000
900
1200
18,000
Note 1. The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.
2. The PG power supply is 12 V.
3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a
backup capacitor or other method.)
PG power supply
Capacitor for momentary
power loss
Signals
Fig 2.30 PG-B2 Connection Example
2-39
PG-D2/PG-X2
There are 5 V and 12 V PG power supplies.
Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting.
The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz.
Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG (fPG).
fPG (Hz) =
Motor speed at maximum frequency output (min−1)
&times; PG rating (p/rev)
60
A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA. (If momentary
power loss must be handled, use a backup capacitor or other method.)
PG-X2
PG power
supply
TA1
AC
IP12 1
2
IG
IP5
3
A (+) 4
A (-)
5
B (+) 6
B (-) 7
0V +12V
0V
Capacitor for
momentary
power loss
+12 V
+
+
-
PG
+
-
Z (+) 8
Z (-)
IG
9
10
TA3
Fig 2.31 PG-X2 Connection Example (for 12 V PG power supply)
2-40
3
Digital Operator and Modes
This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions, and provides an overview of
operating modes and switching between modes.
Digital Operator............................................................3-2
Modes ..........................................................................3-5
Digital Operator
This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator.
Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.
Drive Mode Indicators (LED)
FWD: Lit when there is a Forward Run Command input.
REV: Lit when there is a Reverse Run Command input.
SEQ: Lit when the Run Command from the control
circuit terminal is enabled.
REF:
Lit when the frequency reference from control
circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled.
ALARM: Lit when error activated.
Blinks when alarm activated.
Data Display
Displays monitor data, constant numbers, and settings.
Frequency Ref
Mode Display (Displayed at upper left of data display.)
DRIVE: Lit in Drive Mode.
QUICK: Lit in Quick Programming Mode.
ADV:
Lit in Advanced Programming Mode.
VERIFY: Lit in Verify Mode.
A. TUNE: Lit in Autotuning Mode.
Keys
Execute operations such as setting user constants,
monitoring, jogging, and autotuning.
Fig 3.1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions
Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Key Functions
Key
3-2
Name
Function
LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and
control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE).
This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant o2-01.
MENU Key
Selects menu items (modes).
ESC Key
Returns to the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed.
JOG Key
Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the
Digital Operator.
Digital Operator
Table 3.1 Key Functions (Continued)
Key
Name
Function
FWD/REV Key
Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being
operated from the Digital Operator.
Shift/RESET Key
Sets the number of digits for user constant settings.
Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.
Increment Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and increments set
values.
Used to move to the next item or data.
Decrement Key
Selects menu items, sets user constant numbers, and decrements set
values.
Used to move to the previous item or data.
DATA/ENTER Key
Pressed to enter menu items, user constants, and set values.
Also used to switch from one display to another.
Constants cannot be changed when Undervoltage (UV) is detected.
RUN Key
Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by
the Digital Operator.
STOP Key
Stops Inverter operation.
This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control
circuit terminal by setting user constant o2-02.
Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table.
There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator. These indicators
will light and flash to indicate operating status.
The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the
dynamic brake. The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is
shown in the Fig 3.2.
Inverter output frequency
RUN
STOP
STOP
Frequency setting
RUN
STOP
Lit
Blinking
Not lit
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
3-3
The following table shows the relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the
Inverter conditions.
The indicators are lit, unlit or blinking reflecting the order of priority.
Table 3.2 Relation of Inverter to RUN and STOP Indicators
Priority
1
RUN
STOP
Indicator Indicator
Inverter
Status
Conditions
Stopped
Power supply is shut down.
2
Stopped*
Emergency stop
• Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when the control circuit terminals were used to operate the Inverter.
• Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal.
Switched from LOCAL (operation using the Digital Operator) to
REMOTE (operation using the control circuit terminals) when the Run
Command is sent from the external terminal.
Switched from the Quick or Advanced Quick programming mode to the
Drive mode when the Run Command is sent from the external terminal.
3
Stopped
The Inverter is run at a frequency below the minimum output frequency.
The Run Command is carried out when the External Baseblock Command using the multi-function contact input terminal is issued.
4
Stopped
Stopped
Running
During deceleration to a stop
During DC injection braking when using the multi-function contact input
terminal.
During initial excitation of DC injection braking while the Inverter is
stopped.
6
Running
During emergency deceleration
• Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when operating the
Inverter using the control circuit terminals.
• Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal.
7
Running
Run Command is issued.
During initial excitation of DC injection braking when starting the
Inverter.
5
Note
: Lit
: Blinking
: Not lit
* If planning to run the Inverter again, first turn OFF the Run Command and Emergency Stop Command from the control circuit terminal and send the Run
Command.
3-4
Modes
Modes
This section describes the Inverter's modes and switching between modes.
Inverter Modes
The Inverter's user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user constants.The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes.
The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3.3.
Table 3.3 Modes
Mode
Primary function(s)
Drive mode
The Inverter can be run in this mode.
Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault history.
Quick programming mode
Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user constants to operate the
Inverter (e.g., the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator).
Advanced programming mode
Use this mode to reference and set all user constants.
Verify mode
Use this mode to read/set user constants that have been changed from their factoryset values.
Autotuning mode*
Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants in the vector
control method. The motor constants are calculated and set automatically.
This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line-to-line resistance.
* Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Autotuning mode will not be displayed during operation or when an error
has occurred. The default setting of the Inverter is for open-loop vector 1 control (A1-02 = 2).
3-5
Switching Modes
The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes.
Press the DATA/ENTER Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to
access the setting display.
Display at Startup
Rdy
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
Monitor Display
Setting Display
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
Monitor
** Main Menu **
Operation
Rdy
&gt;
RESET
Rdy
-DRIVE-
Reference Source
U1 - 01=60.00Hz
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
ESC
ESC
DATA
ENTER
Rdy
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=060.00Hz
(0.00←→60.00)
&quot;0.00Hz&quot;
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
Quick Setting
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
&gt;
RESET
-ADV-
Initialization
Select Language
ESC
-ADV-
ESC
-ADV-
Select Language
A1- 00= 0 *1*
English
Select Language
A1- 00 =0 *1*
English
A1 - 00=1
Programming
DATA
ENTER
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
None Modified
Modified Consts
The constant number will be displayed if a
constant has been changed. Press the
DATA/ENTER Key to enable the change.
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-A.TUNE-
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01=0 1 *0*
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
DATA
ENTER
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01= 0 *0*
Standard Tuning
&quot;0&quot;
Standard Tuning
&quot;0&quot;
ESC
-A.TUNE-
ESC
Fig 3.3 Mode Transitions
IMPORTANT
3-6
When running the Inverter after using Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to select the drive mode (displayed on the LCD screen) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive mode display to bring up the
monitor display. Run Commands can't be received from any other display. (Monitor display in the drive mode
will appear when the power is turned ON.)
Modes
Drive Mode
Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated. The following monitor displays are possible in
drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault
information and the fault history.
When b1-01 (Reference selection) is set to 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display.
Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will be
written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the
setting.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure.
Display at Startup
-DRIVE-
Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
Mode Selection
Display
MENU
Monitor Display
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
A
B
-DRIVE-
Monitor
** Main Menu **
1
Rdy
㧪
RESET
U1 - 01=60.00Hz
Operation
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Setting Display
2
Rdy
-DRIVE-
DATA
ENTER
Frequency Ref
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
ESC
-DRIVE-
Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
U1- 01= 060.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
(0.00←→60.00)
̍0.00Hz̍
ESC
MENU
ESC
-DRIVE-
-QUICK-
Monitor
Rdy
** Main Menu **
U1 - 02=60.00Hz
Quick Setting
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
㧪
RESET
-DRIVE-
Output Freq
The Frequency Setting
Display will not be
displayed when using an
analog reference.
Rdy
U1- 02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
U1-04= 2
ESC
MENU
-DRIVE-
Monitor
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
Rdy
㧪
RESET
U1 - 40 = 10H
Rdy
-DRIVE-
FAN Elapsed Time
U1- 40 = 10H
U1-01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
ESC
MENU
DATA
ENTER
U1-01=60.00Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
1
2
3
4
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
MENU
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-DRIVE-
Fault Trace
Rdy
㧪
RESET
-DRIVE-
Current Fault
U2 - 01=
Rdy
U2 - 01 =
U2-02= OV
U2-03=60.00Hz
U2-02=OV
U2-03=60.00Hz
ESC
-DRIVE-
Fault Trace
Rdy
㧪
RESET
-DRIVE-
Last Fault
Rdy
The fault name will be
displayed if the DATA/ENTER
Key is pressed while a constant
is being displayed for which a
fault code is being displayed.
DATA
ENTER
U2 - 02 = OV
U3-03=60.00Hz
U3-04=60.00Hz
U3-03=60.00Hz
U3-04=60.00Hz
ESC
3
4
5
6
-DRIVE-
Rdy
U2 - 02= OV
DC Bus Overvolt
U2 - 02 = OV
ESC
DATA
ENTER
-DRIVE-
Fault History
Rdy
㧪
RESET
-DRIVE-
Last Fault
Rdy
U3-02= OV
U3-03= OH
U3-02=OV
U3-03=OH
ESC
Rdy
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
DATA
ENTER
Fault Message 2
ESC
U3-03= OH
U3-04= UV
-DRIVE-
Rdy
U3 - 02= OV
DC Bus Overvolt
U3 - 02 = OV
5
A
Rdy
-DRIVE-
U3 - 02 = OV
Rdy
ESC
㧪
RESET
Fault Message 2
-DRIVE-
U3 - 01= OC
Over Current
U3 - 01 = OC
U3 - 01= OC
-DRIVE-
DATA
ENTER
ESC
6
B
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Mode
3-7
Note When changing the display with the Increment and Decrement Keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the
first parameter number and vise versa. For example, the next display after the one for U1-01 will be U1-40. This is indicated in the figures by the letters
A and B and the numbers 1 to 6.
The display for the first monitor constant (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON.
The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in o1-02 (Monitor Selection after Power Up).
Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.
IMPORTANT
Quick Programming Mode
In quick programming mode, the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure.
3-8
Modes
Mode Selection Display
Frequency Setting Display
Monitor Display
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
A
B
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
ESC
ESC
-QUICK-
Control Method
A1-02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Reference Source
b1-01=1 *1*
Terminals
ESC
Programming
-QUICKMENU
-VERIFY-
Run Source
b1-02=1 *1*
Terminals
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
Reference Source
b1-01= 1 *1*
Terminals
-QUICK-
Run Source
b1-02= 1 *1*
Terminals
ESC
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
-QUICKMENU
Terminal AM Gain
DATA
ENTER
H4-05=0.50
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
(0.00←→2.50)
0.50
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01=1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
-QUICK-
Terminal AM Gain
H4-05= 0 .50
ESC
DATA
ENTER
(0.00 2.50)
0.50
-QUICK-
MOL Fault Select
L1-01= 1 *1*
Std Fan Cooled
ESC
-QUICK-
StallP Decel Sel
L3-04=1 *1*
Enabled
DATA
ENTER
-QUICK-
StallP Decel Sel
L3-04= 1 *1*
Enabled
ESC
A
B
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode
3-9
Advanced Programming Mode
In advanced programming mode, all Inverter constants can be monitored and set.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure.
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
A
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
1
B
-ADV-
Select Language
ESC
-ADV-
-ADV-
Select Language
A1- 00= 0 *1*
English
Select Language
A1- 00 =0 *1*
English
A1-00=1
Programming
2
DATA
ENTER
㧪
RESET
Initialization
** Main Menu **
Setting Display
ESC
ESC
MENU
㧪
RESET
-ADV-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
Initialization
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
Control Method
A1- 02 =2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
A1- 02 =2
Control Method
ESC
-ADV-
Control Method
A1- 02= 2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
ESC
MENU
-A.TUNE-
1
2
3
4
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
㧪
RESET
-ADV-
PID Control
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
b5-01=0
b5- 01 =0 *0*
b5-01= 0 *0*
Disabled
PID Mode
-ADV-
PID Mode
PID Mode
Disabled
ESC
ESC
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
㧪
RESET
-ADV-
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
-ADV-
PID Control
Fb los Det Time
Fb los Det Time
b5 - 14= 1.0Sec
b5- 14= 1.0Sec
b5-14=01.0Sec
(0.00㨪25.5)
̍1.0Sec̍
Fb los Det Time
ESC
(0.00㨪25.5)
̍1.0Sec̍
ESC
-QUICK-
3
4
5
6
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
MENU
㧪
RESET
-ADV-
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
Torque Limit Fwd
Torque Limit
(0㨪300)
̍200%̍
Torque Limit Fwd
ESC
㧪
RESET
-ADV-
L7- 04= 200%
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
(0㨪300)
̍200%̍
ESC
5
6
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode
3-10
(0㨪300)
̍200%̍
-ADV-
Torq Lmt Rev Rgn
L7- 04= 200%
Torq Lmt Rev Rgn
B
L7-01= 2 00%
ESC
Torq Lmt Rev Rgn
Torque Limit
A
Torque Limit Fwd
L7- 01= 200%
L7-01=200%
-ADV-
L7-04= 2 00%
ESC
(0㨪300)
̍200%̍
Modes
Setting User Constants
Here, the procedure is shown to change C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 10 s to 20 s.
Table 3.4 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
-DRIVE-
1
Description
Rdy
Frequency Ref
U1- 01=60.00Hz
Power supply turned ON.
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
-DRIVE-
2
** Main Menu **
MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode.
Operation
-QUICK-
3
** Main Menu **
MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode.
Quick Setting
-ADV-
4
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
5
Initialization
A1-00=1
DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.
Select Language
-ADV-
6
Accel Time 1
C1-00= 10.0Sec
(0.0←→6000.0)
10.0Sec
Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
-ADV-
7
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 0 010.0Sec
(0.0←→6000.0)
10.0Sec
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting display. The setting of C1-01
(10.00) is displayed.
-ADV-
8
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 0 010.0Sec
(0.0←→6000.0)
10.0Sec
Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right.
-ADV-
9
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 00 10.0Sec
(0.0←→6000.0)
10.0Sec
Increment Key pressed to change set value to 20.00 s.
-ADV-
10
Accel Time 1
C1-01= 00 20.0Sec
(0.0←→6000.0)
10.0Sec
-ADV-
11
Entry Accepted
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data.
“Entry Accepted” is displayed for 1.0 s after the data setting has been confirmed with the DATA/ENTER Key.
-ADV-
12
Accel Time 1
C1- 01= 20.0Sec
(0.0←→6000.0)
10.0Sec
The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
3-11
External Fault Setting Procedure
Examples of the Digital Operator displays that appear when setting an eternal error for a multi-function contact input in Advanced Programming Mode are shown in the following diagram.
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
A
DATA
ENTER
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
1
B
H1-01=24
Terminal S3 Sel
ESC
3
4
-ADV-
-ADV-
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01 =24 *24*
External Fault
Digital Inputs
Programming
2
DATA
ENTER
RESET
-ADV-
Setting Display
&quot;24&quot;
ESC
ESC
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 24 *24*
NO/Always Det
Coast to Stop
MENU
RESET
-ADV-
Digital Inputs
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
-ADV-
-ADV-
Terminal S4 Sel
H1- 02 =14 *14*
Fault Reset
H1- 02 =14
Terminal S4 Sel
&quot;14&quot;
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 25 *24*
NC/Always Det
Coast to Stop
ESC
MENU
RESET
-ADV-
Digital Inputs
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
-ADV-
-ADV-
Terminal S8 Sel
H1- 08 =08*08*
Ext BaseBlk N.O.
H1- 08 =08
Terminal S8 Sel
&quot;08&quot;
ESC
MENU
-ADV-
1
-DRIVE-
2
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Operation
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 26 *24*
NO/During RUN
Coast to Stop
Digital Inputs
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 27 *24*
NC/During RUN
Coast to Stop
H2-01= 0
Term M1-M2 Sel
MENU
-ADV-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
Pulse I/O Setup
H6-01= 0
Pulse Input Sel
-ADV-
MENU
A
B
Terminal S3 Sel
H1- 01= 2F *24*
NC/During RUN
Alarm Only
3
Fig 3.7 External Fault Function Setting Example
3-12
4
Modes
Verify Mode
Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autotuning. “None” will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
Of the environment mode settings, only A1-02 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other environment
modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.
Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used to change settings as are used in the programming
modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to change the frequency. The user constant will
be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing
the setting.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their
default settings: b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and
E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
Setting Display
DATA
ENTER
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
A
B
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
-VERIFY-
Reference Source
b1-01=1 *1*
Terminals
Modified Consts
&quot;1&quot;
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
Reference Source
b1-01= 1 *1*
Terminals
&quot;1&quot;
ESC
ESC
MENU
-VERIFY-
Accel Time 1
-A.TUNE-
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
MENU
DATA
ENTER
C1-01=200.0Sec
(0.0㨪6000.0)
̍10.0Sec̍
** Main Menu **
Operation
-VERIFY-
Input Voltage
(155㨪255)
̍200VAC̍
-VERIFY-
Motor Rated FLA
MENU
Accel Time 1
(0.0㨪6000.0)
̍10.0Sec̍
ESC
DATA
ENTER
E1-01=200VAC
-DRIVE-
-VERIFY-
C1-01=0200.0Sec
Input Voltage
E1-01= 200VAC
ESC
DATA
ENTER
E2-01=2.00A
(0.32㨪6.40)
̍1.90A̍
-VERIFY-
(155㨪255)
̍200V̍
-VERIFY-
Motor Rated FLA
E2-01= 2.00A
ESC
(0.32㨪6.40)
̍1.90A̍
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
A
B
MENU
Fig 3.8 Operations in Verify Mode
3-13
Autotuning Mode
Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor constants when operating in the vector control
methods. Always perform autotuning before starting operation.
When V/f control has been selected, stationary autotuning for only line-to-line resistance can be selected.
When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autotuning. Contact your Yaskawa
representatives to set motor constants by calculation.
The Inverter's autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants, while a servo system's autotuning function determines the size of a load, so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different. The
default setting of the Inverter is for open-loop vector 1 control.
Example of Operation
Set the motor output power (in kW), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, and number of
poles specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN Key. The motor is automatically run
and the motor constants measured based on these settings and autotuning will be set.
Always set the above items. Autotuning cannot be started otherwise, e.g., it cannot be started from the motor
rated voltage display.
Constants can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys to
change the frequency. The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the
DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting.
The following example shows autotuning for open-loop vector control while operating the motor without
switching to motor 2.
3-14
Modes
Mode Selection Display
Monitor Display
Setting Display
DATA
ENTER
-VERIFY-
** Main Menu **
Modified Consts
A
MENU
DATA
ENTER
-A.TUNE-
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01 =0 *0*
Standard Tuning
** Main Menu **
Auto-Tuning
DATA
ENTER
&quot;0&quot;
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
T1- 01 = 0 *0*
Standard Tuning
&quot;0&quot;
ESC
ESC
MENU
-DRIVE-
** Main Menu **
Operation
MENU
-QUICK-
** Main Menu **
Quick Setting
-A.TUNE-
DATA
ENTER
-A.TUNE-
DATA
ENTER
Rated Frequency
T1- 05 = 60.0Hz
(0.0 400.0)
0.0Hz
Rated Frequency
T1- 05 = 0 60.0Hz
(0.0 400.0)
0.0Hz
ESC
Number of Poles
T1- 06 = 4
(2 48)
4
-A.TUNE-
Auto-Tuning
MENU
-A.TUNE-
Rdy
ESC
RUN
0.0Hz/0.0A
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN key
-A.TUNE-
Number of Poles
T1- 06 = 04
(2 48)
4
-A.TUNE-
48.0Hz/10.5A
GOAL
-ADV-
** Main Menu **
Programming
MENU
A
The display will
automatically
change depending
on the status of
autotuning.
Tune Proceeding
48.0Hz/10.5A
START30%
GOAL
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
START
-A.TUNE-
Tune Proceeding
30%
Tune
Successful
STOP
-A.TUNE-
Tune Aborted
STOP key
-A.TUNE-
Tune Successful
30%
* TUn10 will be displayed during rotational autotuning and TUn11 will be displayed during stationary autotuning. The DRIVE indicator will light when
autotuning starts.
Fig 3.9 Operation in Autotuning Mode
The setting displays in for autotuning depend on the control method (V/f, V/f with PG, or open-loop vector). If
a fault occurs during autotuning, refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT
3-15
4
Trial Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example
of trial operation.
Overview of Trial Operation Procedure........................4-2
Trial Operation Procedures..........................................4-3
Adjustment Suggestions ............................................4-18
Overview of Trial Operation Procedure
Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart.
START
Installation
Wiring
Set power supply voltage.*1
Turn ON power.
Confirm status.
Select
operating
method.
Basic settings
(Quick programming mode)
V/f control?
V/f
YES
(Default: A1-02=0)
PG?
Vector (A1-02=2, 3, or 4)*5
V/f with PG
(A1-02=1)
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200V/60Hz(400V/60Hz)
Settings according
to control mode
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall or
overload?
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.*2
V/f default: 200V/60Hz
(400V/60Hz)
OK to operate *3
motor during
autotuning?
YES
NO
YES
NO
Stationary autotuning for *4
line-to-line resistance only
Application settings
(Advanced programming mode)
Rotational
autotuning
Load is
connected to motor when
operating motor first time
after autotuning?
NO
Stationary
autotuning 1 *6
*1
Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 55 kW or more.
*2
If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set
the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced
programming mode.
Optimum adjustments and
constant settings
*3
Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy
whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated.
Check/record constants.
*4
If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual
installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line
resistance only on-site.
*5
The default control mode is open-loop vector control 2
(A1-02 =2).
*6
If the maximum output frequency is different from the base
frequency, set the maximum output frequency (E1-04)
after autotuning.
No-load operation
Loaded operation
END
Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
4-2
YES
Stationary
autotuning 2 *6
Trial Operation Procedures
Trial Operation Procedures
The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section.
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW
or Higher)
Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting) for 400 V Class Inverters
of 55 kW or higher. Insert the jumper into the power tap nearest to the actual power supply
voltage. If the wrong jumper is selected, the Inverter may be damaged.
The jumper is factory-set to 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the
following procedure to change the setting.
1. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.
2. Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out.
3. Remove the terminal cover.
4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter (see Fig 4.2).
5. Return the terminal cover to its original position.
Power tap
Jumper (factory-set position)
200 V Class power supply
400 V class power supply
Power supply input terminals
CHARGE indicator
Fig 4.2 Power Supply Voltage Jumper
Power ON
Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply.
• Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage.
200 V Class: 3-phase 200 to 240 VDC, 50/60 Hz
400 V Class: 3-phase 380 to 480 VDC, 50/60 Hz
• Make sure that the motor output terminals (U, V, W) and the motor are connected correctly.
• Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly.
• Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF.
• When using a PG Speed Control Board, make sure that it is wired correctly.
• Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system (no-load status)
4-3
Checking the Display Status
If the Digital Operator's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:
-DRIVE-DRIVE-
Display for normal operation
Rdy
Frequency
RefRef
Frequency
U1- 01
01= 60.0 0Hz
U1-01= 0 0 0.0 0Hz
U1-02=60.00Hz
U1-03=10.05A
The frequency reference monitor is displayed in the data display section.
When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case,
refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation.
-DRIVE-
Display for fault operation
Frequency
UV Ref
DC Bus Undervolt
4-4
The display will differ depending on the
type of fault.
A low voltage alarm is shown at left.
Trial Operation Procedures
Basic Settings
Switch to the quick programming mode (“QUICK” will be displayed on the LCD screen) and then set the following user constants. Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to Chapter 5 User Constants and Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function for details on the user
constants.
Constants that must be set are listed in Table 4.1 and those that are set according to the application are listed in
Table 4.2.
Table 4.1 Constants that Must Be Set
Constant
Number
A1-02
Name
Control method
selection
Description
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector 1 control
3: Flux vector
4: Open-loop vector 2 control
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Page
0 to 4
2
5-8
1
5-10
6-2
6-76
6-94
0 to 3
1
5-10
6-10
6-76
6-94
Reference selection
Set the frequency reference input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
b1-02
Operation
method selection
Set the Run Command input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
C1-01
Acceleration time Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output
1
frequency to climb from 0% to 100%.
0.0 to 6000.0
10.0 s
5-21
6-18
C1-02
Deceleration time Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output
1
frequency to fall from 100% to 0%.
0.0 to 6000.0
10.0 s
5-21
6-18
Set the Inverter's nominal input voltage in volts.
Input voltage setThis setting is used as a reference value in protecting
tion functions.
155 to 255 V
(200 V Class)
310 to 510 V
(400 V Class)
200 V
(200 V
Class)
400 V
(400 V
Class)
5-33
6-120
Motor rated current
Set the motor rated current.
Setting for
generalpurpose
10% to 200%
motor of
of Inverter's
rated current
same
capacity
as Inverter
Motor protection
selection
Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
b1-01
E1-01
E2-01
L1-01
0 to 4
0 to 3
1
5-34
6-57
6-117
5-58
6-57
4-5
Table 4.2 Constants that Are Set as Required
Constant
Number
b1-03
C6-02
C6-11
Name
Stopping method
selection
Description
Select stopping method when Stop Command is
sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop
3: Coast to stop with timer
Carrier frequency selection
Carrier frequency selection
for open-loop
vector 2 control
L3-04
4-6
Set the voltage level gain for the multi-function
FM and AM ter- analog output 1 (H4-02) and 2 (H4-05).
minal output gain Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as
the 100% output for the monitor item.
Stall prevention
selection during
deceleration
Factory
Setting
Page
0 to 3
0
5-10
6-12
1 to F
Depends
on capacity, voltage, and
control
method.
5-26
1 to 4
Depends
on kVA
setting.
5-26
0 to 400.00 Hz
d1-01 to
d1-04:
0.00 Hz
d1-17:
6.00 Hz
5-27
0.00 to 2.50
H4-02:
1.00
H4-05:
0.50
5-54
0 to 3
1
5-61
6-25
The carrier frequency is set low if the motor cable
is 50 m or longer or to reduce radio noise or leakage current.
Frequency referd1-01 to
ences 1 to 4 and Set the required speed references for multi-step
d1-04 and
jog frequency ref- speed operation or jogging.
d1-17
erence
H4-02
and H405
Setting
Range
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If deceleration
time is too short, a main circuit overvoltage
may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped when the
main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage
level. Deceleration restarts when voltage is
returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode (Deceleration
rate is automatically adjusted so that the
Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible
time. Set deceleration time is disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit, Braking Unit) is used, always set to
0 or 3.
Trial Operation Procedures
Settings for the Control Methods
Autotuning methods depend on the control method set for the Inverter. Make the settings required by the control method.
Overview of Settings
Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autotuning mode according to the following flowchart.
START
NO
Vector control (A1-02 = 2, 3, or 4)*3
V/f control?
㧔A1-02=0 or 1)
YES
V/f
Control mode selection
PG?
YES
㧔A1-02=1㧕
NO
(Default:
A1-02=0)
Set E1-03.
V/f default: 200V/60Hz(400V/60Hz)
Motor cable over
50 m or heavy load possibly
causing motor to stall
or overload?
*2
Set E1-03, E2-04, and F1-01.
V/f default: 200V/60Hz(400V/60Hz)
YES
OK to operate
motor during
autotuning? *1
NO
Load is
connected to motor when
operating motor first time
after autotuning?
YES
YES
NO
Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance only
Rotational *4
autotuning
Stationary *4
autotuning 1
Stationary *4
autotuning 2
END
Note If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only on-site.
* 1. Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated. Always perform rotational autotuning when
using open-loop vector 2 control.
* 2. If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13.
* 3. The default setting of the Inverter is for open-loop vector 1 control (A1-02 = 2).
* 4. If the maximum output frequency is different from the base frequency, set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) after autotuning.
Fig 4.3 Settings According to the Control Method
4-7
Setting the Control Method
Any of the following five control methods can be set.
Control Method
Constant Setting
Basic Control
Main Applications
V/f control
A1-02 = 0
Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control
Variable speed control, particularly
control of multiple motors with one
Inverter and replacing existing Inverters
V/f control with PG
A1-02 = 1
Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control
with speed compensation using a PG
Applications requiring high-precision
speed control using a PG on the
machine side
Open-loop vector 1
control
A1-02 = 2
(factory setting)
Current vector control without a PG
Variable speed control, applications
requiring speed and torque accuracy
using vector control without a PG
A1-02 = 3
Flux vector control
Very high-performance control with a
PG (simple servo drives, high-precision speed control, torque control, and
torque limiting)
A1-02 = 4
Current vector control without a PG
with an ASR (speed controller)
(Always perform rotational autotuning.)
Very high-performance control without a PG (torque control without a PG,
torque limiting, applications requiring
a 1:200 speed control range without a
PG)
Flux vector control
Open-loop vector 2
control
Note With vector control, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. The motor capacity for which stable control is possible is 50% to 100% of the capacity of the Inverter.
V/f Control (A1-02 = 0)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz:
E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 60 Hz:
E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
V/f Control with PG (A1-02=1)
• Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 to E) in E1-03 (V/f Pattern Selection) or set F in E1-03 to specify a
user-set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1-04 to E1-13 in advanced programming mode.
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 50 Hz:
E1-03 = 0
Simple operation of a general-purpose
motor at 60 Hz:
E1-03 = F (default) or 1
If E1-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from
E1-04 to E1-13 are for 60 Hz
• Set the number of motor poles in E2-04 (Number of Motor Poles)
• Set the number of rotations per pulse in F1-01 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the
motor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F1-12 and F1-13 in advanced programming mode.
4-8
Trial Operation Procedures
• Perform stationary autotuning for the line-to-line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for
the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling. Refer to the following section on
Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning.
Open-loop Vector 1 Control (A1-02 = 2)
Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be operated, perform stationary autotuning 1 or 2. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 3)
Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be operated, perform stationary autotuning 1 or 2. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Open-loop Vector 2 Control (A1-02 = 4)
Perform autotuning. If the motor can be operated, perform rotational autotuning. If the motor cannot be operated, perform stationary autotuning 1 or 2. Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotuning.
Autotuning
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set motor constants when using the vector
control method, when the cable length is long, etc.
If the control method was changed after autotuning, be sure to perform autotuning again.
One of the following four autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotational autotuning
• Stationary autotuning 1
• Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
• Stationary autotuning 2
Precautions Before Using Autotuning
Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
• Autotuning the Inverter is fundamentally different from autotuning the servo system. Inverter autotuning
automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor constants, whereas servo system autotuning
adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the load.
• When speed or torque precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), use a
motor with a rated voltage that is 20 V less than the input power supply voltage of the Inverter for 200Vclass Inverters and 40 V less for 400V-class Inverters. If the rated voltage of the motor is the same as the
input power supply voltage, the voltage output from the Inverter will be unstable at high speeds and sufficient performance will not be possible.
• Use stationary autotuning 1 or 2 whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a load.
• Use rotational autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that has fixed output characteris-
tics, when high precision is required, or for a motor that is not connected to a load.
• If rotational autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load, the motor constants will not be found
accurately and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autotuning for a motor
connected to a load.
4-9
• If the wiring between the Inverter and motor changes by 50 m or more between autotuning and motor
installation, perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.
• If the motor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only
even when using V/f control.
• The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs will be as shown in the following table
during autotuning. When performing autotuning with the motor connected to a load, be sure that the holding brake is not applied during autotuning, especially for conveyor systems or similar equipment.
Tuning Mode
Multi-function Inputs
Multi-function Outputs
Rotational autotuning
Do not function.
Same as during normal
operation
Stationary autotuning 1
Do not function.
Maintain same status as
when autotuning is started.
Stationary autotuning for lineto-line resistance only
Do not function.
Maintain same status as
when autotuning is started.
Stationary autotuning 2
Do not function.
Maintain same status as
when autotuning is started.
• To cancel autotuning, always use the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
• Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning is performed even though the motor will
not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
Rotational Autotuning (T1-01 = 0)
Rotational autotuning is used for open-loop vector control and flux vector control. Set T1-01 to 0, input the
data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will stop the
motor for approximately 1 minute and then set the required motor constants automatically while operating the
motor for approximately 1 minute.
IMPORTANT
1. Always disconnect the motor from the machine and confirm that it is safe to operate the motor before
performing rotational autotuning.
2. If the motor cannot be operated by itself, perform stationary autotuning, but always use rotational
autotuning whenever it is possible to operate the motor by itself to increase performance.
Stationary Autotuning 1 (T1-01 = 1)
Stationary autotuning1 is used for open-loop vector control and flux vector control. Set T1-01 to 1, input the
data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power
to the stationary motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor constants will be set automatically.
The remaining motor constants E2-02 (motor rated slip) and E2-03 (motor no-load current) will be set automatically the first time operation is started in drive mode. To perform an operation immediately after stationary autotuning1, use the following procedure under the recommended conditions.
1. Check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode.
2. Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions.
• The Inverter and the motor are connected.
• The motor shaft is not locked with a mechanical brake or other stopping mechanism (or function).
• A motor-load ratio of 30% or less is maintained.
• A speed of 30% or more of the base frequency set at E1-06 (default = highest frequency) is maintained at a
constant speed for one second or more.
4-10
Trial Operation Procedures
3. After stopping the motor, check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 again in verify mode or advanced programming mode. If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differ from the ones before the first operation was carried
out, the settings have been successfully completed. Next, check if the values are suitable or not.
If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or the
instruction manual, hunting, motor vibrations, insufficient motor torque, or an overcurrent may occur because
the motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after stationary
autotuning1. For elevators, failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury. If so, perform stationary autotuning1 again and run the motor using the aforementioned procedure under the recommended conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2 or rotational autotuning.
Usually the standard setting for E2-02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz, and that for E2-03 is 30% to 65% of the rated current
for a general-purpose motor. Generally, the larger the motor capacity is, the smaller the rated slip and the ratio
of the no-load current to the rated current become. Use the data given in Factory Settings that Change with the
Inverter Capacity (o2-04) of Chapter 5 User Constants as a reference.
IMPORTANT
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning 1 is performed even though the motor
will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning 1 connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
holding brake is not activated during autotuning.
Stationary Autotuning for Line-to-Line Resistance Only (T1-01 = 2)
Stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only can be used in any control method. This is the only autotuning possible for V/f control and V/f control with PG modes.
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long (50 m or longer) or the cable
length has changed since installation or when the motor and Inverter have different capacities.
Set T1-01 to 2, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-Line Resistance (E2-05) and cable resistance will be automatically measured.
IMPORTANT
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance is performed
even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
holding brake is not activated during autotuning.
Stationary Autotuning 2 (T1-01 = 4)
If using Inverters for applications with constant loads such as for elevators, or with a motor load ratio exceeding 30% at startup, and rotational autotuning without loads cannot be performed, perform stationary autotuning 2 (T1-01=4).
Stationary autotuning 2 is used for open-loop vector control and flux vector control. Set T1-04 to 4, and Motor
no-load current (T1-09) will be added as a setting item. Input the data from the nameplate. Be sure to input the
value or motor no-load current (motor exciting current) from motor examination results to T1-09. After autotuning, the value of T1-09 will be written in E2-03. When not setting T1-09, the value of Yaskawa standard
motor’s no-load current will be written in E2-03.
IMPORTANT
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning 2 is performed even though the motor
will not turn. Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning 2 connected to a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the
holding brake is not activated during autotuning.
4-11
Precautions for Rotational and Stationary Autotuning
Lower the base voltage based on Fig 4.4 to prevent saturation of the Inverter’s output voltage when the rated
voltage of the motor is higher than the voltage of the power supply to the Inverter. Use the following procedure to perform autotuning.
1. Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1-03 (Motor rated voltage).
2. Input the results of the following formula to T1-05 (Motor base frequency):
(Base frequency from the motor’s nameplate &times; setting of T1-03)/(Rated voltage from motor’s nameplate)
3. Perform autotuning.
After having completed autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency shown on the
motor nameplate.
Output voltage
Rated voltage from
motor nameplate
T1-03
0
Base frequency
from motor nameplate
&times;T1-03
Output frequency
Base frequency
from motor nameplate
Rated voltage from motor nameplate
Fig 4.4 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting
IMPORTANT
1. When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T1-03 (Motor
rated voltage) to the input power supply voltage &times; 0.9.
2. When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the output current will increase as
the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.
Precautions After Using Rotational and Stationary Autotuning
• After completing autotuning, set E1-04 (Max. output frequency) to the base frequency from the motor’s
nameplate.
• In stationary autotuning 1, when the motor is first operated in the drive mode after tuning, the remaining
motor constants E2-02 (Motor rated slip) and E2-03 (Motor no-load current) are set automatically. To perform an operation immediately after stationary autotuning 1, use the following procedure under the recommended conditions.
1. Check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode.
2. Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions.
• The Inverter and the motor are connected.
• The motor shaft is not locked with a mechanical brake or other stopping mechanism (or function).
• A motor-load ratio of 30% or less is maintained.
• A speed of 30% or more of the base frequency set at E1-06 (default = highest frequency) is maintained
at a constant speed for one second or more.
3. After stopping the motor, check the values of E2-02 and E2-03 again in verify mode or advanced programming mode. If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differ from the ones before the first operation was carried
out, the settings have been successfully completed. Next, check if the values are suitable or not.
4-12
Trial Operation Procedures
If the values of E2-02 and E2-03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or the
instruction manual, hunting, motor vibrations, insufficient motor torque, or an overcurrent may occur because
the motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after stationary autotuning 1. For elevators, failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury. If so, perform stationary autotuning 1 again and run the motor using the aforementioned procedure under the recommended
conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2 or rotational autotuning.
Usually the standard setting for E2-02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz, and that for E2-03 is 30% to 65% of the rated current
for a general-purpose motor. Generally, the larger the motor capacity is, the smaller the rated slip and the ratio
of the no-load current to the rated current become. Use the data given in Factory Settings that Change with the
Inverter Capacity (o2-04) of Chapter 5 User Constants as a reference.
4-13
Constant Settings for Autotuning
The following constants must be set before autotuning.
Table 4.3 Constant Settings before Autotuning
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Display
Motor 1/2 When switching to motor 2 is
selection*1 selected, set the motor for
which autotuning is to be performed. (This constant is
T1-00
ignored if motor 2 is not
Select
selected.)
Motor
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
Autotuning mode
selection
T1-01
Tuning
Mode Sel
Motor output power
T1-02
Mtr Rated
Power
Motor
rated voltage
T1-03
Rated Voltage
Motor
rated curT1-04 rent
Rated Current
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotational autotuning
1: Stationary autotuning 1
2: Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance only
3: Shipping adjustment*8
4: Stationary autotuning 2*9
4-14
Factory
Setting
1 or 2
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 to 4
2 (V/f)
0 (Vector)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*4
0.00 to
650.00 kW
Set the rated voltage of the
motor in volts.*5 *6
0.0 to
255.0 V
(200 V
Class)
0.0 to
510.0 V
(400 V
Class)
200.0 V
(200 V
Class)
400.0 V
(400 V
Class)
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set the rated current of the
motor in amps.*5 *7
0.32 to
6.40 A*3
1.90 A*2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0.0 to
400.0 Hz
60.0 Hz
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
2 to 48
poles
4 poles
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Number of
motor
poles
Set the number of motor poles.
Number of
Poles
Setting
Range
Set the output power of the
motor in kilowatts.*5 *7
Motor base
frequency Set the base frequency of the
T1-05
*5 *6
Rated Fre- motor in hertz.
quency
T1-06
Data Displays during Autotuning
Open
Open
V/f
Flux
-loop
-loop
V/f
with
VecVecVecPG
tor
tor 1
tor 2
0.40 kW
*2
Trial Operation Procedures
Table 4.3 Constant Settings before Autotuning (Continued)
Constant
Number
Name
Data Displays during Autotuning
Open
Open
V/f
Flux
-loop
-loop
V/f
with
VecVecVecPG
tor
tor 1
tor 2
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the base speed of the motor
in min−1.*5
0 to 24000
1750
min−1
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 to 60000
600
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
0.00 to 1.89
1.20A
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display
Motor base
speed
T1-07
Rated
Speed
Number of
PG pulses
when turn- Set the number of pulses for the
PG (pulse generator or
ing
T1-08
encoder). Set the number of
pulses per motor revolution
PG Pulses/ without a multiplication factor.
Rev
Motor noload curT1-09 rent
*9
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
No-Load
Current
Set the current value recorded
in the motor’s test results for a
motor without a load.
Displayed only when Stationary
autotuning 2 is selected (T1-01
= 4).
*10
*2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Not normally displayed. Displayed only when a motor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H1-01 to H1-10 set to 16).
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. Values are given for a 200 V Class, 0.4 kW Inverter.
The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for a 0.4 kW is given.
Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. Only set value 2 (2 or 3 for Control Boards ETC618046-S1033 and later) is possible for V/f control or V/
f control with PG.
5. For fixed output motors, set the base speed value.
6. For Inverter motors or for specialized vector motors, the voltage or frequency may be lower than for general-purpose motors. Always confirm the information on the nameplate or in test reports. If the no-load values are known, input the no-load voltage in T1-03 and the no-load current in T1-05 to
ensure accuracy.
7. The settings that will ensure stable vector control are between 50% and 100% of the Inverter rating.
8. Applicable for Control Boards ETC618046-S1033 and later. Refer to Chapter 8 Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board
(Page 8-3) for the details of setting 3 (Shipping adjustment).
9. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
10.The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given. The upper limit depends on the setting of
E2-01.
Refer to page 3-15 for Digital Operator displays during autotuning.
Precautions for Precision Settings
Settings for autotuning are different when performing autotuning using motor test reports or design data. Use
the following table as reference.
Operator Display
Simple Setting
Precision Setting
T1-03
Motor rated voltage
Voltage under no-load conditions at motor rated speed
T1-05
Motor base frequency
Frequency under no-load
conditions at rated speed
4-15
Application Settings
User constants are set as required in advanced programming mode (“ADV” will be displayed on the LCD
screen). All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in
advanced programming mode.
Setting Examples
The following are examples of settings for applications.
• When using an Inverter-mounted braking resistor (ERF), set L8-01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor
overheating protection.
• To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b1-04 to 1 to disable reverse operation.
• To increase the speed of a 60 Hz motor by 10%, set E1-04 to 66.0 Hz.
• To use a 0 to 10-V analog signal for a 60 Hz motor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 54 Hz (0%
to 90% speed deduction), set H3-02 to 90.0%.
• To control speed between 20% and 80% to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of
the machine, set d2-01 to 80.0% and set d2-02 to 20.0%.
No-load Operation
To being no-load operation (without connecting the machine and the motor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator
should be OFF).
Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital
Operator. Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter.
Jog Frequency Reference (d1-17, default: 6.00 Hz) can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the
JOG Key on the Digital Operator. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator, confirm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in
REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be
taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine.
Both a Run Command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed reference) must
be provided to start Inverter operation.
Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE).
INFO
Loaded Operation
Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the
Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals).
Connecting the Load
• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.
• Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system.
4-16
Trial Operation Procedures
Operation using the Digital Operator
• Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation.
• If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.
• At first, set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.
Checking Operating Status
• Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow
speed, increase the frequency reference.
• After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnor-
mal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display to ensure that U1-03 (Output Current) is not too
high.
• Continuously driving a general-purpose motor with its rated current at a speed of less than 20 Hz may
cause motor overheat. Further, if a current exceeding 70 to 80% of the load current flows for more than one
minute while the motor is running at a low speed, OL1 (Motor Overload) will be generated.
• When neither a braking unit (braking resistor) nor a regenerative converter is connected, some operation
conditions may cause an overvoltage. Check the DC bus voltage monitor (U1-07), and adjust the acceleration/deceleration time, etc. as required. (200 V class: less than 350 V, 400 V class: less than 700 V)
• Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-18 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the
control system occur.
Check and Recording User Constants
Use verify mode (“VERIFY” will be displayed on the LCD screen) to check user constants that have been
changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table.
Any user constants that have been change by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode.
If required, the copy function in constants o3-01 and o3-02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be
used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator, they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system
recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced.
The following functions can also be used to manage user constants.
• Recording user constants
• Setting access levels for user constants
• Setting a password
Recording User Constants (o2-03)
If o2-03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation, the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate
memory area in the Inverter. Later, after Inverter settings have been changed, the user constants can be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area when o2-03 was set to 1 by setting A1-03 (Initialize) to
1110.
User Constant Access Levels (A1-01)
A1-01 can be set to 0 (monitoring-only) to prevent user constants from being changed. A1-01 can also be set
to 1 (User-specified Constants) and used along with A2 constants to display only constants required by the
machine or application in a programming mode.
Password (A1-04 and A1-05)
When the access level is set to monitoring-only (A1-01 = 0), a password can be set so that user constants will
be displayed only when the correct password is input.
4-17
Adjustment Suggestions
If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation,
adjust the constants listed in the following table according to the control method. This table lists only the
most commonly used user constants.
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants
Control
Method
V/f control
(A1-02 = 0
or 1)
Name (Constant
Number)
Performance
Factory
Setting
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if
torque is insufficient for
heavy loads.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for
light loads.
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low to middle-range
speeds.
200 to 1000
ms
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Hunting-prevention
gain (N1-02)
Carrier frequency
selection
(C6-02)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds
Depends
on capacity
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Increasing torque
and speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
Depends
on capacity
Torque compensation
gain (C4-01)
• Improving torque at
low speeds (10 Hz
or lower)
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
1.00
0.50 to 1.50
• Increase the setting if
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for
light loads.
Middle output frequency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
• Improving torque at
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capacity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 3
to 5 V*
• Increase the setting if
torque is insufficient at
low speeds.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
0.50 to 2.00
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
20 to
100 ms
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
100 to
500 ms
• Reduce the setting if speed
response is slow.
• Increase the setting if the
speed is not stable.
0.5 to 1.5
• Increase the setting if
speed response is slow.
• Reduce the setting if the
speed is too fast.
Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant (C4-02)
• Increasing torque
and speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
20 ms
• Increasing speed
Slip compensation priresponse
mary delay time (C3200 ms
• Improving speed sta02)
bility
Slip compensation
gain (C3-01)
4-18
Adjustment Method
Controlling hunting
and vibration in mid1.00
dle-range speeds (10 to
40 Hz)
• Increasing torque
Speed feedback detecand speed response
tion control (AFR)
• Controlling hunting
1.00
gain
and vibration in mid(N2-01)
dle-range speeds (10
to 40 Hz)
Open-loop
vector 1
control
(A1-02 = 2)
Recommended
Setting
• Improving speed
accuracy
1.0
Adjustment Suggestions
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants (Continued)
Control
Method
Name (Constant
Number)
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-02)
Open-loop
vector 1
control
Middle output fre(A1-02 = 2) quency voltage
(E1-08)
Minimum output frequency voltage
(E1-10)
Performance
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
speeds (10 Hz or
less)
Depends
on capacity
0 to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low speeds.
• Improving torque at
low speeds
• Controlling shock at
startup
Depends
on capacity and
voltage
Default to
Default + 1
or 2 V*
• Increase the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Reduce the setting if shock
at startup is large.
10.00 to
50.00
• Increase the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
0.300 to
1.000 s
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
ASR proportional gain • Torque and speed
1 (C5-01) and
response
ASR proportional gain • Controlling hunting
2 (C5-03)
and vibration
ASR integral time 1
(high-speed) (C5-02)
and
ASR integral time 2
(low-speed) (C5-04)
Factory
Setting
• Torque and speed
response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
20.00
0.500 s
Flux vector
ASR switching frecontrol
quency (C5-07)
(A1-02 = 3)
Switching the ASR
proportional gain and
integral time according to the output frequency
0.0 Hz
0.0 to max.
output frequency
Set the output frequency at
which to change the ASR
proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both
high-speed and low-speed
operation.
ASR primary delay
time (C5-06)
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
0.004 s
0.004 to
0.020 s
Increase the setting if
machine rigidity is low and
the system vibrates easily.
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-02)
• Reducing motor
Depends
magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting on the
and vibration at low capacity.
speeds (3 Hz or less)
2.0 kHz to
default
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low to middle-range
speeds.
10.00 to
50.00
• Increase the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow. (Refer to Procedure
for Increasing the Speed
Response below.)
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
0.300 to
1.000 s
• Reduce the setting if
torque or speed response is
slow.
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Open-loop
vector 2
control
(A1-02 = 4)
ASR proportional gain • Torque and speed
1 (C5-01) and
response
ASR proportional gain • Controlling hunting
and vibration
2 (C5-03)
ASR integral time 1
(high-speed) (C5-02)
and
ASR integral time 2
(low-speed) (C5-04)
• Torque and speed
response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
10.00
0.500 s
4-19
Table 4.4 Adjusted User Constants (Continued)
Control
Method
Name (Constant
Number)
ASR switching frequency (C5-07)
ASR primary delay
time (C5-06)
ASR primary delay
time 2 (C5-10)
Open-loop
vector 2
control
(A1-02 = 4) Integral time of speed
estimator (N4-07)
Performance
Switching the ASR
proportional gain and
integral time according to the output frequency
Factory
Setting
0.0 Hz
0.0 to max.
output frequency
0.010 s
0.04 to
0.020 s
0.035 s
0.010 to
0.035 s
0.010 s
0.010 to
0.035 s
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
• Speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
0.030 ms
High-speed proportional gain of speed
estimator (N4-10)
• Speed response
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
Carrier frequency
selection (C6-11)
• Reducing motor
magnetic noise
Depends
• Controlling hunting on the
and vibration at low capacity.
speeds (3 Hz or less)
15
* The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
4-20
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
Set the output frequency at
which to change the ASR
proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both
high-speed and low-speed
operation.
Increase the setting if
machine rigidity is low and
the system vibrates easily.
(Enabled in the range 0 to
35 Hz. Refer to Procedure
for Increasing the Speed
Response below.)
Increase the setting if
machine rigidity is low and
the system vibrates easily.
(Enabled above 35 Hz. Refer
to Procedure for Increasing
the Speed Response below.)
0.015 to
0.060 ms
(Enabled below the N4-11
setting.)
• Reduce the setting if speed
response is slow. (Typically, reduce in intervals of
0.05. Refer to Procedure
for Increasing the Speed
Response below.)
• Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
10 to 60
(Enabled below the N4-11
setting.)
• Increase the setting if
speed response is slow.
(Typically, increase in
intervals of 5. Refer to
Procedure for Increasing
the Speed Response
below.)
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs.
Default
value
• Increase the setting if
motor magnetic noise is
high.
• Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at
low to middle-range
speeds.
Adjustment Suggestions
Procedure for Increasing the Speed Response (PRG: 102 only)
Increase the speed response.
C5-01 ≥ 30.0
No
Increase the setting for the ASR proportional gain (C5-01).
(Typically, increase in intervals of 5.)
Yes
C5-06 ≤ 0.01
No
Reduce the setting for the ASR primary delay time (C5-06).
(Typically, reduce in intervals of 0.01.)
Yes
Speed ≥ N4-11
Is the speed response to be
increased for low-speed
operation or high-speed
operation?
Increase the setting for the high-speed proportional gain of
speed estimator (N4-10). (Typically, increase in intervals
of 5.)
Speed &lt; N4-11
Reduce the setting for the integral time of
speed estimator (N4-07). (Typically,
reduce in intervals of 0.005.)
• Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-01) from its default setting of 1.00 when using open-
loop vector 1 control.
• If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector 1 control, enable Slip Compensation Dur-
ing Regeneration (C3-04 = 1).
• Use slip compensation to improve speed control during V/f control (A1-02 = 0).
Set the Motor Rated Current (E2-01), Motor Rated Slip (E2-02), and Motor No-load Current (E2-03), and
then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-01) to between 0.5 and 1.5. The default setting for V/f control
is C3-01 = 0.0 (slip compensation disabled).
• To improve speed response and stability in V/f control with a PG (A1-02 = 1), set the ASR constants (C5-
01 to C5-05) to between 0.5 and 1.5 times the default. (It is not normally necessary to adjust this setting.)
ASR for V/f control with a PG will only control the output frequency; a high gain, such as is possible for
open-loop vector 2 control or flux vector control, cannot be set.
The following user constants will also indirectly affect the control system.
Table 4.5 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications
Name (Constant Number)
Application
Dwell function (b6-01 to b6-04)
Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes.
Droop function (b7-01 to b7-02)
Used to soften the torque or to balance the load between two motors. Can
be used when the control method (A1-02) is set to 3 or 4.
Acceleration/deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-11)
Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration.
S-curve characteristics (C2-01 to C2-04)
Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration.
Jump frequencies (d3-01 to d3-04)
Used to avoid resonance points during operation.
Analog input filter time constant (H3-12)
Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise.
Stall prevention
(L3-01 to L3-06, L3-11, L3-12)
Used to prevent overvoltage errors and motor stalling for heavy loads or
rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by default and
the setting does not normally need to be changed. When using a braking
resistor, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting
L3-04 to 0.
4-21
Table 4.5 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications (Continued)
Name (Constant Number)
Application
Set the maximum torque during vector control. If a setting is increased,
Torque limits (L7-01 to L7-04, L7-06, L7-07) use a motor with higher capacity than the Inverter. If a setting is reduced,
stalling can occur under heavy loads.
Feed forward control (N5-01 to N5-03)
4-22
Used to increase response for acceleration/deceleration or to reduce overshooting when there is low machine rigidity and the gain of the speed
controller (ASR) cannot be increased. The inertia ratio between the load
and motor and the acceleration time of the motor running alone must be
set.
5
User Constants
This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter.
User Constant Descriptions .........................................5-2
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels ..........5-3
User Constant Tables ..................................................5-8
User Constant Descriptions
This section describes the contents of the user constant tables.
Description of User Constant Tables
User constant tables are structured as shown below. Here, b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an
example.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
Reference
Source
Setting
Range
Description
Set the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Q
Q
Q
Q
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Q
180H
-
• Constant Number:
The number of the user constant.
• Name:
The name of the user constant.
• Description:
Details on the function or settings of the user constant.
• Setting Range:
The setting range for the user constant.
• Factory Setting:
The factory setting (each control method has its own factory setting.
Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is
changed.)
Refer to page 5-87 for factory settings by control method.
• Change during Operation:
Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the
Inverter is in operation.
Yes: Changes possible during operation.
No:
• Control Methods:
5-2
Changes not possible during operation.
Indicates the control methods in which the user constant can be monitored or set.
Q:
Items which can be monitored and set in either quick programming mode or advanced programming mode.
A:
Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced programming mode.
No:
Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method.
• MEMOBUS Register:
The register number used for MEMOBUS communications.
• Page:
Reference page for more detailed information on the constant.
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter.
MENU
Drive Mode
Inverter can be operated and
its status can be displayed.
Quick Programming Mode
Minimum constants required
for operation can be monitored
or set.
Advanced Programming Mode
All constants can be monitored
or set.
Verify Mode
Constants changed from the
default settings can be monitored or set.
Autotuning Mode
Automatically sets motor constants if autotuning data (from
motor nameplate) is input for
open-loop vector control or to
measure the line-to-line resistance for V/f control.
No.
Function
Display
Page
U1
U2
Status Monitor Constants
Monitor
5-78
Fault Trace
Fault Trace
U3
5-84
Fault History
Fault History
5-86
5-8
A1
Initialize Mode
Initialization
A2
User-specified Setting Mode
User
Parameter
5-9
b1
Operation Mode Selections
Sequence
5-10
b2
DC Injection Braking
DC Braking
5-12
b3
Speed Search
Speed
Search
5-13
b4
Timer Function
Delay Timers
5-15
b5
PID Control
PID Control
5-15
b6
Dwell Functions
5-17
b7
Droop Control
b8
Energy Saving
Reference
Hold
Droop
Control
Energy
Saving
b9
Zero-servo
Zero Servo
5-20
C1
Acceleration/Deceleration
Accel/Decel
5-21
C2
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration
5-22
C3
Motor Slip Compensation
C4
Torque Compensation
S-Curve
Acc/Dcc
Motor-Slip
Comp
Torque
Comp
C5
Speed Control (ASR)
ASR Tuning
5-25
C6
Carrier Frequency
Carrier Freq
5-26
d1
Preset Reference
5-27
d2
Reference Limits
d3
Jump Frequencies
Preset
Reference
Reference
Limits
Jump
Frequencies
d4
Reference Frequency Hold
Sequence
5-29
d5
Torque Control
Torque Control
5-30
d6
Field Weakening
Fieldweakening
5-31
E1
V/f Pattern
V/f Pattern
5-33
E2
Motor Setup
Motor
Setup
5-34
E3
Motor 2 V/f Pattern
V/f Pattern 2
5-36
E4
Motor 2 Setup
5-38
F1
PG Option Setup
Motor Setup
2
PG Option
Setup
F2
Analog Reference Board
AI-14 Setup
5-41
F3
Digital Reference Board
5-42
F4
Analog Monitor Boards
F5
Digital Output Boards
F6
Communications Option Boards
DI-08, 16
Setup
AO-08, 12
Setup
DO-02,08
Setup
ComOPT
Setup
H1
Multi-function Contact Inputs
Digital
Inputs
5-46
H2
Multi-function Contact Outputs
Digital
Outputs
5-49
H3
Analog Inputs
Analog
Inputs
5-51
H4
Multi-function Analog Outputs
5-54
H5
MEMOBUS Communications
H6
Pulse Train
L1
Motor Overload
L2
Power Loss Ridethrough
L3
Stall Prevention
L4
Reference Detection
Analog
Outputs
Serial Com
Setup
Pulse I/O
Setup
Motor
Overload
PwrLoss
Ridethru
Stall
Prevention
Ref
Detection
L5
Fault Restart
Fault Restart
5-63
L6
Torque Detection
Torque
Detection
5-64
L7
Torque Limits
Torque Limit
5-65
L8
Hardware Protection
Hdwe
Protection
5-66
N1
Hunting Prevention Function
Hunting Prev
5-69
N2
Speed Feedback Protection Control
AFR
5-70
N3
High-slip Braking
High Slip
5-70
N4
Speed Estimation
Observer
5-71
N5
Feed Forward
5-73
o1
Monitor Select
o2
Multi-function Selections
o3
Copy Function
Feedfoward
Cont
Monitor
Select
Key
Selections
COPY
Function
T
Motor Autotuning
Auto-Tuning
5-77
5-18
5-19
5-23
5-24
5-28
5-29
5-39
5-43
5-44
5-45
5-55
5-57
5-58
5-59
5-61
5-62
5-73
5-75
5-76
5-3
User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode
The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming
mode. The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and
all other user constants, are also displayed in advanced programming mode.
Refer to the overview of modes on page 3-5 for an overview of quick programming mode.
Name
Constant
Number
A1-02
Display
Control
method
selection
Control
Method
Reference
selection
b1-01
b1-02
Reference
Source
Operation
method
selection
Run
Source
Stopping
method
selection
b1-03
Stopping
Method
C1-01
C1-02
C6-02
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the control method for the Inverter.
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector 1 control
3: Flux vector control
4: Open-loop vector 2 control
0 to 4
2
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
Set the Run Command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
0 to 3
Select stopping method when Stop
Command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC braking stop (Stops faster than
coast to stop, without regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
Commands are disregarded during
deceleration time.)
Acceleration time 1 Set the acceleration time in seconds
for the output frequency to climb from
Accel
0% to 100%.
Time 1
Deceleration time 1 Set the deceleration time in seconds
for the output frequency to fall from
Decel
100% to 0%.
Time 1
Carrier frequency
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
selection
Select F to enable detailed settings
using constants C6-03 to C6-07.
Carrier
Freq Sel
5-4
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
*10
0.0 to
6000.0
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
102H
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
180H
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
181H
0
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
182H
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
200H
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
201H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
10.0 s
*1
1 to F
6
*11
*2
No
*13
224H
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
C6-11
Carrier frequency for Select carrier frequency when openopen-loop loop vector 2 control is used.
1: 2kHz
vector 2
2: 4kHz
control
3: 6kHz
Carrier
4: 8kHz
Freq Sel
d1-01
Frequency Set the frequency reference in the unit
reference 1 specified in o1-03 (Frequency Units
Reference for Reference Setting And Monitor,
default: Hz)
1
0.00 Hz
d1-02
Frequency
reference 2 Frequency reference when multi-step
speed reference 1 is ON for a multiReference function input (unit: Set in o1-03).
2
d1-03
d1-04
d1-17
E1-03
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
*13
*13
*13
Yes
Q
Q
Q
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Frequency
reference 3 Frequency reference when multi-step
speed reference 2 is ON for a multiReference function input (unit: Set in o1-03).
3
0 to
0.00 Hz
400.00
Yes
Q
Frequency Frequency reference when multi-step
reference 4 speed reference 1 and 2 are ON for a
Reference multi-function input (unit: Set in o103).
4
0.00 Hz
Yes
6.00 Hz
Jog
frequency
reference
Jog
Reference
E1-01
Change
during
Operation
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt.
This set value will be the basis for the
Input Volt- protection functions.
age
V/F Selection
0 to E: Select from 15 preset patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns (Applicable for setting E1-04 to E1-10).
4
*2
No
Q
22DH
Q
Q
280H
Q
Q
Q
281H
Q
Q
Q
Q
282H
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
283H
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
292H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
300H
No
Q
Q
No
No
No
302H
*13
*7
Frequency reference when Jog Frequency Selection, FJOG command, or
RJOG command is ON for a multifunction input (unit: Set in o1-03).
Input voltage setting
V/f pattern
selection
1 to 4
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
155 to
255
*3
0 to F
200 V
*3
F
5-5
Name
Constant
Number
E1-04
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Description
Display
Max.
output
frequency
(FMAX)
40.0 to
60.0 Hz
400.0
*4
E1-05
Max
Voltage
E1-06
Base frequency
(FA)
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
VBASE
(E1-13)
Frequency
(Hz)
VMIN
(E1-10)
FMIN
(E1-09)
FA
FMAX
(E1-06) (E1-04)
Base Frequency
E1-09
Min. output frequency
(FMIN)
E1-13
Base
Voltage
E2-01
E2-04
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
*3
*3*4
0.0 to
400.0
60.0 Hz
*7
0.0 to
400.0
*7
Min Frequency
Base
voltage
(VBASE)
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
303H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
304H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
305H
No
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
308H
No
A
A
Q
Q
Q
30CH
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
30EH
No
No
Q
No
Q
Q
311H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
318H
*7
Max
Frequency
Max.
voltage
(VMAX)
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Change this setting only when making
advanced adjustments for V/f in the
fixed outputs area. Normally, there is
no need to make these settings.
Motor
rated current
Set the motor rated current in amps.
This set value becomes the base value
for motor protection, torque limit, and
torque control. It is set automatically
Motor
Rated FLA when using autotuning.
Number of
motor
Set the number of motor poles. The
poles
value is set automatically during autoNumber of tuning.
0.0 to
255.0
*3
0.32 to
6.40
*6
*4
0.5 Hz
*4
0.0 V
*5
1.90 A
*2
2 to 48
4 poles
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
Poles
E2-11
Motor
rated
output
Mtr Rated
Power
F1-01
PG constant
Set the number of pulses per rotation
for the PG (pulse generator or
PG Pulses/ encoder) being used. (Do not set as a
multiple.)
Rev
Gain (terminal FM)
H4-02
Set the output of the motor in units of
0.01kW. This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Terminal
FM Gain
Set the voltage level gain for multifunction analog output 1.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
be output as the 100% output for the
monitor items. Voltage output from the
terminals, however, have a 10 V max.
meter calibration function.*13
5-6
*8
0 to
60000
600
No
No
Q
No
Q
No
380H
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
41EH
Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels
Name
Constant
Number
H4-05
Control Methods
Description
Display
Gain (ter- Set the voltage level gain for multiminal AM) function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10 V to
be output as the 100% output for the
monitor items. Voltage output from the
Terminal
terminals, however, have a 10 V max.
AM Gain
A meter calibration function is avail-
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
0 to 3
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
-loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
421H
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
480H
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
492H
able.*13
L1-01
Motor pro- Set to enable or disable the motor
tection
overload protection function using the
selection
electronic thermal relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned off,
MOL Fault
the thermal value is reset, so even if
Select
this constant is set to 1, protection
may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to
one Inverter, set to 0 and ensure that
each motor is installed with a protection device.
Stall prevention
selection
during
deceleration
L3-04
StallP
Decel Sel
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set. If
deceleration time is too short, a
main circuit overvoltage may
result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is stopped
when the main circuit voltage
exceeds the overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when voltage
is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is automatically
adjusted so that the Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest possible
time. Set deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking Resistor
Unit)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, Braking Unit) is used, always set to 0 or 3.
0 to 3
*9
* 1. The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to 0,
the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
* 2. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.
* 3. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 4. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
* 5. E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
* 6. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
For the motor no-load current, set E2-03 to a value less than that of E2-01.
* 7. The setting range for open-loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66.0 (0 to 132.0 for PRG: 103).
* 8. The same capacity as that of the Inverter will be set if the constants are initialized.
* 9. The setting range for flux vector and open-loop vector 2 control is 0 to 2.
* 10.0 or 1 for flux vector control and open-loop vector 2 control.
* 11.The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.
* 12.Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi-function input.
* 13.The CH1 output can be adjusted when the H4-02 or H4-03 setting is displayed in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
The CH2 output can be adjusted when the H4-05 or H4-06 setting is displayed in quick, Advance, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
For analog output, the value equivalent to 100% of output value of monitored item is multiplied by the gain setting and the set bias is added.
5-7
User Constant Tables
A: Setup Settings
The following settings are made with the environment constants (A constants): Language displayed on the
Digital Operator, access level, control method, initialization of constants.
Initialize Mode: A1
User constants for the environment modes are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Language
selection for
Digital
Operator
display
A1-00
Select Language
Constant
access level
A1-01
Access
Level
Control
method
selection
A1-02
Control
Method
5-8
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Control Methods
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
100H
-
2
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
101H
4-17
6-156
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
102H
4-5
4-7
4-18
Description
Setting
Range
Used to select the language
displayed on the Digital
Operator (LCD).
0: English
1: Japanese
2: German
3: French
4: Italian
5: Spanish
6: Portuguese
This constant is not initialized
by the initialize operation.
0 to 6
1
Used to set the constant
access level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only
(Monitoring drive mode
and setting A1-01 and A104.)
1: Used to select user
constant
(Only constants set in A201 to A2-32 can be read
and set.)
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read
and set in both quick
programming mode and
advanced programming
(A) mode.)
0 to 2
Used to select the control
method for the Inverter
0: V/f control
1: V/f with PG feedback
2: Open-loop vector 1 control
3: Flux vector
4: Open-loop vector 2 control
This constant is not initialized
by the initialize operation.
0 to 4
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Initialize
A1-03
Init Parameters
Password
A1-04
Enter Password
Password
setting
A1-05
Select Password
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Control Methods
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
103H
6-11
6-150
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
104H
4-17
6-157
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
105H
4-17
6-157
Description
Setting
Range
Used to initialize the constants using the specified
method.
0:
No initializing
1110: Initializes using the
User constants
2220: Initializes using a
two-wire sequence.
(Initializes to the
factory setting.)
3330: Initializes using a
three-wire sequence.
0 to
3330
0
Password input when a password has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects
some constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed,
A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to
A2-32 constants can no
longer be changed. (Programming mode constants can be
changed.)
0 to
9999
Used to set a four digit number as the password.
This constant is not usually
displayed. When the Password (A1-04) is displayed,
hold down the RESET Key
and press the Menu Key and
the password will be displayed.
0 to
9999
User-set Constants: A2
The constants set by the user are listed in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Control Methods
Description
Factory
Setting
b1-01
to
o3-02
-
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
User setting
constants
A2-01
to
A2-32
Used to set the constant numbers that can be set/read.
Maximum 32.
Effective when the Constant
Access Level (A1-01) is set to
User Param 1 User Program (1). Constants
to 32
set in constants A2-01 to A232 can be set/read in programming mode.
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
A
106H
to
125H
6-157
5-9
b: Application Constants
The following settings are made with the application constants (B constants): Operation method selection, DC
injection braking, speed searching, timer functions, dwell functions, droop control, energy saving control, and
zero-servo control.
Operation Mode Selections: b1
User constants for operation mode selection are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
Reference
Source
Operation
method
selection
b1-02
Run Source
Stopping
method
selection
b1-03
Stopping
Method
b1-04
Prohibition
of reverse
operation
Reverse
Oper
5-10
Description
Set the frequency reference
input method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
Setting
Range
0 to 4
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
Q
V/f
with
PG
Q
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Q
Flux
Vector
Q
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Q
180H
4-5
6-2
6-76
6-94
Set the Run Command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
181H
4-5
6-10
6-76
6-94
Used to set the stopping
method used when a Stop
Command is input.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop
(Stops faster than coast to
stop, no regenerative
operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer
(Run Commands are
disregarded during
deceleration.)
0 to 3 *
0
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
182H
4-6
6-12
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
183H
6-62
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Operation
selection
for setting
E1-09 or
less
b1-05
Zero-Speed
Oper
Read
sequence
input twice
b1-06
Cntl Input
Scans
Operation
selection
after
switching to
remote
mode
b1-07
LOC/REM
RUN Sel
b1-08
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
A
No
184H
6-12
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
185H
-
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
186H
-
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
187H
-
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
No
No
A
1DEH
-
Description
Setting
Range
Used to set the method of
operation when the frequency reference input is less
than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
0: Run at frequency reference
(E1-09 not effective).
1: STOP (Frequencies below
E1-09 in the coast to stop
state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero-speed (Frequencies below E1-09 are
zero)
0 to 3
0
Used to set the responsiveness
of the control inputs (forward/
reverse and multi-function
inputs.)
0: One scan every 5 ms (Use
for fast responses.)
1: Two scans every 5 ms (Use
for possible malfunction
due to noise.)
0 or 1
Used to set the operation mode
by switching to the Remote
mode using the Local/Remote
Key.
0: Run signals that are input
during mode switching are
disregarded. (Input Run
signals after switching the
mode.)
1: Run signals become
effective immediately after
switching to the Remote
mode.
Run Com- Used to set an operation intermand selec- lock in programming modes.
tion in
0: Cannot operate.
program1: Can operate (Disabled
ming modes
when Digital Operator is
set to select Run Command
(when b1-02 = 0)).
RUN CMD 2: Cannot operate. (Cannot be
at PRG
in programming mode
Control Methods
during operation.)*2
b1-10
Mode selec- Enable for machines that
tion for
rotate the motor only in the
zero-speed same direction as the speed
reference. This setting
improves the control stability
ModeSel
of the motor at zero-speed.
@ZeroSpd
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
* 1. 0 or 1 for flux vector control and open-loop vector 2 control.
* 2. Applicable for G7 series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
5-11
DC Injection Braking: b2
User constants for injection braking are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
b2-01
Display
Zero-speed
level (DC
injection
braking starting frequency)
DCInj Start
Freq
b2-02
DC injection
braking current
DCInj Current
DC injection
braking time
at start
b2-03
DCInj
Time@Start
DC injection
braking time
at stop
b2-04
DCInj
Time@Stop
b2-08
5-12
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the frequency
which starts DC injection
braking in units of Hz when
deceleration to stop is
selected.
When b2-01 is less than E109, E1-09 becomes the DC
injection braking starting frequency.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
Sets the DC injection braking
current as a percentage of the
Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at
start in units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor
and restart it. When the set
value is 0, DC injection braking at start is not performed.
Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at
stop in units of 1 second.
Used to prevent coasting after
the Stop Command is input.
When the set value is 0.00,
DC injection braking at stop
is not performed.
Magnetic flux
Sets the magnetic flux comcompensapensation as a percentage of
tion volume
the no-load current.
Field Comp
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
189H
6-12
6-145
50%
No
A
A
A
No
No
18AH
6-12
6-16
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
18BH
6-13
6-16
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
18CH
6-13
0 to
1000
0%
No
No
No
A
No
No
190H
-
User Constant Tables
Speed Search: b3
User constants for the speed search are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Speed
search
selection
(current
detection or
speed calculation)
b3-01
SpdSrch at
Start
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
2*1
Sets the speed search operation
current as a percentage, taking
the Inverter rated current as
100%.
Not usually necessary to set.
When restarting is not possible
with the factory settings,
reduce the value.
0 to
200
Sets the output frequency
deceleration time during speed
search in 1-second units.
Set the time for deceleration
from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output
frequency.
Sets the magnetic contactor
operating delay time when
there is a magnetic contactor
on the output side of the
Inverter. When a speed search
is performed after recovering
from a momentary power loss,
the search operation is delayed
by the time set here.
Description
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
No
A
191H
6-65
100%*1
No
A
No
A
No
A
192H
6-65
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s
No
A
No
A
No
No
193H
6-65
0.0 to
20.0
0.2 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
195H
6-65
Enables/disables the speed
search function for the Run
Command and sets the speed
search method.
0: Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
acceleration/deceleration is
performed from the calculated
speed to the specified
frequency (motor direction is
also searched).
Current Detection:
The speed search is started
from the frequency when
power was momentarily lost
and the maximum frequency,
and the speed is detected at
the search current level.
b3-02
Speed
search operating current
(current
detection)
SpdSrch
Current
b3-03
Speed
search
deceleration time
(current
detection)
SpdSrch
Dec Time
b3-05
Speed
search wait
time (current detection or
speed calculation)
Search
Delay
5-13
Name
Constant
Number
b3-10
*2
*2
b3-19
*2
Operation restarts at a speed
obtained by multiplying the
speed from the speed search by
the compensation gain (excitation search only.)
Increase this setting if overvoltages occur when a speed
search is performed after a
long baseblock, for example, in
searches at startup.
1.00 to
1.20
1.10
Sets the proportional gain (PI
control) of the speed estimator
during speed search taking the
setting of N4-08 as equivalent
to a setting of 1.0.
Usually, there is no need to
change this setting. If, however, the load inertia is large
and overvoltages occur during
the search, reduce this setting.
Increase this setting for greater
speed coincidence response.
0.1 to
2.0
0: Disabled (operates with
specified rotation direction)
1: Enabled (operates with
rotation direction found by
search)
No
A
No
A
No
A
19AH
6-65
1.0%
No
No
No
No
No
A
19DH
6-66
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
No
A
19EH
6-66
0 to
200
150%
No
A
No
A
No
A
1F0H
6-66
Speed
search
retrial detec- Sets the time for detection in a
speed search retrial in units of
tion time
seconds.
SrchRestart
Time
0.00 to
1.00
0.10 s
No
A
No
A
No
A
1F1H
6-66
Number of
speed search
Sets the number of times that a
retrials
speed search can be retried.
Num of
SrchRestr
0 to 10
0
No
A
No
A
No
A
1F2H
6-66
Speed
search
detection
compensation gain
(speed calculation)
Proportional gain
of the speed
estimator
during
speed search
Rotation
direction
search
selection
Speed
search
retrial current level
Sets the current level to retry a
speed search as a percentage,
taking the Inverter rated current as 100%.
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
5-14
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
Display
SrchRestart
Lv1
b3-18
Factory
Setting
Flux
Vector
Bidir Search
Sel
b3-17
Setting
Range
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Srch Est P
Gain
b3-14
Description
V/f
with
PG
Srch Detect
Comp
b3-13
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
User Constant Tables
Timer Function: b4
User constants for timer functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Timer function ONdelay time
b4-01
Delay-ON
Timer
Timer function OFFdelay time
b4-02
Delay-OFF
Timer
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the timer function output ON-delay time (dead
band) for the timer function
input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
Sets the timer function output OFF-delay time (dead
band) for the timer function
input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is set in H1- or H2.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
Description
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A3H 6-105
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A4H 6-105
PID Control: b5
User constants for PID control are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
PID control
method
selection
b5-01
PID Mode
b5-02
Proportional
gain (P)
PID Gain
b5-03
Integral (I)
time
PID I Time
b5-04
Integral (I)
limit
PID I Limit
b5-05
Derivative
(D) time
PID D Time
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value
is D-controlled.)
3: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(frequency reference +
PID output, D control of
feedback value).
0 to 4
0
Sets P-control proportional
gain as a percentage.
P-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
Sets I-control integral time in
1-second units.
I-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.0.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A5H 6-107
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A6H 6-107
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A7H 6-107
Sets the I-control limit as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A8H 6-107
Sets D-control derivative time
in 1-second units.
D-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.00.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A9H 6-107
5-15
Name
Constant
Number
b5-06
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the upper limit after PIDcontrol as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
100.0
100.0%
Sets the offset after PID-control as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
-100.0
to
+100.0
PID first
order lag time Sets the time constant for low
pass filter for PID-control
constant
outputs in 1-second units.
PID Delay
Not usually necessary to set.
Time
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1AAH 6-107
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1ABH 6-107
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1ACH 6-107
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1ADH 6-107
Output Level
Sel
Select forward/reverse for
PID output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
(highlights the output
code)
PID output
gain
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1AEH 6-107
0: 0 limit when PID output is
negative.
1: Reverses when PID output
is negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit
is selected using b1-04.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1AFH 6-107
0: No detection of loss of
PID feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Operation continues
during detection, with the
malfunctioning contact
not operating.
2: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault
contact operates.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B0H 6-108
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level as a percent
units, with the maximum output frequency at 100%.
0 to
100
0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B1H 6-108
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B2H 6-108
Display
PID upper
limit
PID offset
adjustment
PID Offset
b5-08
b5-09
b5-10
PID output
characteristics selection
Output Gain
b5-11
PID reverse
output selection
Output Rev
Sel
Selection of
PID feedback command loss
detection
b5-12
Fb los Det Sel
b5-13
PID feedback command loss
detection
level
Fb los Det
Lvl
b5-14
PID feedback command loss
detection
time
Fb los Det
Time
5-16
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
PID Limit
b5-07
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Sets the PID feedback loss
detection level in s units.
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
b5-15
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the PID sleep function
start level as a frequency.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
Set the delay time until the
PID sleep function starts in
seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
Set the accel/decel time for
PID reference in seconds.
0.0 to
25.5
Description
Display
PID sleep
function
operation
level
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B3H
6-108
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B4H
6-108
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B5H
6-108
PID Sleep
Level
b5-16
PID sleep
operation
delay time
PID Sleep
Time
b5-17
Accel/decel
time for PID
reference
PID SFS
Time
Dwell Functions: b6
User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
b6-01
Name
Display
Control Methods
Description
Dwell frequency at
start
Dwell Ref
@Start
Dwell time
at start
b6-02
b6-03
Dwell
Time
@Start
Dwell frequency at
stop
Dwell Ref
@Stop
Dwell time
at stop
b6-04
Dwell
Time
@Stop
Run command
ON
OFF
Output frequency
b6-01 b6-03
b6-02
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
0.0 to
10.0
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B6H
4-21
6-22
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B7H
4-21
6-22
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B8H
4-21
6-22
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B9H
4-21
6-22
Time
b6-04
The dwell function is used to output
frequency temporarily when driving
a motor with a heavy load.
5-17
Droop Control: b7
User constants for droop functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
b7-01
b7-02
5-18
Display
Control Methods
Description
Droop control Sets the slip as a percentage
gain
of maximum frequency when
the maximum output frequency is specified and the
rated torque occurs.
Droop Quan- Droop-control is not pertity
formed when the setting is
0.0.
Droop control Droop control responsivedelay time
ness constant
Droop Delay When hunting or oscillation
occurs, increase the value.
Time
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
100.0
0.0
0.03 to
2.00
0.05 s
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
No
No
No
A
A
1CAH
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A4H
4-21
6-144
4-21
6-144
User Constant Tables
Energy Saving: b8
User constants for energy-saving control functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
b8-01
Display
Energy-saving mode
selection
Energy Save
Sel
b8-02
b8-03
Energy-saving gain
Energy Save
Gain
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Select whether to enable or
disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
Set the energy-saving gain
with the open-loop vector
control method.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
Description
Energy-saving filter time Set the energy-saving filter
constant
time constant with the openEnergy Save loop vector control method.
*1
*2
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
1CCH 6-115
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
1CDH 6-115
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
1CEH 6-115
No
A
A
No
No
No
1CFH 6-115
F.T
Energy-saving coefficient
b8-04
Energy Save
COEF
b8-05
Power detection filter
time constant
kW Filter
Time
b8-06
Set the maximum motor efficiency value.
Set the motor rated capacity
in E2-11, and adjust the value
by 5% at a time until output
power reaches a minimum
value.
Set the time constant for output power detection.
Search opera- Set the limit value of the volttion voltage
age control range during
limiter
search operation.
Perform search operation to
optimize operations using
minute variations in voltage
Search V
using energy-saving control.
Limit
Set to 0 to disable the search
operation. 100% is the motor
base voltage.
0.0 to
288.20
655.00
*3 *4
0 to
2000
20 ms
No
A
A
No
No
No
1D0H 6-115
0 to
100
0%
No
A
A
No
No
No
1D1H 6-115
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using flux vector control.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory setting is given.
* 3. By setting E2-11 (Motor rated output) the appropriate value will be set.
* 4. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
5-19
Zero-servo: b9
User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Zero-servo
gain
b9-01
Zero Servo
Gain
Zero-servo
completion
width
b9-02
Zero Servo
Count
5-20
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Adjust the strength of the
zero-servo lock.
Enabled when the “zero-servo
command” is set for the
multi-function input. When
the zero-servo command has
been input and the frequency
reference drop below excitation level (b2-01), a position
control loop is created and the
motor stops. Increasing the
zero-servo gain in turn
increases the strength of the
lock. Increasing it by too
much will cause oscillation.
0 to
100
5
Sets the output width of the
P-lock completion signal.
Enabled when the “zero-servo
completion (end)” is set for a
multi-function input. The
zero-servo completion signal
is ON when the current position is within the range (the
zero-servo position + zeroservo completion width.)
Set the allowable position displacement from the zeroservo position to 4 times the
pulse rate of the PG (pulse
generator, encoder) in use.
0 to
16383
10
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
A
No
1DAH 6-145
No
No
No
No
A
No
1DBH 6-145
Page
User Constant Tables
C: Autotuning Constants
The following settings are made with the autotuning constants (C constants): Acceleration/deceleration times,
s-curve characteristics, slip compensation, torque compensation, speed control, and carrier frequency functions.
Acceleration/Deceleration: C1
User constants for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
Display
Acceleration time 1
Accel Time
1
Deceleration time 1
Decel Time
1
Acceleration time 2
Accel Time
2
Deceleration time 2
Decel Time
2
Acceleration time 3
Accel Time
3
Deceleration time 3
Decel Time
3
Acceleration time 4
C1-07
Accel Time
4
Deceleration time 4
C1-08
Decel Time
4
Emergency
stop time
C1-09
Fast Stop
Time
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Sets the acceleration time to
accelerate from 0 to the maximum output frequency, in 1second units.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
200H
4-5
4-21
6-18
Sets the deceleration time to
decelerate from the maximum
output frequency to 0, in 1second units.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
201H
4-5
4-21
6-18
The acceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” is set to
ON.
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
202H
4-21
6-18
The deceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” is set to
ON.
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
203H
4-21
6-18
No
A
A
A
A
A
204H
4-21
6-18
The deceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 2” is set to
ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
205H
4-21
6-18
The acceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” and
“accel/decel time 2” are set to
ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
206H
4-21
6-18
The deceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 1” and
“accel/decel time 2” are set to
ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
207H
4-21
6-18
The deceleration time when
the multi-function input
“Emergency (fast) stop” is set
to ON.
This function can be used as a
stopping method when a fault
has been detected.
No
A
A
A
A
A
208H
4-21
6-17
The acceleration time when
the multi-function input
“accel/decel time 2” is set to
ON.
0.0 to
6000.0
10.0 s
*
5-21
Name
Constant
Number
C1-10
Control Methods
Description
Display
Accel/decel
time setting
unit
Acc/Dec
Units
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
1
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
209H
4-21
6-18
No
A
A
A
A
A
20AH
4-21
6-19
Accel/decel
time switching frequency
C1-11
Sets the frequency for automatic acceleration/deceleration switching.
Below set frequency: Accel/
decel time 4
Above set frequency: Accel/
decel time 1
Acc/Dec SW The multi-function input
Freq
“accel/decel time 1” or
“accel/decel time 2” take priority.
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to 0,
the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C2
User constants for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
C2-01
Name
Control Methods
Description
Display
S-curve
characteristic time at
acceleration start
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
0.00 to
2.50
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
20BH
4-21
6-19
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20CH
4-21
6-19
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20DH
4-21
6-19
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20EH
4-21
6-19
SCrv Acc
@ Start
C2-02
C2-03
S-curve
characterisAll sections of the S-curve characteristic time at
tic time are set in seconds units.
acceleraWhen the S-curve characteristic time is
tion end
set, the accel/decel times will increase
by only half of the S-curve characterisSCrv Acc
tic times at start and end.
@ End
S-curve
characteristic time at
deceleration start
Run Command
Output
frequency
OFF
ON
C2-02
C2-01
C2-03
C2-04
Time
SCrv Dec
@ Start
C2-04
S-curve
characteristic time at
deceleration end
SCrv Dec
@ End
5-22
User Constant Tables
Motor Slip Compensation: C3
User constants for slip compensation are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Slip compensation gain
C3-01
Slip Comp
Gain
Slip compensation primary delay
time
C3-02
Slip Comp
Time
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
Slip Comp
Limit
Slip compensation selection during
regeneration
C3-04
Slip Comp
Regen
C3-05
Output voltage limit
operation
selection
Output V
limit
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a
load.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
• When actual speed is low,
increase the set value.
• When actual speed is high,
decrease the set value.
Used as the applicable control
gain when using flux vector
control.
0.0 to
2.5
1.0*
Slip compensation primary
delay time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
• Reduce the setting when
slip compensation responsive is slow.
• When speed is not stabilized, increase the setting.
0 to
10000
Sets the slip compensation
limit as a percentage of motor
rated slip.
0 to
250
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation
during regeneration function
has been activated, as regeneration capacity increases
momentarily, it may be necessary to use a braking option
(braking resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit or Braking
Unit.)
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux
will be lowered automatically when the output
voltage become saturated.)
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
No
A
A
No
20FH
4-18
6-36
No
A
No
A
No
No
210H
4-18
6-36
200%
No
A
No
A
No
No
211H
6-36
0 or 1
0
No
A
No
A
No
No
212H
6-36
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
A
A
No
213H
6-36
200 ms
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
5-23
Torque Compensation: C4
User constants for torque compensation are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
C4-01
Display
C4-02
Torq Comp
Time
C4-04
C4-05
Description
Setting
Range
Torque com- Sets torque compensation
pensation
gain as a ratio.
gain
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long;
increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter
capacity (Max. applicable
motor capacity), increase
the set values.
0.00 to
• When the motor is oscillat2.50
Torq Comp
ing, decrease the set valGain
ues.
Adjust the output current
range at minimum speed rotation so that it does not exceed
the Inverter rated output current.
Do not alter the torque compensation gain from its
default (1.00) when using the
open-loop vector 1 control
method.
Torque compensation
primary
delay time
constant
C4-03
Control Methods
Forward
starting
torque
F
TorqCmp@
start
Reverse
starting
torque
R
TorqCmp@
start
Starting
torque time
constant
TorqCmp
DelayT
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1.00
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
A
A
No
No
215H
4-18
6-39
No
A
A
A
No
No
216H
4-18
6-39
The torque compensation
delay time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the motor is oscillating, increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness
of the motor is low,
decrease the set values.
0 to
10000
Sets the forward starting
torque as a percentage of the
motor rated torque.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0%
No
No
No
A
No
No
217H
-
Sets the reverse starting
torque as a percentage of the
motor rated torque.
-200.0
to 0.0
0.0%
No
No
No
A
No
No
218H
-
Sets the delay time in ms for
starting torque. The filter is
disabled if the time is set to 0
to 4 ms.
0 to
200
10 ms
No
No
No
A
No
No
219H
-
20 ms
*
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
5-24
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
User Constant Tables
Speed Control (ASR): C5
User constants for speed control are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
C5-01
Name
V/f
Flux
Vector
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21BH
4-19
6-136
0.000 0.500
to
s
*1
10.000
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21CH
4-19
6-136
0.00 to
Usually setting is not necessary.
300.00 20.00
*1
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
*2
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21DH
4-19
6-137
0.000 0.500
to
s
*1
10.000
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21EH
4-19
6-137
Sets the upper limit for the compensation frequency for the speed control
loop (ASR) to a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
20.0
5.0%
No
No
A
No
No
No
21FH 6-137
Sets the filter time constant for outputting torque references from the speed
control loop (ASR). It is set in 1-second units.
With open-loop vector 2 control, this
ASR Delay setting is enabled only for speeds in
Time
the range 0 to 35 Hz.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0.000
to
0.500
0.004
s
No
No
No
No
A
A
220H
4-19
6-137
Set the frequency for switching
between Proportion Gain 1, 2 and Integral Time 1, 2 in Hz units.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0
Hz
No
No
No
No
A
A
221H
4-19
6-137
Set to a small value to prevent any radical load change. Set to 100% of the
maximum output frequency.
0 to
400
400%
No
No
No
No
A
A
222H 6-137
0.000
to
0.500
0.010
s
No
No
No
No
No
A
4-20
231H 6-137
6-141
Description
Display
ASR proportional
(P) gain 1
ASR integral (I)
time 1
ASR proportional
(P) gain 2
ASR P
Gain 2
C5-04
ASR integral (I)
time 2
Sets the proportional gain of the speed
loop (ASR.)
Sets the integral time of the speed loop
(ASR) in 1-second units.
ASR limit
ASR Limit
C5-07
ASR
switching
frequency
ASR Gain
SW Freq
C5-08
ASR integral (I)
limit
ASR I
Limit
ASR primary delay
time 2
C5-10
0.00 to
20.00
300.00
*2
*1
Page
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
0
E1-04
Motor speed (Hz)
ASR primary delay
time
C5-06
Setting
Range
P, I
ASR I
Time 2
C5-05
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
Open
Loop
Vector
1
ASR I
Time 1
C5-03
Change
during
Operation
V/f
with
PG
ASR P
Gain 1
C5-02
Control Methods
Factory
Setting
Sets the filter time constant for outputting torque references from the speed
control loop (ASR). It is set in 1-second units.
With open-loop vector 2 control, this
ASR Delay setting is enabled only for speeds
Time2
greater than 35 Hz.
Usually setting is not necessary.
*1
* 1. When the control method is changed, the factory settings will change. The flux vector factory settings are given. Refer to Factory Settings that Change
with the Control Method (A1-02).
* 2. The setting range for flux vector and open-loop vector 2 controls is 1.00 to 300.00.
5-25
Carrier Frequency: C6
User constants for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
C6-02
Name
Display
Description
Carrier frequency
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
selection
Select F to enable detailed settings
using constants C6-03 to C6-07.
Carrier
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
1 to F
6
*2
*1
2.0 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*2 *5
*1
0.4 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*2 *5
*1
00 to
99
00
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
A
A
A
A
No
A
A
No
No
A
A
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMOBUS
Page
Register
224H
4-6
4-18
6-42
No
225H
6-42
No
No
226H
6-42
No
No
No
227H
6-42
No No
No
No
*4
*4
*4
Q
4-6
22DH 4-20
6-42
No
*4
Freq Sel
C6-03
*3
C6-04
*3
Carrier
Set the carrier frequency upper limit and
frequency lower limit in kHz units.
upper limit The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
Carrier
With the vector control method, the
Freq Max
upper limit of the carrier frequency is
fixed in C6-03.
Carrier
frequency
lower limit
Carrier
Freq Min
Carrier frequency
proportional gain
*3
Carrier
Freq Gain
Carrier frequency
selection
for openloop vector 2 control
Carrier
Freq Sel
*
*
*
*
*
5-26
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output
frequency
(Max. output frequency)
C6-05
C6-11
Carrier frequency
K is a coefficient that depends on the
setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
10.0 kHz &gt; C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz &gt; C6-03: K = 1
Select the carrier frequency when openloop vector 2 control is used.
1: 2 kHz
2: 4 kHz
3: 6 kHz
4: 8 kHz
1 to 4
4
*1
No
*4
The factory settings depend on the capacity of the Inverter. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.
The setting ranges depend on the capacity of the Inverter. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.
This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.
Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi-function input.
The maximum output frequency depends on the setting for the carrier frequency (refer to page 6-43).
User Constant Tables
d: Reference Constants
The following settings are made with the reference constants (d constants): Frequency references.
Preset Reference: d1
User constants for frequency references are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
d1-01
Display
Frequency
reference 1
Reference 1
d1-02
Frequency
reference 2
Reference 2
d1-03
Frequency
reference 3
Reference 3
d1-04
Frequency
reference 4
Reference 4
d1-05
Frequency
reference 5
Reference 5
d1-06
Frequency
reference 6
Reference 6
d1-07
Frequency
reference 7
Reference 7
d1-08
Frequency
reference 8
Reference 8
d1-09
Frequency
reference 9
Reference 9
d1-10
Frequency
reference 10
Reference 10
d1-11
Frequency
reference 11
Reference 11
Control Methods
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the frequency reference
in the units used in o1-03.
0.00 Hz
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference 1 is ON for a multi-function input.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
280H
4-6
6-5
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
281H
4-6
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference 2 is ON for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
282H
4-6
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1 and 2 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
283H
4-6
6-5
The frequency when multistep speed reference 3 is ON
for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
284H
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1 and 3 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0 to
0.00 Hz
400.00
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
285H
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 2 and 3 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
286H
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1, 2, and 3 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
287H
6-5
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference 4 is ON for a multi-function input.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
288H
-
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1 and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28BH
-
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 2 and 4 are ON for a
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28CH
-
Description
Setting
Range
*
5-27
Name
Constant
Number
d1-12
Frequency
reference 12
Frequency
reference 13
Reference 13
d1-14
Frequency
reference 14
Reference 14
d1-15
Frequency
reference 15
Reference 15
d1-16
Frequency
reference 16
Reference 16
d1-17
Factory
Setting
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1, 2, and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
0.00 Hz
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 3 and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1, 3, and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
Description
Display
Reference 12
d1-13
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 2, 3, and 4 are ON for
multi-function inputs.
Setting
Range
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28DH
-
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28EH
-
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
28FH
-
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
290H
-
0.00 Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
291H
-
6.00 Hz
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
292H
4-6
6-5
6-84
0 to
400.00
*
The frequency reference
when multi-step speed references 1, 2, 3, and 4 are ON
for multi-function inputs.
Jog frequency The frequency reference
reference
when the jog frequency reference selection, FJOG comJog
mand, or RJOG command is
Reference
ON.
Note The unit is set in o1-03 (Frequency units of reference setting and monitor). The default for o1-03 is 0 (increments of 0.01 Hz).
* The setting range for open-loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66.0 (0 to 132.0 for PRG: 103)
Reference Limits: d2
User constants for frequency reference limits are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
d2-01
Display
Frequency
reference
upper limit
Ref Upper
Limit
d2-02
Frequency
reference
lower limit
Ref Lower
Limit
d2-03
Master speed
reference
lower limit
Ref1 Lower
Limit
5-28
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the output frequency
upper limit as a percent, taking the max. output frequency
to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0%
Sets the output frequency
lower limit as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percent,
taking the max. output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
289H
6-34
6-79
0.0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
28AH
6-34
6-79
0.0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
293H
6-34
6-79
User Constant Tables
Jump Frequencies: d3
User constants for jump frequencies are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
d3-01
Display
Jump frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
d3-04
Control Methods
Description
Set the center values of the
jump frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by
setting the jump frequency to
0 Hz. Always ensure that the
following applies:
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited
but during acceleration and
deceleration, speed changes
smoothly without jump.
Jump freSets the jump frequency
quency width bandwidth in Hz.
The jump frequency will be
Jump Bandthe jump frequency &plusmn; d3-04.
width
Setting
Range
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 to
20.0
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 Hz
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
294H
4-21
6-31
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
295H
4-21
6-31
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
296H
4-21
6-31
1.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
297H
4-21
6-31
Reference Frequency Hold: d4
User constants for the reference frequency hold function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Frequency
reference
hold function
selection
d4-01
MOP Ref
Memory
+ - Speed
limits
d4-02
Trim Control
Lvl
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets whether or not frequencies on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation
is stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at
0.)
1: Enabled (when operation
is stopped or the power is
turned on again starts at
the previous hold
frequency.)
This function is available
when the multi-function
inputs “accel/decel Ramp
Hold” or “up/down” commands are set.
0 or 1
0
Set the frequency to be added
to or subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a
percent, taking the maximum
output frequency to be 100%.
Enabled when the increase
(+) speed command or
decrease (-) speed command
is set for a multi-function
input.
0 to
100
10%
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
298H
6-78
No
A
A
A
A
A
299H
6-82
5-29
Torque Control: d5
User constants for the torque control are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Torque control selection
d5-01
Torq Control
Sel
Torque
reference
delay time
d5-02
Torq Ref
Filter
Speed limit
selection
d5-03
Speed Limit
Sel
Speed limit
d5-04
Speed Lmt
Value
Speed limit
bias
d5-05
5-30
Speed Lmt
Bias
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Speed control (C5-01 to
C5-07)
1: Torque control
This function is only available in flux vector control
method. To use the function
for switching between speed
and torque control, set to 0
and set the multi-function
input to “speed/torque control
change.”
0 or 1
0
Set the torque reference delay
time in ms units.
This function can be used to
adjust the noise of the torque
control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation
occurs during torque control,
increase the set value.
0 to
1000
Set the speed limit command
method for the torque control
method.
1: The analog input limit
from a frequency reference
2: Limited by d5-04 constant
setting values.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
A
A
29AH 6-127
0*
No
No
No
No
A
A
29BH 6-127
1 or 2
1
No
No
No
No
A
A
29CH 6-127
Set the speed limit during
torque control as a percentage
of the maximum output frequency.
This function is enabled when
d5-03 is set to 2. Directions
are as follows.
+: Run Command direction
-: Run Command opposite
direction
-120 to
+120
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
29DH 6-127
Set the speed limit bias as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Bias is given to the specified
speed limit. It can be used to
adjust the margin for the
speed limit.
0 to
120
10
No
No
No
No
A
A
29EH
6-127
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the delay time from inputting the multi-function input
“speed/torque control
change” (from On to OFF or
OFF to ON) until the control
is actually changed, in ms
units.
This function is enabled when
the multi-function input
“speed/torque control
change” is set. In the speed/
torque control switching
timer, the analog inputs hold
the values of when the
“speed/torque control
change” changes. Always be
sure to allow time for this
process to finish completely.
0 to
1000
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Usually, use a setting of 1
(enabled).
Be sure to enable this setting
when rotating the motor in
the same direction as the
speed limit (winding operation).
0 or 1
1
Display
Speed/torque
control
switching
timer
d5-06
Ref Hold
Time
d5-07
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Rotation
direction
limit
operation
selection
Drctn
SpdLmt Sel
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
A
A
29FH
No
No
No
No
No
A
2A6H 6-128
6-128
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The flux vector factory setting is given.
Field Weakening: d6
User constants for the field weakening command are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Field weakening level
d6-01
Field-Weak
Lvl
Field
frequency
d6-02
Field-Weak
Freq
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the Inverter output voltage when the field weakening
command is input.
It is enabled when the field
weakening command is set
for a multi-function input.
Set the level as a percentage
taking the voltage set in the
V/f pattern as 100%.
0 to
100
80%
Set the lower limit in hertz of
the frequency range where
field control is valid.
The field weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting and
only when the speed is in
agreement with the current
speed reference.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
2A0H
-
No
A
A
No
No
No
2A1H
-
5-31
Name
Constant
Number
Display
d6-03
Field forcing
function
selection
Field Force
Sel
AφR time
constant
d6-05
A PHI R
Filter
Field forcing
limit
d6-06
5-32
FieldForce
Limit
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the field forcing function.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1
0
No
Set the factor to multiple
times the secondary circuit
time constant of the motor to
achieve the AφR time
constant.
AφR time constant =
Secondary circuit time
constant x d6-05
AφR will not function when
d6-05 is 0. If d6-05 is not 0,
the lower limit of the value
will be internally adjusted to
200 ms in the Inverter.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
No
No
No
Set the excitation current reference’s upper limit for field
forcing. Set the limit as a percentage, taking the motor’s
no-load current as 100%.
Enabled for operation other
than DC excitation.
Usually, there is no need to
change this setting.
100 to
400
400%
No
No
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
No
No
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
No
A
A
2A2H
-
No
No
A
2A4H
-
A
A
A
2A5H
-
A
User Constant Tables
E: Motor Constant Constants
The following settings are made with the motor constant constants (E constants): V/f characteristics and motor
constants.
V/f Pattern: E1
User constants for V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
E1-01
Name
E1-04
Description
Display
Input voltage setting
Input Voltage
V/f pattern
selection
E1-03
Control Methods
V/F Selection
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1
volt.
This setting is used as a reference
value in protection functions.
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for settings E1-04
to E1-10.)
Max.
output
frequency
Max
Frequency
E1-05
E1-06
Max.
voltage
Max
Voltage
Base
frequency
Base
Frequency
Mid. output
frequency
E1-07
E1-08
E1-09
E1-10
Mid
Frequency
A
Min. output
frequency
voltage
Min
Voltage
Factory
Setting
155 to
255
200 V
*1
*1
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
300H
4-5
6-120
Page
0 to F
F
No
Q
Q
No
No
No
302H
6-120
40.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
303H
6-120
*5
*2
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
304H
6-120
*1
*1*2
0.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
305H
6-120
*5
*2
0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
No
No
306H
6-120
No
A
A
A
No
No
307H
4-18
6-120
No
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
308H
6-120
No
A
A
A
No
No
309H
4-18
6-120
Output voltage (V)
VMAX
(E1-05)
(V BASE)
(E1-13)
VC
(E1-08)
VMIN
(E1-10)
FMIN
(E1-09)
FB
(E1-07)
FA
FMAX
(E1-06) (E1-04)
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values for
E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the
Mid. output setting for E1-08 will be disrefrequency
garded.
voltage
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following
Mid
manner:
Voltage A
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) &gt; E1Min. output 07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
frequency
Min
Frequency
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
400.0
*5
0.0 to
255.0
*1
*2
11.0 V
*1 *2
0.5 Hz
*2
2.0 V
*1 *2
5-33
Constant
Number
Name
Display
Control Methods
Description
Mid. output
frequency 2
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
*
*
*
*
*
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Mid
Frequency
B
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
*3
*5
Mid. output
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the
frequency
output range. Normally, this setting
voltage 2
is not required.
Mid
Voltage B
Base
voltage
0.0 to
255.0
0.0 to
255.0
Base
Voltage
0.0 V
*3
*1
0.0 V
*4
*1
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
30AH 6-121
No
A
A
A
A
A
30BH 6-121
No
A
A
Q
Q
Q
30CH 6-121
Page
These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
The setting range for open-loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66.0 (0 to 132.0 for PRG: 103).
Motor Setup: E2
User constants for motor 1 are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor rated
current
E2-01
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor rated
slip
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
Motor Rated
Slip
Motor noload current
No-Load
Current
Number of
motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor lineto-line resistance
Term Resistance
5-34
Control Methods
Description
Sets the motor rated current in
1 A units.
These set values will become
the reference values for motor
protection, torque limits and
torque control.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Sets the motor rated slip in
Hz units.
These set values will become
the reference values for slip
compensation.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Sets the motor no-load current in 1 A units.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32 to
6.40
1.90 A
*2
*1
0.00 to 2.90 Hz
*1
20.00
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*1
Change
during
Operation
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Q
Q
Q
Q
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
Q
30EH
4-5
6-57
6-117
No
A
A
A
A
A
30FH
6-115
6-117
No
A
A
A
A
A
310H
6-117
Sets the number of motor
poles.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
2 to 48
4 poles
No
No
Q
No
Q
Q
311H
6-117
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842
Ω
No
A
A
A
A
A
312H
6-117
*1
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor leak
inductance
E2-06
E2-07
Leak Inductance
Motor iron
saturation
coefficient 1
Saturation
Comp1
E2-08
Motor iron
saturation
coefficient 2
Saturation
Comp2
Motor
mechanical
loss
E2-09
Mechanical
Loss
E2-10
Motor iron
loss for
torque compensation
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
A
A
A
313H
6-117
0.50
No
No
No
A
A
A
314H
6-117
0.75
No
No
No
A
A
A
315H
6-117
A
A
316H
-
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as a
percentage of the motor rated
voltage.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.00 to
0.50
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.00 to
0.75
*1
Sets motor mechanical loss as
a percentage of motor rated
output (W).
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When torque loss is large
due to motor bearing.
• When the torque loss in the
pump or fan is large.
The set mechanical loss will
compensate for torque.
0.0 to
10.0
Sets motor iron loss in W
units.
0 to
65535
14 W
Set the rated output of the
motor in units of 0.01 kW.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 130% of magnetic flux.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
1.30 to
1.60
No
0.0
No
No
No
A
*1
No
A
A
No
No
No
317H
6-118
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
318H
6-115
No
No
No
A
A
A
328H
6-118
Tcomp Iron
Loss
E2-11
E2-12
Motor rated
output
Mtr Rated
Power
Motor iron
saturation
coefficient 3
Saturation
Comp3
*4
1.30
* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
For the motor no-load current, set E2-03 to a value less than that of E2-01.
* 3. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given. The upper limit depends on the setting of
E2-01.
* 4. The same capacity as that of the Inverter will be set if the constants are initialized.
5-35
Motor 2 V/f Pattern: E3
User constants for motor 2 V/f characteristics are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
E3-01
Name
Display
Motor 2
control
method
selection
Control
Method
5-36
Control Methods
Description
0: V/f control
1: V/f control with PG
2: Open-loop vector control
3: Flux vector control
4: Open-loop vector 2 control
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 4
2
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
319H
-
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
E3-02
Name
Control Methods
Description
Display
Motor 2
max. output frequency
(FMAX)
Setting
Range
40.0 to
400.0
*3
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
60.0
Hz
MEMOBUS
Page
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
31AH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
31BH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
31CH
-
No
A
A
A
No
No
31DH
-
No
A
A
A
No
No
31EH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
31FH
-
No
A
A
A
No
No
320H
-
Max Frequency
E3-03
Motor 2
max. voltage
(VMAX)
Max Voltage
E3-04
Motor 2
max. voltage frequency
(FA)
Base Frequency
E3-05
Motor 2
mid. output frequency 1
(FB)
Mid Frequency
E3-06
Motor 2
mid. output frequency
voltage 1
(VC)
Mid Voltage
E3-07
Motor 2
min. output frequency
(FMIN)
Output voltage (V)
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
*1
*2
0.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz
VMAX
E3-03
VC
E3-06
VMIN
E3-08
FMIN
E3-07
FB
E3-05
FMAX
FA
E3-04 E3-02
*2
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values for
E3-05 and E3-07.
In this case, the setting for E3-06
will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner:
E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) &gt; E305 (FB) &gt; E3-07 (FMIN)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
400.0
11.0 V
*1
0.5 Hz
*2
Min Frequency
E3-08
Motor 2
min. output frequency
voltage
(VMIN)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
2.0 V
*1
Min Voltage
* 1. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 2. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
* 3. The setting range for open-loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66.0 (0 to 132.0 for PRG: 103).
5-37
Motor 2 Setup: E4
User constants for motor 2 are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
E4-01
E4-02
E4-03
E4-04
Display
Control Methods
Description
Motor 2 rated Sets the motor rated current in
current
1 A units.
These set values will become
the reference values for motor
Motor Rated protection, torque limits and
torque control.
FLA
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Motor 2 rated Sets the motor rated slip in
slip
Hz units.
These set values will become
the reference values for slip
Motor Rated compensation.
Slip
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Motor 2 noload current
No-Load
Current
Sets the motor no-load current in 1 A units.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Motor 2 number of poles
Sets the number of motor
(number of
poles.
poles)
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
Number of
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.32
to 6.40
1.90 A
*2
*1
0.00 to 2.90 Hz
*1
20.00
0.00 to
1.89
*3
1.20 A
*1
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
321H
6-57
No
A
A
A
A
A
322H
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
323H
-
2 to 48
4 poles
No
No
A
No
A
A
324H
-
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842
Ω
No
A
A
A
A
A
325H
-
Sets the voltage drop due to
motor leakage inductance as a
percentage of the motor rated
voltage.
This constant is automatically
set during autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
No
No
No
A
A
A
326H
-
Motor 2 rated Set the rated output of the
capacity
motor in units of 0.01 kW.
This constant is automatically
Mtr Rated
set during autotuning.
Power
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
No
A
A
A
A
A
327H
-
Poles
E4-05
Motor 2 lineto-line resistance
Term Resistance
Motor 2 leak
inductance
E4-06
E4-07
Leak Inductance
*1
*1
*4
* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
* 3. If a multi-function input is set for motor 2 (H1- = 16), the setting range will depend upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter
of 0.4 kW is given. The upper limit depends on the setting of E4-01.
* 4. The same capacity as that of the Inverter will be set if the constants are initialized.
5-38
User Constant Tables
F: Option Constants
The following settings are made with the option constants (F constants): Settings for option boards
PG Option Setup: F1
User constants for the PG Speed Control Board are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
PG constant
F1-01
PG Pulses/
Rev
Operation
selection at
PG open circuit (PGO)
F1-02
PG Fdbk
Loss Sel
Operation
selection at
overspeed
(OS)
F1-03
PG Overspeed Sel
Operation
selection at
deviation
F1-04
PG Deviation Sel
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the number of PG (pulse
generator or encoder) pulses.
Sets the number of pulses per
motor revolution.
0 to
60000
600
Sets the PG disconnection
stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
0 to 3
Sets the stopping method
when an overspeed (OS) fault
occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To
protect the motor or
machinery, do not
normally make this
setting.)
Sets the stopping method
when a speed deviation
(DEV) fault occurs.
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
time in C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV
is displayed and operation
continued.)
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
Q
No
Q
No
380H
6-158
1
No
No
A
No
A
No
381H
6-158
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
A
A
382H
6-158
0 to 3
3
No
No
A
No
A
A
383H
6-158
5-39
Name
Constant
Number
PG Rotation
Sel
PG division
rate (PG
pulse monitor)
F1-06
F1-08
Overspeed
detection
level
Overspeed
detection
delay time
PG Overspd
Time
F1-10
Excessive
speed deviation detection level
PG Deviate
Level
F1-11
Excessive
speed deviation detection delay
time
PG Deviate
Time
5-40
Factory
Setting
0: Phase A leads with
Forward Run Command.
(Phase B leads with
Reverse Run Command.)
1: Phase B leads with
Forward Run Command.
(Phase A leads with
Reverse Run Command.)
0 or 1
0
1 to
132
Sets the division ratio for the
PG speed control board pulse
output.
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m
(n=0 or 1 m=1 to 32)
n
m
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
A
No
A
No
384H
6-158
1
No
No
A
No
A
No
385H
6-159
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
386H
6-159
0 to
120
115%
No
No
A
No
A
A
387H
6-159
No
No
A
No
A
A
388H
6-159
6-159
This constant is only effective
when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio
settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1.
Integral value Sets integral control during
during accel/ acceleration/deceleration to
decel enable/ either enabled or disabled.
disable
0: Disabled (The integral
function isn't used while
accelerating or
decelerating; it is used at
PG Ramp PI/I
constant speeds.)
Sel
1: Enabled (The integral
function is used at all
times.)
PG Overspd
Level
F1-09
Setting
Range
F1-06
PG Output
Ratio
F1-07
Description
Display
PG rotation
F1-05
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Sets the overspeed detection
method.
Frequencies above that set for
F1-08 (set as a percentage of
the maximum output frequency) that continue to
exceed this frequency for the
time set in F1-09 are detected
as overspeed faults.
Sets the speed deviation
detection method.
Any speed deviation above
the F1-10 set level (set as a
percentage of the maximum
output frequency) that continues for the time set in F1-11 is
detected as a speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor
speed and the reference command speed.
0.0 to
2.0
0.0 s
0 to 50
10%
No
No
A
No
A
A
389H
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 s
No
No
A
No
A
A
38AH 6-159
*
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Description
F1-12
Number of
PG gear teeth Sets the number of teeth on
the gears if there are gears
1
between the PG and the
PG # Gear
motor.
Teeth1
F1-13
Number of
F1-01
F1-12
PG gear teeth
A
gear
ratio
of
1
will
be
used
2
if either of these constants is
PG # Gear
set to 0.
Teeth2
F1-14
PG open-cir- Used to set the PG disconneccuit detection tion detection time. PGO will
time
be detected if the detection
time continues beyond the set
PGO Detect
time.
Time
Input pulses from PG 60
F1-13
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
A
No
No
No
38BH
6-159
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
38CH
6-159
2.0 s
No
No
A
No
A
No
38DH 6-159
0 to
1000
0.0 to
10.0
* When the control method is changed, the factory setting will change. The flux vector factory setting is given.
Analog Reference Board: F2
User constants for the Analog Reference Board are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Bi-polar or
uni-polar
input selection
F2-01
AI-14 Input
Sel
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the functions for channel
1 to 3 which are effective
when the AI-14B Analog
Reference Board is used.
0: 3-channel individual
(Channel 1: terminal A1,
Channel 2: terminal A2,
Channel 3: terminal A3)
1: 3-channel addition (Addition values are the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b101. In this case the multifunction input “Option/
Inverter selection” cannot be
used.
0 or 1
0
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
38FH
6-165
5-41
Digital Reference Board: F3
User constants for the Digital Reference Board are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Digital input
option
F3-01
DI Input
5-42
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the Digital Reference
Board input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5digit input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the
DI-16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or
higher, the input will be BCD,
and the units will change to
the o1-03 setting.
0 to 7
0
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
390H
6-165
User Constant Tables
Analog Monitor Boards: F4
User constants for the Analog Monitor Board are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
Display
Channel 2
output monitor bias
AO Ch2 Bias
F4-07
Analog output signal
level for
channel 1
2
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
391H
6-89
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
392H
6-89
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
393H
6-89
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
394H
6-89
Sets the channel 1 item bias
to 100%/10 V when the Analog Monitor Board is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
395H
6-89
Sets the channel 2 item bias
to 100%/10 V when the Analog Monitor Board is used.
-10.0 to
10.0
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
396H
6-89
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
397H
6-89
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
398H
6-89
Effective when the Analog
Monitor Board is used.
Monitor selection:
Set the number of the monitor
AO Ch1
item to be output. (U1-)
Select
Gain:
Set the multiple of 10 V for
Channel 1
outputting monitor items.
gain
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40
AO Ch1 Gain cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41
are not used. When the AOChannel 2
12 Analog Monitor Board is
monitor
used, outputs of &plusmn; 10 V are
selection
possible. To output &plusmn; 10 V, set
AO Ch2
F4-07 or F4-08 to 1. When
Select
the AO-08 Analog Monitor
Board is used, only outputs of
Channel 2
0 to +10 V are possible.
gain
A meter calibration function
AO Ch2 Gain is available.
Channel 1
output monitor bias
Factory
Setting
V/f
with
PG
Description
Channel 1
monitor
selection
AO Ch1 Bias
F4-06
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Setting
Range
1 to 45
1 to 99
0.00 to
2.50
1 to 45
1 to 99
AO Opt
Level Sel
F4-08
Analog output signal
level for
channel 2
AO Opt
Level Sel
5-43
Digital Output Boards (DO-02C and DO-08): F5
User constants for the Digital Output Board are shown in the following table.
Name
Effective when a Digital Output Board (DO-02C or DO08) is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
A
A
A
399H
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
39AH 6-162
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
39BH 6-162
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
4
No
A
A
A
A
A
39CH 6-162
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
6
No
A
A
A
A
A
39DH 6-162
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
37
No
A
A
A
A
A
39EH
6-162
0 to 37
0F
No
A
A
A
A
A
39FH
6-163
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
0 to 37
0F
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A0H 6-163
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
DO-08 Selec- 1: Binary code output
tion
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A1H 6-163
Channel 2
output selection
Channel 3
output selection
Channel 4
output selection
DO Ch4
Select
Channel 5
output selection
DO Ch5
Select
Channel 6
output selection
DO Ch6
Select
Channel 7
output selection
DO Ch7
Select
F5-08
0
A
DO Ch3
Select
F5-07
0 to 37
A
DO Ch2
Select
F5-06
Effective when a Digital Output Board (DO-02C or DO08) is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
No
DO Ch1
Select
F5-05
Factory
Setting
V/f
F5-01
F5-04
Setting
Range
Flux
Vector
Channel 1
output selection
F5-03
Description
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Display
F5-02
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
V/f
with
PG
Constant
Number
Channel 8
output selection
DO Ch8
Select
Effective when a DO-08 Digital Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multifunction output to be output.
6-162
DO-08 output mode
selection
F5-09
5-44
User Constant Tables
Communications Option Boards: F6
User constants for a Communications Option Board are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
F6-01
F6-02
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3
1
0: Always detect
1: Detect during operation
0 or 1
0: Deceleration stop using
deceleration time in C102
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
deceleration time in C109
3: Continue operation
-
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A2H
-
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A3H
-
0 to 3
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A4H
-
0 to
60000
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A5H
-
0: Torque reference/torque
limit from transmission
disabled.
1: Torque reference/torque
limit from transmission
enabled.
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
3A7H
-
Operation
Set the stopping method for
selection after SI-T WDT errors (E5).
SI-T WDT
0: Deceleration stop using
error
deceleration time in C102
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
SI-T
deceleration time in C1WDTErr Sel
09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
3B6H
-
2 to 10
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
3B7H
-
Display
Description
Operation
Set the stopping method for
selection after communications errors.
communica0: Deceleration stop using
tions error
deceleration time in C102
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
BUS Fault
deceleration time in C1Sel
09
3: Continue operation
Input level of
external fault
from Communications
Option Board
EF0 Detection
F6-03
Stopping
method for
external fault
from Communications
Option Board
EF0 Fault
Action
F6-04
Trace sampling from
Communications Option
Board
Trace Sample Tim
F6-06
Torque reference/torque
limit selection from
optical option
Torq Ref/Lmt
Sel
F6-08
∗
F6-09
∗
Number of
SI-T BUS
error detection
Set the number which SI-T
detects BUS errors.
SI-T BUS
DET Ctr
* Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1038 or later.
Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC73060008) for details.
5-45
H: Terminal Function Constants
The following settings are made with the terminal function constants (H constants): Settings for external terminal functions.
Multi-function Contact Inputs: H1
User constants for multi-function contact inputs are shown in the following tables.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
H1-01
Terminal S3
function selection
Terminal S3
Sel
H1-02
Terminal S4
function selection
Terminal S4
Sel
H1-03
Terminal S5
function selection
Terminal S5
Sel
H1-04
Terminal S6
function selection
Terminal S6
Sel
H1-05
Terminal S7
function selection
Terminal S7
Sel
H1-06
Terminal S8
function selection
Terminal S8
Sel
H1-07
Terminal S9
function selection
Terminal S9
Sel
H1-08
Terminal S10
function selection
Terminal S10
Sel
5-46
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Multi-function contact input
1
0 to 79
24
Multi-function contact input
2
0 to 79
Multi-function contact input
3
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
400H
-
14
No
A
A
A
A
A
401H
-
0 to 79
3 (0)*
No
A
A
A
A
A
402H
-
Multi-function contact input
4
0 to 79
4 (3)*
No
A
A
A
A
A
403H
-
Multi-function contact input
5
0 to 79
6 (4)*
No
A
A
A
A
A
404H
-
Multi-function contact input
6
0 to 79
8 (6)*
No
A
A
A
A
A
405H
-
Multi-function contact input
7
0 to 79
5
No
A
A
A
A
A
406H
-
Multi-function contact input
8
0 to 79
32
No
A
A
A
A
A
407H
-
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
H1-09
Terminal S11
function selection
Terminal S11
Sel
H1-10
Terminal S12
function selection
Terminal S12
Sel
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Multi-function contact input
9
0 to 79
7
Multi-function contact input
10
0 to 79
15
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
408H
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
409H
-
* The factory settings in the parentheses are for 3-wire sequence.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Page
0
3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run Command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-11
1
Local/Remote selection (ON: Local, OFF: Remote)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-76
2
Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option board)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-83
6-164
3
Multi-step speed reference 1
When H3-05 is set to 0, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed
switch.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
4
Multi-step speed reference 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
5
Multi-step speed reference 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
6
Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
7
Accel/decel time 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-19
8
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-77
9
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-77
A
Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration stopped, frequency on hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-78
B
OH2 alarm signal input (ON: OH2 will be displayed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
C
Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
D
No V/f control with PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal V/f control)
No
Yes
No
No
No
6-137
E
Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled)
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
6-137
F
Not used (Set when a terminal is not used)
-
-
-
-
-
-
10
Up command (Always set with the down command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-79
11
Down command (Always set with the up command)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-79
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-84
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-84
14
Fault reset (Reset when turned ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
7-2
15
Emergency stop. (Normally open condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
time set in C1-09 when ON.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-17
5-47
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
16
Motor switch command (Motor 2 selection)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
17
Emergency stop (Normally closed condition: Deceleration to stop in deceleration
time set in C1-09 when OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-17
18
Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-01 and b4-02 and the timer function
outputs are set in H1- and H2-.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-105
19
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-109
1A
Accel/Decel time 2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-19
1B
Constants write enable (ON: All constants can be written-in. OFF: All constants
other than frequency monitor are write protected.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-156
7-25
1C
Trim control increase (ON: d4-02 frequency is added to analog frequency reference.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-82
1D
Trim control decrease (ON: d4-02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency
reference.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-82
1E
Analog frequency reference sample/hold
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-83
20 to
2F
External fault (Desired settings possible)
Input mode: NO contact/NC contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-85
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped
during PID control)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-109
31
PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-109
32
Multi-step speed reference 4
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
34
PID soft starter ON/OFF
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-109
35
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-109
60
DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-16
61
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
6-67
62
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
6-67
63
Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-01 and d602)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
-
64
External speed search command 3 (NC contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
65
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NC contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
66
KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
67
Communications test mode (“Pass” is displayed when the communications test is
passed.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-104
68
High-slip braking (HSB)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
-
71
Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6-129
6-135
72
Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo)
No
No
No
Yes
No
6-146
77
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6-137
78
Polarity reversing command for external torque reference
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6-129
79
Brake ON signal (Brake Signal)*
No
No
No
No
Yes
-
* If the multi-function input is set to 79 and the input value is “closed,” operation will be performed with a speed specification of 0.
5-48
Page
User Constant Tables
Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2
User constants for multi-function outputs are shown in the following tables.
Name
Constant
Number
H2-01
Display
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3D
0
Multi-function contact output
1
0 to 3D
Multi-function contact output
2
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
40BH
-
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
40CH
-
0 to 3D
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
40DH
-
Multi-function contact output
3
0 to 3D
6
No
A
A
A
A
A
40EH
-
Multi-function contact output
4
0 to 3D
10
No
A
A
A
A
A
40FH
-
Description
Terminal M1M2 function
selection
Multi-function contact output
(contact)
Term M1-M2
Sel
H2-02
Terminal P1
function
selection
(open collector)
Term P1 Sel
H2-03
Terminal P2
function
selection
(open collector)
Term P2 Sel
H2-04
Terminal P3
function
selection
(open collector)
Term P3 Sel
H2-05
Terminal P4
function
selection
(open collector)
Term P4 Sel
5-49
Multi-function Contact Output Functions
Control Methods
Setting
Value
5-50
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Page
0
During run (ON: Run Command is ON or voltage is being output)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-86
1
Zero-speed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-86
2
Frequency agree 1 (L4-02 used.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-51
3
Desired frequency agree 1 (ON: Output frequency = &plusmn;L4-01, L4-02 used and during frequency agree)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-51
4
Frequency (FOUT) detection 1 (ON: +L4-01 ≥ output frequency ≥ -L4-01, L4-02
used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-51
5
Frequency (FOUT) detection 2 (ON: Output frequency ≥ +L4-01 or output frequency ≤ -L4-01, L4-02 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-51
6
Inverter operation ready
READY: After initialization, no faults
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
7
During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
8
During baseblock (ON: during baseblock)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
9
Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operator)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
A
Run Command selection status (ON: Run Command from Operator)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque
detection at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-54
C
Loss of frequency reference (Effective when 1 is set for L4-05)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-71
D
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-74
E
Fault (ON: Digital Operator communications error or fault other than CPF00 and
CPF01 has occurred.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
F
Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.)
-
-
-
-
-
-
10
Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
11
Fault reset command active
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
12
Timer function output
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-105
13
Frequency agree 2 (L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-51
14
Desired frequency agree 2 (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and during frequency agree)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-51
15
Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency ≤ -L4-03, L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-51
16
Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency ≥ -L4-03, L4-04 used)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-51
17
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-54
18
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-54
19
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-54
1A
During reverse run (ON: During reverse run)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1B
During baseblock 2 (OFF: During baseblock)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1C
Motor selection (Motor 2 selected)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
1D
During regeneration (ON: During regeneration)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
-
1E
Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-72
1F
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-58
6-87
20
Inverter overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-02 setting)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-87
User Constant Tables
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
2F*1
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Maintenance Time
ON: The operation time of either the electrolytic capacitors or the cooling fan has
reached the specified maintenance time.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
30
During torque limit (current limit) (ON: During torque limit)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
31
During speed limit (ON: During speed limit)
No
No
No
Yes
No
6-87
32
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected (internal
torque reference &lt; external torque reference).
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6-129
33
Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-servo function completed)
No
No
No
Yes
No
6-87
6-146
Frequency (FOUT) detection 5 (ON: Output frequency ≥ + L4-01 or output
frequency ≤ L4-01, L4-02 used, OFF: during baseblock
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-50
During run 2 (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation stop)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-86
Inverter's Cooling Fan Fault detected
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-73
36*2
37
3D*2
Page
* 1. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1038 or later.
Analog Inputs: H3
User constants for analog inputs are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
H3-01
Signal level
selection (terminal A1)
Term A1 Signal
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
Gain (terminal A1)
Terminal A1
Gain
Bias (terminal A1)
Terminal A1
Bias
Signal level
selection (terminal A3)
Term A3 Signal
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
Sets the frequency when 10 V
is input, as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
1000.0
Sets the frequency when 0 V
is input, as a percentage of the
maximum frequency.
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 V to 10 V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/negative) input]
Description
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10V to 10 V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/negative) input]
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
410H
6-28
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
411H
6-28
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
412H
6-28
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
413H
6-28
6-128
5-51
Name
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Select multi-function analog
input function for terminal
A3. Refer to the next page.
0 to 1F
2
Sets the input gain (level)
when 10 V is input.
Set according to the 100%
value selected from H3-05.
0.0 to
1000.0
Sets the input gain (level)
when 0 V is input.
Set according to the 100%
value selected from H3-05.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
414H
6-28
6-128
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
415H
6-28
6-128
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
416H
6-28
6-128
0 to 2
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
417H
6-28
6-128
Select multi-function analog
input function for terminal
A2. Refer to the next table.
0 to 1F
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
418H
6-29
6-128
H3-10
Gain
Sets the input gain (level)
(terminal A2) when 10 V (20 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100%
Terminal A2 value for the function set for
Gain
H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
419H
6-29
6-129
H3-11
Bias
Sets the input gain (level)
(terminal A2) when 0 V (4 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100%
Terminal A2 value for the function set for
Bias
H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
41AH
6-29
6-129
0.00 to
2.00
0.03
s
No
A
A
A
A
A
41BH
6-29
Constant
Number
H3-05
Display
Multi-function analog
input (terminal A3) function selection
Description
Terminal A3
Sel
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
H3-09
Gain (terminal A3)
Terminal A3
Gain
Bias (terminal A3)
Terminal A3
Bias
Signal level
selection
(terminal A2)
0: 0 to 10V
1: -10V to 10V
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage
Term A2 Sig- input using the switch on the
nal
control panel.
Multi-function analog
input (terminal A2) function selection
Terminal A2
Sel
H3-12
Analog input
filter time
constant
Filter Avg
Time
5-52
Sets primary delay filter time
constant in seconds for the
analog input terminal.
Effective for noise control
etc.
User Constant Tables
H3-05,H3-09 Settings
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
Contents (100%)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Page
0
Add to terminal A1
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-30
6-129
1
Frequency gain
Frequency reference (voltage) command
value
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-30
2
Auxiliary frequency reference 1
(2nd step analog)
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
3
Auxiliary frequency reference 2
(3rd step analog)
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-5
4
Voltage bias
200 V (200 V Class)/400 V (400 V Class)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
-
5
Accel/decel change (reduction
coefficient)
Set acceleration and deceleration times
(C1-01 to C1-08)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-18
6
DC injection braking current
Inverter rated output current
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
6-17
7
Overtorque/undertorque detection
level
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for V/f control
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-56
8
Stall prevention level during run
Inverter rated output current
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
6-50
9
Frequency reference lower limit
level
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-35
A
Jump frequency
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-32
B
PID feedback
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-109
C
PID target value
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-109
D
Frequency bias 2
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-31
E
Motor temperature input
10 V = 100%
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-61
10
Positive torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-47
11
Negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-47
12
Regenerative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-47
13
Torque reference/torque limit at
speed control
Motor’s rated torque
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6-129
14
Torque compensation
Motor’s rated torque
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6-129
15
Positive/negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-47
1F
Analog input not used.
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-6
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
16 to 1E Not used
5-53
Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4
User constants for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
H4-01
Display
Monitor
selection
(terminal
FM)
Terminal
FM Sel
Gain (terminal FM)
H4-02
Terminal
FM Gain
Control Methods
Description
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1-)
from terminal FM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40
cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41
are not used.
Sets the multi-function analog
output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item
output will be output in multiples of 10 V.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter cali-
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
2
0.00 to
2.50
-10.0 to
+10.0
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
41DH
6-88
1.00
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
41EH
4-6
6-88
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
41FH
6-88
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
420H
6-88
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
421H
4-6
6-88
-10.0 to
+10.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
422H
6-88
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
423H
6-89
Setting
Range
1 to 45
1 to 99
bration function is available.*
H4-03
Bias (termi- Sets the multi-function analog
nal FM)
output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a
percentage of 10 V.
Terminal
The maximum output from the
FM Bias
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.*
H4-04
Monitor
selection
(terminal
AM)
Terminal
AM Sel
Gain (terminal AM)
H4-05
Terminal
AM Gain
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1-)
from terminal AM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40
cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41
are not used.
Set the voltage level gain for
multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of
10 V to be output as the 100%
output for the monitor items.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter cali-
1 to 45
1 to 99
bration function is available.*
H4-06
Bias (termi- Sets the multi-function analog
nal AM)
output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a
percentage of 10 V.
Terminal
The maximum output from the
AM Bias
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.*
H4-07
5-54
Analog output 1 signal Sets the signal output level for
level selec- multi-function output 1 (terminal FM)
tion
0: -10 to 10 V output
AO Level
1: -10 to 10 V output
Select1
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
H4-08
Display
Control Methods
Description
Analog output 2 signal Sets the signal output level for
level selec- multi-function output 2 (terminal AM)
tion
0: 0 to +10 V output
AO Level
1: 0 to &plusmn;10 V output
Select2
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
424H
-
* The CH1 output can be adjusted when the H4-02 or H4-03 setting is displayed in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
The CH2 output can be adjusted when the H4-05 or H4-06 setting is displayed in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode while the motor is stopped.
For analog output, the value equivalent to 100% of output value of monitored item is multiplied by the gain setting and the set bias is added.
MEMOBUS Communications: H5
User constants for MEMOBUS communications are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
H5-01
Display
Slave
address
Serial
Comm Adr
Control Methods
Description
Set the Inverter's slave address.
Setting
Range
0 to 20
*1
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1F
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
425H
6-94
Communication
speed selection
H5-02
Set the baud rate for MEMOBUS communications of communications connection
terminals.
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
Serial Baud 2: 4800 bps
Rate
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
0 to 4
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
426H
6-94
H5-03
Communi- Set the parity for MEMOBUS
cation par- communications of communiity selection cations connection terminals.
0: No parity
Serial Com
1: Even parity
Sel
2: Odd parity
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
427H
6-94
Set the stopping method for
communications errors.
0: Deceleration to stop using
deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
428H
6-94
Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be
detected as a communications
error.
0: Do not detect.
1: Detect
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
429H
6-94
Set the time from the Inverter
receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
5 to 65
5 ms
No
A
A
A
A
A
42AH
6-94
H5-04
Stopping
method
after communication
error
Serial Fault
Sel
H5-05
Communication error
detection
selection
Serial Flt
Dtct
H5-06
Send wait
time
Transmit
WaitTIM
5-55
Name
Constant
Number
H5-07
Display
RTS control ON/
OFF
RTS Control Sel
H5-10
*2
Unit Selection for
MEMOBUS Register 0025H
MEMOBUS 25H
UNIT
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Select to enable or disable
RTS control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always
ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON
only when sending)
0 or 1
1
Selects the units used for
MEMOBUS registry 0025H
(monitors the output voltage
reference).
0: 0.1 V units
1: 1 V units
0 or 1
0
Description
* 1. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
5-56
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
42BH
6-94
No
A
A
A
A
A
436H
6-95
User Constant Tables
Pulse Train I/O: H6
User constants for pulse I/O are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
H6-01
Pulse train
input function selection
Pulse Input
Sel
H6-02
Pulse train
input scaling
PI Scaling
H6-03
H6-04
H6-05
Pulse train
input gain
Pulse Input
Gain
Pulse train
input bias
Pulse Input
Bias
Pulse train
input filter
time
PI Filter
Time
H6-06
Pulse train
monitor
selection
Pulse Output Sel
H6-07
Pulse train
monitor
scaling
PO Scaling
Control Methods
Description
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Set the number of pulses in
hertz, taking the reference to be
100%.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
42CH
6-2
6-33
6-108
1000 to
32000
Set the input gain level as a per0.0 to
cent when the pulse train set in
1000.0
H6-02 is input.
1440
Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42DH
6-2
6-33
100.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42EH
6-33
Set the input bias when the
pulse train is 0.
-100.0
to
100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42FH
6-33
Set the pulse train input primary delay filter time constant
in seconds.
0.00 to
2.00
0.10
s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
430H
6-33
Select the pulse train monitor
output items (value of the
part of U1-).
There are two types of monitor
items: Speed-related items and
PID-related items.
1, 2, 5,
20, 24,
36
2
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
431H
6-90
Set the number of pulses output
when speed is 100% in hertz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0,
to make the pulse train monitor
output synchronously to the
output frequency.
0 to
32000
1440
Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
432H
6-91
5-57
L: Protection Function Constants
The following settings are made with the protection function constants (L constants): Motor selection function, power loss ridethrough function, stall prevention function, frequency detection, torque limits, and hardware protection.
Motor Overload: L1
User constants for motor overloads are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets whether the motor overload function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal
overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is
turned off, the thermal value is
reset, so even if this constant is
set to 1, protection may not be
effective.
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0
and ensure that each motor is
installed with a protection
device.
0 to 3
1
Motor pro- Sets the electric thermal detectection time tion time in seconds units.
constant
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150%
overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload
MOL Time resistance is known, also set the
Const
overload resistance protection
time for when the motor is hot
started.
0.1 to
5.0
0 to 3
Display
Motor protection
selection
L1-01
MOL Fault
Select
L1-02
Alarm operation selection during
motor overheating
L1-03
MOL Thm
Input
5-58
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the input motor
temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the alarm detection
level (1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop using the
deceleration time in C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (H3 on
the Operator flashes).
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
480H
4-5
6-57
1.0 min
No
A
A
A
A
A
481H
6-57
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
482H
6-60
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor overheating
operation
selection
L1-04
MOL Filter
Time
L1-05
Motor temperature
input filter
time constant
MOL Filter
Time
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the motor temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the operation detection level (2.34 V).
0: Decelerate to stop using the
deceleration time in C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
0 to 2
1
Set H3-09 to E and set the primary delay time constant for
motor temperature (thermistor)
inputs in seconds.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20 s
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
483H
6-60
No
A
A
A
A
A
484H
6-60
Power Loss Ridethrough: L2
User constants for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Momentary
power loss
detection
L2-01
PwrL
Selection
L2-02
Momentary
power loss
ridethru
time
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled [main circuit
undervoltage (UV1)
detection]
1: Enabled [Restarted when
the power returns within the
time for L2-02. When L202 is exceeded, main circuit
undervoltage (UV1) is
detected.]
2: Enabled while CPU is
operating. [Restarts when
power returns during
control operations. Does not
detect main circuit
undervoltage (UV1).]
0 to 2
0
0 to
25.5
0.1 s
Ridethrough time, when
Momentary Power Loss Selection (L2-01) is set to 1, in units
PwrL Ride- of seconds.
thru t
*1
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
485H
6-63
No
A
A
A
A
A
486H
6-63
5-59
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Control Methods
Description
Factory
Setting
0.1 to
5.0
0.2 s
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
487H
6-63
6-66
No
A
A
A
A
A
488H
6-63
6-66
No
A
A
A
A
A
489H
6-64
No
A
A
A
A
A
48AH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
48BH
-
No
A
A
A
A
A
48CH
-
Min. baseblock time
L2-03
Sets the Inverter's minimum
baseblock time in units of one
second, when the Inverter is
restarted after power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately
PwrL Base- 0.7 times the motor secondary
circuit time constant.
block t
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a
speed search or DC injection
braking, increase the set values.
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
Voltage
recovery
time
L2-04
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
Undervoltage detection level
L2-05
PUV Det
Level
L2-06
L2-07
L2-08
Sets the time required to return
the Inverter output voltage to
normal voltage at the completion of a speed search, in units
of one second.
Sets the time required to
recover from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
Sets the main circuit undervoltage (UV) detection level (main
circuit DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower the
main circuit undervoltage
detection level.
KEB decel- Sets in seconds the time
eration time required to decelerate from the
speed where the deceleration at
momentary power loss comKEB Fremand (KEB) is input to zeroquency
speed.
Momentary
recovery
time
UV
RETURN
TIME
Frequency
reduction
gain at KEB
start
KEB Decel
Time
150 to
210
*2
0.0 to
200.0
Set in seconds the time to
accelerate to the set speed after
recovery from a momentary
power loss.
0.0 to
25.5
Sets as a percent the about to
reduce the output frequency at
the beginning of deceleration at
momentary power loss (KEB).
Reduction = slip frequency
before KEB operation &times; L2-08
&times;2
0 to
300
*1
*1
190 V
*2
0.0 s
0s
*3
100
Note Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V/400 V
Class Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Value for a 400 V Class Inverter is double.
* 3. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed for the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
5-60
User Constant Tables
Stall Prevention: L3
User constants for the stall prevention function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stall prevention
selection
during accel
L3-01
StallP
Accel Sel
L3-02
Stall prevention
level during accel
StallP
Accel Lvl
L3-03
Stall prevention
limit during accel
StallP CHP
Lvl
Stall prevention
selection
during
decel
L3-04
StallP
Decel Sel
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Acceleration as
set. With a heavy load, the
motor may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level is
exceeded. Acceleration
starts again when the
current is returned.)
2: Intelligent acceleration
mode (Using the L3-02
level as a basis, acceleration
is automatically adjusted.
Set acceleration time is
disregarded.)
0 to 2
1
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1
or 2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter
rated current.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting reduces the
set values when the motor
stalls.
0 to
200
Sets the lower limit for stall
prevention during acceleration,
as a percentage of the Inverter
rated current, when operation is
in the frequency range above
E1-06.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0 to
100
0: Disabled (Deceleration as
set. If deceleration time is
too short, a main circuit
overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main
circuit voltage exceeds the
overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration
mode (Deceleration rate is
automatically adjusted so
that the Inverter can
decelerate in the shortest
possible time. Set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor
Unit, Braking Unit) is used,
always set to 0 or 3.
0 to 3
*1
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
No
No
48FH
4-21
6-23
150%
No
A
A
A
No
No
490H
4-21
6-23
50%
No
A
A
A
No
No
491H
4-21
6-23
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
492H
4-6
4-21
6-25
5-61
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stall prevention
selection
during running
L3-05
StallP Run
Sel
L3-06
Stall prevention
level during running
StallP Run
Level
Overvoltage inhibit
selection
L3-11
OV Inhibit
Sel
Overvoltage inhibit
voltage
level
L3-12
OV Inhbt
VoltLv1
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With
a heavy load, the motor may
stall.)
1: Deceleration time 1 (the
deceleration time for the
stall prevention function is
C1-02.)
2: Deceleration time 2 (the
deceleration time for the
stall prevention function is
C1-04.)
0 to 2
1
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of the
Inverter rated current.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting reduces the
set values when the motor
stalls.
30 to
200
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Used to enable or disable the
function for inhibiting main circuit overvoltages by reducing
the regenerative torque limit
according to the main circuit
overvoltage level.
If this function is enabled,
when the main circuit voltage
rises, operation will be performed with the regenerative
torque less than the set value.
Sets the main circuit voltage
level for which the regenerative
torque limit is restricted to 0.
Usually, there is no need to
change this setting. If main circuit overvoltages occur even
with the overvoltage inhibit
function enabled, reduce this
setting.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
493H
4-21
6-49
160%
No
A
A
No
No
No
494H
4-21
6-49
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
A
A
A
4C7H
4-21
6-27
7-3
350 to
390
380V
No
No
No
A
A
A
4C8H
4-21
6-27
*2
*2
* 1. The setting range for flux vector and open-loop vector 2 controls is 0 to 2.
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
Reference Detection: L4
User constants for the reference detection function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
L4-01
5-62
Display
Control Methods
Description
Speed agree Effective when “Desired fredetection
quency (ref/setting) agree 1,”
level
“Frequency detection 1,” or
“Frequency detection 2&quot; is set
Spd Agree for a multi-function output.
Frequencies to be detected are
Level
set in Hz units.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
A
499H
6-50
User Constant Tables
Name
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
L4-02
Speed agree Effective when “Frequency
detection
(speed) agree 1,” “Desired frewidth
quency (speed) agree 1,” or
“Frequency (FOUT) detection
1,” Frequency (FOUT) detecSpd Agree tion 2 is set for a multi-function
output.
Width
Sets the frequency detection
width in Hz units.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
L4-03
Speed agree Effective when “Desired fredetection
quency (speed) agree 2,” “Frelevel (+/-)
quency (FOUT) detection 3,”
or “Frequency (FOUT) detection 4&quot; is set for a multi-funcSpd Agree tion output.
Lvl+Frequency that should be
detected is set in Hz units.
-400.0
to
+400.0
L4-04
Speed agree Effective when “Frequency
detection
(speed) agree 2,” “Desired frewidth (+/-) quency (speed) agree 2,” Frequency (FOUT) detection 3 or
“Frequency detection 4&quot; is set
Spd Agree for a multi-function output.
Width+Frequency detection width is
set in Hz units.
Constant
Number
L4-05
Description
Display
Operation
when frequency reference is
missing
Ref Loss
Sel
0: Stop (Operation follows the
frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed
continues. (At 80% of speed
before the frequency
reference was lost)
Frequency reference is lost:
Frequency reference dropped
over 90% in 400 ms.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
49AH
6-50
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
49BH
6-51
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
49CH
6-51
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
49DH
6-71
Fault Restart: L5
User constants for restarting faults are shown in the following table.
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Sets the number of auto restart
attempts.
Automatically restarts after a
fault and conducts a speed
search from the run frequency.
0 to 10
0
Auto restart Sets whether a fault contact
operation
output is activated during fault
selection
restart.
0: Not output (Fault contact is
not activated.)
Restart Sel
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
0 or 1
0
Display
L5-01
Number of
auto restart
attempts
Num of
Restarts
L5-02
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Constant
Number
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
49EH
6-72
No
A
A
A
A
A
49FH
6-72
5-63
Torque Detection: L6
User constants for the torque detection function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Overtorque/
Undertorque
detection
selection 1
L6-01
Torq Det 1
Sel
L6-02
Overtorque/
Undertorque
detection
level 1
Torq Det 1
Lvl
L6-03
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues after overtorque
(warning).
3: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
4: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
5: Undertorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation
continues after overtorque
(warning).
7: Undertorque detection only
with speed agreement;
output stopped upon
detection (protected
operation).
8: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
0 to 8
0
Open-loop vector control:
Motor rated torque is set as
100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current is set as 100%.
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
Overtorque/
Undertorque
Sets the overtorque/underdetection
torque detection time in 1-sectime 1
ond units.
Torq Det 1
Time
5-64
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A1H
6-53
150%
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A2H
6-53
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A3H
6-54
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
L6-04
Control Methods
Description
Display
Overtorque/
Undertorque
detection
selection 2
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 8
0
0 to
300
0.0 to
10.0
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A4H
6-54
150%
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A5H
6-54
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A6H
6-54
Torq Det 2
Sel
L6-05
L6-06
Multi-function output for overtorque detection 1 is output to
Overtorque/ multi-function contact output
Underwhen overtorque detection 1
torque
NO or overtorque detection 1
detection
NC is selected. Multi-function
level 2
output for overtorque detection
Torq Det 2 2 is output to multi-function
contact output when overtorque
Lvl
detection 2 NO or overtorque
Overtorque/ detection 2 NC is selected.
Undertorque
detection
time 2
Torq Det 2
Time
Torque Limits: L7
User constants for torque limits are shown in the following table.
Constant
Number
Control Methods
Name
Description
Forward
drive
torque
L7-01 limit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
300
200%
0 to
300
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
A
A
A
4A7H
4-21
6-46
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4A8H
4-21
6-46
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4A9H
4-21
6-46
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4AA
H
4-21
6-46
Torq Limit
Fwd
Reverse
drive
torque
L7-02 limit
Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Torq Limit
Rev
Forward
regenerative torque
L7-03 limit
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn
Reverse
regenerative torque
L7-04 limit
Output torque
Positive torque
Reverse
No. of
motor
rotations
Regenerative
state
Regenerative
state
Forward
Negative torque
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
5-65
Constant
Number
Control Methods
Name
Description
Integral
time setting for
L7-06 torque
limit
Set the integral time for the torque
limit. When integral control is set for
the torque limit, reduce this setting to
increase the change in frequency for
the torque limit.
Torq Limit *Normally handled with PRG: 103.
Time
Control
method
selection
for torque
limit durL7-07 ing acceleration and
deceleration
Torque
Limit Sel
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
5 to
10,000
200
ms
0, 1
0
Select the control method for the
torque limit during acceleration and
deceleration.
0: Proportional control (integral control during constant speed)
1: Integral control
Normally, this constant does not need
to be set.
*Normally handled with PRG: 103.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
A
No
No
4ACH
4-21
6-46
No
No
No
A
No
No
4C9H
4-21
6-46
Hardware Protection: L8
User constants for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: Disabled (no overheating
protection)
1: Enabled (overheating
protection)
0 or 1
0
L8-02
Overheat pre- Sets the detection temperature
alarm level
for the Inverter overheat
detection pre-alarm in &deg;C.
The pre-alarm detects when
OH Prethe heatsink temperature
Alarm Lvl
reaches the set value.
50 to
130
L8-03
Operation
Sets the operation for when
selection after the Inverter overheat preoverheat pre- alarm goes ON.
alarm
0: Ramp to stop
(Deceleration stop using
Deceleration Time 1, C102.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration
OH Pretime in C1-09.)
Alarm Sel
3: Continue operation
(Monitor display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault
will be given in setting 3.
0 to 3
Constant
Number
L8-01
Display
Protect selection for internal DB
resistor (Type
ERF)
DB Resistor
Prot
5-66
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
4ADH 6-74
95 &deg;C*1
No
A
A
A
A
A
4AEH
6-75
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
4AFH
6-75
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Detects if input
current open-phase, power
supply voltage imbalance
or main circuit
electrostatic capacitor
deterioration occurs.)
This fault is detected if a load
is greater than approximately
80% of the maximum motor
capacity.
0 or 1
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Enabled
Output open-phase is detected
at less than 5% of Inverter
rated current.
When applied motor capacity
is small for Inverter capacity,
output open-phase may be
detected inadvertently or
open-phase may not be
detected. In this case, set to 0.
0 to 2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Cooling fan
Set the ON/OFF control for
control selec- the cooling fan.
tion
0: ON only when Inverter is
ON
FAN Control
1: ON whenever power is
Sel
ON
Display
Input openphase protection selection
L8-05
Ph Loss In
Sel
Output openphase protection selection
L8-07
Ph Loss Out
Sel
L8-09
Ground protection selection
Ground Fault
Sel
L8-10
L8-11
Cooling fan
control delay
time
FAN OFF
TIM
L8-12
L8-15
OL2 characteristics
selection at
low speeds
Soft CLA
selection
Soft CLA Sel
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B1H
-
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B3H
-
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B5H
-
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B6H
-
0 to
300
60 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B7H
-
45 to
60
45 &deg;C
No
A
A
A
A
A
4B8H
-
0: OL2 characteristics at low
speeds disabled.
1: OL2 characteristics at
low speeds enabled.
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
4BBH
-
0: Disable (gain = 0)
1: Enable
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
4BEH
-
Set the time in seconds to
delay turning OFF the cooling
fan after the cooling fan OFF
command is received.
Ambient tem- Set the ambient temperature.
perature
If set to 60 &deg;C, the Inverter
overload protection function
temp
(OL2) will start 20% earlier.
OL2
Chara@LSpd
L8-18
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
5-67
Name
Constant
Number
L8-32
*2
Display
OH1 detection of
Inverter’ s
cooling fan
OH1 Detect
Sel
L8-38
*3
Carrier
frequency
reduction
selection
Prtct@L-Spd
L8-39
*3
L8-41
*3
*
*
*
*
L-Spd Carrier F
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: Disabled (FAN minor
fault detection)
1: Enabled (OH1 major fault
detection)
0 or 1
1
0: Disabled (No carrier
frequency reduction.)
1: Enabled (Carrier
frequency is reduced
accordingly.)
0 or 1
Sets the reduced carrier frequency.
Current alarm Allows or restricts an alarm
from being triggered when
the relative output current
rises above 150%.
HC Alarm
0: Disabled.
Sel
1: Enabled (alarm will be
output).
0, 4 to
2.0
*5
0 or 1
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
4E2H
6-73
No
A
A
A
No
No
4EFH
-
*1 *4
No
A
A
A
No
No
4F0H
-
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
4F2H
6-181
1
*4
2.0 kHz
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1038 or later.
Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1039 or later.
If a current exceeding 110% of the Inverter rated current flows through the unit, the carrier frequency will automatically decrease and electromagnetic
noise will occur.
* 5. The lower limits are 0.4 kHz for V/f control and 1.0 kHz for flux vector control. The upper limit is the same value as that of the factory setting for L839.
5-68
1.
2.
3.
4.
Reduced
carrier
frequency
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
User Constant Tables
N: Special Adjustments
The following settings are made with the special adjustments constants (N constants): Hunting prevention,
speed feedback detection control, high-slip braking, speed estimation, and feed forward control.
Hunting Prevention Function: N1
User constants for hunting prevention are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Hunting-prevention function selection
N1-01
Hunt Prev
Select
Hunting-prevention gain
N1-02
N1-03
*1
Hunt Prev
Gain
Hunting-prevention time
constant
Hunt Prev
Time
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Hunting-prevention
function disabled
1: Hunting-prevention
function enabled
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when
the motor is operating with a
light load.
This function is enabled in V/
f control method only.
If high response is to be given
priority over vibration suppression, disable the huntingprevention function.
0 or 1
1
Set the hunting-prevention
gain multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with
light load, increase the setting.
• If the motor stalls, reduce
the setting.
If the setting is too large, the
voltage will be too suppressed
and the motor may stall.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Set the hunting-prevention
primary delay time in units of
ms.
0 to
500
10 ms
*2
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
580H
6-40
No
A
A
No
No
No
581H
4-18
6-40
No
A
A
No
No
No
582H
6-40
* 1. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software version PRG: 1034 and later.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
5-69
Speed Feedback Protection Control Functions: N2
User constants for speed feedback protection control functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set the internal speed feedback detection control gain
using the multiplication function.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Adjust this constant as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase
the set value.
• If response is low, decrease
the set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
Set the time constant to
decide the rate of change in
the speed feedback detection
control.
0 to
2000
Increase the setting if overvoltage (OV) failures occur at
the completion of acceleration or when the load changes
radically.
0 to
2000
Display
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
N2-01
AFR Gain
N2-02
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time
constant
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
A
No
No
584H
4-18
6-41
50 ms
No
No
No
A
No
No
585H
6-41
750 ms
No
No
No
A
No
No
586H
6-41
AFR Time
N2-03
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time
constant 2
AFR Time 2
High-slip Braking: N3
User constants for high-slip braking are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
N3-01
Display
High-slip
braking
deceleration
frequency
width
HSB Down
Freq
High-slip
braking current limit
N3-02
HSB Current
5-70
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the frequency width for
deceleration during high-slip
braking as a percent, taking
the Maximum Frequency
(E1-04) as 100%.
1 to 20
5%
Sets the current limit for
deceleration during high-slip
braking as a percent, taking
the motor rated current as
100%. The resulting limit
must be 150% of the Inverter
rated current or less.
100 to
200
150%
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
588H
-
No
A
A
No
No
No
589H
-
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
N3-03
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Set in seconds the dwell time
for the output frequency for
FMIN (1.5 Hz) during V/f
control.
Effective only during deceleration for high-slip braking.
0.0 to
10.0
1.0 s
Set the OL time when the output frequency does not
change for some reason during deceleration for high-slip
braking.
30 to
1200
40 s
Display
High-slip
braking stop
dwell time
HSB Dwell
Time
N3-04
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
High-slip
braking OL
time
HSB OL
Time
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
No
No
No
58AH
-
No
A
A
No
No
No
58BH
-
Speed Estimation: N4
User constants for speed estimation are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
N4-07
Integral time
of speed estimator
SPD EST I
Time
N4-08
Proportional
gain of speed
estimator
SPD EST P
GAIN
N4-10
High-speed
proportional
gain of speed
estimator
OBS Gain HSPD
N4-11
N4-15
Description
Low-speed
regeneration
stability coefficient 1
Torque
adjustment
gain
TRQ adjust
gain
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.060
ms
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
No
A
59AH
4-20
Set the integral time of the
speed estimator for PI control.
0.000
to
9.999
Set the proportional gain of
the speed estimator for PI
control.
0 to
1000
15
No
No
No
No
No
A
59BH
-
Set the high-speed proportional gain of the speed estimator for PI control.
0 to
1000.0
15.0
No
No
No
No
No
A
59DH
4-20
40 to
70
70 Hz
No
No
No
No
No
A
59EH
7-34
10-4
Increase this setting if a
higher power for low-speed
regeneration is required. If
the setting is too large, the
torque reference monitor and
the actual torque accuracy
may deteriorate.
0.0 to
3.0
0.3
No
No
No
No
No
A
5A2H
7-34
Set the torque adjustment
gain for low-speed power.
0.0 to
5.0
0.8
No
No
No
No
No
A
5A4H
7-34
Speed estimator switching Set the switching frequency
of high-speed/low-speed
frequency
operation for the speed estiSpeed
mator.
Change F
LowSpd Rgn
Coef1
N4-17
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
0.030
ms
5-71
Name
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.90 to
1.30
1.00
20 to
70
Gradually increase this setting to improve low-speed
power. If the setting is too
high, the power may be
reduced.
Usually, there is no need to
change this setting.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
No
A
5A5H
-
50 Hz
No
No
No
No
No
A
5AFH
7-34
10-4
0.00 to
0.40
0.10
No
No
No
No
No
A
5B4H
7-34
Increase this setting to ensure
stable operation for extremely
low-speed regeneration. If the
setting is set to a high value,
the speed will increase with
the size of the regenerative
load.
Adjust this setting in intervals
of approximately 0.2.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
No
No
No
No
No
A
5B5H
7-33
N4-32
Speed estimator gain fluc- Set the lower limit for the
fluctuation frequency of the
tuation
speed estimator’s low-speed
frequency 1
proportional gain (PI control).
SpdEst Gain Set the value in Hz.
Frq1
0.0 to
60.0
5.0 Hz
No
No
No
No
No
A
5B7H
7-33
N4-33
Speed estimator gain fluc- Set the upper limit for the
fluctuation frequency of the
tuation
speed estimator’s low-speed
frequency 2
proportional gain (PI control).
SpdEst Gain Set the value in Hz.
Frq2
0.0 to
60.0
20.0 Hz
No
No
No
No
No
A
5B8H
7-33
N4-34
Speed estimator gain fluc- Set ratio for fluctuating the
speed estimator’s low-speed
tuation rate
proportional gain (PI control).
SpdEst Gain Set the value as a percentage.
Rate
0.0 to
200.0
200.0%
No
No
No
No
No
A
5B9H
7-33
Display
N4-18
Feeder resistance adjustment gain
Feeder R gain
N4-28
Description
Set the gain for the feeder
resistance in the speed estimator.
Speed estimator switching Set the switching frequency
of high-speed/low-speed
frequency 2
operation for the speed estiSpeed
mator during deceleration.
Change F 2
Torque
adjustment
gain 2
N4-29
TRQ adjust
gain 2
Low-speed
regeneration
stability coefficient 2
N4-30
LowSpd Rgn
Coef 2
5-72
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
V/f
with
PG
Constant
Number
User Constant Tables
Feed Forward: N5
User constants for the feed forward control are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
N5-01
Description
Display
Feed forward
control selec- Select the feed forward control.
tion
0: Disabled
Feedfoward
1: Enabled
Sel
Motor acceleration time
N5-02
Control Methods
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
0
*1
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B0H
4-21
6-142
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B1H
4-21
6-142
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B2H
4-21
6-142
Set the time required to
accelerate the motor at the
rated torque (T100) to the
rated speed (Nr).
J: GD2/4, P: Motor rated output
Motor Accel
Time
Setting
Range
Change
during
Operation
ta =
2π x J [kgm2] x Nr [min-1]
[s]
60 x T100 [N x m]
0.001
to
10.000
0.178 s
*2
However,
T100 =
N5-03
Feed forward
proportional
gain
Feedfoward
Gain
P [kW]
60
&times; 103 [N x m]
x
2π Nr [min-1]
Set the proportional gain for
feed forward control.
Speed reference response will
increase as the setting of N503 is increased.
0.00 to
100.00
1.0
* 1. When the control method is changed, the factory setting will change. The flux vector factory setting is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
o: Digital Operator Constants
The following settings are made with the Digital Operator constants (o constants): Multi-function selections
and the copy function.
Monitor Select: o1
User constants for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Monitor
selection
o1-01
Control Methods
Description
Set the number of the monitor
item to be displayed in the
earliest 4 monitor items. (U1)
The output monitor voltage
User Monitor (factory setting) can be
Sel
changed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
6
Yes
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
4 to 45
A
500H
-
4 to 99
5-73
Name
Constant
Number
o1-02
Display
Control Methods
Description
Monitor
Sets the monitor item to be
selection after displayed when the power is
power up
turned on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
Power-On
3: Output current
Monitor
4: The monitor item set for
o1-01
Frequency
units of reference setting
and monitor
o1-03
Display Scaling
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 4
1
0 to
39999
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
501H
6-148
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
502H
6-148
6-166
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
503H
6-148
0 to 5
3
Yes
No
No
No
A
A
504H
-
Sets the units that will be set
and displayed for the frequency reference and frequency monitor.
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is
100%)
2 to 39:
min−1 units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for
setting and display for the
max. output frequency.
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max. output frequency value is 200.0,
set 12000
o1-04
o1-05
Setting unit
for frequency
Set the setting unit for freconstants
related to V/f quency reference-related constants.
characteris0: Hz
tics
1: min−1
V/f Display
Unit
LCD brightness adjustment
LCD Contrast
5-74
Set a smaller value to lighten
the LCD and a larger value
to darken the LCD (standard: 3).
User Constant Tables
Multi-function Selections: o2
User constants for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
o2-01
Display
LOCAL/
REMOTE
key enable/
disable
Local/
Remote Key
o2-02
STOP key
during control circuit
terminal
operation
Oper STOP
Key
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the Digital Operator
Local/Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches
between the Digital
Operator and the constant
settings.)
0 or 1
1
Sets the Stop Key in the run
mode.
0: Disabled (When the Run
Command is issued from
and external terminal, the
Stop Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
0 or 1
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
505H
6-148
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
506H
6-149
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
507H
6-149
User constant initial
value
o2-03
Clears or stores user initial
values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records
the set constants as user
initial values.)
2: All clear (Clears all
recorded user initial
User Defaults
values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial values, 1110 will be set in A103.
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
kVA selection
o2-04
Inverter
Model #
Do not set.
0 to FF
0*1
No
A
A
A
A
A
508H
-
Frequency
reference setting method
selection
When the frequency reference
is set on the Digital Operator
frequency reference monitor,
sets whether the Enter Key is
necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency reference without Enter Key operation.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
509H
6-149
Sets the operation when the
Digital Operator is disconnected.
0: Disabled (Operation
continues even if the
Digital Operator is
disconnected.)
1: Enabled (OPR is detected
at Digital Operator
disconnection. Inverter
output is cut off, and fault
contact is operated.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
50AH
-
Sets the cumulative operation
time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated
Elapsed Time from the set values.
Set
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
A
A
50BH
6-149
o2-05
Operator
M.O.P.
Operation
selection
when digital
operator is
disconnected
o2-06
Oper Detection
o2-07
Cumulative
operation
time setting
5-75
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0: Cumulative time when the
Inverter power is on. (All
time while the Inverter
power is on is
accumulated.)
1: Cumulative Inverter run
time. (Only Inverter
output time is
accumulated.)
0 or 1
0
Set the initial value of the fan
operation time using time
units.
Fan ON Time The operation time accumulates from the set value.
Set
0 to
65535
0: Disabled (U2 and U3 constants are on hold.)
1: Enabled (Initializes U2
and U3 constants.)
o2-08
Elapsed Time
Run
o2-10
Fan operation time setting
o2-12
Fault trace/
fault history
clear function
Fault Trace
Init
Output power
monitor clear
selection
kWh Monitor Init
o2-18
*2
Capacitor
maintenance
setting
C MaintenanceSet
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
50CH
-
0 hr
No
A
A
A
A
A
50EH
6-149
6-184
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
510H
-
0: Holds output power monitor.
1: Initializes output power
monitor. (Returns to 0.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
512H
5-81
Allows the user to set the
maintenance time for the
electrolytic capacitors (U161). The user can reset the
accumulated operation time
back to zero, or to some other
desired value.
0 to
150
0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
51DH 6-184
Display
Cumulative
operation
time selection
o2-14
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
* 1. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
Copy Function: o3
User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Copy function selection
o3-01
o3-02
5-76
Copy Function Sel
Read permitted selection
Copy Allowable
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to
Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to
Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
0 or 1
0
Description
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
515H
6-151
No
A
A
A
A
A
516H
6-151
User Constant Tables
T: Motor Autotuning
The following settings are made with the motor autotuning constants (T constants): Settings for autotuning.
Name
Constant
Number
T1-00
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the location where the
autotuned motor constants are
to be stored.
1: Motor 1
2: Motor 2
1 or 2
1
Set the autotuning mode.
0: Rotational autotuning
1: Stationary autotuning 1
2: Stationary autotuning for
line-to-line resistance
only
Tuning Mode
3: Shipping adjustment*5
Sel
4: Stationary autotuning 2*7
0 to 4
Display
Motor 1/2
selection
Select Motor
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Page
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
700H
4-14
Autotuning
mode selection
T1-01
T1-02
T1-03
Motor output
power
Mtr Rated
Power
Motor rated
voltage
Rated Voltage
T1-04
Motor rated
current
Rated Current
T1-05
T1-06
T1-07
Motor base
frequency
Rated Frequency
Number of
motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor base
speed
Rated Speed
T1-08
Number of
PG pulses
when turning
PG Pulses/
Rev
T1-09
*7
Motor noload current
No-Load
Current
0
*1
*6
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
701H
4-10
4-14
Set the output power of the
motor in kilowatts.
0.00 to
650.00
0.40
kW
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
702H
4-14
Set the rated voltage of the
motor in volts.
0.0 to 200.0 V
*2
255.5*2
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
703H
4-14
Set the rated current of the
motor in amps.
0.32 to
6.40 *4
1.90 A
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
704H
4-14
Set the base frequency of the
motor in hertz.
0.0 to
400.0
60.0 Hz
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
705H
4-14
Set the number of motor
poles.
2 to 48
poles
4 poles
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
706H
4-14
Set the base speed of the
motor in min−1.
0 to
24000
1750
min−1
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
707H
4-15
Set the number of pulses per
revolution for the PG being
used (pulse generator or
encoder) without any multiplication factor.
0 to
60000
600
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
708H
4-15
Set the current value recorded
in the motor’s test results for
a motor without a load.
Displayed only when Stationary autotuning 2 is selected
(T1-01 = 4).
0.00 to
1.89 *8
1.20A
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
709H
4-15
*3
*3
*3
* 1. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when 2 is set for T1-01. Only set value 2 (2 or 3 for Control Boards ETC618046-S1033 and later) is possible for V/f control or V/
f control with PG.
* 2. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
* 3. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
* 4. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
* 5. Applicable for Control Boards ETC618046-S1033 and later. Refer to Chapter 8 Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board
(Page 8-3) for the details of setting 3 (Shipping adjustment).
* 6. When the control method is changed, the factory setting will change. The open-loop vector 1 control factory setting is given.
* 7. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
* 8. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given. The upper limit depends on the setting of
E2-01.
5-77
U: Monitor Constants
The following settings are made with the monitor constants (U constants): Setting constants for monitoring in
drive mode.
Status Monitor Constants: U1
The constants used for monitoring status are listed in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
U1-01
U1-02
Display
Frequency
reference
Frequency
Ref
Output frequency
Output Freq
U1-03
U1-04
U1-05
U1-06
U1-07
Output current
Output Current
Control
method
Control
Method
Control Methods
Description
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
10 V: Max. frequency
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
40H
Monitors the output frequency.*
10 V: Max. frequency
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
41H
Monitors the output current.
10 V: Inverter rated output
current
(0 to +10 V, absolute value
output)
0.01
A
A
A
A
A
A
42H
Checks the current control
method.
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
A
A
43H
10 V: Max. frequency
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.01
Hz
No
A
A
A
A
44H
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(0 to +10 V output)
0.1 V
A
A
A
A
A
45H
1V
A
A
A
A
A
46H
0.1
kW
A
A
A
A
A
47H
0.1%
No
No
A
A
A
48H
Monitors the detected
Motor Speed motor speed.*
Output Voltage
Min.
Unit
Monitors/sets the frequency reference value.*
Motor speed
Output voltage
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Monitors the output voltage reference value in the
Inverter.
DC bus voltage
Monitors the main DC
voltage in the Inverter.
DC Bus
10 V: 400 VDC (800 VDC)
(0 to +10 V output)
Voltage
U1-08
U1-09
Output
power
Output
kWatts
10 V: Inverter capacity
Monitors the output power (max. applicable motor
(internally detected value). capacity)
(-10 to 10 V possible)
Torque referMonitor in internal torque
ence
reference value for vector
Torque Ref- control.
erence
10 V: Motor rated torque
(-10 to 10 V possible)
* The unit is set in o1-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monitor).
5-78
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Control Methods
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
49H
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
A
A
4AH
1: Run
1: Zero speed
1: Reverse
1: Reset signal
input
(Cannot be output.)
1: Speed agree
1: Inverter
ready
1: Minor fault
-
A
A
A
A
A
4BH
Description
Min.
Unit
Input termi- Shows input ON/OFF status.
nal status
U1-10= 00000000
U1-10
Input Term
Sts
1: FWD command
(S1) is ON.
1: REV command
(S2) is ON.
1: Multi input 1
(S3) is ON.
1: Multi input 2
(S4) is ON.
1: Multi input 3
(S5) is ON.
1: Multi input 4
(S6) is ON.
1: Multi input 5
(S7) is ON.
1:Multi input 6
(S8) is ON.
(Cannot be output.)
The ON/OFF status of the following input terminals can be
checked by displaying U1-10
and pressing the Enter Key.
(Press the Enter Key again to
return to the original display.)
U1-10= 0000
1: Multi input 7
(S9) is ON.
1: Multi input 8
(S10) is ON.
1: Multi input 9
(S11) is ON.
1: Multi input 10
(S12) is ON.
Output ter- Shows output ON/OFF status.
minal status U1-11= 00000000
U1-11
Output
Term Sts
Operation
status
U1-12
Int Ctl Sts 1
1: Multi-function
contact output
(M1-M2) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 1
(P1) is ON.
1: Multi-funtion
contact output 2
(P2) is ON.
1: Multi-function
contact output 3
(P3) is ON.
1: Multi-function
contact output 4
(P4) is ON.
Not used (always 0).
1: Error output
(MA/AB-MC) is ON.
Inverter operating status.
U1-12= 00000000
1: Major fault
5-79
Name
Constant
Number
U1-13
U1-14
Display
Cumulative
operation
time
Control Methods
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
(Cannot be output.)
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
4CH
Elapsed
Time
Monitors the total operating
time of the Inverter.
The initial value and the operating time/power ON time
selection can be set in o2-07
and o2-08.
Software
No. (flash
memory)
(Manufacturer’s ID number)
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
A
A
4DH
Monitors the input voltage of
the voltage frequency reference. An input of 10 V corresponds to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.1
%
A
A
A
A
A
4EH
Monitors the input current of
the multi-function analog
input.
An input of 20 mA corresponds to 100%.
20 mA: 100% (4 to 20 mA)
(0 to 10 V, -10 to 10 V possible)
0.1
%
A
A
A
A
A
4FH
Monitors the input voltage of
the multi-function analog
input.
An input of 10 V corresponds
to 100%.
10 V: 100% (10 V)
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.1
%
A
A
A
A
A
050H
Monitors the calculated value
of the motor secondary current.
The motor rated secondary
current corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Motor rated
secondary current)
(-10 to 10 V output)
0.1
%
A
A
A
A
A
51H
10 V: Motor rated
secondary current)
(-10 to 10 V output)
0.1
%
No
No
A
A
A
52H
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
53H
0.01
%
No
A
No
A
A
54H
0.01
%
No
A
No
A
A
55H
FLASH ID
U1-15
Terminal
A1 input
voltage
Term A1
Level
U1-16
Terminal
A2 input
current
(voltage)
Term A2
Level
U1-17
Terminal
A3 input
voltage
Term A3
Level
U1-18
Motor secondary current (Iq)
Mot SEC
Current
U1-19
Motor
exciting
current (Id)
Mot EXC
Current
U1-20
Output frequency
after softstart
Monitors the output frequency
after a soft start.
The frequency given does not 10 V: Max. frequency
include compensations, such
(-10 to 10 V possible)
as slip compensation.
SFS Output The unit is set in o1-03.
ASR input
U1-21
U1-22
5-80
Monitors the calculated value
of the motor excitation current.
The motor rated secondary
current corresponds to 100%.
ASR Input
Monitors the input to the speed
control loop.
10 V: Max. frequency
The maximum frequency cor- (-10 to 10 V possible)
responds to 100%.
ASR output Monitors the output from the
speed control loop.
ASR OutThe motor rated secondary
put
current corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Motor rated
secondary current)
(-10 to 10 V possible)
User Constant Tables
Name
Control Methods
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
57H
-
A
A
A
A
A
58H
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.1
V
No
No
A
A
A
59H
10 V: 200 VAC (400 VAC)
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.1
V
No
No
A
A
A
5AH
-
A
A
A
A
A
5BH
0.1
kWH
A
A
A
A
A
5CH
MWH
A
A
A
A
A
5DH
U1-32
ACR output of q axis Monitors the current control
10 V: 100%
output value for the motor sec(-10 to 10 V possible)
ACR(q)
ondary current.
Output
0.1
%
No
No
A
A
A
5FH
U1-33
ACR output of d axis Monitors the current control
output value for the motor
ACR(d)
excitation current.
Output
0.1
%
No
No
A
A
A
60H
-
A
A
A
A
A
61H
1
No
No
No
A
No
62H
Constant
Number
U1-24
Display
PID feedback value
PID Feedback
DI-16H2
input status
U1-25
U1-26
DI-16 Reference
Description
Monitors the feedback value
when PID control is used.
The input for the max. frequency corresponds to 100%.
10 V: Max. frequency
(-10 to 10 V possible)
Monitors the reference value
from a DI-16H2 Digital Reference Board.
(Cannot be output.)
The value will be displayed in
binary or BCD depending on
user constant F3-01.
Output voltage referMonitors the Inverter internal
ence (Vq)
voltage reference for motor
Voltage Ref secondary current control.
Min.
Unit
(Vq)
U1-27
Output voltage referMonitors the Inverter internal
ence (Vd)
voltage reference for motor
Voltage Ref excitation current control.
(Vd)
U1-28
Software
No. (CPU)
CPU ID
U1-29
Output
power
lower 4 digits
(Manufacturer’s CPU software
(Cannot be output.)
No.)
Monitors the Inverter’s output
power. The display is split into
upper digits and lower digits in
the following way.
kWh Lower
. kWH
4 dig
U1-30
U1-29
U1-30
U1-34
U1-35
Output
power
upper 5 digits
(Cannot be output.)
Example: If the output power
is 12345678.9 kWh, the display will be as follows:
U1-29: 678.9 kWH
kWh Upper U1-30: 12345 MWH
Range: 0.0 to 32767999.9
5 dig
OPE fault
constant
OPE
Detected
Zero-servo
movement
pulses
Zero Servo
Pulse
10 V: 100%
(-10 to 10 V possible)
Shows the first constant number where an OPE fault was
detected.
(Cannot be output.)
Shows the number of PG
pulses times 4 for the movement range when stopped at
zero.
5-81
Name
Constant
Number
U1-36
Display
PID input
volume
PID Input
U1-37
PID output
volume
PID Output
U1-38
PID target
value
PID Setpoint
Control Methods
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
PID feedback volume
10 V: Max. frequency
Given as maximum frequency/
(-10 to 10 V possible)
100%
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
63H
PID control output
10 V: Max. frequency
Given as maximum frequency/
(-10 to 10 V possible)
100%
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
64H
PID target value
Given as maximum frequency/
100%
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
65H
(Cannot be output.)
-
A
A
A
A
A
66H
(Cannot be output.)
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
68H
Monitors the calculated value
of the motor flux. 100% is dis10 V: Rated motor flux
played for the rated motor
flux.
0.1
%
No
No
No
No
A
69H
Monitors motor flux current
10 V: Rated secondary curcompensation value. 100% is
rent of motor
displayed for the rated second(-10 V to 10 V)
ary current of the motor.
0.1
%
No
No
No
No
A
6AH
10 V: Rated secondary current of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
0.01
%
No
No
No
A
A
6BH
10 V: Rated secondary current of motor
(-10 V to 10 V)
0.01
%
No
No
No
A
A
6CH
10 V: Max. frequency
MEMOBUS Shows MEMOBUS errors.
communi- U1-39= 00000000
1: CRC error
cations
1: Data length error
error code
U1-39
Transmit
Err
U1-40
U1-42
U1-43
Cooling fan
operating
Monitors the total operating
time
time of the cooling fan. The
FAN
time can be set in 02-10.
Elapsed
Time
Estimated
motor flux
Mot Flux
EST
Motor flux
current
compensation
Id Comp
Value
ASR output without
filter
U1-44
ASR Output w Fil
U1-45
Feed forward control output
FF Cout
Output
5-82
Not used (always 0).
1: Parity
error
1: Overrun
error
1: Framing
error
1: Timeout
Not used (always 0).
Monitors the output from the
speed control loop (i.e., the
primary filter input value).
100% is displayed for rated
secondary current of the
motor.
Monitors the output from feed
forward control. 100% is displayed for rated secondary
current of the motor.
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
U1-48
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
0.01
Hz
No
No
No
No
A
6FH
H
No
No
No
No
A
71H
For maintenance purposes,
this timer shows the amount of
time the electrolytic capacitors
(Cannot be output.)
have been operating. Capacitors should be replaced when
the monitor reaches 100%.
1%
A
A
A
A
A
7CH
Cooling fan This monitor displays the
mainteamount of time the cooling fan
nance
(Cannot be output.)
has been operating. Replace
the cooling fan when the disMainteplay reads 100%.
nance
1%
A
A
A
A
A
7EH
0.01
A
A
A
A
A
A
7CFH
A
A
A
A
A
7DOH
Display
Stable
speed for
regeneration
CF error
code
U1-61
*3
CF Error
Code
Electrolytic
capacitor
maintenance
C MaintenanceFan
U1-63
*3
U1-83
*3
U1-84
*3
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
StableSpd
@Regen
U1-50
Control Methods
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Peak hold
current
Current
PeakHold
Output
frequency
during
peak hold
Freq@ I
PeakHold
Description
Monitors the minimum speed
for which the speed will not
exceed the speed reference in a 0.00 to 20.00
steady state during 100% load
regeneration.
Monitors the CF error code.
00: No deceleration for 3 s
after Stop Command
01: Magnetic flux calculation
error
02: Startup status fault
04: Speed estimator gain
adjustment fault
08: Low-speed regeneration
fault
10: Zero-speed fault
20: Rotation direction limit
fault
0 to FFFF
Displays the peak value of the
current during run. “Peak
Hold” refers to the moment
that the peak value is saved.
10V: Inverter rated output
current
(-10 to 10 V absolute value
output)
Displays the frequency value
when the output current
reached its peak value.
10V: Max frequency
(-10 to 10 V)
Min.
Unit
*1
0.01
Hz
*2
* 1. The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity. (0.01 A for Inverter of 0.4 kW to 7.5 kW, and 0.1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more)
* 2. The setting unit can be selected in o1-03.
* 3. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
5-83
Fault Trace: U2
User constants for error tracing are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
U2-01
U2-02
U2-03
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
80H
-
A
A
A
A
A
81H
The reference frequency when
the previous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
82H
The output frequency when the
previous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
A
A
A
A
A
83H
The output current when the previous fault occurred.
0.1 A
A
A
A
A
A
84H
The motor speed when the previ- (Cannot be output.)
ous fault occurred.
0.01
Hz
No
A
A
A
A
85H
The output reference voltage
when the previous fault occurred.
0.1 V
A
A
A
A
A
86H
1V
A
A
A
A
A
87H
0.1
kW
A
A
A
A
A
88H
0.1%
No
No
A
No
A
89H
The contents of the current fault.
Previous fault The contents of the error that
occurred just prior to the current
Last Fault
fault.
Display
Current fault
Current Fault
Reference
frequency at
fault
Output frequency at
fault
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
Min.
Unit
Frequency
Ref
U2-04
Output Signal
Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
Description
Output Freq
U2-05
U2-06
Output current at fault
Output Current
Motor speed
at fault
Motor Speed
U2-07
Output voltage reference
at fault
Output Voltage
U2-08
U2-09
DC bus voltage at fault
The main current DC voltage
DC Bus Volt- when the previous fault occurred.
age
Output power
at fault
The output power when the previous fault occurred.
Output
kWatts
U2-10
5-84
Torque reference at fault
The reference torque when the
previous fault occurred. The
Torque Refer- motor rated torque corresponds
to 100%.
ence
User Constant Tables
Name
Constant
Number
U2-11
Display
Input terminal status at
fault
Input Term
Sts
U2-12
Description
Output Signal
Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
The input terminal status when
the previous fault occurred.
The format is the same as for U110.
Output terminal status at
The output terminal status when
fault
the previous fault occurred. The
Output Term format is the same as for U1-11.
Control Methods
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
8AH
-
A
A
A
A
A
8BH
-
A
A
A
A
A
8CH
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
8DH
A
A
A
A
A
7E6H
A
A
A
A
A
7E7H
Min.
Unit
Sts
U2-13
U2-14
Operation
status at fault
Inverter Status
Cumulative
operation
time at fault
The operating status when the
previous fault occurred. The format is the same as for U1-12.
(Cannot be output.)
The operating time when the previous fault occurred.
Elapsed time
U2-21
*2
U2-22
*2
Peak hold
current at
fault
Current PeakHold
Peak hold
output
frequency at
fault
Freq@ I
PeakHold
Displays the peak hold current
when the last fault occurred.
Displays the frequency value at
the moment the current reached
its peak value when the last fault
occurred.
0.01
A*1
0.01
Hz
Note 1. The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
2. If the PUF fault is already indicated in U2- or U3-, even if the PUF fault is detected again, the fault trace is not updated.
* 1. The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity. (0.01 A for Inverter of 0.4 kW to 7.5 kW, and 0.1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more)
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
5-85
Fault History: U3
User constants for the error log are shown in the following table.
Name
Constant
Number
U3-01
Display
Most recent
fault
Last Fault
U3-02
U3-03
U3-04
U3-05
U3-06
U3-07
U3-08
Second most
recent fault
Fault Message 2
Third most
recent fault
Fault Message 3
Fourth/oldest
fault
Fault Message 4
Control Methods
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
-
A
A
A
A
A
90H
The error contents of 2nd
previous fault.
-
A
A
A
A
A
91H
The error contents of 3rd
previous fault.
-
A
A
A
A
A
92H
The error contents of 4th
previous fault.
-
A
A
A
A
A
93H
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
94H
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
95H
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
96H
1
hr
A
A
A
A
A
97H
The error contents of 1st
previous fault.
Cumulative
operation
time at fault
The total operating time
when the 1st previous fault
Elapsed Time occurred.
1
(Cannot be output.)
Accumulated
time of second fault
The total operating time
when the 2nd previous fault
Elapsed Time occurred.
2
Accumulated
time of third
fault
The total operating time
when the 3rd previous fault
Elapsed Time occurred.
3
Accumulated
time of
fourth/oldest
fault
Elapsed Time
4
The total operating time
when the 4th previous fault
occurred.
Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 01, 02, 03, UV1, and UV2.
5-86
Open MEMOBUS
-loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
Min.
Unit
Description
User Constant Tables
Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method (A1-02)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the control method (A1-02) is changed.
Name
Constant
Number
b3-01
b3-02
b8-02
b8-03
C3-01
C3-02
C4-02
Display
Speed search selection
SpdSrch at Start
Speed search operating current
SpdSrch Current
Energy-saving gain
Energy Save Gain
Energy-saving filter time constant
Energy Save F.T
Slip compensation gain
Slip Comp Gain
Slip compensation primary delay time
Slip Comp Time
Torque compensation primary delay time
constant
Factory Setting
V/f
Control
V/f with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
1
2
3
2
-
2
0 to 200
1%
120
-
100
-
10
0.0 to 10.0
0.1
-
-
0.7
1.0
0.7
0.0 to 10.00
0.01 s
-
-
0.50
0.01
0.50
0.0 to 2.5
0.1
0.0
-
1.0
1.0
1.0
0 to 10000
1 ms
2000
-
200
-
-
0 to 10000
1 ms
200
200
*5
*5
20
-
-
0.00 to 300.00
0.01
-
0.20
-
20.00
10.00
0.000 to 10.000
0.001 s
-
0.200
-
0.500
0.500
0.00 to 300.00
0.01
-
0.02
-
20.00
10.00
0.000 to 10.000
0.001
sec.
-
0.050
-
0.500
0.500
0.000 to 0.500
0.001
-
-
-
0.004
0 to 1000
1 ms
-
-
-
0
10
0.0 to 400.0*4
0.1 Hz
60.0
60.0
*3
*3
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0 to 255.0
0.1 V
200.0
200.0
*3
*3
200.0
200.0
200.0
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
60.0
60.0
*3
*3
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
3.0
3.0
*3
*3
3.0
0.0
0.0
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
15.0
15.0
*3
*3
11.0
0.0
0.0
Setting Range
Unit
0 to 3
Torq Comp Time
C5-01
C5-02
C5-03
C5-04
C5-06
d5-02
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
ASR P Gain 1
ASR integral (I) time
ASR I Time 1
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
ASR P Gain 2
ASR integral (I) time 2
ASR I Time 2
ASR primary delay time
ASR Delay Time
Torque reference delay time
Torq Ref Filter
E1-04
E3-02
Max. output frequency (FMAX)
E1-05
E3-03
Max. voltage (VMAX)
E1-06
E3-04
Base frequency (FA)
Max Frequency
Max Voltage
Base Frequency
E1-07
E3-05
Mid. output frequency (FB)
E1-08
E3-06
Mid. output frequency voltage (VC)*2
Mid Frequency A
Mid Voltage A
0.010
0.035
5-87
Name
Constant
Number
Display
E1-09
E3-07
Min. output frequency (FMIN)
E1-10
E3-08
Min. output frequency voltage (VMIN)*2
Unit
0.0 to 400.0
0.1 Hz
0.0 to 255.0
(0.0 to 510.0)
0.1 V
0.0 to 2.0
0, 1
Min Voltage
Overspeed detection delay time
PG Overspd Time
Feedforward control selection
N5-01
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Setting Range
Min Frequency
F1-09
*
*
*
*
*
Factory Setting
Feedfoward Sel
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
0.5
0.0
0.3
2.0
0.0
1.0
1.0
-
0.0
0.0
-
-
0
1
V/f
Control
V/f with
PG
1.5
1.5
*3
*3
9.0
9.0
*3
*3
0.1 s
-
1
-
The settings will be 0.05 (Flux vector)/1.00 (open-loop vector) for Inverters of 45kW or larger.
The settings shown are for 200 V Class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V Class Inverters.
Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1-03.
The setting range for open-loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66.0 (0 to 132.0 for PRG: 103).
1000 ms for Inverters of 200 V Class 30 to 110 kW and 400 V Class 55 to 300 kW.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 1.5 kW
Constant
Number
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
1
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
2
Flux
Vector
Control
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
Factory Setting
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
E1-07
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
E1-10
*
V
9.0
9.0
9.0
D
E
120.0 180.0
F
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0
200.0 200.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
19.0
24.0
19.0
24.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
15.0
11.0
13.3
0.0
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
0.3
0.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
8.0
9.0
11.0
13.0
11.0
15.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
9.0
2.0
1.3
0.0
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
1
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
2
Flux
Vector
Control
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
* The setting shown are for 200 V Class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V Class Inverters.
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2.2 to 45 kW
Constant
Number
Factory Setting
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
E1-05
*
V
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
E1-07
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
E1-08
*
V
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
E1-10
*
V
7.0
7.0
7.0
E
F
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0
200.0 200.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
18.0
23.0
18.0
23.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
14.0
11.0
13.3
0.0
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
0.3
0.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
11.0
9.0
13.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
2.0
1.3
0.0
* The setting shown are for 200 V Class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V Class Inverters.
5-88
D
120.0 180.0
User Constant Tables
200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW
Constant
Number
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
1
Open
Loop
Vector
Control
2
Flux
Vector
Control
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
Factory Setting
Unit
E1-03
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
E1-04
Hz
50.0
60.0
60.0
72.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
90.0
D
E
E1-05
*
V
200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0 200.0
200.0
200.0
200.0
E1-06
Hz
50.0
60.0
50.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
50.0
50.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
60.0
0.0
E1-07
Hz
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
25.0
25.0
30.0
30.0
2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
0.0
E1-08
*
V
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
35.0
50.0
35.0
50.0
15.0
20.0
15.0
20.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
11.0
13.3
0.0
E1-09
Hz
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.3
1.3
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.5
0.3
0.0
E1-10
*
V
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
9.0
7.0
11.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
2.0
1.3
0.0
120.0 180.0
F
* The setting shown are for 200 V Class Inverters. The values will double for 400 V Class Inverters.
5-89
Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the Inverter capacity (o2-04) is changed.
200 V Class Inverters
Constant
Name
Unit
Number
Inverter Capacity
E2-11 Motor Rated Capacity
kW
2nd Motor Rated
E4-07
Capacity
o2-04
kVA selection
-
Factory Setting
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
288.20
223.70
169.40
156.80
122.90
94.75
72.69
70.44
63.13
-
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
-
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Carrier frequency selection
upper limit
-
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
1.90
3.30
6.20
8.50
14.00
19.60
26.60
39.7
53.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.90
2.50
2.60
2.90
2.73
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
1.20
1.80
2.80
3.00
4.50
5.10
8.00
11.2
15.2
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
9.842
5.156
1.997
1.601
0.771
0.399
0.288
0.230
0.138
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
18.2
13.8
18.5
18.4
19.6
18.2
15.5
19.5
17.2
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
14
26
53
77
112
172
262
245
272
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
s
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
s
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
&deg;C
95
95
100
95
95
95
95
90
100
L8-39
Reduced carrier frequency
kHz
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
N1-03
Hunting-prevention time
constant
ms
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
N5-02
Motor acceleration time
s
0.178
0.142
0.166
0.145
0.154
0.168
0.175
0.265
0.244
C6-02
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection*1
Carrier frequency selection
for open-loop vector 2 con-
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
trol*2
-
5-90
User Constant Tables
Constant
Name
Unit
Number
Inverter Capacity
E2-11 Motor Rated Capacity
kW
2nd Motor Rated
E4-07
Capacity
o2-04
kVA selection
-
Factory Setting
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
10
11
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
57.87
51.79
46.27
38.16
35.78
31.35
23.10
20.65
18.12
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
-
6
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection
for open-loop vector 2 con-
-
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Carrier frequency selection
upper limit
-
6
6
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
65.8
77.2
105.0
131.0
160.0
190.0
260.0
260.0
260.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.60
1.43
1.39
1.39
1.39
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
15.7
18.5
21.9
38.2
44.0
45.6
72.0
72.0
72.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
0.101
0.079
0.064
0.039
0.030
0.022
0.023
0.023
0.023
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
20.1
19.5
20.8
18.8
20.2
20.5
20.0
20.0
20.0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
505
538
699
823
852
960
1200
1200
1200
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
s
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.7
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
&deg;C
90
90
95
100
100
110
100
110
110
L8-39
Reduced carrier frequency
kHz
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
N1-03
Hunting-prevention time
constant
ms
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
100
100
N5-02
Motor acceleration time
s
0.317
0.355
0.323
0.320
0.387
0.317
0.533
0.592
0.646
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
2.00 (Open-loop vector control)
trol*2
-
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V Class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
* 1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 0: Low noise PWM, 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10.0 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, and 6: 15.0 kHz. If the
carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 5.5 kW or more, the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced.
* 2. The initial settings for C6-11 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz.
5-91
400 V Class Inverters
Constant
Number
E2-11
E4-07
o2-04
Name
Inverter Capacity
Motor Rated
Capacity
2nd Motor Rated
Capacity
kVA selection
Unit
Factory Setting
kW
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
4.0
5.5
7.5
11
15
-
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time
constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
576.40
447.40
338.80
313.60
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
-
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Carrier frequency selection upper limit
-
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
1.00
1.60
3.10
4.20
7.00
7.00
9.80
13.30
19.9
26.5
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
2.90
2.60
2.50
3.00
2.70
2.70
1.50
1.30
1.70
1.60
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
0.60
0.80
1.40
1.50
2.30
2.30
2.60
4.00
5.6
7.6
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line resistance
Ω
6.495
3.333
3.333
1.595
1.152
0.922
0.550
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
18.2
14.3
18.3
18.7
19.3
19.3
18.2
15.5
19.6
17.2
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque
compensation
W
14
26
53
77
130
130
193
263
385
440
L2-02
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
s
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.8
0.8
1.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB) time
s
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
&deg;C
95
95
95
95
95
95
95
90
95
95
L8-39
Reduced carrier
frequency
kHz
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
N1-03
Hunting-prevention time
constant
ms
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
N5-02
Motor acceleration time
s
0.178
0.142
0.166
0.145
0.154
0.154
0.168
0.175
0.265
0.244
C6-02
C6-11
Carrier frequency selection*1
Carrier frequency selection for open-loop vector
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
245.80 236.44 189.50 145.38 140.88 126.26
2 control*2
-
5-92
38.198 22.459 10.100
User Constant Tables
Constant
Number
E2-11
E4-07
o2-04
Name
Inverter Capacity
Motor Rated
Capacity
2nd Motor Rated
Capacity
kVA selection
Unit
Factory Setting
kW
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
300
-
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
0.50 (Open-loop vector control)
b8-03
Energy-saving filter
time constant
s
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
-
115.74
103.58
92.54
76.32
71.56
67.20
46.20
38.91
36.23
32.79
30.13
30.57
27.13
21.76
-
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
F
F
1
1
1*1
1*1
1
-
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C6-02
C6-11
Carrier frequency
selection*1
Carrier frequency
selection for open-
2.00 (Open-loop vector control)
loop vector 2 control*2
-
Carrier frequency
selection upper limit
-
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
3*1
3*1
1
1
1
1
1
E2-01
(E4-01)
Motor rated current
A
32.9
38.6
52.3
65.6
79.7
95.0
130.0
156.0
190.0
223.0
270.0
310.0
370.0
500.0
E2-02
(E4-02)
Motor rated slip
Hz
1.67
1.70
1.80
1.33
1.60
1.46
1.39
1.40
1.40
1.38
1.35
1.30
1.30
1.25
E2-03
(E4-03)
Motor no-load current
A
7.8
9.2
10.9
19.1
22.0
24.0
36.0
40.0
49.0
58.0
70.0
81.0
96.0
130.0
E2-05
(E4-05)
Motor line-to-line
resistance
Ω
0.403
0.316
0.269
0.155
0.122
0.088
0.092
0.056
0.046
0.035
0.029
0.025
0.020
0.014
E2-06
(E4-06)
Motor leak inductance
%
20.1
23.5
20.7
18.8
19.9
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
20.0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for
torque compensation
W
508
586
750
925
1125 1260 1600 1760 2150 2350 2850 3200 3700
4700
L2-02
Momentary power
loss ridethru time
s
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock (BB)
time
s
1.0
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.7
1.8
1.9
2.0
2.1
2.1
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
s
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm
level
&deg;C
95
95
95
95
95
100
105
105
120
110
115
100
110
115
L8-39
Reduced carrier
frequency
kHz
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
N1-03
Hunting-prevention
time constant
ms
10
10
10
10
10
30
30
30
30
30
30
100
100
100
N5-02
Motor acceleration
time
s
0.317
0.355
0.323
0.320
0.387
0.317
0.533
0.592
0.646
0.673
0.777
0.864
0.910
1.392
Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 400 V Class Inverters
with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
* 1. The initial settings for C6-02 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 5.0 kHz, 3: 8.0 kHz, 4: 10.0 kHz, 5: 12.5 kHz, 6: 15.0 kHz, and F: optional setting (initial value for
Inverters of 90 or 110 kW: 3.0 kHz).
* 2. The initial settings for C6-11 are as follows: 1: 2.0 kHz, 2: 4.0 kHz, 3: 6.0 kHz, 4: 8.0 kHz.
5-93
6
Constant Settings by
Function
Frequency Reference ..................................................6-2
Run Command...........................................................6-10
Stopping Methods ......................................................6-12
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics ..........6-18
Adjusting Frequency References...............................6-28
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)...6-34
Improved Operating Efficiency...................................6-36
Machine Protection ....................................................6-42
Continuing Operation.................................................6-63
Inverter Protection .....................................................6-74
Input Terminal Functions............................................6-76
Output Terminal Functions......................................... 6-86
Monitor Constants......................................................6-88
Individual Functions ...................................................6-92
Digital Operator Functions ....................................... 6-148
Options ....................................................................6-158
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines ...................6-170
Current Alarm Function............................................ 6-181
Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function...................6-182
Maintenance Timer Display Function.......................6-183
Frequency Reference
This section explains how to input the frequency reference.
Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
Set constant b1-01 to select the frequency reference source.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
H6-01
Reference
Source
Pulse train
input function selection
Pulse Input
Sel
H6-02
Pulse train
input scaling
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (analog
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
0 to 2
1000
to
32000
Description
Set the number of pulses in hertz, taking the reference to be 100%.
PI Scaling
V/f
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
180H
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
42CH
1440
Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42DH
Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator
When b1-01 is set to 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator.
Input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator's reference frequency setting display.
For details on setting the reference frequency, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
-DRIVE-DRIVE-
Rdy
Frequency
RefRef
Frequency
U1-01=
0
0
0.0
0Hz
U1-01= 0 0 0.0
0Hz
(0.00
60.00)
&quot;0.00Hz&quot;
Fig 6.1 Frequency Setting Display
6-2
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
RegisVecter
tor
2
V/f
with
PG
Frequency Reference
Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Control Circuit Terminal (Analog Setting)
When b1-01 is set to 1, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 (voltage input),
or control circuit terminal A2 (voltage or current input).
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only (Voltage Input)
When inputting a voltage for the master speed frequency reference, input the voltage to control circuit terminal A1.
Inverter
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
A1 Master speed frequency
reference
(voltage input)
A2 Master speed frequency
reference
(current input)
A3 Auxiliary speed frequency
reference 1
AC Analog common
2 kΩ
Fig 6.2 Voltage Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only (Current Input)
When inputting a current for the master speed frequency reference, input the current to control circuit terminal
A2, input 0 V to terminal A1, set H3-08 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2
(current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 (add to terminal A1).
Inverter
4 to 20-mA input
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
Master speed frequency
A1
reference
(voltage input)
A2 Master speed frequency
reference
(current input)
A3 Auxiliary speed frequency
reference 1
AC Analog common
1
2
V
I
DIP switch
S1
Fig 6.3 Current Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference
Turn ON pin 2 of DIP switch S1 (toward I), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a current to terminal A2.
Turn OFF pin 2 of DIP switch S1 (toward V), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a voltage to terminal
A2. Set H3-08 to the correct setting for the type of input signal being used.
IMPORTANT
Switch between 2 Step Speeds: Master/Auxiliary Speeds
When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, connect the master speed frequency reference to
control circuit terminal A1 or A2 and connect the auxiliary speed frequency reference to terminal A3. The reference on terminal A1 or A2 will be used for the Inverter frequency reference when the multi-function input
allocated to multi-speed command 1 is OFF and the reference on terminal A3 will be used when it is ON.
6-3
When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, set H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal
A3) to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference, 2nd step analog) and set on of the multi-function input terminals to
multi-step speed reference 1.
When inputting a current to terminal A2 for the master speed frequency reference, set H3-08 (Multi-function
analog input terminal A2 signal level selection) to 2 (current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 function selection) to 0 (add to terminal A1).
Inverter
S5 Multi-step speed
reference 1
+V Power supply: 15 V,
20 mA
Master speed
A1 frequency reference
(voltage input)
2 kΩ
4 to 20 mA
2 kΩ
Master speed
A2 frequency reference
(current input)
A3 Auxiliary speed
frequency reference 1
AC Analog common
Fig 6.4 Switching between Master and Auxiliary Frequencies
Setting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals
When b1-01 is set to 4, the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP is used as the frequency reference.
Set H6-01 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) to 0 (frequency reference), and then set the 100% reference
pulse frequency to H6-02 (Pulse Train Input Scaling).
Inverter
Pulse Input Specifications
Low level voltage
0.0 to 0.8 V
High level voltage
3.5 to 13.2 V
Heavy duty
30 to 70%
Pulse frequency
0 to 32 kHz
32 kHz max.
3.5 to 13.2 V
Pulse input
RP(Pulse train input terminal)
AC (Analog common)
Fig 6.5 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input
6-4
Frequency Reference
Using Multi-Step Speed Operation
With Varispeed-G7 series Inverters, you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps, using 16 frequency
references, and one jog frequency reference.
The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step
references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions.
Related Constants
To switch frequency references, set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the
multi-function contact inputs. Setting examples are shown below.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Terminal
Constant
Number
Set Value
(Factory Setting)
S5
H1-03
3
Multi-step speed reference 1 (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when
multi-function analog input H3-05 is set to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference 1).)
S6
H1-04
4
Multi-step speed reference 2 [Also used for auxiliary frequency reference 2 when multifunction analog input H3-09 is set to 3 (auxiliary frequency reference 2).]
S9
H1-07
5
Multi-step speed reference 3
S7
H1-05
6
Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed reference)
Details
Combination of Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs
You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S5 to S9 (multi-function
contact input terminals) to set multi-step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection. The following table shows the possible combinations.
TerminalS5
TerminalS6
TerminalS9
TerminalS7
Speed
Multi-step
Speed Reference 1
Multi-step
Speed Reference 2
Multi-step
Speed Reference 3
Jog Frequency Selection
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 1 d1-01, master speed frequency
2
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 2 d1-02, auxiliary frequency 1
3
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 3 d1-03, auxiliary frequency 2
4
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Frequency reference 4 d1-04
5
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 5 d1-05
6
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 6 d1-06
7
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 7 d1-07
8
ON
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency reference 8 d1-08
-
ON*
Jog frequency d1-17
9
-
-
Selected Frequency
* Terminal S7's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed references.
6-5
Setting Precautions
Refer to the following to set step 1 to step 3 to analog inputs.
• Step 1
When setting terminal A1's analog input to step 1, set b1-01 to 1, and when setting d1-01 (Frequency Reference 1) to step 1, set b1-01 to 0.
• Step 2
When setting terminal A3's analog input to step 2, set H3-05 to 2 (auxiliary frequency reference 1). When
setting d1-02 (Frequency Reference 2) to step 2, set H3-05 to 1F (Analog input not used).
• Step 3
When setting terminal A2's analog input to step 3, set H3-09 to 3 (auxiliary frequency reference 2). When
setting d1-03(Frequency Reference 3) to step 3, set H3-05 to 1F (Analog input not used).
When inputting 0 to 10 V to terminal A2’s analog input, set H3-08 to 0, and turn OFF pin 2 to DIP switch
S1 on the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page 2-26.)
Connection Example and Time Chart
The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step
operation.
Inverter
S1 Forward/stop
S2 Reverse/stop
S3 External fault
S4 Fault reset
S5 Multi-step speed reference 1
S6 Multi-step speed reference 2
S9 Multi-step speed reference 3
S7 Jog frequency
SC Sequence common
+V Frequency setting power (+15 V)
A1 Master speed referennce (0 to 10 V)
[Master speed frequency (b1-01=1)]
A2 Master speed referennce (4 to 20 mA)
[Auxiliary speed frequency1 (H3-09=2)]
A3 Auxiliary speed frequency (0 to 10 V)
[Auxiliary speed frequency 2 (H3-05=3)]
AC Analog common 0 V
Fig 6.6 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation
6-6
Frequency Reference
Frequency
reference 8
Frequency
reference 7
Frequency
reference 6
Frequency
reference 5
Frequency
reference
Frequency
reference 4
Frequency
reference 3:
Frequency ref- Auxiliary
erence 2: Auxil- speed frequency 2
iary speed
frequency 1
Frequency
reference 1:
Master speed
frequency
Jog frequency
Forward/stop
Multi-step speed
reference 1
Multi-step speed
reference 2
Multi-step speed
reference 3
Jog frequency
selection
Fig 6.7 Multi-step speed reference/Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart
6-7
6-8
6GTOKPCN
A3
6GTOKPCN
A2
6GTOKPCN
A1
Ch3
Ch2
Ch1
=1
=0
=1
=0
F2-01
=1
=0
1/10
X
+
+
3
2
1
C
B
A
=1
=0
F2-01
PID feedback
PID target value
Frequency baias 2
Motor temperature input Yes
Positive toraue limit
0B
0C
0D
0E
10
1F
15
14
13
12
11
09
08
07
06
No
Negative torque limit
No
Regenerative torque
No
limit
Torque refrence/torque
No
limit at speed control
Torque compensation
No
Positive/negative torque
No
limit
Analog input not used.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
100%/10 V
100%/10 V
100%/10 V
Yes
Yes 100%/10 V
Yes &plusmn;100%/&plusmn;10 V
Yes &plusmn;100%/&plusmn;10 V
Yes 100%/10 V
Yes 100%/10 V
Yes 100%/10 V
Yes &plusmn;100%/&plusmn;10 V
Yes &plusmn;100%/&plusmn;10 V
Yes &plusmn;100%/&plusmn;10 V
Yes &plusmn;100%/&plusmn;10 V
Yes 100%/10 V
Yes 100%/10 V
No
Yes 100%/10 V
No
Yes 100%/1 V
No
Yes &plusmn;100%/&plusmn;10 V
Yes &plusmn;100%/&plusmn;10 V
Yes 100%/10 V
Yes &plusmn;100%/&plusmn;10 V
Input Level
Remote
d2-03
Master frequency
lower limit
Option
Frequency
reference 16
(d1-16)
Frequency
reference 15
(d1-15)
Frequency
reference 14
(d1-14)
Frequency
reference 13
(d1-13)
Frequency
reference 12
(d1-12)
Frequency
reference 11
(d1-11)
Frequency
reference 10
(d1-10)
Frequency
reference 9
(d1-09)
Frequency
reference 8
(d1-08)
(d1-07)
Frequency
!reference
! ! ! 7
Frequency
reference 6
(d1-06)
Frequency
reference 5
(d1-05)
Frequency
reference 4
(d1-04)
Multi-function
Frequency analog input is invalid.
reference 1 When 2nd speed
(d1-01) analog is selected
Multi-function
Frequency analog input is invalid.
reference 2 When 3rd speed
(d1-02) analog is selected
Frequency Multi-function
analog input is invalid.
reference 3
(d1-03)
Local Inverter
Fig 6.8 Varispeed G7 Function Block
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
V/f Open Flux
with Loop
VecPG Vector
tor
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
V/f
0A
Auxiliary frequency
reference 1
(2nd step analog)
Auxiliary frequency
reference 2
(3rd step analog)
Frequency gain
Add to terminal A1
Function
=0
d1-01
=0
=1
=2
=3
=4
H3-05 (Terminal A3) function
H3-09 (Terminal A2) function
L4-05
Memobus
communication
=0
Voltage bias
Accel/decel change
(reduction coefficient)
DC injection
braking current
Overtorque/undertorque
detection level
Stall prevention level
during run
Frequency reference
lower limit level
Jump frequency
05
04
03
02
01
00
L4-05
Process when
frequency
=1
refrence is
lost.
Pulse train input
Process when
frequency
refrence is =1
lost.
Setting
Value
0V 10V
H3-02
H3-03
AI input㧔See fig6.11㧕
1/10
+
+
Note: If A1-14B is not mounted,
the same operation as when
F2-01=1 will be performed
regardless of the F2-01 setting.
A/D
&plusmn;11 bits
A/D
&plusmn;11 bits
A/D
&plusmn;11 bits
A/D
&plusmn;13 bits
A/D
&plusmn;13 bits
A/D
&plusmn;13 bits
A1-14B
C option board
other than A1-14B
B1-01
= 15
= 14
= 13
= 12
= 11
= 10
=9
=8
=7
=6
=5
=4
=3
=2
=1
=0
Frequency
reference
When FJOG, RJOG (Jog
frequency command) of
multi-function contact
input is input.
Jog frequency
command (d1-17㧕
Muluti-step speed reference
Varispeed G7 Function Block
The following diagram shows the function block diagram of Varispeed G7.
Frequency Reference
*
*
Primary
delay filter
*
8
#
8
*
*
*
*
Primary
delay filter
*
8
$
≠
8
*
* 2 is current input.
*
*
*
Primary
delay filter
%
*
8
8
*
≠
* The same value can not be set in H3-05 and H3-09.
Fig 6.9 AI Input Detailed Diagram
6-9
Run Command
This section explains input methods for the Run Command.
Selecting the Run Command Source
Set constant b1-02 to select the source for the Run Command.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
b1-02
Display
Operation
method
selection
Run Source
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the Run Command input method
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (sequence
input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
0 to 3
1
No
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Q
Q
Q
Q
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
RegisVecter
tor
2
Q
181H
Performing Operations Using a Digital Operator
When b1-02 is set to 0, you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys (RUN, STOP,
JOG, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operator, refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes.
Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals
When b1-02 is set to 1, you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals.
Performing Operations Using a 2-wire Sequence
The factory setting is set to a 2-wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON, forward operation will be performed, and when S1 is turned OFF, the Inverter will stop. In the same way, when control circuit terminal S2 is set to ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S2 is turned OFF, the Inverter
will stop.
Forward/stop
Inverter
Reverse/stop
Sequence common
Fig 6.10 2-wire Sequence Wiring Example
6-10
Run Command
Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence
When any constant from H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S12) is set to 0, terminals S1 and S2 are used for a 3-wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set functions as a Forward/Reverse Run Command terminal.
When the Inverter is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A1-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the
input terminal for the Forward/Reverse Run Command.
Stop
switch
(NC contact)
Operation switch
(NO contact)
Run Command
(operates when ON)
Stop Command
(stopped when ON)
Forward/Reverse Command
(multi-function input)
Sequence input common
Fig 6.11 3-wire Sequence Wiring Example
50 ms min.
Can be either ON or OFF
Run Command
OFF
(stopped)
Stop Command
Forward/Reverse
Command
OFF (forward)
ON (reverse)
Motor speed
Stop
Forward
Reverse
Stop
Forward
Fig 6.12 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart
INFO
1. Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the Run Command. This will make the
Run Command self-holding in the Inverter.
2. When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi-function
input terminal constant is set. Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
6-11
Stopping Methods
This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter.
Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent
There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a Stop Command is sent:
• Deceleration to stop
• Coast to stop
• DC braking stop
• Coast to stop with timer
Set constant b1-03 to select the Inverter stopping method. A DC braking stop and coasting to a stop with a
timer cannot be set for flux vector control.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stopping
method
selection
b1-03
Stopping
Method
Operation
selection
for setting
E1-09 or
less
b1-05
Zero-Speed
Oper
b2-01
Zero-speed
level (DC
injection
braking
starting frequency)
DCInj Start
Freq
b2-02
DC injection braking current
DCInj Current
6-12
Control Methods
Description
Setting
Range
Select stopping method when Stop
Command is sent.
0: Deceleration to stop
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection braking stop (Stops
0 to 3*
faster than coast to stop, no
regenerative operation.)
3: Coast to stop with timer (Run
Commands are disregarded during
deceleration.)
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
RegisVecter
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
182H
Used to set the method of operation
when the frequency reference input
is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
0: Run at frequency reference (E1-09
not effective).
1: STOP (Frequencies below E1-09
in the coast to stop state.)
2: Run at min. frequency.
(E1-09)
3: Run at zero-speed (Frequencies
below E1-09 are zero)
0 to 3
0
No
No
No
No
A
No
184H
Used to set the frequency which starts
DC injection braking in units of Hz
when deceleration to stop is selected.
When b2-01 is less than E1-09, E1-09
becomes the DC injection braking
starting frequency.
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
189H
Sets the DC injection braking current
as a percentage of the Inverter rated
current.
0 to
100
50%
No
A
A
A
No
No
18AH
Stopping Methods
Name
Constant
Number
b2-03
b2-04
Control Methods
Description
Display
DC injection braking time at
start
Used to set the time to perform DC
injection braking at start in units of 1
second.
Used to stop coasting motor and
restart it. When the set value is 0, DC
DCInj
injection braking at start is not perTime@Start formed.
DC injection braking time at
stop
Used to set the time to perform DC
injection braking at stop in units of 1
second.
Used to prevent coasting after the
Stop Command is input. When the set
DCInj
value is 0.00, DC injection braking at
Time@Stop stop is not performed.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
0.00
to
10.00
0.50 s
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
RegisVecter
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Openloop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
18BH
No
A
A
A
A
A
18CH
* 0 or 1 for flux vector control and open-loop vector 2 control.
Deceleration to Stop
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 0, the motor decelerates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set. (Factory setting: C1-02 (Deceleration
Time 1))
If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2-01, the DC injection brake will be applied
using the DC current set in b2-02 only for the time set in b2-04.
For deceleration time settings, refer to page 6-18 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times.
Run command
ON
OFF
Output frequency
Decelerates to stop at
deceleration time
DC injection brake
DC injection brake time
when stopping (b2-04)
Fig 6.13 Deceleration to Stop
6-13
The operation after stopping depends on the setting of b1-05 when flux vector control is selected (A1-02 = 3).
Run Command OFF
ON
OFF
Frequency reference
via analog input
E1-09
0
b1-05=0
(frequency reference)
Run Command turns OFF
and zero-speed control start
when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Zero speed
control
Injection brake
time at start
Baseblock b2-03
b1-05=1
(Coast)
b2-04
Injection brake
time at start
Baseblock
Zero speed
control
b2-03
b2-04
b1-05=2
(Run on E1-09) Injection brake
time at start
Baseblock
b1-05=3
(Zero-speed)
Baseblock
Frequency reference drops to less
than E1-09 and zero-speed control
starts when motor speed drops to
b2-01.
Baseblock
Run Command turns OFF
and zero-speed control start
when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Zero speed control
Baseblock
b2-04
Run Command turns OFF
and zero-speed control start
when motor speed drops to b2-01.
Zero speed control
b2-03
Injection brake
time at start
Baseblock b2-03
b2-04
Baseblock
Fig 6.14 Deceleration to Stop (for Flux Vector Control)
Setting Precautions
• When using flux vector control, the zero-speed control starts when motor speed drops to b2-01 during
deceleration. Also, the setting b2-01 &lt; E1-09 is possible.
• The current level during injection brake time at start is the value of E2-03 (motor no-load current). Accord-
ingly, b2-02 is invalid in flux vector control.
Coast to Stop
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 1, the Inverter output voltage is interrupted. The motor coasts to a stop at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage to
the machine and inertia including the load.
Run Command
ON
OFF
Output frequency
Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted.
Fig 6.15 Coast to Stop
6-14
Stopping Methods
After the Stop Command is input, Run Commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) has
elapsed.
INFO
DC Braking Stop
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 2, a wait is made
for the time set in L2-03 (Minimum Baseblock (BB) Time) and then the DC injection brake current set in b202 is sent to the motor to apply a DC injection brake to stop the motor. The DC injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2-04 and the output frequency when the Stop Command is input.
DC injection brake time
Run Command
ON
OFF
b2-04
10
Output frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
DC injection brake
b2-04
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
DC injection brake time
10
Output frequency at
Stop Command input
100% (maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.16 DC Injection Braking (DB) Stop
Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during stopping.
INFO
Coast to Stop with Timer
If the Stop Command is input (i.e., the Run Command is turned OFF) when b1-03 is set to 3, the Inverter output is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop. After the Stop Command is input, Run Commands are ignored
until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the Stop Command is input
and the deceleration time.
Run Command
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Operation wait time T
Deceleration time
(e.g., C1-02)
Output
frequency
Inverter output voltage interrupted
Operation wait time T
Minimum baseblock
time (L2-03)
Output frequency at
Stop Command input
Minimum output frequency
100% (Maximum output frequency)
Fig 6.17 Coast to Stop with Timer
6-15
Using the DC Injection Brake
Set constant b2-03 to apply the DC injection braking current to the motor while it is coasting to a stop, to stop
the motor and then restart it.
Set b2-03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start.
Set the DC injection brake current using b2-02. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector control
with the current set in E2-03 (Motor no-load current).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
b2-02
DC injection
braking current
DCInj Current
DC injection
braking time at
start
b2-03
DCInj
Time@Start
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the
Inverter rated current.
0 to
100
50%
Used to set the time to perform
DC injection braking at start in
units of 1 second.
Used to stop coasting motor and
restart it. When the set value is 0,
DC injection braking at start is not
performed.
0.00
to
10.00
0.00 s
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
No
No
18AH
No
A
A
A
A
A
18BH
Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals
If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H1-) to 60 (DC injection brake command), you can
apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake command has been set when the Inverter is being stopped. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector
control.
The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below.
DC injection brake command
FRUN
Output frequency
DC injection brake
E1-09
(DC injection braking at
startup is used for flux
vector control.)
b2-01
DC injection brake
(DC injection braking at
startup is used for flux
vector control.)
If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, or if the Run Command and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will
resume.
Fig 6.18 DC Injection Brake Time Chart
6-16
Stopping Methods
Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 6 (DC injection brake current), you can change the DC
injection brake current level using the analog input.
At 10 V input (voltage) or 20 mA input (current), 100% of the Inverter rated current will be applied.
DC injection brake voltage level
Inverter rated current
Fig 6.19 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input
Using an Emergency Stop
Set a multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15 or 17 (emergency stop) to decelerate to a stop at the deceleration time set in C1-09. If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-) to 15, and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact, set the multi-function input
terminal (H1-) to 17.
After the emergency Stop Command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has
stopped. To cancel the emergency stop, turn OFF the Run Command and emergency Stop Command.
Related Parameters
Name
Constant
Number
C1-09
Display
Description
Emergency stop The deceleration time when the
time
multi-function input “Emergency
(fast) stop” is set to ON.
This function can be used as a
Fast Stop Time stopping method when a fault has
been detected.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.0 to
6000.0 10.0 s
Change
during
Operation
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
208H
*
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to 0,
the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
6-17
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter.
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times
Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to climb from 0% to 100%. Deceleration
time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to reduce to 0%. The factory setting of the acceleration
time is C1-01, and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1-02.
Related Parameters
Name
Constant
Number
C1-01
Display
Acceleration
time 1
Accel Time 1
C1-02
Deceleration
time 1
Decel Time 1
C1-03
Acceleration
time 2
Accel Time 2
C1-04
Deceleration
time 2
Decel Time 2
C1-05
Acceleration
time 3
Accel Time 3
C1-06
Deceleration
time 3
Decel Time 3
C1-07
Acceleration
time 4
Accel Time 4
C1-08
Deceleration
time 4
Decel Time 4
C1-10
Accel/decel
time setting
unit
Acc/Dec
Units
6-18
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Register
Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum output
frequency, in 1-second units.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
200H
Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0, in 1-second units.
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
201H
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” is set to ON.
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
202H
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” is set to ON.
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
203H
No
A
A
A
A
A
204H
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 2” is set to ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
205H
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” and “accel/decel time 2” are
set to ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
206H
The deceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 1” and “accel/decel time 2” are
set to ON.
No
A
A
A
A
A
207H
No
A
A
A
A
A
209H
The acceleration time when the
multi-function input “accel/decel
time 2” is set to ON.
0: 0.01-second units
1: 0.1-second units
0.0 to
6000.0 10.0 s
*
0 or 1
1
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Name
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the frequency for automatic
acceleration/deceleration switching.
Below set frequency: Accel/decel
time 4
Above set frequency: Accel/decel
time 1
The multi-function input “accel/
decel time 1” or “accel/decel time
2” take priority.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
0.00 to
2.50
All sections of the S-curve characteristic time are set in seconds units.
When the S-curve characteristic
0.00 to
time is set, the accel/decel times
2.50
will increase by only half of the Scurve characteristic times at start
and end.
Display
Accel/decel
time switching frequency
C1-11
Acc/Dec SW
Freq
C2-01
Description
Setting
Range
S-curve characteristic time
at acceleration start
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
20AH
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20BH
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20CH
0.00 to
2.50
0.20 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20DH
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
20EH
SCrv Acc @
Start
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time
at acceleration end
SCrv Acc @
End
C2-03
S-curve characteristic time
at deceleration start
SCrv Dec @
Start
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time
at deceleration end
Run Command
Output
frequency
OFF
ON
C2-02
C2-01
C2-03
C2-04
Time
SCrv Dec @
End
* The setting range for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C1-10 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Setting Unit). If C1-10 is set to 0,
the setting range is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units
Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C1-10. Constant C1-10 is set to 1 at the factory.
Set value
Details
0
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 600.00 in units of 0.01 s.
1
The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is 0.00 to 6000.0 in units of 0.1 s.
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal
Commands
Using the Inverter, you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times. When the multi-function
input terminals (H1-) are set to 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) and 1A (acceleration/deceleration time selection 2), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combining the ON/OFF status of the terminals.
The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations.
6-19
Acceleration/DeceleraAcceleration/Deceleration Time Selection 1 Ter- tion Time Selection 2 Terminal
minal
Acceleration Time
Deceleration Time
OFF
OFF
C1-01
C1-02
ON
OFF
C1-03
C1-04
OFF
ON
C1-05
C1-06
ON
ON
C1-07
C1-08
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically
Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration/deceleration time automatically using the set frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1-11, the Inverter switches the acceleration/deceleration
time automatically as shown in the following diagram.
Set C1-11 to a value other than 0.0 Hz. If C1-11 is set to 0.0 Hz, the function will be disabled.
Output frequency
Acceleration/
deceleration
time
switching frequency
(C1-11)
C1-07 rate C1-01 rate
C1-02 rate C1-08 rate
When output frequency ≥ C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 1 (C1-01, C1-02).
When output frequency &lt; C1-11, acceleration and deceleration are performed using
Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C1-07, C1-08).
Fig 6.20 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency
Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 5 (acceleration/deceleration time gain), you can adjust the
acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A2's input voltage.
The Inverter's acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C1-01 is as follows:
Acceleration time = C1-01 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain
Acceleration/deceleration time gain (set value: 5)
(Acceleration/deceleration gain from 1 to
10 V) = 10 V/Input voltage (V) x 10 (%)
Fig 6.21 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input
6-20
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time
By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and
stopping the machine.
Using the Inverter, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: Acceleration start
time, deceleration start time, acceleration end time, and deceleration end time.
INFO
Set the S-curve characteristic time to lengthen acceleration/deceleration time as follows:
Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (Deceleration start time S-curve characteristic time +
Deceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / 2
Setting Example
The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram.
Forward
Reverse
C2-02
Output frequency
C2-03
C2-04
C2-01
C2-04
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
Fig 6.22 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching
6-21
Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function)
The dwell function stores the output frequency when starting or stopping heavy loads. By temporarily storing
the output frequency, you can prevent the motor from stalling. When using the dwell function, you must select
a deceleration stop. Set b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) to 0.
Related Parameters
Name
Constant
Number
b6-01
Display
Description
Dwell frequency at
start
Dwell Ref
@Start
b6-02
b6-03
Dwell time
at start
Dwell frequency at
stop
Dwell time
at stop
6-22
ON
Dwell
Time
@Stop
b6-01 b6-03
b6-02
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
0.0 to
10.0
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B6H
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B7H
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B8H
0.0 to
10.0
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B9H
OFF
Output frequency
Dwell
Time@Start
Dwell Ref
@Stop
b6-04
Run command
Setting
Range
Time
b6-04
The dwell function is used to
output frequency temporarily
when driving a motor with a heavy
load.
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention
During Acceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is placed
on the motor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed.
If you set L3-01 to 1 (enabled) and the Inverter output current exceeds the -15% level of the set value in L302, the acceleration rate will begin to slow down. When L3-02 is exceeded, acceleration will stop.
If you set L3-01 to 2 (optimum adjustment), the motor current accelerates to the value set in L3-02. With this
setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored.
Related Parameters
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stall prevention selection
during accel
L3-01
StallP Accel Sel
Stall prevention level during accel
L3-02
StallP Accel
Lvl
L3-03
Stall prevention limit during accel
StallP CHP Lvl
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Acceleration as set.
With a heavy load, the motor
may stall.)
1: Enabled (Acceleration
stopped when L3-02 level is
exceeded. Acceleration starts
again when the current is
returned.)
2: Intelligent acceleration mode
(Using the L3-02 level as a
basis, acceleration is
automatically adjusted. Set
acceleration time is
disregarded.)
0 to 2
1
Effective when L3-01 is set to 1
or 2.
Set as a percentage of Inverter
rated current.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting reduces the set
values when the motor stalls.
0 to
200
Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration, as a
percentage of the Inverter rated
current, when operation is in the
frequency range above E1-06.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0 to
100
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
No
No
48FH
150%
No
A
A
A
No
No
490H
50%
No
A
A
A
No
No
491H
6-23
Time Chart
The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-01 is set to 1.
Output current
Stall level during
acceleration
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency is controlled
to prevent the motor stalling.
Time
Fig 6.23 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
Setting Precautions
• If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity, or if the motor is operated using the fac-
tory settings, resulting in the motor stalling, lower the set value of L3-02.
• If using the motor in the constant output range, L3-02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling.
L3-03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being
reduced more than necessary.
• Set the constants as a percent taking the Inverter rated voltage to be 100%.
Stall prevention level during
acceleration
L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration)
L3-02 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration)
E1-06
Base Frequency (FA)
Output frequency
Fig 6.24 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration
6-24
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During
Deceleration Function)
The Stall Prevention During Deceleration function makes the rate of deceleration more gentle to suppress
increases in DC bus voltage when the DC bus voltage exceeds the set value during motor deceleration.
This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the bus voltage, even if the deceleration time has been set to a considerably small value.
If L3-04 is set to 1 or 2, when the main circuit DC voltage approaches the stall prevention level during deceleration, deceleration stops, and when deceleration falls below the level, is restarted. Using this operation,
deceleration time is automatically lengthened. If L3-04 is set to 1, deceleration time returns to the set value,
and if L3-04 is set to 2, deceleration is automatically adjusted to a faster deceleration time within the range of
the stall prevention level during deceleration.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 3*
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
MEMO
BUS
Register
Stall prevention selection
during decel
L3-04
0: Disabled (Deceleration as set.
If deceleration time is too
short, a main circuit
overvoltage may result.)
1: Enabled (Deceleration is
stopped when the main circuit
voltage exceeds the
overvoltage level.
Deceleration restarts when
voltage is returned.)
2: Intelligent deceleration mode
(Deceleration rate is
automatically adjusted so that
StallP Decel Sel
the Inverter can decelerate in
the shortest possible time. Set
deceleration time is
disregarded.)
3: Enabled (with Braking
Resistor Unit)
When a braking option (Braking
Resistor, Braking Resistor Unit,
Braking Unit) is used, always set
to 0 or 3.
492H
* The setting range for flux vector and open-loop vector 2 controls is 0 to 2.
6-25
Setting Example
An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set to 1 as shown below.
Deceleration time controlled to
prevent overvoltage
Output frequency
Time
Deceleration time
(set value)
Fig 6.25 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation
Setting Precautions
• The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the Inverter capacity. Refer to the fol-
lowing table for details.
Inverter Capacity
200 V Class
400 V Class
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V)
380
E1-01 ≥ 400 V
760
E1-01 &lt; 400 V
660
• When using the braking option (braking resistor, Braking Resistor Units, and Braking Units), be sure to set
constant L3-04 to 0 or 3.
• To decelerate at a shorter time than the deceleration time set when L3-04 is set to 0 with the braking option
enabled, set L3-04 to 3.
• The setting of L3-04 is ignored for flux vector control or open-loop vector 2 control.
Preventing Overvoltage by Automatically Reducing the Regenerative
Torque Limit (Overvoltage Inhibit Function, PRG: 102 only)
The overvoltage inhibit function is a function that, by reducing the regenerative torque limit to a value less
than its set value according to the main circuit voltage level, suppresses voltage rises with regenerative torque.
Using this function means that if, for example, the main circuit voltage rises during deceleration, the regenerative torque limit will be reduced and so the deceleration rate will be reduced automatically, suppressing rises
in the main circuit voltage.
This function is effective for suppressing overvoltages that occur during stabilization after an overshoot following sudden acceleration. This function differs from the stall prevention during deceleration function in this
respect.
This function is enabled during vector control.
6-26
Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Used to enable or disable the
function for inhibiting main circuit overvoltages by reducing the
regenerative torque limit according to the main circuit overvoltage
level.
If this function is enabled, when
the main circuit voltage rises,
operation will be performed with
the regenerative torque less than
the set value.
0 or 1
0
350 to
380
V*
Display
Overvoltage
inhibit selection
L3-11
OV Inhibit Sel
Overvoltage
inhibit voltage
level
L3-12
OV Inhbt
VoltLv1
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Sets the main circuit voltage level
for which the regenerative torque
limit is restricted to 0.
Usually, there is no need to
change this setting. If main circuit
overvoltages occur even with the
overvoltage inhibit function
enabled, reduce this setting.
390*
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
A
A
A
4C7H
No
No
No
A
A
A
4C8H
* These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
Setting Precautions
When this function is enabled, if the main circuit voltage rises, the regenerative torque limit will decrease to a
value less than its set value and so the motor will not rotate at the speed specified by the speed reference.
Therefore, in applications where it is necessary to rotate the motor at the speed specified by the speed reference, disable this function and use a converter, a dynamic braking resistor, or a power regenerative unit to suppress rises in the main circuit voltage.
6-27
Adjusting Frequency References
This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references.
Adjusting Analog Frequency References
Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H3-01
Display
Signal level
selection (terminal A1)
Term A1 Signal
H3-02
H3-03
H3-04
Gain (terminal
A1)
Terminal A1
Gain
Bias (terminal
A1)
Terminal A1
Bias
Signal level
selection (terminal A3)
Term A3 Signal
H3-05
Multi-function
analog input
(terminal A3)
function selection
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
Sets the frequency when 10 V is
0.0 to
input, as a percentage of the maxi1000.0
mum output frequency.
Sets the frequency when 0 V is
-100.0
input, as a percentage of the maxito
+100.0
mum frequency.
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
410H
100.0
%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
411H
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
412H
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
413H
Select multi-function analog input
0 to 1F
function for terminal A3.
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
414H
Description
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to 10 V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/
negative) input]
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to 10 V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/
negative) input]
Terminal A3
Sel
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
6-28
Gain (terminal
A3)
Sets the input gain (level) when
10 V is input.
Set according to the 100% value
selected from H3-05.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0
%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
415H
Sets the input gain (level) when
0 V is input.
Set according to the 100% value
selected from H3-05.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
416H
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to 10 V
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage input
Term A2 Signal using the switch on the control
panel.
0 to 2
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
417H
Terminal A3
Gain
Bias (terminal
A3)
Terminal A3
Bias
Signal level
selection
(terminal A2)
Adjusting Frequency References
Name
Constant
Number
H3-09
Display
Multi-function
analog input
(terminal A2)
function selection
Description
Setting
Range
Select multi-function analog input
0 to 1F
function for terminal A2.
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
418H
Terminal A2
Sel
H3-10
H3-11
H3-12
Gain (terminal
A2)
Terminal A2
Gain
Bias (terminal
A2)
Terminal A2
Bias
Analog input
filter time constant
Filter Avg
Time
Sets the input gain (level) when
10 V (20 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0
%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
419H
Sets the input gain (level) when 0
V (4 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
41AH
Sets primary delay filter time constant in seconds for the analog
0.00 to
input terminal.
2.00
Effective for noise control etc.
0.03
s
No
A
A
A
A
A
41BH
Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Constants
The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current.
If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal, perform adjustments using constants H3-02 and
H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal, perform adjustments using H3-10 and H3-11.
Adjustment can be made using H3-06 and H3-07 when multi-function analog input terminal A3 is used as a
frequency reference terminal.
Frequency reference
Frequency reference
(H3-06)
Terminal A2 input
voltage (current)
Terminal A1 (A3)
input voltage
(H3-07)
Terminal A1, A3 input
Terminal A2 input
Fig 6.26 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs
6-29
Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input
When H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 1 (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using the analog input
terminal A2 or A3.
Frequency gain
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 input level
Fig 6.27 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A2 Input)
The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the product of H3-02 and terminal A2 gain. For example, when H3-02
is set to 100% and terminal A2 is set to 5 V, the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50%.
Frequency reference
100%
H3-02
50%
H3-02
0.5
Terminal A1 input voltage
0
10 V
Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 or H3-05 is set to 0 (add to terminal A1), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 or
A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Frequency bias
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2 or A3 input level
Fig 6.28 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A2 or A3 Input)
For example, if H3-02 is 100%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A2 is set to 1 V, the frequency reference from
terminal A1 when 0 V is input to A1 will be 10%.
6-30
Adjusting Frequency References
Frequency reference
H3-02
10%
Bias
Terminal A1 input voltage
0V
10 V
When constant H3-09 or H3-05 is set to D (frequency bias 2), the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 or
A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias.
Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function)
The jump frequency function operates the motor while avoiding resonance caused by characteristic frequencies in the machinery.
This function is effective in creating a frequency reference dead band.
During constant-speed operation, operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Smooth operation
still used during acceleration and deceleration, i.e., jumps are not performed.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d3-01
Display
Jump frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
d3-04
Jump frequency width
Jump Bandwidth
Description
Setting
Range
Set the center values of the jump
frequencies in Hz.
This function is disabled by setting the jump frequency to 0 Hz.
Always ensure that the following
applies:
d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03
Operation in the jump frequency
range is prohibited but during
acceleration and deceleration,
speed changes smoothly without
jump.
0.0 to
400.0
Sets the jump frequency bandwidth in Hz.
The jump frequency will be the
jump frequency &plusmn; d3-04.
0.0 to
20.0
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 Hz
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
294H
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
295H
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
296H
1.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
297H
The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows:
6-31
Output frequency
Frequency reference descending
Jump frequency width d3-04
Frequency
reference
ascending
Jump
frequency
width d3-04
Jump
frequency
width d3-04
Jump frequency reference
Jump
frequency
3 (d3-03)
Jump
frequency
2 (d3-02)
Jump
frequency
1 (d3-01)
Fig 6.29 Jump Frequency
Setting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input
When constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to A (jump frequency), you can change the jump frequency using the terminal A2 input level.
Jump frequency
Max. output frequency
E1-04
0V
(4 mA)
Multi-function analog input
10 V terminal A2 or A3 input level
(20 mA)
Fig 6.30 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input
Setting Precautions
• Set the jump frequency according to the following formula: d3-01 ≥ d3-02 ≥ d3-03 &gt; Analog input.
• When constants d3-01 to d3-03 are set to 0 Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled.
6-32
Adjusting Frequency References
Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs
The frequency reference can be adjusted when b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set
the pulse frequency in constant H6-02 to 100% reference, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using
H6-03 and H6-04.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H6-01
H6-04
H6-05
Change
during
Operation
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
0 to 2
0
Set the number of pulses in hertz,
taking the reference to be 100%.
1000
to
32000
Set the input gain level as a percent when the pulse train set in
H6-02 is input.
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
42CH
1440
Hz
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42DH
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0
%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42EH
Set the input bias when the pulse
train is 0.
-100.0
to
100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
42FH
Pulse train
Set the pulse train input primary
input filter time delay filter time constant in seconds.
PI Filter Time
0.00 to
2.00
0.10
s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
430H
Display
Pulse train
input function
selection
Pulse train
input scaling
PI Scaling
H6-03
Factory
Setting
V/f
with
PG
Pulse Input Sel
H6-02
Description
Setting
Range
Pulse train
input gain
Pulse Input
Gain
Pulse train
input bias
Pulse Input
Bias
The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the frequency reference using pulse inputs.
Gain and bias
Filter
RP
Pulse
Cycle
measurement
=0
H6-03
=1
1
1+sT
H6-04
H6-05
0
100
=2
Master speed
frequency
PID feedback
PID target value
H6-01
Scaling using H6-02
Fig 6.31 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs
6-33
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
This section explains how to limit the motor speed.
Limiting Maximum Output Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency, use constant d2-01.
Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percent, taking E1-04 (Maximum Output Frequency) to be 100%.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d2-01
Display
Frequency reference upper
limit
Ref Upper
Limit
Description
Setting
Range
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Set the output frequency upper
limit as a percent, taking the max.
output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0
%
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
289H
Limiting Minimum Frequency
If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency, use constants d2-02 or d2-03.
There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows:
• Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies.
• Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multi-
step speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d2-02
Display
Frequency reference lower
limit
Ref Lower
Limit
d2-03
6-34
Description
Setting
Range
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Sets the output frequency lower
limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
0.0 to
110.0
0.0%
Master speed
reference lower Set the master speed reference
lower limit as a percent, taking
limit
the max. output frequency to be
Ref1 Lower
100%.
Limit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
28AH
No
A
A
A
A
A
293H
Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function)
Adjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 9 (frequency reference lower limit level), you can
adjust the frequency lower level using the terminal A2 input level.
Output frequency lower level
Max. output frequency
E1-04
0V
(4 mA)
Multi-function analog input
10 V terminal A2 or A3 input level
(20 mA)
Fig 6.32 Output Frequency Lower Level for Multi-function Analog Input
If constant d2-02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower level have been set at the same time, the larger set
value will become the frequency lower limit.
INFO
6-35
Improved Operating Efficiency
This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency.
Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function)
When the load is large, the amount of motor slip also grows large and the motor speed decreases. The slip
compensation function controls the motor at a constant speed, regardless of changes in load. When the motor
is operating at the rated load, constant E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) &times; the frequency in constant C3-01 is added to
the output frequency.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Register
Slip compensation gain
C3-01
Used to improve speed accuracy
when operating with a load.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
• When actual speed is low,
increase the set value.
Slip Comp Gain • When actual speed is high,
decrease the set value.
Used as the applicable control
gain when using flux vector control.
Setting
Range
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Slip compensation primary
delay time
C3-02
Slip Comp
Time
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
Slip Comp
Limit
Slip compensation selection
during regeneration
C3-04
Slip Comp
Regen
C3-05
Output voltage
limit operation
selection
Output V limit
Slip compensation primary delay
time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust this constant at the following times.
• Reduce the setting when slip
compensation responsive is
slow.
• When speed is not stabilized,
increase the setting.
Sets the slip compensation limit
as a percentage of motor rated
slip.
0.0 to
2.5
0 to
10000
1.0*
Yes
A
No
A
A
No
20FH
200
ms
No
A
No
A
No
No
210H
*
0 to
250
200%
No
A
No
A
No
No
211H
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When the slip compensation during regeneration function has
been activated, as regeneration
capacity increases momentarily, it
may be necessary to use a braking
option (braking resistor, Braking
Resistor Unit or Braking Unit.)
0 or 1
0
No
A
No
A
No
No
212H
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled. (The motor flux will
be lowered automatically
when the output voltage
become saturated.)
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
A
A
No
213H
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
6-36
Improved Operating Efficiency
Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain
You can switch the C3-01 constant settings as shown below by changing the control method.
• V/f control: 0.0
• Open-loop vector control: 1.0
• Flux vector control: 1.0
Set C3-01 to 1.0 to compensate the rated slip set using the rated torque output status.
Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.
1. Set E2-02 (Motor Rated Slip) and E2-03 (Motor No-load Current) correctly.
You can calculate the motor rated slip from the values on the motor nameplate using the following formula.
Amount of motor rated slip (Hz) = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min−1.) &times; No. of
motor poles / 120
Set the values for rated voltage, rated frequency, and no-load current in the motor unladen current. The
motor rated slip is set automatically in the vector control using autotuning.
2. In V/f control, set C3-01 to 1.0. Setting this constant to 0.0 disables slip compensation.
3. Apply a load, and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation
gain by 0.1 at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if
the speed is greater than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
For flux vector control, the slip compensation gain is used as the motor temperature compensation gain. When
the motor temperate increases, the motor’s internal constant increases, resulting in an increase in slip. If C3-01
is set, the amount of slip is adjusted as the temperature rises. Set C3-01 if the amount of torque varies with the
temperature when using torque control or a torque limit. The larger the value of C3-01, the larger the compensation.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the slip compensation primary delay time constant in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method.
• V/f control: 2000 ms
• Open-loop vector control: 200 ms
Normally, there is no need to make these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set
value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value.
Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit
In C3-03, set the upper limit for the slip compensation amount as a percent, taking the motor rated slip amount
as 100%.
If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even when you adjust the slip compensation
gain, the motor may have reached the slip compensation limit. Increase the limit, and check the speed again.
Make the settings, however, to make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency
does not exceed the tolerance of the machine.
The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range.
6-37
Slip compensation limit
Output frequency
E1-06: Base frequency
E1-04: Maximum output frequency
Fig 6.33 Slip Compensation Limit
Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration
Set whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration.
If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, you might have to use the braking option
(braking resistor, Braking Resistor Unit, and Braking Unit) to momentarily increase the regenerative amount.
Selecting Output Voltage Limit Operation
If output voltage saturation occurs while the output voltage limit operation is disabled, the output current will
not change, but torque control accuracy will be lost. If torque control accuracy is required, change the settings
to enable the output voltage limit operation.
If the output voltage limit operation is enabled, motor magnetic flux current is controlled automatically, and
torque control accuracy is maintained to limit the output voltage references. Consequently, the output current
will increase by approximately 10% maximum (with rated load) compared with when the output voltage limit
operation is disabled, so check the Inverter current margin.
Setting Precautions
• If using the device at medium to low speed only, if the power supply voltage is 10% or more higher than
the motor rated voltage, or if the torque control accuracy at high speeds is insufficient, it is not necessary to
change the output voltage limit operation.
• If the power supply voltage is too low compared with the motor rated voltage, torque control accuracy may
be lost even if the output voltage limit operation is enabled.
Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation (Torque Compensation)
The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased, and increases the output torque.
V/f control calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the output voltage (V), and
compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate the compensation
voltage as follows: Motor primary voltage loss &times; constant C4-01.
Vector control separates the motor excitation current and the torque current by calculating the motor primary
current, and controlling each of the two separately.
Calculate the torque current as follows: Calculated torque reference &times; C4-01
6-38
Improved Operating Efficiency
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Torque compensation gain
C4-01
Torq Comp
Gain
Torque compensation primary delay time
constant
C4-02
Torq Comp
Time
Description
Setting
Range
Sets torque compensation gain as
a ratio.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the cable is long;
increase the set value.
• When the motor capacity is
smaller than the Inverter capacity (Max. applicable motor
capacity), increase the set val- 0.00 to
ues.
2.50
• When the motor is oscillating,
decrease the set values.
Adjust the output current range at
minimum speed rotation so that it
does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current.
Do not alter the torque compensation gain from its default (1.00)
when using the open-loop vector1
control method.
The torque compensation delay
time is set in ms units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Adjust in the following circumstances:
• When the motor is oscillating,
increase the set values.
• When the responsiveness of the
motor is low, decrease the set
values.
0 to
10000
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
1.00
20 ms
*
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
A
A
A
No
No
215H
No
A
A
A
No
No
216H
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain
Normally, there is no need to make this adjustment. Do not adjust the torque compensation gain when using
open-loop vector control.
Adjust the torque compensation gain using V/f control in the following circumstances.
• If the cable is very long, increase the set value.
• If the (maximum applicable) motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity, increase the set value.
• If the motor is vibrating, reduce the set value.
Adjust this constant so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated
output current range.
Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant
Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms.
You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method settings:
• V/f control: 200 ms
• V/f control with PG: 200 ms
• Open-loop vector control: 20 ms
6-39
Normally, there is no need to make this setting. Adjust the constant as shown below.
• If the motor is vibrating, increase the set value.
• If the motor response is low, decrease the set value.
Hunting-prevention Function
The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load. This function can be used in V/f and V/f with PG.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Hunting-prevention function selection
N1-01
Hunt Prev
Select
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Hunting-prevention function
disabled
1: Hunting-prevention function
enabled
The hunting-prevention function
suppresses hunting when the
motor is operating with a light
load.
This function is enabled in V/f
control method only.
If high response is to be given priority over vibration suppression,
disable the hunting-prevention
function.
0 or 1
1
1.00
N1-02
Set the hunting-prevention gain
multiplication factor.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Make the adjustments as follows:
• If vibration occurs with light
0.00 to
load, increase the setting.
2.50
Hunt Prev Gain • If the motor stalls, reduce the
setting.
If the setting is too large, the voltage will be too suppressed and the
motor may stall.
N1-03
Hunting-prevention time
constant
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
No
No
No
580H
No
A
A
No
No
No
581H
No
A
A
No
No
No
582H
Hunting-prevention gain
*1
Set the hunting-prevention primary delay time in units of ms.
0 to
500
10
ms*2
Hunt Prev Time
* 1. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software version PRG: 1034 and later.
* 2. The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
6-40
Improved Operating Efficiency
Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function)
The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function measures the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly applied, by calculating the amount of fluctuation of the torque current feedback value, and compensating the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR)
gain
N2-01
AFR Gain
N2-02
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR)
time constant
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the internal speed feedback
detection control gain using the
multiplication function.
Normally, there is no need to
make this setting.
Adjust this constant as follows:
• If hunting occurs, increase the
set value.
• If response is low, decrease the
set value.
Adjust the setting by 0.05 at a
time, while checking the
response.
0.00 to
10.00
1.00
Set the time constant to decide the
rate of change in the speed feedback detection control.
0 to
2000
Increase the setting if overvoltage
(OV) failures occur at the completion of acceleration or when the
load changes radically.
0 to
2000
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
A
No
No
584H
50 ms
No
No
No
A
No
No
585H
750
ms
No
No
No
A
No
No
586H
AFR Time
N2-03
Speed feedback detection
control (AFR)
time constant 2
AFR Time 2
6-41
Machine Protection
This section explains functions for protecting the machine.
Reducing Noise and Leakage Current
The switching frequency of the Inverter’s output transistor can be changed to reduce carrier noise and leakage
current from the motor.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
C6-02
Display
Control Methods
Description
Carrier frequency
Select carrier wave fixed pattern.
selection
Select F to enable detailed settings using
constants C6-03 to C6-07.
Carrier
Setting
Range
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
1 to F
6
*2
*1
2.0 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*2 *5
*1
0.4 to
15.0
15.0
kHz
*2 *5
*1
00 to
99
00
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
No
A
A
A
A
No
225H
No
A
A
No
No
No
226H
No
A
A
No
No
No
227H
No
No
No
No
*4
*4
*4
*4
Q
22DH
No
*4
224H
Freq Sel
C6-03
*3
C6-04
*3
C6-05
*3
C6-11
Carrier
frequency
upper limit
Carrier
Freq Max
Carrier
frequency
lower limit
Carrier
Freq Min
6-42
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Carrier frequency
Output frequency x (C6-05) x K
Output
Carrier frefrequency
quency
(Max. output frequency)
proportional gain K is a coefficient that depends on the
setting of C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K = 3
Carrier
Freq Gain 10.0 kHz &gt; C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K = 2
5.0 kHz &gt; C6-03: K = 1
Carrier frequency
selection
for openloop vector
2 control
Carrier
Freq Sel
*
*
*
*
*
Set the carrier frequency upper limit and
lower limit in kHz units.
The carrier frequency gain is set as follows:
With the vector control method, the
upper limit of the carrier frequency is
fixed in C6-03.
Select the carrier frequency when openloop vector 2 control is used.
1: 2 kHz
2: 4 kHz
3: 6 kHz
4: 8 kHz
1 to 4
4
*1
No
The factory settings depend on the capacity of the Inverter. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.
The setting ranges depend on the capacity of the Inverter. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW are given.
This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.
Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi-function input.
The maximum output frequency depends on the setting for the carrier frequency (refer to page 6-43).
Machine Protection
Control Method and Carrier Frequency Settings
Carrier frequency settings are restricted as listed in the following table according to the control method selection.
Control Method
V/f control with or without a PG
Open-loop vector 1 control or
Flux vector control
Open-loop vector 2 control
Carrier Frequency
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
F: Any setting*
Detailed settings are available in C6-03, C6-04, and C6-05.
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 5.0 kHz
3: 8.0 kHz
4: 10.0 kHz
5: 12.5 kHz
6: 15.0 kHz
F: Any setting*
The upper limit of the carrier frequency is determined by C6-03.
1: 2.0 kHz
2: 4.0 kHz
3: 6.0 kHz
4: 8.0 kHz
* The upper limit of the carrier frequency depends on the Inverter capacity.
Carrier Frequency Setting Precautions
When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions.
• Adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below.
If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following
values as guidelines.)
Wiring Length
50 m or less
100 m or less
Over 100 m
C6-02 (carrier frequency
selection) setting
1 to 6 (15 kHz)
1 to 4 (10 kHz)
1 to 2 (5 kHz)
If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low.
If leakage current from the Inverter is large: Set the carrier frequency low.
If metallic noise from the motor is large: Set the carrier frequency high.
• When using V/f control or V/f control with PG, you can vary the carrier frequency according to the output
frequency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04
(Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain).
6-43
Carrier Frequency
C6-03
Output frequency &times; C6-05
&times; K*
C6-04
Output frequency
E1-04
Max. Output Frequency
* K is the coefficient determined by the set
value in C6-03.
C6-03 ≥ 10.0 kHz: K=3
10.0 kHz &gt; C6-03 ≥ 5.0 kHz: K=2
5.0 kHz &lt; C6-03: K=1
Fig 6.34
• With vector control, the carrier frequency is fixed to the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6-03 if user-
set or by the carrier frequency set in C6-02.
• To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 to the same value, or set C6-05 to 0.
• If the settings are as shown below, OPE11 (Constant setting error) will occur.
If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) &gt; 6 and C6-03 &lt; C6-04.
• The Inverter overload current level can be reduced by the carrier frequency setting, and an OL2 (Inverter
overload) may be detected even if the overload current is smaller than 150%. The reduction levels of the
Inverter overload current are shown in the following figures.
Overload current reduction level
100%
80%
200 V Class,
22 kW
50%
0
10 kHz
15 kHz
Carrier frequency
Fig 6.35 Reduction Levels for V/f, V/f with PG, Open-loop Vector 1, and Flux Vector Control
6-44
Machine Protection
Overload current reduction level
100%
87%
200 V Class,
30 to 75 kW
50%
Carrier frequency
0
8 kHz
4 kHz
Fig 6.36 Reduction Levels for Open-loop Vector 2 Control
For 400 V Class Inverters, the following limitations apply to the maximum output frequency that can be set
for the carrier frequency settings.
Carrier Frequency
0.4 kHz
1 kHz
2 kHz
3 kHz
5 kHz
8 kHz
Maximum output frequency setting
33 Hz
83 Hz
166 Hz
250 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
40P4 to
4110
40P4 to
4075
40P4 to
4045
Applicable Inverter capacity
CIMR-G7A
40P4 to 4300
6-45
Limiting Motor Torque (Torque Limit Function)
The motor torque limit function is enabled with flux vector control and open-loop vector control.
In the open-loop vector control and flux vector control, the user-set value is applied to the torque limit by calculating internally the torque output by the motor. Enable this function if you do not want a torque above a
specified amount to be applied to the load, or if you do not want a regeneration value above a specified
amount to occur.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
L7-01
Forward
drive
torque limit
Control Methods
Setting
Range
Description
L7-03
Torq Lmt
Fwd Rgn
L7-04
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4A7H
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4A8H
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4A9H
0 to
300
200%
No
No
No
A
A
A
4AAH
Set the integral time for the torque limit.
When integral control is set for the
torque limit, reduce this setting to
increase the change in frequency for the
torque limit.
*Normally handled with PRG: 103.
5 to
10,000
200
ms
No
No
No
A
No
No
4ACH
Select the control method for the torque
limit during acceleration and deceleration.
0: Proportional control (integral control
during constant speed)
1: Integral control
Normally, this constant does not need to
be set.
*Normally handled with PRG: 103.
0, 1
0
No
No
No
A
No
No
4C9H
Reverse
Sets the torque limit value as a percentdrive
torque limit age of the motor rated torque.
Four individual regions can be set.
Torq Limit
Output torque
Rev
Forward
regenerative torque
limit
V/f
V/f
with
PG
0 to
300
Torq Limit
Fwd
L7-02
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Positive torque
Reverse
No. of
motor
rotations
Regenerative
state
Regenerative
state
Forward
Negative torque
Reverse
regenerative torque
limit
Torq Lmt
Rev Rgn
L7-06
Integral
time setting for
torque limit
Torq Limit
Time
L7-07
Control
method
selection
for torque
limit during
acceleration and
deceleration
Torque
Limit Sel
6-46
Machine Protection
Multi-function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
Contents (100%)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
10
Positive torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
11
Negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
12
Regenerative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
15
Positive/negative torque limit
Motor's rated torque
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note The forward torque limit is the limit value when the analog input signal generates forward torque. This torque limit setting is enabled even when the
analog input signal generates forward torque while the motor is operating (regeneration).
Setting the Torque Limit in Constants
Using L7-01 to L7-04, you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions: Forward drive,
reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration.
Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input
You can change the analog input level torque limit value by setting the torque limit in multi-function analog
input terminals A2 and A3.
The analog input terminal signal level is factory-set as follows:
Multi-function analog input terminal A2: 4 to 20 mA
Multi-function analog input terminal A3: 0 to 10
The following diagram shows the relationship between the torque limits.
Output torque
Positive
Positive/negative torque limits
Forward torque limit
Regenerative torque limit
No. of motor rotations
Forward operation
Reverse operation
Regenerative torque limit
Negative torque limit
Positive/negative torque limits
Negative
Fig 6.37 Torque Limit by Analog Input
6-47
Setting Torque Limits Using Constants and an Analog Input
The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using constants and torque limit
using an analog input.
Multi-function analog input
Forward torque limit
Terminal (set value = 10)
A2 or A3
Negative torque limit
(set value = 11)
Regenerative torque limit
(set value = 12)
Positive/negative torque limit
(set value = 15)
Positive forward drive
torque
Reverse positive regenerative torque
Forward negative regenerative torque
Min: Minimum value priority circuit
Reverse
drive
reverse
torque
Forward torque limit
(L7-01)
Constants
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
(L7-02)
Forward regenerative torque
limit (L7-03)
Reverse torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque
limit (L7-04)
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
Forward regenerative
torque limit
175% of Inverter rated current
Fig 6.38 Torque Limit Using Constants and an Analog Input
Selecting the Control Method for Torque Limit during Acceleration and Deceleration
(PRG: 103 only)
L7-07 is used to select the control method for the torque limit during acceleration and deceleration. The selections are proportional control and integral control. For applications, such as presses, in which the torque limit
will be reached during acceleration and deceleration, torque control can be given priority by selecting integral
control. To increase the change in frequency for the torque limit when integral control is selected, decrease the
value set for L7-06 (Integral Time Setting for Torque Limit).
Setting Precautions
• When the torque limit function is operating, control and compensation of the motor speed is disabled
because torque control is given priority. Therefore, the acceleration and deceleration times may increase or
the number of motor rotations may decrease.
• When using the torque limit to raise and lower loads, do not carelessly lower the torque limit value, as this
may result in the motor falling or slipping.
• Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value (during 10 V or 20 mA input) of 100% of the
motor rated torque. To make the torque limit value during 10 V or 20 mA input 150% of the rated torque,
set the input terminal gain to 150.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A2 using
H3-10 and for multi-function analog input terminal A3 using H3-06.
• The torque limit accuracy is &plusmn;5% at the output frequency of 10 Hz or above. When output frequency is less
than 10 Hz, accuracy is lowered.
• When the torque is limited while L7-07 is set to 1 (integral control), the acceleration and deceleration
times may increase or the motor speed may not agree with the speed reference value.
6-48
Machine Protection
Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation
Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter's
output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed.
Stall prevention during operation is enabled only during V/f control. If the Inverter output current continues to
exceed the setting in constant L3-06 for 100 ms or longer, the motor speed is reduced. Set whether to enable or
disable deceleration time using constant L3-05. Set the deceleration time using C1-02 (Acceleration time 1) or
C1-04 (Acceleration Time 2).
If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3-06 - 2% (Inverter Rated Output Current), the motor
will accelerate again at the frequency set or the acceleration time set.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Stall prevention selection
during running
L3-05
StallP Run Sel
L3-06
Stall prevention level during running
StallP Run
Level
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled (Runs as set. With a
heavy load, the motor may
stall.)
1: Deceleration time 1 (the
deceleration time for the stall
prevention function is C1-02.)
2: Deceleration time 2 (the
deceleration time for the stall
prevention function is C1-04.)
0 to 2
1
Effective when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Set as a percentage of the Inverter
rated current.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting reduces the set
values when the motor stalls.
30 to
200
160%
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
No
No
No
493H
No
A
A
No
No
No
494H
6-49
Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 8 (stall prevention level during run), you can change the stall
level during operation by setting H3-10 (Gain (Terminal A2)) and H3-11 (Bias (Terminal A2)) or H3-06 (Gain
(Terminal A3)) and H3-07 (Bias (Terminal A3).
The stall prevention level during operation enabled is the multi-function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input
level or the set value in constant L3-06, whichever is the smaller.
Stall prevention level during operation
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA) (8.8 mA) (20 mA)
Fig 6.39 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input
If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation.
INFO
Using Frequency Detection: L4-01 to L4-05
Set these constants when outputting one of the frequency agree or frequency detection signals from a multifunction output. When using flux vector control, the motor speed is detected.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Speed agree
detection level
L4-01
L4-02
6-50
Spd Agree
Level
Speed agree
detection width
Spd Agree
Width
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the speed that you want to
detect in Hz.
The set speed is an absolute value,
so the speed is detected in forward
or reverse.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
Set the speed detection range in
Hz.
0.0 to
20.0
2.0 Hz
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
499H
No
A
A
A
A
A
49AH
Machine Protection
Name
Constant
Number
L4-03
Display
Speed agree
detection level
(+/−)
Spd Agree Lvl
+−
L4-04
Description
Speed agree
detection width
(+/−)
Spd Agree
Width +−
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Register
Set the speed that you want to
detect in Hz.
Set positive values for forward,
negative values for reverse.
−400.0
0.0 Hz
to
+400.0
No
A
A
A
A
A
49BH
Set the speed detection range in
Hz.
0.0 to
20.0
No
A
A
A
A
A
49CH
2.0 Hz
Constants and Output Signals
User Constant Number
Name
Function
Speed agree detection level
Fref/Set Agree 1
Frequency Detection 1
Frequency Detection 2
Frequency Detection 5
L4-02
Speed agree detection width
Fref/Fout Agree 1
Fref/Set Agree 1
Frequency Detection 1
Frequency Detection 2
Frequency Detection 5
L4-03
Speed agree detection level (+/-)
Fref/Set Agree 2
Frequency Detection 3
Frequency Detection 4
Speed agree detection width (+/-)
Fref/Fout Agree 2
Fref/Set Agree 2
Frequency Detection 3
Frequency Detection 4
L4-01
L4-04
Set the corresponding setting in the multi-function output (H2-01 to H2-05) to output the desired Fref/Fout
Agree signal, Fref/Set Agree signal, or Frequency Detection signal.
Function
Setting
Fref/Fout Agree 1
2
Fref/Set Agree 1
3
Frequency Detection 1
4
Frequency Detection 2
5
Fref/Fout Agree 2
13
Fref/Set Agree 2
14
Frequency Detection 3
15
Frequency Detection 4
16
Frequency Detection 5
36
6-51
Timing Chart for Frequency Detection Operation
Related
constant
L4-01: Speed Agree Level
L4-02: Speed Agree Width
Fref/Fout Agree 1
Frequency
reference
Fref/Fout
Agree
L4-02
L4-03: Speed Agree Level +/−
L4-04: Speed Agree Width +/−
Fref/Fout Agree 2
Frequency
reference
L4-04
Output frequency
or motor speed
Output frequency
or motor speed
L4-02
Fref/Fout Agree 1
OFF
ON
OFF
Fref/Fout Agree 2
(Multi-function output setting = 2)
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 13)
Fref/Set Agree 1
(ON at the following conditions during frequency
agree)
Fref/Set Agree 2 +/−
(ON at the following conditions during frequency
agree)
L4-02
L4-04
L4-03
L4-01
Fref/Set
Agree
Output frequency
or motor speed
put frequency
motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
f/Set Agree 1 OFF
Fref/Set Agree 2 OFF
ON
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 14)
(Multi-function output setting = 3)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 1
(L4-01 &gt; | Output frequency |)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 3
(L4-03 &gt; Output frequency)
L4-04
L4-02
L4-03
L4-01
Output frequency
or motor speed
Output frequency
or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 1
ON
Freq. Detection 3
OFF
ON
OFF
(Multi-function output setting = 15)
(Multi-function output setting = 4)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 2
(L4-01 &lt; | Output frequency |)
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 4
(L4-01 &lt; Output frequency)
L4-02
L4-04
L4-03
L4-01
Frequency
Detection
Output frequency
or motor speed
Output frequency
or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 2
OFF
Freq. Detection 4
ON
Frequency (FOUT) Detection 5
(L4-01 &lt; | Output frequency |)
L4-02
L4-01
Output frequency
or motor speed
L4-01
L4-02
Freq. Detection 5
OFF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 36)
6-52
OFF
ON
(Multi-function output setting = 16)
(Multi-function output setting = 5)
OFF during baseblock
Machine Protection
Detecting Motor Torque
If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overtorque) or the load is suddenly lightened (undertorque),
you can output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal M1-M2, P1-PC, P2-PC, P3-C3, or P4-C4.
To use the overtorque/undertorque detection function, set B, 17, 18, 19 (overtorque/undertorque detection NO/
NC) in one of the following constants: H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, P2PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection).
The overtorque/undertorque detection level is the current level (Inverter rated output current 100%) in V/f
control, and the motor torque (motor rated torque 100%) in vector control.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Torque detection selection 1
L6-01
Torq Det 1 Sel
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
Torq Det 1 Lvl
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Overtorque/undertorque
detection disabled.
1: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
2: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation continues
after overtorque (warning).
3: Overtorque detection only
with speed agreement; output
stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
4: Overtorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
5: Undertorque detection only
with speed agreement;
operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
6: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; operation continues
after overtorque (warning).
7: Undertorque detection only
with speed agreement; output
stopped upon detection
(protected operation).
8: Undertorque detected
continuously during
operation; output stopped
upon detection (protected
operation).
0 to 8
0
Open-loop vector control: Motor
rated torque is set as 100%.
V/f control: Inverter rated current
is set as 100%.
0 to
300
150%
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A1H
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A2H
6-53
Name
Constant
Number
L6-03
L6-04
Display
Torque detection time 1
Torq Det 1
Time
Torque detection selection 2
Torq Det 2 Sel
L6-05
Torque detection level 2
Torq Det 2 Lvl
L6-06
Torque detection time 2
Torq Det 2
Time
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the overtorque/undertorque
detection time in 1-second units.
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
Multi-function output for overtorque detection 1 is output to
multi-function contact output
when overtorque detection 1 NO
or overtorque detection 1 NC is
selected. Multi-function output
for overtorque detection 2 is output to multi-function contact output when overtorque detection 2
NO or overtorque detection 2 NC
is selected.
0 to 8
Description
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A3H
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A4H
0 to
300
150%
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A5H
0.0 to
10.0
0.1 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
4A6H
Multi-function Output (H2-01 to H2-05)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
6-54
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
B
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NO (NO contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
17
Overtorque/undertorque detection 1 NC (NC Contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
18
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NO (NO Contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
19
Overtorque/undertorque detection 2 NC (NC Contact: Overtorque/undertorque detection at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Machine Protection
L6-01 and L6-04 Set Values and LCD Indications
The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is
detected, and the set values in L6-01 and L6-04, is shown in the following table.
Set
Value
LCD Indications
Overtorque/
Overtorque/
Undertorque Undertorque
Detection 1
Detection 2
Function
0
Overtorque/undertorque detection disabled.
-
-
1
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
OL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
2
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
after overtorque (warning).
OL3 flashes
OL4 flashes
3
Overtorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon detection (protected operation).
OL3 lit
OL4 lit
4
Overtorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
OL3 lit
OL4 lit
5
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after
overtorque (warning).
UL3 flashes
UL4 flashes
6
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; operation continues
after overtorque (warning).
UL3 flashes
UL4 flashes
7
Undertorque detection only with speed matching; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
UL3 lit
UL4 lit
8
Undertorque detected continuously during operation; output stopped upon
detection (protected operation).
UL3 lit
UL4 lit
Setting Example
The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection.
• Overtorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
*
L6-02 or L6-05
Overtorque detection 1 NO
or overtorque detection 2 NO
L6-03 or
L6-06
ON
*
L6-03 or
L6-06
ON
* Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque).
6-55
• Undertorque Detection
Motor current (output torque)
*
L6-02 or L6-05
Undertorque detection 1 NO
or Undertorque detection 2 NO
L6-03
or
L6-06
ON
L6-03
or
L6-06
ON
* The undertorque detection disabled margin is approximately 10% of the Inverter rated output
current (or motor rated torque)
Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input
If you set constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to 7 (overtorque/undertorque detection level), you can
change the overtorque/undertorque detection level.
If you change the overtorque/undertorque detection level using the multi-function analog input, only overtorque/undertorque detection level 1 will be enabled.
The following diagram shows the overtorque/undertorque detection level using an analog input.
Detection level
Multi-function analog input
terminal A2, A3 input level
(4 mA)
(20 mA)
Fig 6.40 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
7
6-56
Function
Overtorque/undertorque detection
level
Contents (100%)
Motor rated torque for vector control
Inverter rated output current for V/f control
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Machine Protection
Motor Overload Protection
You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter's built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor rated
current
E2-01
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor 2 rated
current
E4-01
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor protection selection
L1-01
MOL Fault
Select
Motor protection time constant
L1-02
MOL Time
Const
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Register
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A
units.
These set values will become the
0.32 to
reference values for motor protec1.90 A
6.40
*1
tion, torque limits and torque con*2
trol.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
30EH
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A
units.
These set values will become the
reference values for motor protection, torque limits and torque control.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
No
A
A
A
A
A
321H
0.32
to
6.40
1.90 A
*1
*3
Sets whether the motor overload
function is enabled or disabled at
electric thermal overload relay.
0: Disabled
1: General-purpose motor
protection
2: Inverter motor protection
3: Vector motor protection
In some applications when the
Inverter power supply is turned
off, the thermal value is reset, so
even if this constant is set to 1,
protection may not be effective.
When several motors are connected to one Inverter, set to 0 and
ensure that each motor is installed
with a protection device.
0 to 3
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
480H
Sets the electric thermal detection
time in seconds units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
The factory setting is 150% overload for one minute.
When the motor's overload resistance is known, also set the overload resistance protection time for
when the motor is hot started.
0.1 to
5.0
1.0
min
No
A
A
A
A
A
481H
* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
For the motor no-load current, set E2-03 to a value less than that of E2-01.
* 3. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
6-57
Multi-Function Outputs (H2-01 to H2-05)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
1F
Function
Motor overload (OL1, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection
level)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Setting Motor Rated Current
Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E2-01 (for motor 1) and E4-01 (for motor 2).
This set value is the electronic thermal base current.
Setting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics
Set the overload protection function in L1-01 according to the applicable motor.
The induction motor's cooling abilities differ according to the speed control range. Consequently, you must
select the electronic thermal protection characteristics to match the applicable motor's tolerance load characteristics.
The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics.
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type
Tolerance Load Characteristics
Cooling Ability
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
1
General-purpose
motor (standard
motor)
Torque (%)
Short time 60 s.
Continuous
Frame
number
Max.
speed Frame number Max. speed
of 200 of 160 MJ to 160 LJ min.
LJ min.
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Use this motor for
operations using a
commercial power
supply. This motor
construction yields
best cooling effect
when operating at 50/
60 Hz.
When operating continuously at 50/60 Hz or less,
motor overload detection
(OL1) is detected. The
Inverter outputs the error
contact, and the motor
coasts to a stop.
This motor yields a
cooling effect even
when operating at
low speeds (approx.
6 Hz).
Operates continuously at 6
to 50/60 Hz.
Rotation speed (%)
2
Inverter motor
(constant torque)
(1:10)
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
Torque (%)
Short time 60
Continuous
Frame number Max.
speed of 200 LJ min.
Frame number Max. speed
of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
Rotation speed (%)
6-58
Machine Protection
L1-01
Set
Value
Motor Type
Tolerance Load Characteristics
3
Vector motor
(1:100)
Electronic Thermal
Operation (at 100%
Motor Load)
Rated rotation speed
= 100% speed
Torque (%)
Short time 60 s.
Cooling Ability
Continuous
Frame number
Max. speed of
200 LJ min.
Frame number Max. speed
of 160 MJ to 180 LJ
Frame number Max.
speed of 132 MJ
This motor yields a
cooling effect even
Operates continuously at
when operating at
0.6 to 60 Hz.
extremely low speeds
(approx. 0.6 Hz).
Rotation speed (%)
Setting Motor Protection Operation Time
Set the motor protection operation time in L1-02.
If, after operating the motor continuously at the rated current, a 150% overload is experienced, set the (hot
start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The factory setting is resistance to 150% for 60 seconds.
The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation
time (L1-02 = 1.0 min., operation at 60 Hz, general-purpose motor characteristics, when L1-01 is set to 1)
Operating time (min.)
Cold start
Hot start
Motor current (%)
E2-01 is set to 100%
Fig 6.41 Motor Protection Operation Time
Setting Precautions
• If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter, set constant L1-01 to 0 (disabled). To protect the motor,
install a thermal relay in the motor power cable, and perform overload protection on each motor.
• With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be protected even if this constant has been set to 1 (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset.
• To detect overloads in good time, set the set value in constant L1-02 to a low setting.
• When using a general-purpose motor (standard motor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f1/4 (fre-
quency). Consequently, the frequency may cause motor overload protection (OL1) to occur, even below
the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special motor.
6-59
Setting the Motor Overload Pre-Alarm
If the motor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L1-01 is set to other than 0) and you set H2-01 to
H2-05 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, P2-PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to 1F
(motor overload OL1 pre-alarm), the motor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value
reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON.
Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs
Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC
(Positive Temperature Coefficient) built into the windings of each motor phase.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Alarm operation selection
during motor
overheating
L1-03
MOL Thm
Input
Motor overheating operation selection
L1-04
MOL Filter
Time
L1-05
6-60
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the input motor
temperature (thermistor) input
exceeds the alarm detection level
(1.17 V).
0: Decelerate to stop using the
deceleration time in C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
3: Continue operation (H3 on the
Operator flashes).
0 to 3
3
Set H3-09 to E and select the
operation when the motor temperature (thermistor) input exceeds
the operation detection level (2.34
V).
0: Decelerate to stop using the
deceleration time in C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using the
deceleration time in C1-09.
0 to 2
1
Motor temperature input filter Set H3-09 to E and set the primary delay time constant for
time constant
motor temperature (thermistor)
MOL Filter
inputs in seconds.
Time
0.00 to
0.20 s
10.00
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
482H
No
A
A
A
A
A
483H
No
A
A
A
A
A
484H
Machine Protection
PTC Thermistor Characteristics
The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermistor temperature to the resistance value.
Class F
150&deg;C
Resistance (ohms)
Class H
180&deg;C
1330
Tr: Temperature threshold value
550
Tr
Tr
5
Tr
Temperature
Tr+5
Fig 6.42 PTC Thermistor Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics
Operation during Motor Overheating
Set the operation if the motor overheats in constants L1-03 and L1-04. Set the motor temperature input filter
time constant in L1-05. If the motor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital
Operator.
Error Codes If the Motor Overheats
Error Code
Details
OH3
Inverter stops or continues to operate, according to the setting in L1-03.
OH4
Inverter stops according to the setting in L1-04.
By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function
Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to E (Motor temperature input), you can detect alarm OH3 or
OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics, and protect the motor. The terminal connections
are shown in the following diagram. Set H3-08〔Signal level selection (terminal A2)〕(H3-04 when A3 is used)
to 0 (0 to + 10 V).
Inverter
Multi-function
contact input
Multi-function
contact output
Fault contact
output
Branch resistance
18 kΩ
A2, A3
(0-10 V)
PTC thermistor
Multi-function
PHC output
* When using terminal A2, set DIP switch S1-2 to OFF (0 to 10 V).
Fig 6.43 Mutual Connections During Motor Overheating Protection
6-61
Limiting Motor Rotation Direction
If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited, a Reverse Run Command will not be accepted even if it is input.
Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.)
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
b1-04
Display
Prohibition of
reverse operation
Reverse Oper
6-62
Description
0: Reverse enabled
1: Reverse disabled
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
183H
Continuing Operation
Continuing Operation
This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation using speed
search even if an error occurs.
Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored
Even if a temporary power loss occurs, you can perform estimated/current detection speed search using the
speed search function (b3-01) and restart the Inverter automatically after power is restored to continue motor
operation. To restart the Inverter after power has been restored, set L2-01 to 1 or 2. Make settings of L2-01 to
L2-05 and b3-01 for related details of restarting.
• If L2-01 is set to 1:
when power is restored within the time set in L2-02, the Inverter will restart. If the time set in L2-02 is
exceeded, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
• If L2-01 is set to 2:
when the main power supply is restored while the control power supply (i.e., power supply to the control
panel) is backed up, the Inverter will restart. Consequently, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will not
be detected.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Momentary
power loss
detection
L2-01
PwrL Selection
L2-02
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Disabled [main circuit
undervoltage (UV1)
detection]
1: Enabled [Restarted when the
power returns within the time
for L2-02. When L2-02 is
exceeded, main circuit
undervoltage (UV1) is
detected.]
2: Enabled while CPU is
operating. [Restarts when
power returns during control
operations. Does not detect
main circuit undervoltage
(UV1).]
0 to 2
0
0 to
25.5
0.1 s
0.1 to
5.0
0.2 s
Momentary
power loss ride- Ridethrough time, when Momentary Power Loss Selection (L2thru time
01) is set to 1, in units of seconds.
PwrL Ridethru t
Min. baseblock
time
L2-03
Description
Setting
Range
PwrL Baseblock t
Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time in units of one second,
when the Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7
times the motor secondary circuit
time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.
*1
*1
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
485H
No
A
A
A
A
A
486H
No
A
A
A
A
A
487H
6-63
Name
Constant
Number
Factory
Setting
Sets the time required to return
the Inverter output voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a
speed search, in units of one second.
Sets the time required to recover
from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
Display
Voltage recovery time
L2-04
Description
Setting
Range
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
Undervoltage
detection level
L2-05
PUV Det Level
Sets the main circuit undervoltage
(UV) detection level (main circuit
DC voltage) in V units.
Usually setting is not necessary.
Insert an AC reactor in the
Inverter input side to lower the
main circuit undervoltage detection level.
150 to
210
*2
*1
190 V
*2
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
488H
No
A
A
A
A
A
489H
Note Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V/400 V
Class Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter. For a 400 V Class Inverter, double the values.
Setting Precautions
• Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery.
• To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored, make settings so that Run Commands from
the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended.
• If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss
exceeds 15 ms during operation, alarm UV1 (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.
Speed Search
The speed search function finds the actual speed of the motor that is rotating using inertia, and then starts
smoothly from that speed. When restoring power after a temporary power loss, the speed search function
switches connection from the commercial power supply, and then restarts the fan that is rotating using inertia.
Speed search will be performed in the following cases.
• When Momentary power loss detection (L2-01) is set to 1 or 2 (Enabled) and power is restored after
IMPORTANT
a momentary power loss.
• When Number of auto restart attempts (L5-01) is set from 1 to 10 and the auto restart is performed
after a fault.
• Multi-function contact inputs (H1-) are set to External search command (61, 62, or 64) and the
command is sent.
• Multi-function contact inputs (H1-) are set to External baseblock (8 or 9) and the release command is sent.
The selected speed search type in b3-01, speed calculation or current detection, will be performed.
6-64
Continuing Operation
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Speed search
selection (current detection
or speed calculation)
b3-01
SpdSrch at Start
Description
Setting
Range
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
No
A
191H
No
A
No
A
No
A
192H
Enables/disables the speed search
function for the Run Command
and sets the speed search method.
0:Disabled, speed calculation
1: Enabled, speed calculation
2: Disabled, current detection
3: Enabled, current detection
Speed Calculation:
When the search is started, the
motor speed is calculated and
acceleration/deceleration is
performed from the calculated
speed to the specified frequency
(motor direction is also
searched).
0 to 3
2
*1
Current Detection:
The speed search is started from
the frequency when power was
momentarily lost and the
maximum frequency, and the
speed is detected at the search
current level.
b3-02
Speed search
operating current (current
detection)
SpdSrch Current
b3-03
Speed search
deceleration
time (current
detection)
SpdSrch Dec
Time
b3-05
Speed search
wait time (current detection
or speed calculation)
Search Delay
b3-10
Speed search
detection compensation gain
(speed calculation)
Srch Detect
Comp
Sets the speed search operation
current as a percentage, taking the
Inverter rated current as 100%.
Not usually necessary to set.
When restarting is not possible
with the factory settings, reduce
the value.
0 to
200
Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in
1-second units.
Set the time for deceleration from
the maximum output frequency to
the minimum output frequency.
0.1 to
10.0
2.0 s
No
A
No
A
No
No
193H
Sets the magnetic contactor operating delay time when there is a
magnetic contactor on the output
side of the Inverter. When a speed
search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss,
the search operation is delayed by
the time set here.
0.0 to
20.0
0.2 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
195H
Operation restarts at a speed
obtained by multiplying the speed
from the speed search by the compensation gain.
1.00 to
Increase this setting if overvolt1.20
ages occur when speed search is
performed after a long baseblock,
for example, in searches at startup.
1.10
No
A
No
A
No
A
19AH
100%
*1
6-65
Name
Constant
Number
b3-13
b3-14
Display
b3-17
*2
b3-18
*2
b3-19
*2
Speed search
retrial current
level
SrchRestart
Lv1
Speed search
retrial detection time
SrchRestart
Time
Number of
speed search
retrials
Num of
SrchRestr
Min. baseblock
time
L2-03
PwrL Baseblock t
Voltage recovery time
L2-04
PwrL V/F
Ramp t
Change
during
Operation
0.1 to
2.0
1.0%
Control Methods
V/f
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
No
No
A
19DH
1
No
A
A
A
No
A
19EH
0 to
200
150%
No
A
No
A
No
A
1F0H
Sets the time for detection in a
speed search retrial in units of
seconds.
0.00 to
1.00
0.10 s
No
A
No
A
No
A
1F1H
Sets the number of times that a
speed search can be retried.
0 to 10
0
No
A
No
A
No
A
1F2H
Sets the Inverter's minimum baseblock time in units of one second,
when the Inverter is restarted after
power loss ridethrough.
Sets the time to approximately 0.7
times the motor secondary circuit
time constant.
When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed
search or DC injection braking,
increase the set values.
0.1 to
5.0
0.2 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
487H
Sets the time required to return
the Inverter output voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a
speed search, in units of one second.
Sets the time required to recover
from 0 V to the maximum voltage.
0.0 to
5.0
0.3 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
488H
0: Disabled (operates with specified rotation direction)
0 or 1
1: Enabled (operates with rotation direction found by search)
Sets the current level to retry a
speed search as a percentage, taking the Inverter rated current as
100%.
*3
*3
* 1. The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 control factory settings are given.
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
* 3. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
6-66
MEMO
BUS
Register
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Sets the proportional gain (PI control) of the speed estimator during
speed search taking the setting of
N4-08 to be equivalent to a setting
of 1.0.
Usually, there is no need to
change this setting. If, however,
Srch Est P Gain the load inertia is large and overvoltages occur during the search,
reduce this setting.
Bidir Search
Sel
Factory
Setting
V/f
with
PG
Description
Proportional
gain of the
speed estimator
during speed
search
Rotation direction search
selection
Setting
Range
Continuing Operation
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
61
External search command 1 (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
62
External search command 2 (ON: Speed search from set frequency)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Setting Precautions
• When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03
(invalid multi-function input selection) operation error may occur. Set either external search command 1 or
external search command 2.
• If speed search during startup is selected when using V/f control with PG, the Unit will start from the fre-
quency detected by PG.
• If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the period
when the Run Command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum
Baseblock Time (L2-03).
• If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search
Wait Time (b3-05). The factory setting is 0.2 s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time
by making the setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Inverter starts the speed
search.
• Constant b3-02 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When
the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed, and the motor accelerates or decelerates to the set frequency. If a motor overload (OL1) or an Inverter overload (OL2) occurs
and the motor cannot restart, lower the set value.
• If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss, lengthen
the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).
• If a main circuit over voltage (OV) is detected when using a current detection speed search after a momen-
tary power loss, lengthen the Speed search detection time (b3-03).
Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed
• When using V/f control with or without a PG, always perform stationary autotuning for only line-to-line
resistance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
• When using vector control, always perform rotational or stationary autotuning (not stationary autotuning
for line-to-line resistance only) before using speed searches based on estimated speeds.
• If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed, per-
form stationary autotuning for line-to-line resistance only again.
The motor will not operate when stationary autotuning or stationary autotuning for line-to-line
resistance only is performed.
IMPORTANT
6-67
Speed Search Selection
Set whether to enable or disable speed search at startup, and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or
current detection) using setting b3-01. To perform speed search when inputting the Run Command, set b3-01
to 1 or 3.
Search Name
Search Method
Estimated Speed (b3-01 = 0 or 1)
Current Detection (b3-01 = 2 or 3)
Estimates the motor speed when the search
starts, and accelerates and decelerates from the
estimated speed to the set frequency. You can
also search including direction of motor rotation.
Starts speed search from the frequency when
the temporary power loss was detected, or from
the highest frequency, and performs speed
detection at the current level during the search.
External search command 1 and external
External Speed Search search command 2 become the same operation,
Command
estimating the motor speed and starting the
search from the estimated speed.
Application Precautions
External speed search command 1:
Starts speed search from the maximum output
frequency.
External speed search command 2:
Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command.
Cannot be used multi-motor drives, motors two
In control method without PG, the motor may
or more frames smaller than the Inverter capacaccelerate suddenly with light loads.
ity, and high-speed motors (130 Hz min.)
Estimated Speed Search (b3-01 = 0 or 1)
The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below.
Search at Startup (b3-01 = 1)
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command of multi-function inputs has
been selected is shown below.
OFF
ON
Set frequency
reference
Run Command
Output frequency
Start using
speed detected
b3-02
Output current
1.0 s
* Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) &times; 0.7*
Note: If the stopping method is set to coast to stop, and the Run Command turns ON in a short time,
the operation may be the same as the search in case 2.
Fig 6.44 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed)
6-68
Continuing Operation
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.) (b3-01 = 0)
The time chart when the Inverter operation is restarted after power has been restored is shown below.
• Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Start using
speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1
*2
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before the baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.45 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Start using speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
Output current
10 ms
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Fig 6.46 Speed Search After Baseblock (Estimated Speed: Loss Time &gt; L2-03)
6-69
Current Detection Speed Search (b3-01 = 2 or 3)
The time charts for current detection speed search is shown below.
Speed Search at Startup (b3-01 = 3)
The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below.
Run Command
OFF
ON
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Maximum output
frequency or
set frequency
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Output current
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
*
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05).
Fig 6.47 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection)
Speed Search after Short Baseblock (b3-01 = 2)
The time chart when the Inverter operation is restarted after power has been restored is shown below.
• Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency
Deceleration
reference
time set in b3-03
Output frequency
b3-02
speed search operating current
Output current
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum
Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) *1
*2
Fig 6.48 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time &lt; L2-03)
• Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time
AC power supply
ON
OFF
Output frequency before power loss
Deceleration speed set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
Output frequency
b3-02
Speed search operating time
Output current
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Fig 6.49 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time &gt; L2-03)
6-70
Continuing Operation
Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is
Lost
The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation using 80% speed of the frequency reference before loss when the frequency reference using a master speed analog input* is reduced 90% or more in
400 ms.
When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function
contact output terminal M1-M2, P1-PC, P2-PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to C (frequency reference lost).
* Frequency references using the following master speed analog inputs are used to detect a frequency loss.
• Analog input using terminal A1
• Analog input using terminal A2 when H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A2 function selection) is set
to 0 (Add to terminal A1).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Operation when
frequency reference is missing
L4-05
Ref Loss Sel
Description
Setting
Range
0: Stop (Operation follows the
frequency reference.)
1: Operation at 80% speed
continues. (At 80% of speed
before the frequency reference
was lost)
Frequency reference is lost: Frequency reference dropped over
90% in 400 ms.
0 or 1
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
49DH
6-71
Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function)
If an Inverter fault occurs during operation, the Inverter will perform self-diagnosis. If no fault is detected, the
Inverter will automatically restart using the speed search function (b3-01). This is called the auto restart function.
Set the number of auto restarts in constant L5-01. A fault reset is attempted every 5 ms after a fault occurs and
minimum baseblock time has passed. The number of auto restarts is counted when the Inverter attempts a fault
reset and restarts operation. The protection function will operate if a fault continues to occur after auto restarting the number of times set in L5-01.
The auto restart function can be applied to the following faults. If a fault not listed below occurs, the protection function will operate and the auto restart function will not.
• OC (Overcurrent)
• RH (Braking resistor overheated)
• GF (Ground fault)
• RR (Braking transistor error)
• PUF (Fuse blown)
• OL1 (Motor overload)
• OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
• OL2 (Inverter overload)
• UV1 (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit Magnetic Contactor Operation
Failure)*
• OH1 (Motor overheat)
• PF (Main circuit voltage fault)
• OL3 (Overtorque)
• LF (Output phase failure)
• OL4 (Overtorque)
* When L2-01 is set to 1 or 2 (continue operation during momentary power loss)
Auto Restart External Outputs
To output auto restart signals externally, set H2-01 to H2-05 (multi-function contact output terminals M1-M2,
P1-PC, P2-PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) to 1E (restart enabled).
Related Constants
Name
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
L5-01
Number of auto Sets the number of auto restart
restart attempts attempts.
Automatically restarts after a fault 0 to 10
Num of
and conducts a speed search from
Restarts
the run frequency.
0
L5-02
Sets whether a fault contact outAuto restart
operation selec- put is activated during fault
restart.
tion
0: Not output (Fault contact is
not activated.)
Restart Sel
1: Output (Fault contact is
activated.)
0
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
0 or 1
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
49EH
No
A
A
A
A
A
49FH
Application Precautions
• The number of auto restarts count is reset under the following conditions:
After auto restart, normal operation has continued for 10 minutes.
After the protection operation has been performed, and the fault has been verified, and an fault reset
has been input.
After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again.
• Do not use the auto restart function with variable loads.
6-72
Continuing Operation
Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault
Use the constant setting to select the operation of the motor after a cooling fan fault occurs. This function can
be used for times when a motor should not be stopped quickly (with an emergency stop.)
A cooling fan equipped for 200 V Class Inverters of 7.5 kW, 15 kW, and 30 to 110 kW, and 400 V Class
Inverters of 5.5 to 15 kW and 55 to 300 kW.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
L8-32*
Description
Display
OH1 detection
of Inverter’ s
cooling fan
OH1 Detect Sel
0: Disabled (FAN minor fault
detection)
1: Enabled (OH1 major fault
detection)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
4E2H
* Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1038 or later.
The following table describes the operation of the motor and the display of the Digital Operator in accordance
with the settings of the L8-32 if a cooling fan fault occurred.
Setting
Value
Fault
Cooling Fin Overheating
0
1
Digital Operator
OH1 (lit)
Motor Operation
Coast to a stop
Multi-function Contact Output
Fault
*
Minor fault
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault
FAN (blink)
Continue operation
Cooling Fin Overheating
OH (lit)
Coast to a stop
Fault
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault
OH1 (lit)
Coast to a stop
Fault
* If L8-32 is set to 0, the motor will continue running even if a cooling fan fault occurred. However, the Inverter rated output current and the
overload capacity will be reduced. The rated output current will be reduced to 80% if the normal rated output current is 100%, and the overload
capacity will be reduced to the values as follows.
When CT is selected: 100% per every 3 minutes, 150% per every 15 seconds
When VT is selected: 100% per every 30 seconds, 120% per every 10 seconds
IMPORTANT
If L8-32 is set to 0, be sure to set H2-01 to H2-03 multi-function contact outputs to 10 (minor fault) or to 3D
(Inverter’s cooling fan fault.) If a cooling fan fault occurs, stop the Inverter immediately and replace the cooling fan. If the Inverter continues to run while a cooling fan fault occurs, the Inverter’s cooling ability will be
affected and the Inverter’s internal temperature will increase and shorten the Inverter’s life.
During a cooling fan fault, the cooling fan stops for about 3 seconds every minute (interval operation.)
6-73
Inverter Protection
This section explains the functions for protecting the Inverter and the braking resistor.
Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors
Perform overheating protection on Inverter-mounted braking resistors (Model: ERF-150WJ ).
When overheating in a mounted braking resistor is detected, an alarm RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) is displayed on the Digital Operator, and the motor coasts to a stop.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
L8-01
Protect selection for internal
DB resistor
(Type ERF)
DB Resistor
Prot
Description
0: Disabled (no overheating
protection)
1: Enabled (overheating
protection)
Setting
Range
0 or 1
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
4ADH
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-05)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
D
Function
Braking resistor fault (ON: Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resistor overheating) being detected are that the deceleration
time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration
time or replace the Braking Resistor Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity.
INFO
6-74
Inverter Protection
Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels
The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermistor, and protects the Inverter from
overheating. You can receive Inverter overheating pre-alarms in units of 1&deg;C.
The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Stopping the Inverter as error protection, and
continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fins overheating) on the Digital Operator flashing.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Overheat prealarm level
L8-02
OH Pre-Alarm
Lvl
Operation
selection after
overheat prealarm
L8-03
OH Pre-Alarm
Sel
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the detection temperature for
the Inverter overheat detection
pre-alarm in &deg;C.
The pre-alarm detects when the
heatsink temperature reaches the
set value.
50 to
130
95 &deg;C*
Sets the operation for when the
Inverter overheat pre-alarm goes
ON.
0: Decelerate to stop in
deceleration time C1-02.
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop in fast-stop time C109.
3: Continue operation (Monitor
display only.)
A fault will be given in setting 0
to 2 and a minor fault will be
given in setting 3.
0 to 3
3
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
4AEH
No
A
A
A
A
A
4AFH
* The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity. The value for 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
6-75
Input Terminal Functions
This section explains input terminal functions, which set operating methods by switching functions for the
multi-function contact input terminals (S3 to S12).
Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control
Circuit Terminals
You can switch the Inverter Run Command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital
Operator) and remote (input method using b1-01 and b1-02).
You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an output from H1-01 to
H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) has been set to 1 (local/remote
selection).
To set the control circuit terminals to remote, set b1-01 and b1-02 to 1 (Control circuit terminals).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
Reference
Source
Operation
method selection
b1-02
Run Source
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
Set the Run Command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
0 to 3
1
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
180H
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
181H
You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. When
the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the
Digital Operator will be disabled.
INFO
6-76
Input Terminal Functions
Blocking Inverter Outputs (Baseblock Commands)
Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input
terminal S3 to S12 function selection) to perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation, and prohibit Inverter output using the baseblock commands. At this time, the motor will be coasting and
“BB” will blink on the Digital Operator.
Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from frequency references from the
previous baseblock command input.
Multi-function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
8
External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
9
External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Time Chart
The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below.
Forward operation/Stop
Baseblock command
Input
Cleared
Frequency reference
Search from stored frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold
Fig 6.50 Baseblock Commands
If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during operation, as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting, and may result in the motor falling or slipping.
IMPORTANT
6-77
Stopping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold)
The acceleration/deceleration ramp hold function stops acceleration and deceleration, stores the output frequency at that point in time, and then continues operation.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection)
to A (acceleration/deceleration ramp hold) to stop acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned
ON and to store the output frequency at that point in time. Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the
terminal is turned OFF.
If d4-01 is set to 1 and the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input, the output frequency is
still stored even after the power supply is turned OFF.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets whether or not frequencies
on hold will be recorded.
0: Disabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is turned
on again starts at 0.)
1: Enabled (when operation is
stopped or the power is turned
on again starts at the previous
hold frequency.)
This function is available when
the multi-function inputs “accel/
decel Ramp Hold” or “up/down”
commands are set.
0 or 1
0
No
Display
Frequency reference hold
function selection
d4-01
MOP Ref
Memory
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
Time Chart
The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below.
Power supply
Forward/Stop
Acceleration/Deceleration
Ramp Hold
Frequency reference
Output frequency
Hold
Hold
Fig 6.51 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold
6-78
MEMO
BUS
Register
298H
Input Terminal Functions
Application Precautions
• When d4-01 is set to 1, the output frequency on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. If
performing operations using this frequency after the Inverter has also been turned OFF, input the Run
Command with the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON.
• When d4-01 is set to 0 and a Run Command is input while the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold is
turned ON, the output frequency will be set to zero.
• If you input an Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during posi-
tioning, deceleration may be canceled.
Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/
DOWN)
The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S7.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12
function selection) to 10 (UP command) and 11 (DOWN command). Be sure to allocate two terminals so that
the UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair.
The output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration time. Be sure to set b1-02 (Run Command
selection) to 1 (Control circuit terminal).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d2-01
Display
Frequency reference upper
limit
Ref Upper
Limit
d2-02
Frequency reference lower
limit
Ref Lower
Limit
d2-03
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Set the output frequency upper
limit as a percent, taking the max.
output frequency to be 100%.
0.0 to
110.0
100.0
%
Sets the output frequency lower
limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
110.0
Master speed
reference lower Set the master speed reference
lower limit as a percent, taking
limit
the max. output frequency to be
Ref1 Lower
100%.
Limit
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
289H
0.0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
28AH
0.0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
293H
Precautions
When setting and using UP and DOWN commands, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
If multi-function input terminals S3 to S12 are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function
input selection) will occur:
• Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set.
• UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time.
6-79
Application Precautions
• Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower
limits set in constants d2-01 to d2-03. Here, frequency references from analog frequency reference terminal A1 becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference
from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either constant d2-02 or d2-03, the larger
lower limit will become the frequency reference lower limit.
• If inputting the Run Command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates to the
frequency reference lower limit.
• When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled.
• When d4-01 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set to 1, the frequency reference held using
the UP/DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is
turned ON and the Run Command is input, the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been
stored. To reset (i.e., to 0 Hz) the stored frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while
the Run Command is OFF.
Connection Example and Time Chart
The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi-function contact input
terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4, are shown below.
Constant
Name
Set Value
H1-01
Multi-function input (terminal S3)
10
H1-02
Multi-function input (terminal S4)
11
Inverter
Forward
operation/Stop
Reverse
operation/Stop
Up command
Down command
0 to 10 V analog
signal
Sequence
common
Frequency
reference lower limit
Fig 6.52 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated
6-80
Input Terminal Functions
Output frequency
Upper limit
Accelerates to
lower limit
Same
frequency
Lower limit
Forward operation/stop
UP command
Reference
frequency reset
DOWN command
Frequency
matching signal*
Power supply
* The frequency matching signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating/
decelerating while the Run Command is ON.
Fig 6.53 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart
6-81
Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References (+/- Speed)
The +/- speed function increments or decrements the frequency set in analog frequency reference d4-02 (+/Speed Limit) using two contact signal inputs.
To use this function, set One of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 to
S12 function selection) to 1C (Trim Control Increase command) and 1D (Trim Control Decrease command).
Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command can be used as a pair.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d4-02
Description
Display
+ - Speed limits Set the frequency to be add to or
subtracted from the analog frequency reference as a percent,
taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
Trim Control
Enabled when the increase (+)
Lvl
speed command or decrease (-)
speed command is set for a multifunction input.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
100
10%
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
299H
Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference
The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown
below.
Set Frequency
Reference
+ d4-02
Set Frequency
Reference
- d4-02
Trim Control Increase
Command Terminal
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Trim Control Decrease
Command Terminal
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Frequency Reference
Set Frequency Command
Application Precautions
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference &gt; 0 and the speed reference is
from an analog input.
• When the analog frequency reference value - d4-02 &lt; 0, the frequency reference is set to 0.
• If only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multi-
function contact input terminal S3 to S12, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected)
will occur.
6-82
Input Terminal Functions
Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing
When one of H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) is set to 1E
(sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the
terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency.
The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference.
Sample/hold
command
Analog input
Frequency reference
Fig 6.54 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency
Precautions
When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precautions.
Setting Precautions
When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same
time. If these commands are used at the same time, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) will occur.
• Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command
• UP/DOWN command
• Trim Control Increase/Decrease command
Application Precautions
• When performing sample/hold of analog frequency references, be sure to store references of 100 ms mini-
mum. If the reference time is less than 100 ms, the frequency reference will not be held.
• The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF.
Switching Operations between a Communications Option Board and
Control Circuit Terminals
You can switch reference input between the Communications Option Board and the control circuit terminals.
Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection)
to 2 (Option/Inverter selection) to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when
the Inverter is stopped.
6-83
Setting Precautions
To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Board and the control circuit terminals, set
the following constants.
• Set b1-01 (Reference Selection) to 1 [Control circuit terminal (analog input)]
• Set b1-02 (Operation Method Selection to 1 [Control circuit terminal (sequence inputs)]
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selec-
tion) to 2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Terminal Status
Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection
OFF
Inverter
(Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input terminal.)
ON
Communications Option Board
(Frequency reference and Run Command are enabled from Communications Option Board.)
Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands
(FJOG/RJOG)
The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/
OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need to input the Run Command.
To use this function, set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12
function selection) to 12 (FJOG command) or 13 (RJOG command).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
d1-17
Description
Setting
Range
The frequency reference when the
jog frequency reference selection, FJOG command, or RJOG
command is ON.
0 to
400.00
*
Display
Jog frequency
reference
Jog Reference
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
6.00
Hz
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
MEMO
BUS
Register
292H
Note The unit is set in o1-03 (Frequency units of reference setting and monitor). The default for o1-03 is 0 (increments of 0.01 Hz).
* The setting range for open-loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66.0 (0 to 132.0 for PRG: 103)
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
12
FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
13
RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d1-17)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Application Precautions
• Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references.
• When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in b1-03 (stopping method selection).
6-84
Input Terminal Functions
Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the
Inverter (External Fault Function)
The external fault function performs the error contact output, and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter
peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operator will display EFx (External fault [input
terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external fault signal. For
example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed.
To use the external fault function, set one of the values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multifunction contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection).
Select the value to be set in H1-01 to H1-10 from a combination of any of the following three conditions.
• Signal input level from peripheral devices
• External fault detection method
• Operation during external fault detection
The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H1.
Set
Value
20
Input Level
(See Note 1.)
NO Contact
Yes
21
22
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2D
2E
2F
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2B
2C
Yes
Yes
29
2A
Yes
Yes
27
28
Yes
Yes
25
26
Yes
Yes
23
24
NC Contact
Error Detection Method
Operation During Error Detection
(See Note 2.)
Detection
DecelerCoast to
EmerContinue
Constant
During
ate to Stop
Stop
gency Stop Operation
Detection
Operation
(Error)
(Error)
(Error)
(Warning)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Note 1. Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External fault when ON; NC contact: External fault when
OFF).
2. Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation.
Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter.
Detection during operation: Detects only during Inverter operation.
6-85
Output Terminal Functions
The output terminal function, which sets the output methods by switching the functions of the multi-function output terminals (M1-M2, P1-PC, P2-PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4), is described here.
During Run (Setting: 0)
OFF
The Run Command is OFF and there is not output voltage.
ON
The Run Command is ON or a voltage is being output.
During Run 2 (Setting: 37)
OFF
The Inverter is not outputting a frequency. (Baseblock, DC injection braking, initial excitation, or
stopped)
ON
The Inverter is outputting a frequency.
• These outputs can be used to indicate the Inverter's operating status.
Run Command
Baseblock command
OFF ON
OFF
ON
Output frequency
During run 1 output
During run 2 output
OFF ON
OFF
ON
Fig 6.55 Timing Chart for “During RUN” Output
Zero-speed (Setting: 1)
OFF
The output frequency is greater than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
(With flux vector control, is greater than the zero-speed level (b2-01).)
ON
The output frequency is less than the minimum output frequency (E1-09).
(With flux vector control, is less than the zero-speed level (b2-01).)
Minimum output frequency (E1-09)
(Zero speed level (b2-01) when flux vector control is
being used.)
Output frequency
Zero-speed output
OFF
ON
Fig 6.56 Timing Chart for Zero-speed
6-86
Output Terminal Functions
Motor Overload (OL1) Pre-alarm (Setting: 1F)
OFF
The motor protection function's electronic thermal value is less than 90% of the detection level.
ON
The motor protection function's electronic thermal value is greater than 90% of the detection level.
• This output function is valid when the motor overload protection function is enabled (L1-01 =1).
• This output can be used to warn of overheating before the protection function itself operates.
Inverter Overheat (OH) Pre-alarm (Setting: 20)
OFF
The cooling fin temperature is less than the &quot;OH Pre-Alarm Level&quot; set in L8-02.
ON
The cooling fin temperature exceeds the &quot;OH Pre-Alarm Level&quot; set in L8-02.
• This output function indicates that the temperature of the cooling fins reaches the temperature set in L8-02
(the Inverter overheating alarm detection level).
Speed reference limit (Setting: 31)
OFF
Other than ON condition
ON
Enables the speed reference limit in the following conditions (During flux vector control method):
1. Frequency reference ≥ Frequency reference upper limit (d2-01)
Frequency reference ≤ Frequency reference lower limit (d2-02)
Frequency reference ≥ Output frequency lower limit of the multi-function analog input
(Setting: 9)
2. The frequency reference is less than the Min. output frequency (E1-09), and b1-05 is set to 1,
2, or 3.
Zero-servo End (Setting: 33)
OFF
The zero-servo command isn't being input or zero-servo position control hasn't been completed.
ON
The position has been brought within the zero-servo completion width (b9-02) after the zero-servo
command was input.
• This output function indicates that zero-servo position control has been completed.
• The output is turned ON after the zero-servo command is input and the difference between the zero-servo
operation starting position and the current position is within the zero-servo completion width (b9-02).
6-87
Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor constants.
Using the Analog Monitor Constants
This section explains the analog monitor constants.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H4-01
Display
Monitor selection (terminal
FM)
Terminal FM
Sel
Gain (terminal
FM)
H4-02
Terminal FM
Gain
Bias (terminal
FM)
H4-03
H4-04
Terminal FM
Bias
Monitor selection (terminal
AM)
Terminal AM
Sel
Gain (terminal
AM)
H4-05
Terminal AM
Gain
Bias (terminal
AM)
H4-06
6-88
Terminal AM
Bias
Description
Setting
Range
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1-) from 1 to 45
terminal FM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41 are not 1 to 99
used.
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
2
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
41DH
Sets the multi-function analog
output 1 voltage level gain.
Sets whether the monitor item
output will be output in multiples
of 10 V.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
0.00 to
2.50
1.00
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
41EH
Sets the multi-function analog
output 1 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
-10.0
to
+10.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
41FH
Sets the number of the monitor
item to be output (U1-) from 1 to 45
terminal AM.
4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 cannot be set. 29 to 31 and 41 are not 1 to 99
used.
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
420H
Set the voltage level gain for
multi-function analog output 2.
Set the number of multiples of 10
V to be output as the 100% output 0.00 to
for the monitor items. The maxi2.50
mum output from the terminal is
10 V. A meter calibration function
is available.
0.50
Yes
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
421H
Sets the multi-function analog
output 2 voltage level bias.
Sets output characteristic up/
down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V.
The maximum output from the
terminal is 10 V. A meter calibration function is available.
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
422H
-10.0
to
+10.0
Monitor Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H4-07
F4-01
F4-02
F4-03
F4-04
F4-05
Display
F4-06
Channel 2 output monitor
bias
AO Ch2 Bias
F4-07
Analog output
signal level for
channel 1
AO Opt Level
Sel
F4-08
Analog output
signal level for
channel 2
AO Opt Level
Sel
Change
during
Operation
0 or 1
0
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
423H
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
391H
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
392H
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
393H
0.00 to
2.50
0.50
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
394H
Sets the channel 1 item bias to
100%/10 V when the Analog
Monitor Board is used.
-10.0
to 10.0
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
395H
Sets the channel 2 item bias to
100%/10 V when the Analog
Monitor Board is used.
-10.0
to 10.0
0.0
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
396H
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
397H
0: 0 to 10 V
1: -10 to +10 V
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
398H
Channel 1 mon- Effective when the Analog Moniitor selection
tor Board is used.
Monitor selection:
AO Ch1 Select Set the number of the monitor
Channel 1 gain item to be output. (U1-)
Gain:
AO Ch1 Gain
Set the multiple of 10 V for outputting monitor items.
Channel 2 mon4, 10 to 14, 25, 28, 34, 39, 40 canitor selection
not be set. 29 to 31 and 41 are not
AO Ch2 Select used. When the AO-12 Analog
Monitor Board is used, outputs of
Channel 2 gain
&plusmn; 10 V are possible. To output &plusmn;
10 V, set F4-07 or F4-08 to 1.
When the AO-08 Analog Monitor
Board is used, only outputs of 0 to
AO Ch2 Gain
+10 V are possible.
A meter calibration function is
available.
AO Ch1 Bias
Factory
Setting
V/f
with
PG
Description
Analog output 1 Sets the signal output level for
signal level
multi-function output 1 (terminal
selection
FM)
0: 0 to +10 V output
AO Level
1: -10 to 10 V output
Select1
Channel 1 output monitor
bias
Setting
Range
1 to 45
1 to 99
0.00 to
2.50
1 to 45
1 to 99
Selecting Analog Monitor Items
The digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) are output from multi-function analog output
terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the values for the part of U1 (status monitor).
Alternatively, you can output monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from analog output option terminal
channels 1 and 2 on analog monitor boards AO-08 and AO-12. Refer to the table of constants, and set the values.
6-89
Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items
Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and
bias in H4-02, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06. Also, adjust the output voltage for output channels 1 and 2 of Analog Output option boards AO-08 and AO-12 using the gain and bias in F4-02, F4-04, F4-05, and F4-06.
Adjusting the Meter
The output voltage for terminals FM-AC and AM-AC and output channels 1 and 2 of the AO option board can
be adjusted while the Inverter is stopped. For example, just pressing the Enter Key and displaying the data setting display for H4-02 or H4-03 will cause the following voltage to be output by the FM-AC terminals.
10 V/100% monitor output &times; output gain (H4-02) + output bias (H4-03)
Just pressing the Enter Key and displaying the data setting display for F4-02 or F4-05 will cause the following
voltage to be output to channel 1 of the AO option board.
10 V/100% monitor output &times; output gain (H4-02) + output bias (H4-05)
Output voltage
Gain x 10 V
Bias x 10/100 V
Monitor item
Fig 6.57 Monitor Output Adjustment
Switching Analog Monitor Signal Levels
Monitor items corresponding to -10 to 10 V output 0 to 10 V signals when the monitor value is positive (+),
and 0 to -10 V signals when the monitor value is negative (-). For monitor items corresponding to -10 to 10 V,
refer to Chapter 5 User Constants.
You can select the signal levels separately for multi-function analog output terminals and analog output option
terminals.
INFO
Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents
This section explains pulse monitor constants.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H6-06
Display
Pulse train
monitor selection
Pulse Output
Sel
6-90
Description
Setting
Range
Select the pulse train monitor output items (value of the part
1, 2, 5,
of U1-).
20, 24,
There are two types of monitor
36
items: Speed-related items and
PID-related items.
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
2
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
431H
Monitor Constants
Name
Constant
Number
H6-07
Description
Display
Pulse train
Set the number of pulses output
monitor scaling when speed is 100% in hertz.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to
make the pulse train monitor outPO Scaling
put synchronously to the output
frequency.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
32000
1440
Hz
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
432H
Selecting Pulse Monitor Items
Output digital operator monitor items (U1- [status monitor]) from pulse monitor terminal MP-AC. Refer
to Chapter 5 User Constants, and set the part of U1- (Status monitor). The possible monitor selections are limited as follows: U1-01, 02, 05, 20, 24, 36.
Adjusting the Pulse Monitor Items
Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monitor terminal MP-AC. Set the pulse frequency output when
100% frequency is output to H6-07.
Set H6-06 to 2, and H6-07 to 0, to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter's U-phase output.
Application Precautions
When using a pulse monitor constant, connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions.
If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the machinery.
Using a Sourcing Output
Output Voltage
(Isolated)
VRL (V)
Load Impedance (kΩ)
+5 V min.
1.5 kΩ min.
+8 V min.
3.5 kΩ min.
+10 V min.
10 kΩ min.
Load impedance
MP
VRL
AC
External power supply
Using a Sinking Input
External Power
Supply (V)
12 VDC&plusmn;10%,
15 VDC&plusmn;10%
Sink Current (mA)
16 mA Max
Load impedance
MP
Sinking current
AC
6-91
Individual Functions
This section explains the individual functions used in special applications.
Using MEMOBUS Communications
You can perform serial communications with MEMOCON-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or similar devices using the MEMOBUS protocol.
MEMOBUS Communications Configuration
MEMOBUS communications are configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communications between master and slave are normally started by the master, and the slave responds.
The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address
of each slave beforehand, so the master can perform signal communications using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response to the master.
MEMOCON-series PLC
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
RS-485 connections
example
Fig 6.58 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter
Communications Specifications
The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table.
Item
Interface
RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communications Parameters
6-92
Specifications
Baud rate:
Select from 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 19,200 bps.
Data length:
8 bits fixed
Parity:
Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits:
1 bit fixed
Communications Protocol
MEMOBUS (RTU mode only)
Number of Connectable Units
31 units max. (when using RS-485)
Individual Functions
Communications Connection Terminal
MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance
by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only, as seen from the PLC.
S+
+
-
SRS-422A
or RS-485
R+
R-
S1
O
F
F
OFF
1
2
ON
Terminating
resistance
Switch
1
Terminating resistance (1/2 W, 110 Ohms)
Fig 6.59 Communications Connection Terminal
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.
2. Use shielded cables for the communication cables, connect the shield cover to the Inverter earth terminal,
and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected to prevent operating errors due to noise.
3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the Inverter exterior.
R+
R
S+
S
Procedure for Communicating with the PLC
Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC.
1. Turn OFF the power supply turned and connect the communication cable between the PLC and the
Inverter.
2. Turn ON the power supply.
3. Set the required communications constants (H5-01 to H5-07) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the power supply once again.
6. Perform communications with the PLC.
Set the timer on the master to monitor response time from the slave. Set the master so that if the slave does
not respond to the master within the set time, the same command message will be sent from the master
again.
INFO
6-93
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Reference
selection
b1-01
Reference
Source
Operation
method selection
b1-02
Run Source
V/f
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
180H
1
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
181H
1F
No
A
A
A
A
A
425H
0 to 4
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
426H
Set the parity for MEMOBUS communications of communications connection
0 to 2
terminals.
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
427H
Set the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(analog input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
0 to 4
1
Set the Run Command input
method.
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal
(sequence input)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
0 to 3
Set the Inverter's slave address.
Communication speed
selection
Set the baud rate for MEMOBUS communications of communications connection
terminals.
Serial Baud
Rate
Communication parity
selection
H5-03
Serial Com Sel
0: 1200 bps
1: 2400 bps
2: 4800 bps
3: 9600 bps
4: 19200 bps
0 to 20
*1
0: No parity
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
H5-04
Stopping
Set the stopping method for commethod after
munications errors.
communication 0: Deceleration to stop using
error
deceleration time in C1-02
1: Coast to stop
2: Emergency stop using
Serial Fault Sel
deceleration time in C1-09
3: Continue operation
0 to 3
3
No
A
A
A
A
A
428H
H5-05
CommunicaSet whether or not a communication error detections timeout is to be detected as a
tion selection
communications error.
0: Do not detect.
Serial Flt Dtct
1: Detect
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
429H
5 to 65
5 ms
No
A
A
A
A
A
42AH
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
42BH
Send wait time
H5-06
Transmit WaitTIM
RTS control
ON/OFF
H5-07
6-94
MEMO
BUS
Register
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Setting
Range
Serial Comm
Adr
H5-02
Control Methods
V/f
with
PG
Description
Slave address
H5-01
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
RTS Control
Sel
Set the time from the Inverter
receiving data to when the
Inverter starts to send.
Select to enable or disable RTS
control.
0: Disabled (RTS is always ON)
1: Enabled (RTS turns ON only
when sending)
Individual Functions
Name
Constant
Number
H5-10
*2
Description
Display
Setting
Range
Unit Selection
Selects the units used for MEMOfor MEMOBUS
BUS registry 0025H (monitors
Register 0025H the output voltage reference).
0 or 1
0: 0.1 V units
MEMOBUS
1: 1 V units
25H UNIT
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
436H
* 1. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications.
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b102.
• Monitoring operation status from the PLC
• Setting and reading constants
• Resetting errors
• Inputting multi-function commands
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands
input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S12.
Message Format
In MEMOBUS communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is
changed by the command (function) contents.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
The space between messages must support the following.
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Inverter to PLC
Response message
PLC to Inverter
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long
H5-06 24 bits long
setting
5 ms min.
Fig 6.60 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Inverter address from 0 to 20 Hex. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the
Inverter will not return responses).
6-95
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below.
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Function
Command Message
Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
03H
Read storage register contents
8
8
7
37
08H
Loopback test
8
8
8
8
10H
Write multiple storage registers
11
41
8
8
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and
the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Error Check
Errors are detected during communications using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method.
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communications is usually 0, but when using the MEMOBUS system, set
the factory setting to 1 (i.e., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves, and compare them to the CRC-16 in the
response messages.
6-96
Individual Functions
MEMOBUS Message Example
An example of MEMOBUS command/response messages is given below.
Reading Storage Register Contents
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive, starting
from a specified address. The contents of the storage register are separated into higher place 8 bits and lower
place 8 bits, and comprise the data within response messages in address order.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and
frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Slave Address
02H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
03H
Function Code
83H
Start
Address
Quantity
CRC-16
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
20H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
04H
Higher
place
45H
Lower
place
F0H
Data quantity
Lead storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
Next storage register
CRC-16
08H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
65H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
01H
Lower
place
F4H
Higher
place
AFH
Lower
place
82H
Error code
CRC-16
03H
Higher
place
F1H
Lower
place
31H
6-97
Loopback Test
The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to
check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter.
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Command Message
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Function code
08H
Function code
08H
Function code
89H
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Higher
place
00H
Higher
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Lower
place
00H
Higher
place
A5H
Higher
place
A5H
Lower
place
37H
Lower
place
37H
Higher
place
DAH
Higher
place
DAH
Lower
place
8DH
Lower
place
8DH
Test Code
Data
CRC-16
Error Code
CRC-16
01H
Higher
place
86H
Lower
place
50H
Writing to Multiple Storage Registers
Write the specified data to each specified storage register from the specified addresses. The written data must
be in the following order in the command message: Higher place 8 bits, then lower place 8 bits, in storage register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency reference of 60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC.
Command Message
Slave Address
Function Code
Start
Address
Quantity
01H
10H
Higher
place
Lower
place
Higher
place
Lower
place
No. of data
Lead data
Next data
CRC-16
6-98
Higher
place
Lower
place
Higher
place
Lower
place
Higher
place
Lower
place
00H
01H
00H
02H
04H
00H
01H
02H
58H
63H
39H
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
10H
Higher
00H
place
Start
Address
Lower
01H
place
Higher
00H
place
Quantity
Lower
02H
place
Higher
10H
place
CRC-16
Lower
08H
place
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address
01H
Function Code
90H
Error code
CRC-16
Higher
place
Lower
place
02H
CDH
C1H
Individual Functions
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle
response messages in the same way.
INFO
Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data, and broadcast
data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data.
Register No.
0000H
Contents
Not used
Frequency reference
Bit 0
Forward Run/Stop Command 1: Forward run 0: Stop
Bit 1
Reverse Run/Stop Command 1: Reverse run 0: Stop
Bit 2
External fault
1: Error (EFO)
Bit 3
Fault reset
1: Reset command
Bit 4
ComNet
Bit 5
ComCtrl
Bit 6
Multi-function input command 3
0001H
Bit 7
Multi-function input command 4
Bit 8
Multi-function input command 5
Bit 9
Multi-function input command 6
Bit A
Multi-function input command 7
Bit B
Multi-function input command 8
Bit C
Multi-function input command 9
Bit D
Multi-function input command 10
Bit E
Multi-function input command 11
Bit F
Multi-function input command 12
0002H
Frequency reference (Set units using constant o1-03)
0003H
Not used
0004H
Not used
0005H
Not used
0006H
PID target value
0007H
Analog output 1 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 11 V/1540)
0008H
Analog output 2 setting (-11 V/-1540 to 11 V/1540)
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0
Contact output (Terminal M1-M2)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
PHC1(Contact P1-PC)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
PHC2(Contact P2-PC)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3
PHC3(Contact P3-C3)
1: ON 0: OFF
0009H
Bit 4
PHC4(Contact P4-C4)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5
Not used
Bit 6
Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7
Error contact (terminal MA-MC)
1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
6-99
Register No.
000FH
Contents
Reference selection settings
Bit 0
Not used
Bit 1
Use MEMOBUS 0006H PID target value 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 2 to B Not used
C
Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D
Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E
Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F
Broadcast data terminal S8 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Note Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Register No.
0020H
0021H
Contents
Inverter status
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bits A and B
Error details
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit A
Bit B
Bit C
0022H
0023H
0024H
0025H
0026H
0027H
6-100
Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Error 1: Error
Data setting error 1: Error
Multi-function contact output (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 1 (terminal P1 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 2 (terminal P2 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 3 (terminal P3 - C3) 1: ON 0: OFF
Multi-function PHC output 4 (terminal P4 - C4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Not used
Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Inverter overload (OL2)
Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Fuse blown (PUF)
PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
External fault (EF, EFO)
Hardware error (CPF)
Motor overload (OL1), overtorque 1 (OL3) detected, or overtorque 2 (OL4)
detected
PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss
Main Circuit Voltage Fault (PF), Output Open-phase (LF)
MEMOBUS communications error (CE)
Operator disconnected (OPR)
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Data link status
Bit 0
Writing data
Bit 1
Not used
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4
Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F
Not used
Frequency reference (U1-01)
Output frequency (U1-02)
Output voltage reference (U1-06)
Output current (U1-03) (Unit: 1/0.1A)
Output power (U1-08)
Individual Functions
Register No.
0028H
0029H
002AH
002BH
002CH
002DH
002EH - 0030H
0031H
0032H
0033H
0034H - 0037H
0038H
0039H
003AH
003BH
003CH
Contents
Torque reference (U1-09)
Not used
Not used
Sequence input status
Bit 0
1: Control circuit terminal S1 ON
Bit 1
1: Control circuit terminal S2 ON
Bit 2
1: Control circuit terminal S3 ON
Bit 3
1: Control circuit terminal S4 ON
Bit 4
1: Control circuit terminal S5 ON
Bit 5
1: Control circuit terminal S6 ON
Bit 6
1: Control circuit terminal S7 ON
Bit 7
1: Control circuit terminal S8 ON
Bit 8
1: Control circuit terminal S9 ON
Bit 9
1: Control circuit terminal S10 ON
Bit A
1: Control circuit terminal S11 ON
Bit B
1: Control circuit terminal S12 ON
Bits C to F
Not used
Inverter status
Bit 0
Operation
1: Operating
Bit 1
Zero-speed
1: Zero-speed
Bit 2
Frequency matching
1: Matched
Bit 3
User-defined speed matching
1: Matched
Bit 4
Frequency detection 1
1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5
Frequency detection 2
1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6
Inverter startup completed
1: Startup completed
Bit 7
Low voltage detection
1: Detected
Bit 8
Baseblock
1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9
Frequency reference mode
1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit A
Run Command mode
1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit B
Overtorque detection
1: Detected
Bit C
Frequency reference lost
1: Lost
Bit D
Retrying error
1: Retrying
Bit E
Error (including MEMOBUS communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F
MEMOBUS communications time-out 1: Timed out
Multi-function contact output status
Bit 0
Multi-function contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1
Multi-function PHC output 1 (terminal P1 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2
Multi-function PHC output 2 (terminal P2 - PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3
Multi-function PHC output 3 (terminal P3 - C3) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4
Multi-function PHC output 4 (terminal P4 - C4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 5 to F
Not used
Not used
Main circuit DC voltage
Torque monitor (Unit: 1/0.1%)
Output power (U1-08)
Not used
PID feedback quantity (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
PID input quantity (&plusmn;100%/&plusmn;Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
PID output quantity (&plusmn;100%/&plusmn;Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
CPU software number
Flash software number
6-101
Register No.
Contents
Communications error details
Bit 0
CRC error
Bit 1
Invalid data length
Bit 2
Not used
Bit 3
Parity error
Bit 4
Overrun error
Bit 5
Framing error
Bit 6
Time-out
Bits 7 to F
Not used
kVA setting
Control method
003DH
003EH
003FH
Note Communications error details are stored until an fault reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating).
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data.
Register
Address
Contents
Operation signal
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bits 2 and 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bits 6 to B
Bit C
Bit D
Bit E
Bit F
Frequency reference
0001H
0002H
Run Command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Not used
External fault 1: Error (set using H1-01)
Fault reset 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Not used
Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input
Multi-function contact input terminal S8 input
30000/100%
Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
ENTER Command
When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications, the constants are
temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter. To enable these constants in the constant data area,
use the ENTER command.
There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM, and
ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Inverter at the same time as
enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written.
The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H.
Register No.
0900H
Write constant data to EEPROM
0910H
Constant data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
INFO
6-102
Contents
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100 thousand. Do not frequently execute ENTER commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address
will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Individual Functions
Error Codes
The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes.
Error Code
Contents
01H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
02H
Invalid register number error
• The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
• With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
03H
Invalid quantity error
• The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16.
• In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
21H
Data setting error
• A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing constants.
• When writing constants, the constant setting is invalid.
22H
Write mode error
• Attempting to write constants from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write via ENTER commands from the PLC during operation.
• Attempting to write constants other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when warning alarm
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred.
• Attempting to write read-only data.
23H
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error
• Writing constants from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
• Writing via ENTER commands from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
24H
Writing error during constants processing
Attempting to write constants from the PLC while processing constants in the Inverter.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function. If the slave address specified in the command
message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
• When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
• When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree.
• When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits.
• When the command message data length is invalid.
Application Precautions
Set a timer in the master to monitor response time from the slaves. Make the setting so that if no response is
sent to the master from the slave within the set time, the same command message is sent again from the master.
6-103
Self-Diagnosis
The Inverter has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface circuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communications parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Inverter, and checks if
communications are being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter, and set 67 (communications test mode) in constant H1-05 (Terminal S7 Function Selection).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again.
Fig 6.61 Details of Communications Terminals
“Pass” will be displayed if self-diagnosis is completed without an error occurring.
If an error occurs, a CE (MEMOBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator,
the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
6-104
Individual Functions
Using the Timer Function
Multi-function contact input terminals S3 to S12 can be designated as timer function input terminals, and
multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, P2-PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 can be designated as timer function output terminals. By setting the delay time, you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches.
• Set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12) to 18 (timer
function input).
• Set H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function output terminals M1-M2, P1-PC, P2-PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function
selection) to 12 (timer function output).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the timer function output
ON-delay time (dead band) for
the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Enabled when a timer function is
set in H1- or H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
Timer function Sets the timer function output
OFF-delay time OFF-delay time (dead band) for
the timer function input, in 1-second units.
Delay-OFF
Enabled when a timer function is
Timer
set in H1- or H2-.
0.0 to
300.0
0.0 s
Display
Timer function
ON-delay time
b4-01
b4-02
Delay-ON
Timer
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A3H
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A4H
Setting Example
When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-01, the timer output function is
turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-02, the timer output
function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram.
Timer function input
Timer function output
Fig 6.62 Timer Function Operation Example
6-105
Using PID Control
PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combining proportional control (P), integral control (I), and derivative control (D), you can even control targets
(machinery) with play time.
The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below.
P control
Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation. You cannot, however, set the
deviation to zero using P control alone.
I control
Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback
value to the target value. I control is not suited, however, to rapid variations.
D control
Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation. Can respond promptly to rapid
variations.
PID Control Operation
To understand the differences between each PID control operation (P, I, and D, the variation in the amount of
operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference
between the target value and feedback value) is fixed.
Deviation
Time
PID control
Amount of operation
I control
D control
P control
Time
Fig 6.63 PID Control Operation
PID Control Applications
The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter.
Application
6-106
Control Details
Example of Sensor Used
• Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed to the target value.
Speed Con• Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs
trol
synchronous control using the actual speed feedback.
Tachometer generator
Pressure
Control
Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control.
Pressure sensor
Flow Rate
Control
Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately.
Flow rate sensor
Temperature Control
Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control
by rotating the fan.
• Thermocouple
• Thermistor
Individual Functions
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1A5H
1.00
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A6H
0.0 to
360.0
1.0 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A7H
0.0 to
100.0
100.0
%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A8H
0.00 to
10.00
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1A9H
0.0 to
100.0
100.0
%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1AAH
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1ABH
Sets the time constant for low
pass filter for PID-control outputs 0.00 to
in 1-second units.
10.00
Not usually necessary to set.
0.00 s
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
1ACH
Setting
Range
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Deviation is Dcontrolled.)
2: Enabled (Feedback value is Dcontrolled.)
3: PID control enabled
(frequency reference + PID
output, D control of deviation)
4: PID control enabled
(frequency reference + PID
output, D control of feedback
value).
0 to 4
0
Sets P-control proportional gain
as a percentage.
P-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.00.
0.00
to
25.00
b5-03
Integral (I) time Sets I-control integral time in 1second units.
I-control is not performed when
PID I Time
the setting is 0.0.
b5-04
Integral (I) limit Sets the I-control limit as a percentage of the maximum output
PID I Limit
frequency.
PID control
method selection
b5-01
PID Mode
b5-02
Proportional
gain (P)
PID Gain
b5-05
Derivative (D)
time
PID D Time
b5-06
b5-07
PID Offset
b5-08
PID first order
lag time constant
PID Delay
Time
b5-09
PID output
characteristics
selection
Output Level
Sel
b5-10
Sets D-control derivative time in
1-second units.
D-control is not performed when
the setting is 0.00.
PID upper limit Sets the upper limit after PIDcontrol as a percentage of the
PID Limit
maximum output frequency.
PID offset
adjustment
PID output gain
Output Gain
PID reverse
output selection
b5-11
Output Rev Sel
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
with
PG
Description
Display
Control Methods
Sets the offset after PID-control
as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Select forward/reverse for PID
output.
0: PID output is forward.
1: PID output is reverse
(highlights the output code)
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1ADH
Sets output gain.
0.0 to
25.0
1.0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1AEH
0: 0 limit when PID output is
negative.
1: Reverses when PID output is
negative.
0 limit when reverse prohibit is
selected using b1-04.
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
1AFH
6-107
Name
Constant
Number
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
0
0 to
100
Fb los Det Lvl
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percent units, with
the maximum output frequency at
100%.
PID feedback
command loss
detection time
Sets the PID feedback loss detection level in s units.
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B0H
0%
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B1H
0.0 to
25.5
1.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B2H
b5-15
PID sleep function operation
Set the PID sleep function start
level
level as a frequency.
PID Sleep
Level
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B3H
b5-16
PID sleep operation delay time Set the delay time until the PID
sleep function starts in seconds.
PID Sleep Time
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B4H
0.0 to
25.5
0.0 s
No
A
A
A
A
A
1B5H
0 to 2
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
42CH
Description
Display
Selection of
PID feedback
command loss
detection
0: No detection of loss of PID
feedback.
1: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Operation continues during
detection, with the
malfunctioning contact not
operating.
2: Detection of loss of PID
feedback.
Coasts to stop during
detection, and fault contact
operates.
b5-12
Fb los Det Sel
b5-13
b5-14
PID feedback
command loss
detection level
Fb los Det Time
b5-17
Accel/decel
time for PID
reference
Set the accel/decel time for PID
reference in seconds.
PID SFS Time
H6-01
Pulse train
input function
selection
Pulse Input Sel
0: Frequency reference
1: PID feedback value
2: PID target value
Monitor Functions
Name
Constant
Number
Display
PID feedback value
U1-24
U1-36
PID Feedback
PID input
volume
PID Input
6-108
Control Methods
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
RegVecister
tor
2
Monitors the feedback value
when PID control is used.
The input for the max. frequency corresponds to
100%.
10 V: Max. frequency
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
57H
PID feedback volume
Given as maximum frequency/100%
10 V: Max. frequency
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
58H
Individual Functions
Name
Constant
Number
U1-37
Control Methods
Description
Display
PID output
volume
PID control output
Given as maximum frequency/100%
PID Output
U1-38
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function Analog Output
10 V: Max. frequency
(-10 to 10 V possible)
PID command
PID command + PID command bias
Given as maximum frePID Setpoint quency/100%
10 V: Max. frequency
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
RegVecister
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
59H
0.01
%
A
A
A
A
A
5AH
Min.
Unit
Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
19
PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
30
PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when stopped during
PID control)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
31
PID control integral hold (ON: Hold)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
34
PID soft starter
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
35
PID input characteristics switch
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
Contents (100%)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
B
PID feedback
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
C
PID target value
Maximum output frequency
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PID Control Methods
There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting constant b5-01.
Set Value
Control Method
1
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID
target value and feedback value.
2
PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value.
3
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
difference between PID target value and feedback value.
4
PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency, and D control is used in the
PID feedback value.
6-109
PID Input Methods
Enable PID control using constant b5-01, and set the PID target value and PID feedback value.
PID Target Value Input Methods
Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1-01 (Reference Selection).
Normally, the frequency reference selected in b1-01 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target
value as shown in the following table.
PID Target Input Method
Setting Conditions
Multi-Function Analog Terminal A2, or A3 Input
Set H3-05 or H3-09 to C (PID target value). Also, be sure to set H6-01 (pulse train input
function selection) to 1 (PID feedback value).
The negative inputs cannot be used for target values.
MEMOBUS register 0006H
Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 (enable/disable PID target value
from communications) to be able to use register number 0006H as the PID target value.
Pulse train input
Set H6-01 to 2 (PID target value).
PID Feedback Input Methods
Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods.
Input Method
Setting Conditions
Multi-function analog input
Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) to B (PID feedback).
Pulse train input
Set H6-01 to 1 (PID feedback).
Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items.
• Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias.
• Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias.
INFO
PID Adjustment Methods
Use the following procedure to adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response waveform.
1. Set b5-01 (PID Control Method Selection) to 1 or 2 (PID control enabled).
2. Increase b5-02 (Proportional Gain (P)) to within a range that does not vibrate.
3. Reduce b5-03 (Integral (I) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
4. Increase b5-05 (Derivative (D) time) to within a range that does not vibrate.
6-110
Individual Functions
PID Fine Adjustment Methods
This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control constants.
Suppressing Overshoot
If overshoot occurs, reduce derivative time (D), and increase integral time (I).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition
To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen derivative time
(D).
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, the integral operation is too strong.
Lengthen the integral time (I) to suppress the vibration.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
6-111
Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration
If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short, and the cycle is almost identical to the derivative time (D)
set value, the differential operation is too strong. Shorten the derivative time (D) to suppress the vibration.
If vibration continues even when the derivative time (D) is set to 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant.
Response
Before adjustment
After adjustment
Time
Setting Precautions
• In PID control, the b5-04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a
specified amount. If the load changes rapidly, the machine may be damaged or the motor may stall because
of unpredictable response from the Inverter. In this case, reduce the set value.
• The b5-06 constant is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from
exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100%.
• The b5-07 constant is used to adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.1%, taking the maximum
output frequency to be 100%.
• Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this constant to prevent
machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this
case, set the constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant to
reduce Inverter responsiveness.
• Using b5-09, you can invert the PID output polarity. Consequently, if you increase the PID target value,
you can apply this constant to applications to lower the Inverter output frequency.
• Using b5-10, you can apply gain to the PID control output. Enable this constant to adjust the amount of
compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation.
• When PID control output is negative, you can use constant b5-11 to invert the Inverter. When b1-04 (Pro-
hibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (enabled), however, PID output limit is 0.
• With the Inverter, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in constant b5-17, you can
increase or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/
deceleration function (constant C1) used normally, however, is allocated after PID control, so depending
on the settings, resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens,
reduce constant C1 until hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b517. Also, you can disable the set value in b5-17 from the external terminals during operation using multifunction input set value 34 (PID soft starter ON/OFF).
6-112
PID feed-back
value (U1-24)
Z -1
+
H6-01=2
+
b5-01=2,4
+
H6-01=1
b5-01=1,3
P
-1
Select multi-function inputs
PID input characteristics
Proportional
gain (P)
b5-02
+
PID OFF
b5-01=3,4
b5-01=1,2
b5-01=0
Z-1
+
1
T
Z -1
Derivative
time
+
PID ON
b5-01=2,4
+
+
+
Integral rset using
multi-function inputs
Integral (I)
time
b5-04
b5-01=1,3
+
+
b5-05
Integral
(I) time
b5-03
Store integral using
multi-function inputs
PID target value
(U1-38)
Multi-function input PID control cancel
signal is ON. PID is OFF under the
following conditions:
b5-01 = 0
During JOG command input
Frequency reference
(U1-01)
PID input volume
(U1-36)
Set PID target value in
multi-function analog input
H3-05 or
H3-09=B
0
PID SFS Cancel
b5-17
1
Frequency reference
using multi-step command
Set bit 1 of MEMOBUS
register 0FH to 1
0
1
2
3
4
b5-05
Derivative (D)
time
Pulse input terminal RP
Terminal A2 or A3 PID
feedback
Terminal A2 or A3 PID
target value
MEMOBUS communications
register 06 H PID target value
Pulse input terminal RP
d1-16
d1-02
d1-01
Terminal A1
Serial Com
Option Card
Pulse train input
b1-01
+
Lower limit
-(Fmaxx109%)
1
T
+
+
1
Output frequency
(U1-02)
+
PID offset
adjustment (b5-07)
-1
+
PID output
gain (b5-10)
PID output monitor
(U1-37)
1
Select PID output
characteristics selection
(b5-09)
Z -1
0
Lower limit 0
Upper limit
Fmax x109%
Upper limit
Fmax x109%
b5-11=0
PID first order lag
time constant
b5-08
b5-11=1
PID upper
limit
b5-06
PID Limit
+
Enable/disable reverse operation
when PI output is negative
Individual Functions
PID Control Block
The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter.
Fig 6.64 PID Control Block
6-113
PID Feedback Loss Detection
When performing PID control, be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function. If PID feedback is lost,
the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency.
When setting b5-12 to 1 and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5-13 is insufficient and
continues for the time set in b5-14, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator and Inverter operation will continue.
When b5-12 is set to 2, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital
Operator, the error contact will operate, and Inverter operation will be stopped.
The time chart for PID feedback loss detection (set b5-12 to 2) is shown below.
PID feedback value
Loss detection
level
(b5-13)
Time
No FbL
detection
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
FbL detection
Loss detection time
(b5-14)
Fig 6.65 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart
PID Sleep
The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID sleep function delay time continues while the PID
control target value is at an insufficient level to operate the PID sleep function. When the PID sleep delay time
continues and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level, Inverter operation
will automatically resume.
When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function,
select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method.
The PID sleep time chart is shown below.
PID target value
Sleep operation
level b5-15
Sleep operation
delay time
Internal Run Command
External Run Command
Operating
Sleep operation
delay time
b5-16
Operation
b5-16
Stopped
Run Command has been input
Operation status output
Fig 6.66 PID Sleep Time Chart
6-114
Individual Functions
Energy-saving
To perform energy saving, set b8-01 (Energy Saving Mode Selection) to 1. Energy-saving control can be performed using both V/f control and vector control. The constants to be adjusted are different for each. In V/f
control, adjust b8-04 to b8-06, and in vector control, adjust b8-02 and b8-03.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
b8-01
b8-02
b8-03
Display
Energy-saving
mode selection
Energy Save
Sel
Energy-saving
gain
Energy Save
Gain
Energy-saving
filter time constant
Energy Save
F.T
Energy-saving
coefficient
b8-04
b8-05
Energy Save
COEF
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Select whether to enable or disable energy-saving control.
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 or 1
0
Set the energy-saving gain with
the open-loop vector control
method.
0.0 to
10.0
0.7
Set the energy-saving filter time
constant with the open-loop vector control method.
0.00 to
10.0
0.50 s
Set the maximum motor efficiency value.
Set the motor rated capacity in
E2-11, and adjust the value by 5%
at a time until output power
reaches a minimum value.
0.0 to 288.20
655.00 *3 *4
Description
Power detection
filter time con- Set the time constant for output
stant
power detection.
*1
*2
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
1CCH
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
1CDH
Yes
No
No
A
A
A
1CEH
No
A
A
No
No
No
1CFH
0 to
2000
20 ms
No
A
A
No
No
No
1D0H
0 to
100
0%
No
A
A
No
No
No
1D1H
2.90
Hz
No
A
A
A
A
A
30FH
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
318H
kW Filter Time
Search operation voltage
limiter
b8-06
Search V Limit
E2-02
E2-11
Set the limit value of the voltage
control range during search operation.
Perform search operation to optimize operations using minute
variations in voltage using
energy-saving control. Set to 0 to
disable the search operation.
100% is the motor base voltage.
Motor rated slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz
units.
These set values will become the
reference values for slip compenMotor Rated
sation.
Slip
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Motor rated
output
Mtr Rated
Power
Set the rated output of the motor
in units of 0.01 kW.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.00 to
20.00
0.00 to
650.00
*4
0.40
*4
* 1. The factory setting is 1.0 when using flux vector control.
* 2. The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory setting is given.
* 3. By setting E2-11 (Motor rated output) the appropriate value will be set.
* 4. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
6-115
Adjusting Energy-saving Control
The method of adjustment during energy-saving control operations differs depending on the control method.
Refer to the following when making adjustments.
V/f Control
In V/f control method, the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage
reference.
• b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter. If the motor
capacity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter, set the motor capacity in E2-11 (Motor Rated Output). Also, adjust the output voltage in steps of 5 until it reaches minimum. The larger the energy-saving
coefficient, the greater the output voltage.
• To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-05. If b8-
05 is set too small, however, motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable.
• Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics. Conse-
quently, control motor efficiency online to optimize efficiency by causing minute variations in voltage
using the search operation. Constant b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that control the voltage using the search operation. For 200 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/200 V, and for
400 V Class Inverters, set the range to 100%/400 V. Set to 0 to disable the search operation.
Vector Control
In vector control method, control the slip frequency so that motor efficiency is maximized.
• Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, calculate the optimum slip for motor
efficiency for each frequency. In vector control, be sure to perform autotuning, and set the motor rated slip.
• If the motor performs hunting when using energy-saving control in vector control, reduce the set value in
b8-02 (Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03 (Energy-saving Filter Time Constant).
6-116
Individual Functions
Setting Motor Constants
In vector control method, the motor constants are set automatically using autotuning. If autotuning does not
complete normally, set them manually.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Motor rated
current
E2-01
E2-02
E2-03
E2-04
E2-05
Motor Rated
FLA
Motor no-load
current
No-Load Current
Number of
motor poles
Number of
Poles
Motor line-toline resistance
Term Resistance
E2-07
Leak Inductance
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
Saturation
Comp1
E2-08
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
Saturation
Comp2
Factory
Setting
Sets the motor rated current in 1 A
units.
These set values will become the
0.32 to
reference values for motor protec1.90 A
6.40
*1
tion, torque limits and torque con*2
trol.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Motor rated slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz
units.
These set values will become the
reference values for slip compenMotor Rated
sation.
Slip
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
Motor leak
inductance
E2-06
Description
Setting
Range
0.00 to
20.00
2.90
Hz
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
30EH
No
A
A
A
A
A
30FH
No
A
A
A
A
A
310H
*1
Sets the motor no-load current in
1 A units.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.00 to
1.20 A
1.89
*1
Sets the number of motor poles.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
2 to 48
4
poles
No
No
Q
No
Q
Q
311H
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
resistance in Ω units.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.000
to
65.000
9.842
Ω
No
A
A
A
A
A
312H
Sets the voltage drop due to motor
leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage.
This constant is automatically set
during autotuning.
0.0 to
40.0
18.2%
No
No
No
A
A
A
313H
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 50% of magnetic
flux.
This constant is automatically set
during rotational autotuning.
0.00 to
0.50
0.50
No
No
No
A
A
A
314H
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 75% of magnetic
flux.
This constant is automatically set
during rotational autotuning.
0.00 to
0.75
0.75
No
No
No
A
A
A
315H
*3
*1
*1
6-117
Name
Constant
Number
E2-10
Description
Display
Motor iron loss
for torque compensation
Sets motor iron loss in W units.
Tcomp Iron
Loss
E2-12
Motor iron saturation coefficient 3
Saturation
Comp3
Sets the motor iron saturation
coefficient at 130% of magnetic
flux.
This constant is automatically set
during rotational autotuning.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0 to
65535
14 W
1.30 to
1.60
*1
1.30
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
No
No
No
317H
No
No
No
A
A
A
328H
* 1. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
* 2. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0.4 kW is given.
For the motor no-load current, set E2-03 to a value less than that of E2-01.
* 3. The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given. The upper limit depends on the setting of
E2-01.
Manual Motor Constant Setting Methods
The motor constants settings methods are given below. Make (enter) settings referring to the motor test report.
Motor Rated Voltage Setting
Set E2-01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate.
Motor Rated Slip Setting
Set E2-02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate.
Amount of motor rated slip = Motor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min−1) x No. of motor
poles/120.
Motor No-Load Current Setting
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current using the rated voltage and rated frequency. The motor no-load current
is not normally written on the motor nameplate. Consult the motor manufacturer.
Factory setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole motor.
Number of Motor Poles Setting
Set the number of motor poles (number of poles) as written on the motor nameplate. E2-04 is not displayed
when V/f control or open-loop vector control is selected.
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Setting
E2-05 is set automatically when performing motor line-to-line resistance autotuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the motor manufacturer for the line-to-line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from
the line-to-line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting
accordingly.
• E-type isolation: [Line-to-line resistance (Ω) at 75&deg;C of test report] &times; 0.92 (Ω)
• B-type isolation: [Line-to-line resistance (Ω) at 75&deg;C of test report] &times; 0.92 (Ω)
• F-type isolation: [Line-to-line resistance (Ω) at 115&deg;C of test report] &times; 0.87 (Ω)
6-118
Individual Functions
Motor Leak Inductance Setting
Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leak inductance in E2-06 using the percentage over the motor
rated voltage. Make this setting when the high-speed motor inductance is small. If the inductance is not written on the motor nameplate, consult the motor manufacturer.
Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1, 2 and 3 Settings
E2-07, E2-08 and E2-12 are set automatically using rotational autotuning.
Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting
E2-10 is displayed only when in V/f control method. To increase the torque compensation accuracy when in
V/f control method, set the motor iron loss in Watts.
Motor Mechanical Loss
When using flux vector control, adjust mechanical loss in the following cases. (There is normally no reason to
make this adjustment.) The mechanical loss setting is used to compensate the torque.
• There is excessive torque loss from the motor bearings.
• There is excessive torque loss from a fan, pump, etc.
6-119
Setting the V/f Pattern
In V/f control method, you can set the Inverter input voltage and the V/f pattern as the need arises.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
E1-01
Display
Input voltage
setting
Input Voltage
V/f pattern
selection
E1-03
V/F Selection
E1-04
Description
Set the Inverter input voltage in 1
volt.
This setting is used as a reference
value in protection functions.
0 to E: Select from the 15 preset
patterns.
F: Custom user-set patterns
(Applicable for settings E1-04
to E1-10.)
Max. output
frequency
Max
Frequency
Max. voltage
E1-05
E1-06
E1-07
E1-08
Max Voltage
Base
frequency
Mid
Frequency A
Mid. output
frequency
voltage
Mid Voltage
A
E1-09
E1-10
Min. output
frequency
Min
Frequency
Min. output
frequency
voltage
Min Voltage
6-120
Factory
Setting
155 to
255
200 V
*1
*1
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
300H
0 to F
F
No
Q
Q
No
No
No
302H
40.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
303H
*5
*2
0.0 to
255.0
200.0
V
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
304H
*1
*1*2
0.0 to
400.0
60.0
Hz
No
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
305H
*5
*2
0.0 to
400.0
3.0 Hz
No
A
A
A
No
No
306H
No
A
A
A
No
No
307H
No
Q
Q
Q
A
Q
308H
No
A
A
A
No
No
309H
Output voltage (V)
Base
Frequency
Mid. output
frequency
Setting
Range
Frequency (Hz)
To set V/f characteristics in a
straight line, set the same values for
E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the
setting for E1-08 will be disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following
manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) &gt; E107 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
0.0 to
255.0
*1
0.0 to
400.0
*5
0.0 to
255.0
*1
*2
11.0 V
*1 *2
0.5 Hz
*2
2.0 V
*1 *2
Individual Functions
Name
Constant
Number
E1-11
E1-12
E1-13
*
*
*
*
*
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Display
Description
Mid. output
frequency 2
Mid
Frequency B
Mid. output
frequency
voltage 2
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
*5
Set only to fine-adjust V/f for the
output range. Normally, this setting
is not required.
0.0 to
255.0
Mid Voltage
B
*1
Base voltage
0.0 to
255.0
Base Voltage
*1
Change
during
Operation
*3
0.0 V
*3
0.0 V
*4
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
30AH
No
A
A
A
A
A
30BH
No
A
A
Q
Q
Q
30CH
These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
The setting range for open-loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66.0 (0 to 132.0 for PRG: 103).
Setting Inverter Input Voltage
Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1-01 to match the power supply voltage. This set value will be the
standard value for the protection function and similar functions.
The overvoltage detection level (OV) and the braking transistor operation level (BTR) vary depending on the
input voltage as shown in the following table.
Inverter Class
200 V Class
400 V Class
All values
400 V or more
Approx. 410 V
Approx. 820 V
BTR Operation Level∗
Approx. 394 V
Approx. 788 V
Less than 400 V
Approx. 720 V
Approx. 682 V
E1-01 Setting
OV Detection Level
* These are values of operation levels for braking transistors built in Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW. Refer to FOR VARISPEED-600 SERIES INVERTER BRAKING UNIT BRAKING RESISTOR UNIT INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC720600000) for operation levels for separately-installed type Braking Resistor Units.
If selecting a fixed V/f pattern (E1-03 = 0 to E) in V/f control the values of the max. voltage (E1-05), the mid.
Output frequency voltage (E1-08), and the min. output frequency voltage (E1-10) will change if the value for
the input voltage setting (E1-01) is changed.
6-121
Setting V/f Pattern
Set the V/f pattern in E1-03 when using V/f control (with or without a PG). There are two methods of setting
the V/f pattern: Select one of the 15 pattern types (set value: 0 to E) that have been set beforehand, or set a
user-defined V/f pattern (set value: F).
The factory setting for E1-03 is F. The contents of E1-03 when factory-set to F are the same as when E1-03 is
set to 1.
To select one of the existing patterns, refer to the following table.
Characteristic
Constant Torque
Characteristic
Variable torque
characteristic
High Startup
Torque (See
Note)*
Fixed Output
Operation
Application
This pattern is used in general applications.
Used when the load torque is fixed, regardless of rotation speed, for linear transport
systems.
This pattern is used for loads with torque
proportional to two or three times the rotation speed, such as fans and pumps.
Select the high startup torque V/f pattern
only in the following cases.
• The wiring distance between Inverter and
motor is large (approx. 150 m min.)
• A large torque is required at startup (elevator loads, etc.)
• An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter
input or output.
• You are operating a motor that is less
than optimum.
This pattern is used for frequencies of 60
Hz or higher. A fixed voltage is applied.
Set
Value
Specifications
0
50 Hz specifications
1 (F)
60 Hz specifications
2
60 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
50 Hz
3
72 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
4
50 Hz specifications,&times; 3 decrement
5
50 Hz specifications, &times; 2 decrement
6
60 Hz specifications, &times; 3 decrement
7
60 Hz specifications, &times; 2 decrement
8
50 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
9
50 Hz specifications, large startup torque
A
60 Hz specifications, medium startup
torque
B
60 Hz specifications, large startup torque
C
90 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
D
120 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
E
180 Hz specifications, voltage saturation at
60 Hz
* The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function, so normally there is no need to use this pattern.
When you select these patterns, the values of constants E1-04 to E1-10 are changed automatically. There are
three types of values for E1-04 to E1-10, depending on the Inverter capacity.
• 0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f pattern
• 2.2 to 45 kW V/f pattern
• 55 to 300 kW V/f pattern
The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages.
6-122
Individual Functions
0.4 to 1.5 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High startup torque (Set value 8: to B)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
6-123
2.2 to 45 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
6-124
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
Individual Functions
55 to 300 kW V/f Pattern
The diagrams show characteristics for a 200-V class motor. For a 400-V class motor, multiply all voltages by
2.
• Constant Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 0 to 3)
Set Value 0
50 Hz
Set Value 1
60 Hz
Set Value 2
60 Hz
Set Value 3
72 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value 6
60 Hz
Set Value 7
60 Hz
50 Hz
Set Value A
60 Hz
Set Value B
60 Hz
Set Value E
180 Hz
(Initial value of set value F)
• Decrement Torque Characteristics (Set Value: 4 to 7)
Set Value 4
50 Hz
Set Value 5
• High Startup Torque (Set Value: 8 to B)
Set Value 8
50 Hz
Set Value 9
• Fixed Output Operation (Set Value: C to E)
Set Value C
90 Hz
Set Value D
120 Hz
6-125
When E1-03 is set to F (User-defined V/f pattern), you can set constants E1-04 to E1-10. If E1-03 is set to
anything other than F, you can only refer to constants E1-04 to E1-10. If the V/f characteristics are linear, set
E1-07 and E1-09 to the same value. In this case, E1-08 will be ignored.
Output voltage (V)
E1-05
(VMAX)
E1-13
(V Base)
E1-08
(VC)
E1-10
(VMIN)
E1-09
(FMIN)
E1-07
(FB)
E1-06
(FA)
E1-04
(FMAX)
Frequency (Hz)
Fig 6.67 User-Set V/f Pattern
Setting Precautions
When the setting is to user-defined V/f pattern, beware of the following points.
• When changing control method, constants E1-07 to E1-10 will change to the factory settings for that
control method.
• Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows:
E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) &gt; E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
6-126
Individual Functions
Torque Control
With flux vector control or open-loop vector 2 control, the motor's output torque can be controlled by a torque
reference from an analog input. To control torque, set d5-01 to 1 or set multi-function contact inputs H1-
to 71 (Speed/Torque control) and turn ON the contact.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Speed control (C5-01 to C507)
1: Torque control
This function is only available in
flux vector control method. To
use the function for switching
between speed and torque control,
set to 0 and set the multi-function
input to “speed/torque control
change.”
0 or 1
0
Set the torque reference filter primary delay time in ms units.
This function can be used to
adjust the noise of the torque control signal or the responsiveness
with the host controller. When
oscillation occurs during torque
control, increase the set value.
0 to
1000
Set the speed limit command
method for the torque control
method.
1: The analog input limit from a 1 or 2
frequency reference
Speed Limit Sel
2: Limited by d5-04 constant setting values.
Display
Torque control
selection
d5-01
Torq Control
Sel
Torque
reference delay
time
d5-02
Torq Ref Filter
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
No
A
A
29AH
0*
No
No
No
No
A
A
29BH
1
No
No
No
No
A
A
29CH
-120
to
+120
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
29DH
0 to
120
10
No
No
No
No
A
A
29EH
Speed limit
selection
d5-03
Speed limit
d5-04
d5-05
Speed Lmt
Value
Set the speed limit during torque
control as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency.
This function is enabled when d503 is set to 2. Directions are as
follows:
+: Run Command direction
-: Opposite of Run Command
Speed limit bias Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output
frequency.
Bias is applied to the specified
Speed Lmt Bias speed limit. It can be used to
adjust the margin for the speed
limit.
6-127
Name
Constant
Number
d5-06
d5-07
Display
Rotation
direction limit
operation
selection
Signal level
selection (terminal A3)
Term A3 Signal
H3-05
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
1000
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Usually, use a setting of 1
(enabled).
Be sure to enable this setting
when rotating the motor in the
same direction as the speed limit
(winding operation).
0 or 1
0: 0 to 10V
1: -10 to 10V
[11-bit + polarity (positive/
negative) input]
Multi-function
analog input
(terminal A3)
function selection
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
No
A
A
29FH
1
No
No
No
No
No
A
2A6H
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
413H
Select multi-function analog input
0 to 1F
function for terminal A3.
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
414H
Description
Speed/torque
Set the delay time from inputting
control
the multi-function input “speed/
switching timer torque control change” (from ON
to OFF or OFF to ON) until the
control is actually changed in ms
units.
This function is enabled when the
multi-function input “speed/
torque control change” is set. In
Ref Hold Time the speed/torque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold
the values of when the “speed/
torque control change” changes.
Always be sure to allow time for
this process to finish completely.
Drctn SpdLmt
Sel
H3-04
Setting
Range
Terminal A3
Sel
H3-06
H3-07
H3-08
H3-09
Gain (terminal
A3)
Sets the input gain (level) when
10 V is input.
Set according to the 100% value
selected from H3-05.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0
%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
415H
Sets the input gain (level) when
0 V is input.
Set according to the 100% value
selected from H3-05.
-100.0
to
+100.0
0.0%
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
416H
0: 0 to 10V
1: -10V to 10V
2: 4 to 20 mA (9-bit input).
Switch current and voltage input
Term A2 Signal using the switch on the control
panel.
0 to 2
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
417H
Select multi-function analog input
0 to 1F
function for terminal A2.
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
418H
Terminal A3
Gain
Bias (terminal
A3)
Terminal A3
Bias
Signal level
selection
(terminal A2)
Multi-function
analog input
(terminal A2)
function selection
Terminal A2
Sel
6-128
Individual Functions
Name
Constant
Number
H3-10
H3-11
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the input gain (level) when
10 V (20 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0
%
Sets the input gain (level) when 0
V (4 mA) is input.
Set according to the 100% value
for the function set for H3-09.
-100.0
to
+100.
0
0.0%
Description
Display
Gain (terminal
A2)
Terminal A2
Gain
Bias (terminal
A2)
Terminal A2
Bias
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
419H
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
41AH
* The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The flux vector factory setting is given.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
71
Speed/torque control change (ON: Torque control)
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
78
Polarity Reverse Command for external torque reference
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-05)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
32
Function
Speed control circuit operating for torque control (except when stopped).
The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected.
Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit.
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Multi-function Analog Inputs (H3-05, H3-09)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
0
Add to terminal A1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
13
Torque reference/torque limit at speed control
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
14
Torque compensation
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Monitor Function
Name
Constant
Number
U1-09
Display
Control Methods
Description
Torque referMonitor in internal torque
ence
reference value for vector
Torque Ref- control.
erence
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function Analog Output
Min.
Unit
10 V: Motor rated torque
(-10 to 10 V possible)
0.1
%
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
A
A
Open MEMO
BUS
Loop
RegVecister
tor
2
A
48H
6-129
Inputting Torque References and Torque Reference Directions
The torque reference can be changed according to an analog input by setting H3-09 (Multi-function analog
input terminal A2 selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 selection) to 13 (torque reference) or 14 (torque compensation). The torque reference input methods are listed in the following table.
Torque Reference Input
Method
Reference Location
Between A3 and AC
Selection
Method
H3-04 = 1
H3-05 = 13
Set H3-04 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque reference.
To switch the torque reference between
positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
Set H3-08 to 0 for a 0 to 10-V torque reference.
To switch the torque reference between
positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-09 to 14.
Voltage input (-10 to 10 V)
Between A2 and AC
(Turn OFF pin 2 of
SW1.)
Remarks
Current input (4 to 20 mA)
Between A2 and AC
(Turn ON pin 2 of
SW1.)
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 13
To switch the torque reference between
positive and negative torque, set a multifunction analog input to 78.
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-09 to 14.
Option board (AI-14B)
(-10 to 10 V)
F2-01 = 0
Between TC2 and TC4 H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 13
The input can be used for torque compensation by setting H3-05 to 14.
The direction of the torque output from the motor will be determined by the sign of the analog signal input. It
does not depend on the direction of the Run Command. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive analog reference: Torque reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from
the motor output axis).
• Negative analog reference: Torque reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the
motor output axis).
Application Precautions
If the analog signal input level is 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA, a forward torque reference will not be applied. To
apply reverse torque, use an input level of -10 V to 10 V or switch the direction using a multi-function input
set to 78 (polarity Reverse Command for external torque reference).
6-130
Individual Functions
Torque compensation
from analog input
Torque reference
from analog input
Torque primary delay
filter
d5-02
+
Speed limit from analog
input from terminal A1
1
+
Speed limit
d5-04
−
Priority
circuit
Speed controller
(ASR)
Internal torque
reference
Torque limit
+
+
Refer to torque limit setting
via constants and analog input
2
d5-03
Speed limit bias
d5-05
Speed limiter
Speed feedback
Fig 6.68 Torque Control Block Diagram
Speed Limiter and Priority Circuit (Speed Limit Function)
If the external torque reference and load are not balanced during torque control, the motor will accelerate in
either the forward or reverse direction. The speed limit function is used to limit the speed to a specified value
and it consists of the speed limiter circuit and priority circuit.
When the motor speed exceeds the speed limit value during torque control, the speed limiter circuit generates
the suppression torque proportional to the speed above the limit value and adds to the torque reference. The
priority circuit switches the internal torque reference to ASR output so that the motor speed does not exceed
the speed limit value.
Application Precautions
There are two ways to set a speed limit: using an input from an analog input terminal and setting a speed limit
in d5-04. The inputs methods for a speed limit are listed in the following table.
Speed Limit Input Method
Location of Reference
Constant Settings
Set in d5-04
d5-03 = 2
Between A1 and AC
b1-01 = 1
H3-01 = 1
Voltage input (-10 to 10 V)
Remarks
Set H3-01 to 0 if the speed limit is always
to be positive.
Between A2 and AC
b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 1
H3-09 = 1
The value will be added to the value input
on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Set H3-03 to 0 if the speed limit input on
A2 is always to be positive.
Turn OFF (V side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1
on the terminal board.
Current input (4 to 20 mA)
Between A2 and AC
b1-01 = 0
H3-08 = 2
H3-09 = 1
The value will be added to the value input
on A1 to determine the speed limit.
Turn ON (I side) pin 2 of DIP switch S1
on the terminal board.
Option board (AI-4B)
(-10 to 10 V)
b1-01 = 3
Between TC1 and TC4
F2-01 = 0
If H3-09 is set to 0, the sum of the input
between TC2 and TC4 will be added the
input between TC1 and TC4 to determine
the speed limit.
6-131
The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal and the direction
of the Run Command.
• Positive voltage applied: The speed in the forward direction will be limited for forward operation.
IMPORTANT
• Negative voltage applied: The speed in the reverse direction will be limited for reverse operation.
If the direction of motor rotation and the command direction are not the same, speed will be limited to 0 as
long as b5-05 is set to 0.
Setting Speed Limit Bias
The same speed limit bias can be set for the forward and reverse side, and is different from the speed limit. Set
d5-04 to 0, and set the speed limit bias (d5-05) as a percentage of the maximum output frequency.
When setting both forward and reverse speed limit biases to 50%, set the speed limit to 0 (d5-03 = 2, d5-04 =
0, d5-05 = 50). The torque control range with these settings is between -50 to +50% of the speed.
When using the speed limit together with the speed limit bias, the torque control range will be limited by the
speed limit + the speed limit biases on the forward and reverse sides of the speed limit range.
When the forward speed limit is set to 50% and the speed limit bias to 10%, the torque control range will be as
shown in the figure below unless the priority circuit is taken into consideration.
Forward torque
∆N %
Reverse run
Forward run
Forward speed limit
d5-04 50 %
Speed limit bias
d5-05 10 %
∆N will be set as follows
Torque reference [%]
At motoring operation:
C5-01
Reverse torque
At regenerative operation: The smaller vaue
Torque reference [%]
or d5-05
C5-04
Fig 6.69 Setting Speed Limit Bias
Torque Limit Operation Examples
Operation examples will be described separately for winding operation, in which the speed and motor torque
are in the same directions, and rewinding operation, in which the speed and motor torque are in opposite directions.
Winding Operation
In a winding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the same direction. For the
winding operation, both the speed limit and the torque reference input are positive. The motor will accelerate
when the torque reference input is larger than the load and will decelerate when it is smaller than the load. If
the motor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. When the speed then drops below the speed limit, a positive compensation value is output. The torque
compensation is proportional to the ASR proportional gain. When the sum of the torque reference and the
torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating
and run at a constant speed.
6-132
Individual Functions
Rewinding Operation
In a rewinding operation, the line (speed) and torque generated by the motor are in the opposite directions. (In
this example, we’ll assume that the line speed is positive and the torque reference input is negative.) For the
rewinding operation, the speed limit is positive and the torque reference input is negative. If the motor turns
faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. If the motor
is rotating in reverse, a negative compensation value is output. If the speed is 0 or is below the speed limit, a 0
compensation value is output. In this way, the output from the speed limiter is used to maintain the motor
speed between 0 and the speed limit. When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant
speed.
Winding Operation
N T
Line direction
N T
X
Configuration
Rewinding Operation
T
N
Line direction
X
T
N
X
X
Line direction
M
Normal Rotation
Direction
M
Forward
M
Reverse
M
Forward
Line
direction
Reverse
Torque Reference
Polarity (TREF)
Speed Limit
Polarity (SLIM)
Torque
limit
Torque
Torque
limit
∆N
Torque
limit
Torque
Torque
limit
Torque
TREF
∆N
(d5-05)
(d5-05)
SLIM
SLIM
0
0
Generated Torque
0
Speed
SLIM
Speed
∆N
Speed
(d5-05)
TREF
TREF
Torque
limit
N(%) =
TREF(%)
C5-01
Torque
TREF
ǍN
N(%) =
Torque
limit
0
Speed
(d5-05)
Torque
limit
Torque
limit
TREF(%)
C5-01
SLIM
The lower value of ∆N(%) =
TREF(%) or d5-05(%)
C5-01
The lower value of ∆N(%) =
TREF(%) or d5-05(%)
C5-01
Rotation Direction Limit Operation Selection (Valid Only for PRG: 102 in Open-loop
Vector 2 Control)
In applications where the machine is not rotated in the opposite direction to the sign of the speed limit (i.e., in
winding operation), use with d5-07 set to 1. If the sign of the calculated speed is the opposite to that of the
speed limit, a torque will be output to prevent the motor from accelerating in the opposite direction.
Torque Reference Adjustment
Consider the following information when adjusting the torque.
Torque Reference Delay Time: d5-02
The time constant of the primary filter in the torque reference section can be adjusted. This constant is used to
eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness to the host controller. Increase the
setting if oscillation occurs during torque control.
6-133
Setting the Torque Compensation
Set multi-function analog input A2 or A3 to torque compensation (setting 14). When the amount of torque loss
for mechanical loss or other factor at the load is input to one of these terminals, it is added to the torque reference to compensate for the loss. The direction of torque will be as follows:
• Positive voltage (current): Torque compensation reference for forward motor rotation (counterclockwise as
viewed from the motor output axis).
• Negative voltage: Torque compensation reference for reverse motor rotation (clockwise as viewed from
the motor output axis).
Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward torque compensation can be
input when the 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected. If you want to input reverse torque compensation, be sure to select the -10 to 10 V signal level.
Speed/Torque Control Switching Function
It is possible to switch between speed control and torque control when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01
to H1-10) is set to 71 (Speed/Torque Control Change). Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and
torque control is performed when the input is ON. Set d5-01 to switch speed/torque control.
6-134
Individual Functions
Setting the Speed/Torque Control Switching Timer
The delay between a change in the speed/control switching function input (ON to OFF or OFF to ON) and the
corresponding change in the control method can be set in d5-06. During the timer delay, the value of the 3 analog inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/OFF status of speed/torque control switching signal
was changed. Use this delay to complete any changes required in external signals.
Application Precautions
• The frequency reference (during speed control) is set in b1-01. The speed limit during torque control is set
in d5-03.
• If the torque reference has been assigned to a multi-function analog input, terminal A2, or terminal A3, the
input function changes when the control method is switched between torque control and speed control.
During speed control: The multi-function analog input terminal is used as the torque limit input.
During torque control: The multi-function analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input.
• When the Run Command turns OFF, the control method when stopped will be for speed control. Even
from the torque control method, the system will automatically change to speed control and decelerate to a
stop when the Run Command turns OFF.
• When A1-02 (control method selection) is set to 3 (flux vector control), the speed/torque change command
(a setting of 71) can be set for a multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-10) to switch between speed and torque
control during operation. An example is shown below.
Terminal No.
User Constant No.
Factory Setting
Setting
S8
H1-06
8
71
Speed/torque control change
b1-01
1
1
Frequency reference selection
(terminals A1, A2)
d5-03
1
1
Speed limit (terminals A1, A2)
H3-05
0
13
Torque reference/torque limit
A1
A3
Function
A timing chart for switching between speed and torque control is shown in the following figure.
CLOSED
OPEN
Speed/torque change signal
(terminal S8 input)
CLOSED
OPEN
Run
Run Command
Control mode
Stop
Speed
Torque
Speed
Terminal A3 input
Speed (decel to stop)
Speed limit
Speed limit
Terminal A1 input
Torque
Speed
reference
Speed
reference
Torque limit
Torque limit
Torque
reference
Torque
reference
Fig 6.70 Speed/Torque Control Switching Time Chart.
6-135
Speed Control (ASR) Structure
Speed control (ASR) during vector control adjusts the torque reference so that the deviation between the
speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback or speed estimator) is 0. Speed control (ASR) during V/
f control with a PG adjusts the output frequency so that the deviation between the speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback or speed estimator) is 0. The following block diagram shows the structure of the
speed control for vector or V/f control with a PG.
Torque limits
C5-01, C5-03
Frequency
reference
+
+
−
Detected speed
Estimated speed
+
I
limit
I
Torque reference
Primary
filter
P
C5-06
(C5-10)
L7-01 to L7-04
C5-08
C5-02, C5-04
Speed Control Block Diagram for Vector Control
Output frequency
+
Frequency
reference
+
Limit
Detected speed
−
+
Change
rate
limiter
+
P
+
I
C5-01
C5-03
C5-05
C5-02, C5-04
Speed Control Block Diagram for V/f Control with a PG
Fig 6.71 Speed Control Block Diagrams
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
C5-01
C5-02
Display
Description
ASR proportional (P)
Sets the proportional gain of the speed
gain 1
loop (ASR.)
ASR P Gain
1
ASR integral (I) time
1
ASR I Time
1
6-136
Control Methods
Sets the integral time of the speed loop
(ASR) in 1-second units.
Setting
Range
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
0.00 to
300.00
20.00
*2
0.000
to
10.000
*1
0.500
s*1
Open MEMO
Loop BUS
RegVecister
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21BH
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21CH
Individual Functions
Name
Constant
Number
Display
C5-03
ASR proportional (P)
gain 2
ASR P Gain
2
C5-04
ASR limit
ASR Limit
ASR primary delay
time
C5-06
ASR Delay
Time
C5-07
ASR switching frequency
ASR Gain
SW Freq
C5-08
Description
Usually setting is not necessary.
Set to change the rotational speed gain.
ASR integral (I) limit
ASR I Limit
ASR primary delay
time 2
C5-10
ASR Delay
Time2
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.00 to
300.00
20.00
*1
*2
Open MEMO
Loop BUS
RegVecister
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21DH
Yes
No
A
No
A
A
21EH
No
No
A
No
No
No
21FH
No
No
No
No
A
A
220H
P, I
P=C5-01
I=C5-02
ASR integral (I) time
2
ASR I Time
2
C5-05
Control Methods
Change
during
Operation
P=C5-03
I=C5-04
0
E1-04
Motor speed (Hz)
0.000
to
10.000
0.500
s*1
Sets the upper limit for the compensation
frequency for the speed control loop
(ASR) to a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
0.0 to
20.0
Sets the filter time constant for outputting
torque references from the speed control
loop (ASR). It is set in 1-second units.
With open-loop vector 2 control, this setting is enabled only for speeds in the
range 0 to 35 Hz.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0.000
to
0.500
Set the frequency for switching between
Proportion Gain 1, 2 and Integral Time 1,
2 in Hz units.
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain
switching for a multi-function input takes
priority.
0.0 to
400.0
0.0 Hz
No
No
No
No
A
A
221H
Set the upper limit of the speed control
loop integral as a percentage of the value
at the rated load.
0 to
400
400%
No
No
No
No
A
A
222H
Sets the filter time constant for outputting
torque references from the speed control
loop (ASR). It is set in 1-second units.
With open-loop vector 2 control, this setting is enabled only for speeds greater
than 35 Hz.
Usually setting is not necessary.
0.000
to
0.500
0.010
s
No
No
No
No
No
A
231H
5.0%
0.004s
*1
* 1. When the control method is changed, the factory settings will change. The flux vector factory settings are given.
* 2. The setting range for flux vector and open-loop vector 2 controls is 1.00 to 300.00.
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
D
Speed control disable setting for V/f control with PG
OFF: Use speed control V/f control with PG
ON: Do not use speed control for V/f control with PG
No
Yes
No
No
No
E
Speed control integral reset
Enables switching between PI and P control for the speed control loop.
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
77
Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (switching between C5-01 and C5-03)
OFF: Use proportional gain in C5-01
ON: Use proportional gain in C5-03
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
6-137
Speed Control (ASR) Gain Adjustment for Vector Control
Use the following procedure to adjust C5-01 and C5-03 with the mechanical system and actual load connected.
At zero-speed, increase C5-01
(ASR P Gain 1) until there is no oscillation.
At zero-speed, decrease C5-02
(ASR I Time 1) until there is no oscillation.
Does oscillation develop when the motor
operates at the maximum normal operating
speed?
YES
Decrease C5-01 (ASR P Gain 1).
NO
Adjustment completed.
(When there is higher-level position control,
adjust the position loop gain so that
overshooting/undershooting doesn't occur.)
Increase C5-02 (ASR I Time 1).
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. Constant settings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to monitor the speed waveform.
Constant
No.
Name
Setting
H4-01
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM monitor selection
2
H4-02
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM output gain
1.00
H4-03
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal FM bias
0.0
H4-04
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM monitor selection
H4-05
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM output gain
1.00
H4-06
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal AM bias selection
0.00
H4-07
Multi-function analog output 1 terminal signal level selection
1
H4-08
Multi-function analog output 2 terminal signal level selection
1
5
Explanation
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 1 to be used
to monitor the output frequency.
Settings that allow multi-function analog output 2 to be used
to monitor the motor speed.
Settings that allow a -10 to 10 V
signal range to be monitored.
The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings.
• Multi-function analog output 1 (terminal FM): Outputs Inverter's output frequency (-10 to 10 V).
• Multi-function analog output 2 (terminal AM): Outputs actual motor speed (-10 to 10 V).
Terminal AC is the multi-function analog output common.
We recommend monitoring both the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response delay or
deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram.
6-138
Individual Functions
Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 (C5-01)
This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness is increased when
this setting is increased. Usually this setting is higher for larger loads. Oscillation will occur if this setting is
increased too much.
The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR proportional
gain is changed.
Motor speed
The proportional gain is high.
(Oscillation occurs when the gain is too high.)
The proportional gain is low.
Time
Fig 6.72 Responsiveness for Proportional Gain
Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 (C5-02)
This constant sets the speed control (ASR) integral time.
Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness, and weakens the resistance to external influences.
Oscillation will occur if this setting is too short. The following diagram shows the type of changes that can
occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed.
Motor speed
Short integral time
Long integral time
Time
Fig 6.73 Responsiveness for Integral Time
6-139
Different Gain Settings for Low-speed and High-speed
Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the
mechanical system at low speed or high speed. The proportional gain P and integral time I can be switched
according to the motor speed, as shown below.
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P, I
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
C5-07
(Low speed)
Motor speed (Hz)
If C5-07 is set to 0, P = C5-01 and I = C5-02.
Fig 6.74 Low-speed and High-speed Gain Settings
Setting the Gain Switching Frequency (C5-07)
Set the switching frequency to about 80% of the motor operating frequency or the frequency at which oscillation occurs.
Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03, C5-04)
Connect the actual load and adjust these constants at zero-speed. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2)
until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) until there is no oscillation.
High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-01, C5-02)
Adjust these constants at normal operating speed. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) until there is no
oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) until there is no oscillation. Refer to Fine Adjustments on
page 6-138 for details on making fine adjustments of high-speed operation.
ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting
When one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-10) is set to 77, the input can be used to switch between
C5-01 (proportional gain 1) and C5-03 (proportional gain 2). Proportional gain 2 is used when the multi-function input is ON. This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07.
ON
ASR Gain Switch signal
(a multi-function input)
OFF
Proportional gain
determined
by motor speed.
Proportional gain (P)
C5-03 gain setting
C5-02
C5-02
The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 (C5-02).
Fig 6.75 ASR Proportional Gain Switch
6-140
Individual Functions
Precautions for Open-loop Vector 2 Control (PRG: 102 only)
• The ASR primary delay time setting for open-loop vector 2 control is divided between constants C5-06
and C5-10. The constant that is used depends on the size of the operating frequency. If the operating frequency is between 0 and 35 Hz, adjust the setting using C5-06, and if the operating frequency is greater
than 35 Hz, adjust the setting using C5-10.
• To increase the speed response, adjust the gain with reference to the explanations on page 4-19 in Chapter
4 Trial Operation.
Gain Adjustment for Speed Control during V/f Control with PG
When using V/f control with PG, set the proportional gain (P) and the integral time (I) at E1-09 (minimum output frequency) and E1-04 (maximum output frequency). Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V/f
Control with PG shows how the proportional gain and integral time change in linear fashion based on the
speed.
P and I setting
P = C5-01
I = C5-02
P = C5-03
I = C5-04
0
E1-09
Min. output frequency
Motor speed (Hz)
E1-04
Max. output frequency
Fig 6.76 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V/f Control with PG
Gain Adjustments at Minimum Output Frequency
Operate the motor at the minimum output frequency. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain 2) to a level
where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time 2) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Monitor the Inverter's output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the Inverter rated current. If the output current exceeds 50% of the Inverter's rated current, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04.
Gain Adjustments at Maximum Output Frequency
Operate the motor at the maximum output frequency. Increase C5-01 (ASR proportional gain 1) to a level
where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-02 (ASR integral time 1) to a level where there is no oscillation.
Fine Adjustments
When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. The adjustment method is the same as that for vector control.
Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration (by setting F1-07 to 1) when you want the
motor speed to closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration. Reduce the setting
of C5-01 if overshooting occurs during acceleration, and reduce the setting of C5-03 and increase the setting
of C5-04 if undershooting occurs when stopping. If overshooting and undershooting cannot be eliminated by
adjusting only the gain, reduce the value of C5-05 speed control and reduce the limit of the frequency reference compensation value.
6-141
Increasing the Speed Reference Response (Feed Forward Control)
Use feed forward control to increase the responsiveness to speed references. This function is effective for
machines for which the ASR gain cannot be increased to a large value because doing so would result in vibrations. There is also the additional effect of making the system less prone to overshoot. This function is valid
only in flux vector and open-loop vector 2 controls.
Overshooting when acceleration completed
is being suppressed
Overshooting
Rotation
speed
(min-1)
Rotation
speed
(min-1)
Time(s)
Feed forward control
Time(s)
Conventional speed control
Overshooting control effect
Fig 6.77 Overshooting Control Effect
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
N5-01
Description
Display
Feed forward
control selection
Feedfoward Sel
Motor acceleration time
Select the feed forward control.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Motor Accel
Time
2π x J [kgm2] x Nr [min-1]
[s]
ta =
60 x T100 [N x m]
N5-03
Feedfoward
Gain
0
*1
Change
during
Operation
Control Methods
V/f
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B0H
0.001
to
10.000
0.178
s*2
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B1H
No
No
No
No
A
A
5B2H
P [kW]
60
&times; 103 [N x m]
x
2π Nr [min-1]
Set the proportional gain for feed
forward control.
Speed reference response will
increase as the setting of N5-03 is
increased.
0.00 to
100.00
1.0
* 1. When the control method is changed, the factory setting will change. The flux vector factory setting is given.
* 2. The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity. The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW is given.
6-142
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
with
PG
However,
T100 =
Feed forward
proportional
gain
0 or 1
Factory
Setting
Set the time required to accelerate the motor at the rated torque
(T100) to the rated speed (Nr).
J: GD2/4, P: Motor rated output
N5-02
Setting
Range
Individual Functions
Feed Forward Control Structure
• The following block diagram shows the speed controller (ASR) and the feed forward control structure.
Frequency
reference
N5-02, N5-03
U1-45
Feed
forward
controller
U1-44
Torque limit
Primary
filter
Speed controller (ASR)
C5-06
(C5-10)
U1-05
Secondary
current
reference
L7-01 to L7-04
Detected speed
(Calculated speed)
Fig 6.78 Structure of Speed Controller (ASR) and Feed Forward Control
Setting Precautions
• When N5-02 (Motor acceleration time) is not properly set, the acceleration time may not increase. The fac-
tory setting of N5-02 depends on the Inverter capacity. When the Inverter capacity is different from the
motor capacity, calculate an appropriate acceleration time using the equation given in N5-02 of Chapter 5
User Constants or set the time that corresponds to the motor capacity referring to Factory Settings that
Change with the Control Method (A1-02) (Page 5-87)
• When setting the feed forward proportional gain (N5-03), take the inertia of the motor to be equivalent to
1. If the speed reference response is slow, increase the feed forward proportional gain (N5-03). If overshoot occurs with the actual speed, or if a negative torque reference is output when acceleration is completed, reduce the feed forward proportional gain (N5-03).
• When using the droop control function (i.e., if b7-01 is not set to 0.0), disable feed forward control (i.e., set
N5-01 to 0).
Droop Control Function
Droop control is a function that allows the user to set the amount of motor slip.
When a single load is operated with two motors (such as in a crane conveyor), a high-resistance motor is normally used. This is to use torque characteristics that exhibit proportion movements due to changes in the secondary resistor to maintain torque balance with the load and overall speed balance with the load.
If droop control is used, a high-resistance motor characteristics can be set for a general-purpose motor.
The balance of the load is very different with different amounts of slip.
Motor A's torque
characteristics
Torque
TA
Torque
Motor B's torque characteristics
TA
Load torque
TB
Motor B's torque
characteristics
Motor A's torque characteristics
Load torque
TB
The difference between
TA and TB is getting larger.
Reference
Speed
speed
Load balance when using a general-purpose motor
The difference between
TA and TB is getting smaller.
Reference
Speed
speed
Load balance when using a high-purpose motor
Fig 6.79 Droop Control Function
6-143
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Display
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
100.0
0.0
0.03 to
2.00
0.05 s
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
No
No
No
A
A
1CAH
No
A
A
A
A
A
1CBH
Droop control
gain
b7-01
b7-02
Sets the slip as a percentage of
maximum frequency when the
maximum output frequency is
specified and the rated torque
occurs.
Droop Quantity Droop-control is not performed
when the setting is 0.0.
Setting
Range
Droop control
delay time
Droop Delay
Time
Droop control responsiveness
constant
When hunting or oscillation
occurs, increase the value.
Setting Precautions
• Droop control is disabled if b7-01 is set to 0.0.
• Set b7-01 to the amount of slip as the percentage of slip when the maximum output frequency is input and
the rated torque is generated.
• Constant b7-02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control. Increase this setting if oscillation or
hunting occur.
• Disable the feed forward control (N5-01 = 0) when using the droop control function.
Setting the Droop Control Gain
Set the droop control gain as the speed reduction at a 100% motor torque, as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Torque
b7-01
100%
Speed
0
Speed reference
Fig 6.80 Droop Control Gain
6-144
Individual Functions
Zero-servo Function
The zero-servo function holds the motor when the motor is stopped in what is call a zero-servo status. This
function can be used to stop the motor even with an external force acts on the motor or the analog reference
input is offset.
The zero-servo function is enabled when one of the multi-function inputs (H1-01 to H1-10) is set to 72 (zeroservo command). If the zero-servo command is ON when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zerospeed level, a zero-servo status is implemented.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
b2-01
Zero-speed
level (DC injection braking
starting frequency)
DCInj Start
Freq
b9-01
Description
Used to set the frequency which
starts DC injection braking in
units of Hz when deceleration to
stop is selected.
When b2-01 is less than E1-09,
E1-09 becomes the DC injection
braking starting frequency.
(For flux vector control, zerospeed control from B2-01)
Zero-servo gain Adjust the strength of the zeroservo lock.
Enabled when the zero-servo
command is set for a multi-function input. When the zero-servo
command has been input and the
frequency reference drop below
Zero Servo
excitation level (b2-01), a posiGain
tion control loop is created and
the motor stops. Increasing the
zero-servo gain in turn increases
the strength of the lock. Increasing it by too much will cause
oscillation.
Zero-servo
completion
width
b9-02
Zero Servo
Count
Sets the output width of the Plock completion signal.
Enabled when the “zero-servo
completion (end)” is set for a
multi-function input. The zeroservo completion signal is ON
when the current position is
within the range (the zero-servo
position + zero-servo completion
width.)
Set the allowable position displacement from the zero-servo
position to 4 times the pulse rate
of the PG (pulse generator,
encoder) in use.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 Hz
0 to
100
0 to
16383
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
189H
5
No
No
No
No
A
No
1DAH
10
No
No
No
No
A
No
1DBH
6-145
Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H1-01 to H1-10)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
72
Function
Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo)
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
Yes
No
Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H2-01 to H2-05)
Control Methods
Setting
Value
33
Function
Zero-servo end
ON: Current position is within zero-servo start position &plusmn; the zero-servo end width.
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
No
Yes
No
To output the zero-servo status externally, assign the Zero-servo End signal (setting 33) to one of the multifunction outputs (H2-01 to H2-05).
Monitor Function
Name
Constant
Number
U1-35
Description
Display
Zero-servo
movement
pulses
Zero Servo
Pulse
Shows the number of PG pulses
times 4 for the movement range
when stopped at zero.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
(Cannot be
output.)
1
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
No
A
No
Time Chart
A time chart for the zero-servo function is given in Time Chart for Zero-servo.
ON
Run Command
Zero servo command
OFF
ON
Frequency (speed) reference
Excitation level
b2-01
Motor speed
Zero Servo End signal
Zero-servo status
Fig 6.81 Time Chart for Zero-servo
6-146
OFF
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Register
62H
Individual Functions
Application Precautions
• Be sure to leave the Run Command input ON. If the Run Command is turned OFF, the output will be inter-
rupted and the zero-servo function will become ineffective.
• The holding force of the zero-servo is adjusted in b9-01. The holding force will increase if the value of the
setting is increased, but oscillation and hunting will occur if the setting is too large. Adjust b9-01 after
adjusting the speed control gain.
• The zero-servo detection width is set as the allowable position offset from the zero-servo start position. Set
4 times the number of pulses from the PG.
• The Zero-servo End signal will go OFF when the zero-servo command is turned OFF.
Do not lock the servo for extended periods of time at 100% when using the zero-servo function. Inverter
errors may result. Extended periods of servo lock can be achieved by ensuring that the current during the servolock is 50% or less or by increasing the Inverter capacity.
IMPORTANT
6-147
Digital Operator Functions
This section explains the Digital Operator functions.
Setting Digital Operator Functions
You can set Digital Operator-related constants such as selecting the Digital Operator display, multi-function
selections, and copy functions.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
o1-02
Display
Description
Monitor selec- Sets the monitor item to be distion after power played when the power is turned
up
on.
1: Frequency reference
2: Output frequency
Power-On
3: Output current
Monitor
4: The monitor item set for o1-01
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to 4
1
0 to
39999
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
A
A
A
A
A
501H
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
502H
0 or 1
0
No
No
No
No
A
A
503H
0 or 1
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
505H
Frequency units Sets the units that will be set and
of reference set- displayed for the frequency referting and moni- ence and frequency monitor.
tor
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
o1-03
Display Scaling
min−1 units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max. output
frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
o1-04
o2-01
Setting unit for
frequency constants related to Set the setting unit for frequency
V/f characteris- reference-related constants.
0: Hz
tics
1: min−1
V/f Display
Unit
LOCAL/
REMOTE key
enable/disable
Local/Remote
Key
6-148
Sets the Digital Operator Local/
Remote Key
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (Switches between
the Digital Operator and the
constant settings.)
Digital Operator Functions
Name
Constant
Number
o2-02
STOP key during control circuit terminal
operation
User constant
initial value
o2-03
User Defaults
Frequency reference setting
method selection
o2-05
Operator
M.O.P.
Cumulative
operation time
setting
Elapsed Time
Set
o2-10
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the Stop Key in the run
mode.
0: Disabled (When the Run
Command is issued from and
external terminal, the Stop
Key is disabled.)
1: Enabled (Effective even
during run.)
0 or 1
1
Clears or stores user initial values.
0: Stores/not set
1: Begins storing (Records the
set constants as user initial
values.)
2: All clear (Clears all recorded
user initial values)
When the set constants are
recorded as user initial values,
1110 will be set in A1-03.
0 to 2
When the frequency reference is
set on the Digital Operator frequency reference monitor, sets
whether the Enter Key is necessary.
0: Enter Key needed
1: Enter Key not needed
When set to 1, the Inverter
accepts the frequency reference
without Enter Key operation.
Fan operation
time setting
Fan ON Time
Set
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
506H
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
507H
0 or 1
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
509H
Sets the cumulative operation
time in hour units.
Operation time is calculated from
the set values.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
A
A
50BH
Set the initial value of the fan
operation time using time units.
The operation time accumulates
from the set value.
0 to
65535
0 hr
No
A
A
A
A
A
50EH
Description
Display
Oper STOP
Key
o2-07
Setting
Range
Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units
Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using constant o1-03. You can change the units
for the following constants using o1-03.
• U1-01 (Frequency Reference)
• U1-02 (Output Frequency)
• U1-05 (Motor Speed)
• U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
• d1-01 to d1-17 (Frequency references)
Switching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON
Using constant o1-02, select the monitor item (U1- [status monitor]) to be displayed on the Digital Operator when the power supply is turned ON. For monitors that can be displayed, refer to U1- in Chapter 5
User Constants.
6-149
Setting Precautions
If selecting monitor constants other than U1-01 (Frequency Reference), U1-02 (Output Frequency), and U103 (Output Current), first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1-01, and then set o1-02 to 4.
Disabling the STOP Key
If b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1, 2, or 3, the Stop Command from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is an emergency Stop Command.
Set o2-02 to 0 to disable emergency Stop Commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator.
Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key
Set o2-01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator. You cannot switch Inverter reference inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operator, b1-01 (Reference Selection), or b1-02
(Operation Method Selection).
Initializing Changed Constant Values
You can save the Inverter constant set values that you have changed as constant initial values. Change the set
values from the Inverter factory settings, and then set o2-03 to 1.
If, however, “Out of Memory MAX Param Change” is displayed on the Operator when changes in the settings
of the constants are saved as initial values, do not attempt to register any further changes as initial values.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 1110 to initialize the Inverter constants using the user-set initial values in memory. To
clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o2-03 to 2.
Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the
Enter Key
Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator. When o2-05 is set to 1, you
can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter
Key.
For example, enter the Run Command using a 0 Hz reference, and then continuously press the UP Key to
increment the frequency reference by 0.01 Hz only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.01 Hz every 80 ms for 3 s
thereafter. Press and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s
after that. The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys
are released.
Clearing Cumulative Operation Time
Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-07. Set o2-07 to 0 to clear U1-13
(Inverter Operating Time).
Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time
Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in constant o2-10. Set o2-10 to 0 to clear U1-40 (Cooling
Fan Operating Time).
6-150
Digital Operator Functions
Copying Constants
The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile
memory).
• Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator (READ)
• Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
• Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants (VERIFY)
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
o3-01
o3-02
Display
Copy function
selection
Copy Function
Sel
Read permitted
selection
Copy Allowable
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0: Normal operation
1: READ (Inverter to Operator)
2: COPY (Operator to Inverter)
3: Verify (compare)
0 to 3
0
0: Read prohibited
1: Read permitted
0 or 1
0
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
515H
No
A
A
A
A
A
516H
6-151
Storing Inverter Set Values in the Digital Operator (READ)
To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator, make the settings using the following method.
Set 03-02 (Read permitted selection) to 1 (read permitted).
Table 6.1 READ Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
-ADV-
1
** Main Menu **
Programming
Press the Menu Key, and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
2
Initialization
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
3
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
COPY Function
o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
4
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 0
*0*
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants setting display.
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
5
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 1
*0*
Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key.
INV→OP READ
-ADV-
6
READ
INV→OP READING
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function will start.
-ADV-
7
READ
READ COMPLETE
If the READ function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
-ADV-
8
Copy Funtion Sel
o3 - 01=0
*0*
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
COPY SELECT
An error may occur while saving to memory. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display.
Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
6-152
Meaning
You are attempting to set o3-01 to 1 while o3-02 is set to 0.
Digital Operator Functions
Error Display
Meaning
IFE
Read data length mismatch or read data error.
READ DATA ERROR
RDE
Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator, but unable to perform write
operation.
DATA ERROR
Select READ Permitted
Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake. With o3-02 set to 0, if you
set o3-01 to 1, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator, and the write
operation will be stopped.
Writing Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter (COPY)
To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter, make the settings using the following method.
Table 6.2 COPY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
-ADV-
1
** Main Menu **
Programming
Press the MENU Key, and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
2
Initialization
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
-ADV-
3
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
COPY Function
o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
4
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 0
*0*
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants setting display.
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
5
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 2
*0*
Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key.
OP→INV WRITE
-ADV-
6
COPY
OP→INV COPYING
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function will start.
-ADV-
7
COPY
COPY COMPLETE
If the COPY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
6-153
Table 6.2 COPY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
-ADV-
Copy Funtion Sel
8
o3 - 01=0
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
*0*
COPY SELECT
During the copy operation, errors may occur. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the 03-01 display.
Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator
Copy Function.)
Error Display
CPE
ID UNMATCH
VAE
INV. KVA UNMATC
CRE
CONTROL UNMATCH
CYE
COPY ERROR
CSE
SUM CHECK ERROR
Meaning
Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.
Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter capacity stored in
the Digital Operator are different.
The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy, and the Inverter control
method stored in the Digital Operator are different.
Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital
Operator shows they are different.
After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the Inverter constant area
and the sum value of the Digital Operator constant area shows they are different.
Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values, make the settings using the following
method.
Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
-ADV-
1
** Main Menu **
Programming
Press the MENU Key. and select advanced programming mode.
-ADV-
2
Initialization
A1 - 00=1
Select Language
6-154
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the constants monitor display.
Digital Operator Functions
Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure (Continued)
Step
No.
Digital Operator Display
Explanation
-ADV-
3
Display o3-01 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement
Key.
COPY Function
o3 - 01=0
Copy Funtion Sel
-ADV-
4
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 0
Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the function setting display.
*0*
COPY SELECT
-ADV-
5
Copy Funtion Sel
o3-01= 3
Change the set value to 3 using the Increment Key.
*0*
OP←→INV VERIFY
-ADV-
6
VERIFY
Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function will
start.
DATA VERIFYING
-ADV-
7
VERIFY
If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operator.
VERIFY COMPLETE
-ADV-
8
Copy Funtion Sel
o3 - 01=0
The display returns to o3-01 when a key is pressed.
*0*
COPY SELECT
An error may occur during the comparison. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error display
and return to the o3-01 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer to Chapter 7
Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function.)
Error Display
VYE
VERIFY ERROR
CPE
ID UNMATCH
Meaning
Verify error (Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match).
Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different.
Application Precautions
• When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the
Digital Operator.
• Inverter product and type
• Inverter capacity and voltage
• Software number
• Control method
• Use the copy function off-line or with a communications option board removed.
• A CPF03 fault (EEPROM error) can occur if the power is shut down while the Inverter constants are being
copied. Do not shut down the power while copying the constants.
6-155
Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator
If you set A1-01 to 0, you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 constant groups, and refer to drive mode, using
the Digital Operator.
If you set one of the constants H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection) to 1B (write constants permitted), you can write constants from the digital operator when the terminal
that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing constants other than the frequency reference is
prohibited. You can, however, reference constants.
Name
Constant
Number
A1-01
Display
Description
Constant access Used to set the constant access
level
level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring
drive mode and setting A1-01
and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01
to A2-32 can be read and set.)
Access Level
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set
in both quick programming
mode and advanced
programming (A) mode.)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
2
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
101H
Setting a Password
When a password is set in A1-05, if the set values in A1-04 and A1-05 do not match, you cannot refer to or
change the settings of constants A1-01 to A1-03, or A2-01 to A2-32.
You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all constants except A1-00 by using the password function in
combination with setting A1-01 to 0 (Monitor only).
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
A1-01
6-156
Display
Description
Constant access Used to set the constant access
level
level (set/read.)
0: Monitoring only (Monitoring
drive mode and setting A1-01
and A1-04.)
1: Used to select user constant
(Only constants set in A2-01
to A2-32 can be read and set.)
Access Level
2: Advanced
(Constants can be read and set
in both quick programming
mode and advanced
programming (A) mode.)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to 2
2
Yes
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
101H
Digital Operator Functions
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Display
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
9999
0
0 to
9999
0
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
104H
No
A
A
A
A
A
105H
Password
A1-04
Password input when a password
has been set in A1-05.
This function write-protects some
constants of the initialize mode.
If the password is changed, A1-01
Enter Password to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32
constants can no longer be
changed. (Programming mode
constants can be changed.)
Setting
Range
Password setting
A1-05
Select Password
Used to set a four digit number as
the password.
This constant is not usually displayed. When the Password (A104) is displayed, hold down the
RESET Key and press the Menu
Key and the password will be displayed.
Setting Precautions
Constant A1-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A1-05, hold down the RESET
Key and press the MENU Key while A1-04 is displayed.
Displaying User-set Constants Only
You can set and refer to constants necessary to the Inverter only, using the A2 constants (user-set constants)
and A1-01 (Constants Access Level).
Set the number of the constant to which you want to refer in A2-01 to A2-32, and then set A1-01 to 1. You can
set and refer to constants set in A1-01 to A1-03 and A2-01 to A2-32 only, using advanced programming mode.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
User setting
constants
A2-01 to
A2-32 User Param 1
to 32
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Used to set the constant numbers
that can be set/read. Maximum
32.
Effective when the Constant
Access Level (A1-01) is set to
User Program (1). Constants set
in constants A2-01 to A2-32 can
be set/read in programming mode.
b1-01
to
o3-02
-
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
106H
to
125H
6-157
Options
This section explains the Inverter option functions.
Performing Speed Control with PG
This section explains functions with V/f control with PG.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
PG constant
F1-01
PG Pulses/Rev
Operation
selection at PG
open circuit
(PGO)
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
MEMO
BUS
Register
600
No
No
Q
No
Q
No
380H
1
No
No
A
No
A
No
381H
Operation
Sets the stopping method when an
selection at
overspeed (OS) fault occurs.
overspeed (OS) 0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
stop using Deceleration Time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
PG Overspeed
using the deceleration time in
Sel
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect
the motor or machinery, do not
normally make this setting.)
0 to 3
1
No
No
A
No
A
A
382H
Sets the stopping method when a
speed deviation (DEV) fault
occurs.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
stop using Deceleration Time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration time in
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (DEV is
displayed and operation
continued.)
0 to 3
3
No
No
A
No
A
A
383H
0: Phase A leads with Forward
Run Command. (Phase B
leads with Reverse Run Command.)
1: Phase B leads with Forward
Run Command. (Phase A
leads with Reverse Run Command.)
0 or 1
0
No
No
A
No
A
No
384H
Operation
selection at
deviation
F1-04
PG Deviation
Sel
PG rotation
6-158
Sets the number of PG (pulse generator or encoder) pulses.
0 to
Sets the number of pulses per
60000
motor revolution.
V/f
V/f
with
PG
0 to 3
PG Fdbk Loss
Sel
F1-05
Setting
Range
Control Methods
Sets the PG disconnection stopping method.
0: Ramp to stop (Deceleration
stop using Deceleration Time
1, C1-02.)
1: Coast to stop
2: Fast stop (Emergency stop
using the deceleration time in
C1-09.)
3: Continue operation (To protect
the motor or machinery, do not
normally make this setting.)
F1-02
F1-03
Description
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
PG Rotation Sel
Options
Name
Constant
Number
Description
Display
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
1 to
132
1
0 or 1
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
No
A
No
A
No
385H
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
386H
0 to
120
115%
No
No
A
No
A
A
387H
0.0 to
2.0
0.0 s*
No
No
A
No
A
A
388H
0 to 50
10%
No
No
A
No
A
A
389H
0.0 to
10.0
0.5 s
No
No
A
No
A
A
38AH
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
38BH
0
No
No
A
No
No
No
38CH
2.0 s
No
No
A
No
A
No
38DH
PG division rate Sets the division ratio for the PG
(PG pulse mon- speed control board pulse output.
itor)
Division ratio = (1+ n) /m (n=0 or
1 m=1 to 32)
F1-06
F1-06
PG Output
Ratio
Integral value
during accel/
decel enable/
disable
F1-07
PG Ramp PI/I
Sel
F1-08
F1-09
Overspeed
detection level
PG Overspd
Level
Overspeed
detection delay
time
PG Overspd
Time
F1-10
F1-11
F1-12
F1-13
F1-14
n
m
This constant is only effective
when a PG-B2 is used.
The possible division ratio settings are: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1.
Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration to either
enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled (The integral
function isn't used while
accelerating or decelerating; it
is used at constant speeds.)
1: Enabled (The integral function
is used at all times.)
Sets the overspeed detection
method.
Frequencies above that set for F108 (set as a percentage of the
maximum output frequency) that
continue to exceed this frequency
for the time set in F1-09 are
detected as overspeed faults.
Excessive
speed deviation Sets the speed deviation detection
detection level method.
Any speed deviation above the
PG Deviate
F1-10 set level (set as a percentLevel
age of the maximum output frequency) that continues for the
Excessive
speed deviation time set in F1-11 is detected as a
detection delay speed deviation.
Speed deviation is the difference
time
between actual motor speed and
PG Deviate
the reference command speed.
Time
Number of PG
gear teeth 1
PG # Gear
Teeth1
Number of PG
gear teeth 2
PG # Gear
Teeth2
PG open-circuit detection
time
PGO Detect
Time
Sets the number of teeth on the
gears if there are gears between
the PG and the motor.
Input pulses from PG 60
F1-13
F1-01
F1-12
0 to
1000
A gear ratio of 1 will be used if
either of these constants is set to
0.
Used to set the PG disconnection
detection time. PGO will be
detected if the detection time continues beyond the set time.
0.0 to
10.0
* When the control method is changed, the factory setting will change. The flux vector factory setting is given.
6-159
Using PG Speed Control Board
There are four types of PG Speed Control Board that can be used in V/f control with PG.
• PG-A2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with open collector or complimentary outputs.
• PG-B2: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs.
• PG-D2: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
• PG-X2: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers.
There are two types of PG Speed Control Boards that can be used for flux vector control.
• PG-B2: A/B phase pulse inputs, complementary outputs
• PG-X2: A/B/Z phase pulse inputs, line driver outputs
For the connection diagram, refer to page 2-35 to 2-37.
Setting Number of PG Pulses
Set the number of PG (Pulse Generator/Encoder) pulses in pulses/rotation. Set the number of A-phase or Bphase pulses per 1 motor rotation in F1-01.
Matching PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction
Constant F1-05 matches the PG rotation direction and the motor rotation direction. If the motor is rotating forwards, set whether it is A-phase driven or B-phase driven. Make this setting when using PG-B2 or PG-X2.
Inverter
Motor
PG (encoder)
Forward
Command
Pulse output
A-phase driven when set value = 0
B-phase driven when set value = 1
A-phase
A-phase
B-phase
B-phase
Example: Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa motor (PG used: Samtack (KK))
Forward
Command
Motor output axis rotates
counter-clockwise during Inverter Forward Command.
Rotation
(CCW)
A-phase
B-phase
Yaskawa standard PG used is A-phase driven (CCW) when motor rotation is forward.
Fig 6.82 PG Rotation Direction Setting
Generally, PG is A-phase driven when rotation is clockwise (CW) see from the input axis. Also, motor rotation is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the output side when Forward Commands are output. Consequently, when motor rotation is forward, PG is normally A-phase driven when a load is applied, and B-phase
driven when a load is not applied.
6-160
Options
Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor
Set the number of PG gear teeth in F1-12 and F1-13. If there are gears between the motor and PG, you can
operate the motor by setting the number of gear teeth.
When the number of gear teeth has been set, the speed of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated
using the following formula.
Speed of motor rotations (min−1.) = No. of input pulses from PG &times; 60 / F1-01 &times; F1-13 (No. of gear teeth on
load side) / F1-12 (No. of gear teeth on motor side)
Matching Motor Speed During Acceleration and Deceleration to Frequency Reference
You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration when using
V/F with PG control.
To match the motor speed as closely as possible to the frequency reference even during acceleration and deceleration, set F1-07 to 1.
If F1-01 is set to 1, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and deceleration. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F1-01 to 0.
IMPORTANT
Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio
This function is enabled only when using PG speed control board PG-B2. Set the dividing ratio for the PG
pulse monitor output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the lower place 2
digits. The dividing ratio is calculated as follows:
Dividing ratio = (1 + n)/m (Setting range) n: 0 or 1, m: 1 to 32

F1-06 =
n
m
The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: 1/32 ≤ F1-06 ≤ 1. For example, if the dividing ratio is
1/2 (set value 2), half of the number of pulses from the PG are monitor outputs.
Detecting PG Open Circuit
Select the stopping method when PG cable disconnected is detected and the PG open circuit (PGO) detection
time.
When the Inverter is operating with the frequency reference set to 1% minimum (except when operating on
direct current), if the speed feedback from PG is greater than the time setting in F1-14, PGO is detected.
Detecting Motor Overspeed
An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the regulated limit. An overspeed (OS) is
detected when a frequency that exceeds the set value in F1-08 continues for longer than the time set in F1-09.
After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-03.
Detecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference
An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the designated speed and the actual
motor speed) is too great. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the
speed reference and actual workpiece speed are within the setting of L4-02, if a speed deviation great than the
set value in F1-10 continues for longer than the time set in F1-11. After a speed deviation is detected, the
Inverter stops according to the setting in F1-04.
6-161
Using Digital Output Boards
There are two types of Inverter digital output boards:
• DO-02C
Relay contact output (DPDT contact)
• DO-08
6 photocoupler output channels (shared commons)
2 (independent) relay contact output channels (NC contact)
+24 V
TD
Inverter
control
panel 3CN
NC NO
1
2
CH1
3
3CN
Inverter
control
panel 3CN
Photocoupler TD5
CH1
TD6
CH2
TD7
3CN
4
NC NO
5
6
Relay contact
DO-02C Digital Output Card
CH3
TD8
CH4
TD9
CH5
TD10
TD11
TD1
TD2
TD3
TD4
CH2
Photocoupler
CH6
COM (0 V common)
CH7
CH8
Relay contact
DO-08 Digital Output Card
Fig 6.83 Digital Output Boards
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Channel 1 output selection
F5-01
DO Ch1 Select
Channel 2 output selection
F5-02
DO Ch2 Select
F5-03
Channel 3 output selection
DO Ch3 Select
F5-04
Channel 4 output selection
DO Ch4 Select
F5-05
Channel 5 output selection
DO Ch5 Select
F5-06
Channel 6 output selection
DO Ch6 Select
6-162
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Effective when a Digital Output
Board (DO-02C or DO-08) is
used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
0
Effective when a Digital Output
Board (DO-02C or DO-08) is
used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
399H
1
No
A
A
A
A
A
39AH
0 to 37
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
39BH
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
4
No
A
A
A
A
A
39CH
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
6
No
A
A
A
A
A
39DH
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
37
No
A
A
A
A
A
39EH
Options
Name
Constant
Number
Change
during
Operation
0 to 37
0F
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
0 to 37
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Board is used.
Set the output mode.
0: 8-channel individual outputs
1: Binary code output
2: Output according to
F5-01 to F5-08 settings.
0 to 2
Display
F5-07
DO Ch7 Select
Channel 8 output selection
DO Ch8 Select
DO-08 output
mode selection
F5-09
Factory
Setting
Description
Channel 7 output selection
F5-08
Setting
Range
DO-08 Selection
Effective when a DO-08 Digital
Output Board is used.
Set the number of the multi-function output to be output.
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
No
A
A
A
A
A
39FH
0F
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A0H
0
No
A
A
A
A
A
3A1H
Setting Output Items for the DO-02C Digital Output Board
If using DO-02C Digital Output Board, set the output items using F5-01 and F5-02.
Setting Output Items for the DO-08 Digital Output Board
If using DO-08 Digital Output Board, select one of the following three output modes according to the setting
in F5-09.
F5-09 Set to 0
Set Value
0: 8 separate
outputs
Terminal
Number
Output Details
TD5-TD11
Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
TD6-TD11
Overvoltage (OV)
TD7-TD11
Inverter overload (OL2)
TD8-TD11
Fuse blown (PUF)
TD9-TD11
Overspeed (OS)
TD10-TD11
Inverter overheated (OH1) or motor overload (OL1)
TD1-TD2
Zero-speed detected
TD3-TD4
Speed agreement
6-163
F5-09 Set to 1
Set Value
1: Binary code
output
Terminal
Number
Output Details
TD5-TD11
bit 0
TD6-TD11
bit 1
TD7-TD11
bit 2
TD8-TD11
bit 3
TD9-TD11
Zero-speed detected
TD10-TD11
Speed agreement
TD1-TD2
Operating
TD3-TD4
Minor fault
Encoded output
(Refer to table below)
The following table shows the code outputs.
Bits 3, 2, 1,
and 0
Output Details
Bits 3, 2, 1,
and 0
Output Details
0000
No error
1000
External fault (EFxx)
0001
Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF)
1001
Controller error (CPFxx)
0010
Overvoltage (OV)
1010
Motor overload (OL1)
0011
Inverter overload (OL2)
1011
Not used
0100
Inverter overheated (OH, OH1)
1100
Power loss (UV1, UV2, or UV3)
0101
Overspeed (OS)
1101
Speed deviation (DEV)
0110
Fuse blown (PUF)
1110
PG open circuit (PGO)
0111
Dynamic braking resistor (RH)
Injection brake transistor error (RR)
1111
Not used
F5-09 Set to 2
Output depends on the settings in F5-01 to F5-08.
Using an Analog Reference Board
AI-14B provides 3 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy (and a sign bit). The function of each channel is determined by the setting of F2-01.
AI-14U provides 2 channels of bi-polar inputs with 14-bit A/D conversion accuracy. Channel 1 is a voltage
input and channel 2 is a current input. The sum of channels 1 and 2 is a frequency input. F2-01 does not need
to be set for the AI-14U.
6-164
Options
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
F2-01
Description
Display
Setting
Range
Bi-polar or uni- Sets the functions for channel 1 to
polar input
3 that are effective when the AIselection
14B Analog Reference Board is
used.
0: 3-channel individual (Channel 1: terminal A1, Channel 2:
terminal A2, Channel 3: terminal A3)
0 or 1
1: 3-channel addition (Addition
AI-14 Input Sel
values are the frequency reference)
When set to 0, select 1 for b1-01.
In this case the multi-function
input “Option/Inverter selection”
cannot be used.
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
38FH
Setting Precautions
Always set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 1 (control circuit terminal) when using the AI-14B for three channels of independent inputs. When this is done, H1-01 to H1-10 (multi-function contact inputs) cannot be set to
2 (Option/Inverter selection).
Using a Digital Reference Board
When using a DI-08 or DI-16H2 Digital Reference Board, set b1-01 (Reference selection) to 3 (Option board).
The DI-16H2 can be used to set a frequency using a 16-bit digital reference. The DI-08 can be used to set a
frequency using a 8-bit digital reference.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Digital input
option
F3-01
DI Input
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Sets the Digital Reference Board
input method.
0: BCD 1% unit
1: BCD 0.1% unit
2: BCD 0.01% unit
3: BCD 1 Hz unit
4: BCD 0.1 Hz unit
5: BCD 0.01 Hz unit
6: BCD special setting (5-digit
input)
7: Binary input
6 is only effective when the DI16H2 is used.
When o1-03 is set to 2 or higher,
the input will be BCD, and the
units will change to the o1-03 setting.
0 to 7
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
390H
6-165
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
39999
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
Frequency units Sets the units that will be set and
of reference set- displayed for the frequency referting and moni- ence and frequency monitor.
tor
0: 0.01 Hz units
1: 0.01% units (Maximum
output frequency is 100%)
2 to 39:
o1-03
Display Scaling
min−1 units (Sets the motor
poles.)
40 to 39999:
User desired display
Set the desired values for setting
and display for the max. output
frequency.
502H
Set 4-digit number
excluding the decimal
point.
Set the number of digits
below the decimal point
to display.
Example: When the max. output
frequency value is 200.0, set
12000
Selecting Input Terminal Functions for the DI-16H2 Digital Reference Board
The frequency reference from the DI-16H2 Board is determined by the setting of F3-01 and the 12/16-bit
switch on the option board. The possible settings are listed in the following table.
6-166
Options
Terminal
TC1
TC2
Pin No.
12-bit Binary 16-bit Binary
with Sign
with Sign
F3-01 = 7
F3-01 = 7
S1: 12 bit
S1: 16 bit
3-digit BCD with
Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
S1: 12 bit
4-digit BCD with 5-digit BCD withSign
out Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
F3-01 = 6
S1: 16 bit
S1: 16 bit
1
1
Bit 1 (20)
Bit 1 (20)
1
2
Bit 1 (21)
Bit 1 (21)
2
3
Bit 1 (22)
Bit 1 (22)
4
4
Bit 1 (23)
Bit 1 (23)
8
8
1
5
Bit 1 (24)
Bit 1 (24)
1
1
2
5
5
BCD digit 1
(0 to 9)
2
4
BCD digit 1
(0 to 9)
4
Bit 1 (2 )
Bit 1 (2 )
2
7
Bit 1 (26)
Bit 1 (26)
4
8
Bit 1 (27)
Bit 1 (27)
8
8
1
9
Bit 1 (28)
Bit 1 (28)
1
1
2
2
4
9
9
10
Bit 1 (2 )
Bit 1 (2 )
2
1
Bit 1
(210)
(210)
4
2
Bit 1 (211)
Bit 1 (211)
8
3
-
Bit 1 (212)
4
Bit 1
BCD digit 3
(0 to 9)
4
4
BCD digit 2
(0 to 9)
BCD digit 3
(0 to 9)
4
-
1
2
-
13)
Bit 1 (2
-
2
5
-
Bit 1 (214)
-
4
6
-
Bit 1 (215)
-
8
Sign signal (0: Forward, 1: Reverse)
8
SET (read) signal (1: Read)
9
Input signal common (0 V)
TC3
BCD digit 3
(0 to 9)
8
1
7
BCD digit 2
(0 to 9)
8
8
BCD digit 4
(0 to 9)
BCD digit 1
(0, 2, 4, 6, 8)
8
6
BCD digit 2
(0 to 9)
2
2
4
BCD digit 4
(0 to 9)
8
1
2
BCD digit 5
(0 to 3)
Shield wire connection terminal
Application Precautions
• The maximum frequency (100% speed) reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting: 6 or 7)
and all bits are 1.
• Setting F3-01 to 6 is valid only when the D1-16H2 is used. Using this setting, a frequency from 0.00 to
399.8 Hz can be set in BCD. The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set. Also,
the digit starts from 0, so the minimum setting is 0.02 Hz.
Selecting the Input Terminal Function for a DI-08 Digital Reference Board
The frequency reference from a DI-08 Board is determined by the setting of F3-01, as shown in the following
table.
6-167
Terminal
TC
Pin No.
8-bit Binary with Sign
F3-01 = 7
2-digit BCD with Sign
F3-01 = 0 to 5
1
Bit 1 (20)
1
2
Bit 1 (21)
2
2
3
Bit 1 (2 )
4
4
Bit 1 (23)
8
5
Bit 1 (24)
1
6
Bit 1 (25)
2
6
7
Bit 1 (2 )
4
8
Bit 1 (27)
8
9
Sign signal
10
SET (read) signal
11
Reference common signal (0 V)
BCD digit 1
(0 to 9)
BCD digit 2
(0 to 15)
Application Precautions
The DI-08 will not function if F3-01 is set to 6
Selecting the Digital Reference
The range of the digital references is determined by the combination of the settings of o1-03 and F3-01. The
information monitored in U1-01 (Frequency reference) will also change.
DI-16H2 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-16H2, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
o1-03 F3-01
0
1
2
0 or 1
3
4
5
6
7
6-168
Switch
S1
Reference Input Mode
Reference Setting
Range
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 1%
-110 to 110%
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 1%
-110 to 110%
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
-110.0 to 110.0%
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
-110.0 to 110.0%
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
-15.99 to 15.99%
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
-110.0 to 110.0%
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
-400 to 400 Hz
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
-400 to 400 Hz
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
-159.9 to 159.9 Hz
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
-400.0 to 400.0 Hz
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
-15.99 to 15.99 Hz
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
-159.99 to 159.99 Hz
16 bits
5-digit BCD without sign, 0.01 Hz
000.00 to 399.98 Hz
12 bits
12-bit binary with sign, 100%/4095
-4095 to 4095
16 bits
16-bit binary with sign, 100%/30000
-33000 to 33000
U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
0.01 Hz
0.01%
Options
o1-03 F3-01
2 to 39
X0040
to
X9999
(X = 0
to 3)
X1000
(X = 0
to 3)
Switch
S1
Reference Input Mode
Reference Setting
Range
U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 = 0 o1-03 = 1
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
-1599 to 1599 rpm
1 rpm
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 1 rpm
-15999 to 15999 rpm
1 rpm
-
12 bits
3-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4digit setting of o1-03)
-1599 to 1599
-
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/(1- to 4digit setting of o1-03)
-9999 to 9999
(when o1-03 = 9999)
-
16 bits
4-digit BCD with sign, 100%/10000
-1000 to 1000
-
5th digit of o1-03 setting:
X = 0, unit: 1
X = 1, unit: 0.1
X = 2, unit: 0.01
X = 3, unit: 0.001
DI-08 Reference Ranges
When using the DI-08, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants.
F3-01
Reference Input Mode
Reference Setting Range
0
2-digit BCD with sign, 1%
-110 to 110%
1
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1%
-15.9 to 15.9%
2
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01%
-1.59 to 1.59%
3
2-digit BCD with sign, 1 Hz
-159 to 159 Hz
4
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.1 Hz
-15.9 to 15.9 Hz
5
2-digit BCD with sign, 0.01 Hz
-1.59 to 1.59 Hz
6
7
U1-01 Monitor Unit
o1-03 = 0
o1-03 = 1
0.01 Hz
0.01%
8-bit binary with sign, 100%/255
-255 to 255
6-169
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
This section describes precautions to be observed when using the Varispeed G7 for elevating machines
such as elevators and cranes.
IMPORTANT
When performing trial operation, enable Current alarm function (L8-41 =1), and be sure to make adjustments
to the braking sequence by using Peak hold functions (refer to Current Alarm Function and Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function in Chapter 6 ) so that the startup current is less than 150% of the Inverter rated current.
Brake ON/OFF Sequence
Brake ON/OFF Sequence
For the holding brake’s ON/OFF sequence, use the following Inverter output signals according to the set control method.
Brake ON/OFF Signal
Signal Name
Constant *1
Control Method
V/f (A1-02 = 0)
V/f with PG (A1-02 = 1)
Open-loop vector 1 (A1-02 = 2,
factory setting)
Frequency detection 2
H2-01 = 05*5
Frequency detection 5*4
H2-01 = 36*5
Flux vector (A1-02 = 3)
During run 2
H2-01 = 37
Brake ON/OFF Level Adjustment
Signal Name
Constant
• Speed agree
detection level
• Speed agree
detection width
• L4-01 = 1.0 to
3.0 Hz *2
• L4-02 = 0.1 to
0.5 Hz *3
Zero-speed level
(OFF timing only)
b2-01 = 0.1 to
0.5 Hz
Do not set Open-loop vector 2 for use in elevating machines.
IMPORTANT
* 1. This example shows multi-function output terminals M1-M2 used for the holding brake ON/OFF signal.
Do not set H2-01 to 0 (During run).
* 2. This is the standard setting range for open-loop vector 1 control. For V/f control, set to approximately the motor rated slip frequency +0.5 Hz.
If the set value is too low, the motor torque is insufficient and the load may slip when the brake is applied. Be sure to set L4-01 to a value larger than that
of E1-09 (Min. output frequency) and larger than that of L4-02 shown in Figure 6.84. If the set value is too large, the motor may not run smoothly when
it starts running.
* 3. The hysteresis in frequency detection 2 can be adjusted (from 0.1 to 0.5 Hz) by L4-02 (speed agree detection width). Change the setting to approximately 0.1 Hz if there are drops while stopping.
* 4. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1038 or later.
* 5. When using frequency detection 2, set L4-01 before H2-01. If H2-01 is set before L4-01, the holding brake will engage while stopping. For Inverters
with software versions PRG: 1038 or later, use frequency detection 5 in which a holding brake signal is OFF when the Inverter is baseblocked.
L4-01
L4-02
Output frequency
Frequency detection 2
Time
ON
Fig 6.84
6-170
OFF
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
Sequence Circuit Configuration
The brake ON/OFF sequence circuit configuration is shown below.
Holding brake
auxiliary relay coil
Inverter (Varispeed G7)
Fault contacts
MA
UP
DOWN
S1
(Forward run)
MB
S2
(Reverse run)
MC
Safety
circuit
UP
DOWN
BR
BR
HIGH/LOW S6
(Multi-step speed reference 2)
M1
SC
M2
Energizes the brake when ON
(250 VAC 1 A or less, 30 VDC
1 A or less)
Frequency
detection 2, 5 or
During run 2
Note Design the sequence so that the holding brake contact is open when the sequence operation conditions are satisfied and the contact between M1 and M2
is closed (ON).
Make sure that the holding brake contact is closed when the emergency stop signal or Inverter fault contact output signal is ON.
Fig 6.85 Brake ON/OFF Sequence Circuit Configuration
Time Chart
Output
Input
The brake ON/OFF sequence time charts are shown in Figs. 6.86 and 6.87.
S1-SC
UP
S6-SC
High speed/
Low speed
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
d1-03
Output frequency
0
b4-01
L4-01
Frequency detection 2
M1-M2 (H2-01 = 05)
Holding brake
operation
d1-01 (Enabled when b1-01 = 0)
DC injection braking
Time
OFF
ON
CLOSE OPEN
CLOSE
Note For variable speed operation by an analog signal, set to b1-01 = 1.
Output
Input
Fig 6.86 Brake ON/OFF Sequence Time Chart (V/f, V/f with PG, open-loop vector 1)
S1-SC
UP
S6-SC
High speed/
Low speed
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
d1-03
Output frequency
0
M1-M2
During run 2
(H2-01 = 37)
Holding brake
operation
CLOSE
d1-01 (Enabled when b1-01 = 0)
b2-01
Time
DC injection braking (Zero-speed control)
ON
OPEN
OFF
CLOSE
Note For variable speed operation by an analog signal, set to b1-01 = 1.
Fig 6.87 Brake ON/OFF Sequence Time Chart (Flux Vector)
6-171
Stall Prevention during Deceleration
If connecting a braking resistor to discharge regenerative energy, be sure to set Stall prevention selection during decel (L3-04) to 0 (Disabled).
IMPORTANT
If Stall prevention selection during decel (L3-04) is set to the initial value 1 (Enabled), the motor may not stop
within the specified decelerating time.
Stall prevention selection during accel (L3-01) and Stall prevention selection during running (L3-05) should be
set to their initial values 1 (Enabled) to enable these functions.
Autotuning
Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control. Be sure to disconnect the
motor from the load before conducting autotuning. Conducting autotuning while the motor is connected to an
elevating machine system is dangerous because it automatically runs the motor for approximately one minute.
IMPORTANT
1. When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autotuning (T1-01 = 1 or 4). For
G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later, perform stationary autotuning 2 (T1-01 = 4).
Stationary autotuning will apply current to the motor in its stopped condition and automatically measure the
motor data. In the initial running period after autotuning (T1-01 =1) (20% speed min., fixed speed for 1 s
min.), the motor data measured by autotuning will automatically be corrected.
2. To improve low-speed torque characteristics using V/f control, conduct stationary autotuning for line to line
resistance only (T1-01 = 2).
3. When conducting autotuning on wound motor or other special types of motors, obtain a test report for the
motor in advance and confirm that the E2 motor constants after autotuning do not vary greatly from those
of the test report.
Braking Resistor Overheating Protection
When using a braking resistor other than the Braking Resistor Unit, provide a sequence with a thermal overload relay or similar means to turn off the power input to the Inverter when it detects resistor overheating. See
the Connection Diagram on page 2-3 for this sequence circuit.
Momentary Power Loss Restart
Do not use the momentary power loss restart and fault restart functions in applications for elevating machines.
Make sure that L2-01=0 and L5-01=0. If these functions are used, the motor coasts to a stop with the brake
contact open when a momentary power loss or fault occurs during operation, possibly resulting in serious accidents.
Torque Limit
The torque limit values (L7-01 to L7-04) are the motor's rated torque. When there is a possibility of insufficient torque at start-up or other time, increase the Inverter capacity and set the torque limit value to between
200% and 300% (factory setting is 200%).
6-172
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
I/O Open-phase Protection and Overtorque Detection
To prevent the machine from falling when the motor is open-phase or a similar situation, enable L8-05 and L807 (Input and output open-phase protection selection) and L6-01 to L6-06 (Overtorque detection) (factory setting is Disabled).
Falling detection or a similar safety measure should also be provided on the machine side.
External Baseblock Signal
If the external baseblock command (settings 8 and 9 of H1-01 to H1-10) is input while the motor is running,
the motor will immediately coast to a stop. Do not input the external baseblock command while the motor is
running unless necessary.
Make sure that the holding brake operates when using the external base block command for an emergency
stop or interlock to start the Inverter.
If the external baseblock command is input and immediately reset, the Inverter does not output voltage during
the value of L2-03 (Min. baseblock time), which factory setting is 0.5 to 2.0 seconds depending on the Inverter
capacity. Do not use the external baseblock command in an application where the motor is frequently started
and stopped.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
If the delay time for the holding brake’s mechanical operation is not taken into consideration and the acceleration/deceleration time on the Inverter side is set to a time that is too short, and overcurrent or wear on the
brakes may occur at staring or the load will slip at stopping because the holding brake does not operate on
time. If so, use the dwell function at start described on page 6-176 or the dwell function at stop described on
page 6-177 to tune the timing for the holding brake.
Magnetic Contactor on the Inverter’s Output-side
Do not install a magnetic contactor between the Inverter and the motor. If a magnetic contactor must be
installed because of local electrical codes or regulations or to operate motors with an Inverter, excluding emergencies, open or close the magnetic contactor only when the holding brake is fully closed and the Inverter is in
baseblock status with the baseblock signal ON.
If the magnetic contactor is opened or closed while the Inverter is controlling the motor or DC injection braking (Zero-speed control), surge voltage or a current from the motor by full-voltage starting may cause an
Inverter fault.
When a magnetic contactor is installed between the Inverter and the motor, set L8-07 (Output open-phase protection selection) to 1 or 2 (Enabled).
6-173
Control-related Adjustments
The Varispeed G7 is designed to provide sufficient performance for elevating machines. However, if problems
related to controllability should occur, such as vibration or slipping, adjust the following constants in accordance with the control method. Only constants that frequently require adjustment are listed in this table.
Table 6.4 Control-related Adjustments
Control
Method
Constant
Number
Name
• Increasing torque and
speed response
• Controlling hunting
1.00
and vibration in middle-range speeds (10
to 40 Hz)
Recommended
Setting
Adjustment Method
• Torque or speed response
is insufficient: Reduce the
setting
• Hunting or vibration
occurs: Increase the setting
N2-01
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
C4-02
Torque com• Increasing torque and
pensation
speed response
primary
20 ms
• Controlling hunting
delay time
and vibration
constant
• Torque or speed response
is insufficient: Reduce the
setting
20 to 100 ms
• Hunting or vibration
occurs: Increase the setting
C3-02
Slip compen- • Increasing speed
sation priresponse
mary delay
• Improving speed statime
bility
100 to
500 ms
• Speed response is slow:
Reduce the setting
• Speed is not stable:
Increase the setting
0.5 to 1.5
• Speed is slow: Increase
the setting
• Speed is too fast: Reduce
the setting
1 to F
• Motor magnetic noise is
high: Increase the setting
• Hunting or vibration
occurs at low speeds:
Reduce the setting
Open-loop
vector 1 control (A1-02 =
2)
C3-01
C6-02
E1-08
E1-10
Slip compen- • Improving speed
sation gain
accuracy
Carrier frequency
selection
200 ms
1.0
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
• Controlling hunting
*1
and vibration at low
speeds (10 Hz or
lower)
Mid. output
*2
frequency
• Improving torque and 11.0 V
voltage (VC)
speed response at low
speeds
Min. output
•
Controlling
shock at
frequency
2.0 V*2
startup
voltage
(VMIN)
6-174
Factory
Setting
Performance
0.50 to 2.00
12.0 to
13.0 V*2
2.0 to
3.0 V*2
• Torque or speed response
is insufficient: Increase
the setting
• Shock at startup is large:
Reduce the setting
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
Table 6.4 Control-related Adjustments (Continued)
Control
Method
Constant
Number
Name
Factory
Setting
Performance
ASR proportional (P)
• Increasing torque and
gain 1
speed response
20.00
•
Controlling
hunting
ASR proporand vibration
tional (P)
Recommended
Setting
10.00 to
50.00
• Torque or speed response
is insufficient: Increase
the setting
• Hunting or vibration
occurs: Reduce the setting
0.300 to
1.000 s
• Torque or speed response
is insufficient: Reduce the
setting
• Hunting or vibration
occurs: Increase the setting
C5-07
Switching the ASR proASR switchportional gain and inte- 0.0 Hz (no
ing fregral time according to
switching)
quency
the output frequency.
0.0 to max.
output frequency
Set the output frequency at
which to change the ASR
proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both
high-speed and low-speed
operation.
C5-06
ASR primary delay
time
0.004 to
0.020
Machine rigidity is low and
the system vibrates easily:
Increase the setting
N1-02
• Controlling hunting
Hunting-preand vibration in midvention gain
dle-range speeds (10
to 40 Hz)
0.50 to 2.00
• Torque is insufficient for
heavy loads: Reduce the
setting
• Hunting or vibration
occurs for light loads:
Increase the setting
1 to F
• Motor magnetic noise is
high: Increase the setting
• Hunting or vibration
occurs at low to middlerange speeds: Reduce the
setting
0.50 to 1.50
• Torque is insufficient at
low speeds: Increase the
setting
• Hunting or vibration
occurs for light loads:
Reduce the setting
C5-01
C5-03
gain 2
C5-02
Flux vector
control
(A1-02 = 3)
Adjustment Method
C5-04
ASR integral (I) time
1
ASR integral (I) time
2
• Increasing torque and
speed response
0.500 s
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
• Controlling hunting
and vibration
0.004 s
1.00
• Reducing motor magnetic noise
*1
• Controlling hunting
and vibration at low
and medium speeds
C6-02
Carrier frequency
selection
C4-01
• Improving torque at
low speeds (10 Hz or
Torque comlower)
pensation
1.00
• Controlling hunting
gain
and vibration for light
loads
V/f control
(A1-02 = 0
or 1)
E1-08
E1-10
Mid. output
frequency
voltage (VC) • Improving torque at
low speeds
Min. output • Controlling shock at
frequency
startup
voltage
(VMIN)
15.0 V*2
13.0 to
16.0 V*2
9.0 V*2
7.0 to
10.0 V*2
• Torque is insufficient at
low speeds: Increase the
setting
• Shock at startup is large:
Reduce the setting
* 1. Varies depending on capacity.
* 2. The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters. Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters.
Note 1. Do not change C4-01 (Torque compensation gain) from its factory setting of 1.00 when using open-loop vector 1 control.
2. If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vector 1 control, enable Slip compensation selection during regeneration (C3-04 = 1). If
speeds are inaccurate in the high-speed range, enable Output voltage limit operation selection (C3-05 = 1).
6-175
3. Do not use Slip compensation gain (C3-01) during V/f control (A1-02 = 0). (It is not used with the factory setting.)
4. Use the ASR constants (C5-01 to C5-05) in their factory settings when using V/f control with PG (A1-02 = 1). Vibration may occur if these constants
are changed greatly from their factory settings.
5. The torque and speed response of high-resistance (high-slip) motors are insufficient. Use appropriate adjustments to improve them. On the contrary,
low-resistance (low-slip) motors are easily subject to hunting and vibration. Here too, use appropriate adjustments to improve them.
6. The current during startup may increase when C4-02 (Torque compensation primary delay time constant) is increased. Check the current during startup while adjusting this constant.
Reducing Shock during Elevating Machine Start, Stop, Acceleration, and
Deceleration
When the riding comfort during start, stop, acceleration, and deceleration is of high importance, as it is for elevators in which people ride, adjust the following constants.
S-curve Characteristics, Acceleration/Deceleration Times
(High speed)
C2-02
C2-03
Output frequency
(Low speed)
C2-03
C2-01
C2-04
C2-04
Acceleration time
IMPORTANT
Deceleration time
DC injection braking when stopping
(Zero-speed control for flux vector control)
1. The factory setting for C2-04 (S-curve characteristic time at deceleration end) is 0.00 second, while the factory setting for all other S-curve characteristic times is 0.20 second. Make appropriate settings for the
accel/decel times and S-curve characteristic times at each point. (S-curve characteristic time = Approximately 0.2 to 1.0 second)
2. The accel/decel rate can be automatically switched during acceleration and deceleration by using C1-11
(Accel/decel time switching frequency). (Factory setting: Disabled)
Output frequency ≥ set frequency: C1-01, C1-02 accel/decel times
Output frequency &lt; set frequency: C1-07, C1-08 accel/decel times
3. If the output frequency during the S-curve characteristic time for deceleration falls below the value set for
E1-09 (Min. output frequency), the S-curve characteristic will be cancelled, and the DC injection braking
(Zero-speed control) will be applied.
4. Do not use the S-curve characteristic for applications where a short run time is desired, such as in cranes
and hoists. (S-curve characteristic time = Approximately 0.0 to 0.2 second)
Dwell Function at Start
b6-02
(Dwell time at start)
0.1 to 0.3 sec
Output frequency
(High speed)
b6-01 (Dwell frequency at start) 0.1 to 3.0 Hz
Frequency detection
2 or During run 2
OFF
Holding brake
operation
6-176
CLOSE
ON
OPEN
t
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
If the mechanical operation of the holding brake is slow, use the dwell function at start to prevent brake wear,
and accelerate after the brake is completely open.
IMPORTANT
1. When using open-loop vector 1 control and V/f control, set b6-01 (Dwell frequency at start) higher than frequency detection 2 (frequency when brakes open).
2. If the motor tends to have insufficient torque when started, use the DC injection braking function to allow
sufficient motor current (torque) before starting.
• b2-03 (DC injection braking time at start): 0.2 to 0.5 s
• b2-02 (DC injection braking current): 50% to 80% (open-loop vector 1 control, V/f control only)
Stopping with DC Injection Braking and Zero-speed Control
b2-04 (DC injection braking time at stop
(zero-speed control time at stop): 0.3 to 0.5 s
(HIGH)
Output frequency
(LOW)
Frequency
detection 2 or
During run 2
t
ON
Holding brake operation
OPEN
OFF
b2-01 [Zero speed level (DC injection braking
starting frequency)]: 0.1 to 3.0 Hz
b2-02 (DC injection braking current): 50% to 80%
(open-loop vector control, V/f control only)
CLOSE
When the holding brake’s mechanical operation is slow, use DC injection braking (zero-speed control for flux
vector control) until the brakes are fully closed to prevent the brakes from slipping when stopping.
1. When the load cannot be maintained sufficiently using DC injection braking with open-loop vector 1 control
and V/f control, use the dwell functions at stop.
• b6-03 (Dwell frequency at stop): Min. output frequency to 3.0 Hz.
IMPORTANT
The value must be less than the frequency when frequency detection 2 is OFF (L4-01 − L4-02).
• b6-04 (Dwell time at stop): 0.3 to 0.5 s
[b2-04 (DC injection braking at stop): 0.0 s]
2. If the Inverter and motor must be isolated while stopping using a magnetic contactor, for example in an elevator, fully close the holding brakes and isolate the Inverter during baseblock (during baseblock signal: ON)
as stipulated by law in the EU.
During motor control or DC injection braking (zero-speed control), an Inverter error may occur due to surge
voltage. When a magnetic contactor is used between the Inverter and motor, set L8-07 (Output openphase protection) to 1 (enabled).
Torque Compensation (Flux Vector Control Only)
When flux vector control is used, the torque compensation signals corresponding to the load can be input from
the multi-function analog input terminals in advance to reduce shock, such as that caused by opening and closing holding brakes. The load size and motoring/regenerating status must be detected at the machine side in
advance. Check that polarity is correct. Incorrect polarity will increase the shock.
6-177
Sequence Circuit Configuration
The following diagram shows the sequence circuit configuration for torque compensation.
UP
S1 (Forward run)
DOWN
S2 (Reverse run)
HIGH/LOW
S6 (Multi-step speed reference 2)
SC
(Using elevator control circuit)
Torque compensation signal
−10 to +10 V
A3
H3-04 (multi-function analog input terminal A3 signal level)
AC = 1 (−10 to +10 V)
H3-05 (multi-function analog input terminal A3 function
selection) = 14 (torque compensation)
Use H3-06 and H3-07 for fine tuning.
Fig 6.88 Torque Compensation Sequence Circuit Configuration
Time Chart
• Lifting
The analog signals corresponding to the load size are input as torque compensation signals from before the
Inverter starts until operation stops. (Factory setting: 10 V/100% torque)
Positive polarity is input for motor loads and negative polarity is input for regenerative loads.
The following diagram shows the time chart for lifting.
UP (Forward)
ON
HIGH/LOW
ON
Torque compensation
signal: 0
OFF
OFF
(Motor load: Inputs positive polarity.)
(Regenerative load: Inputs negative polarity.)
Analog signals corresponding to load size
Same as above
Output frequency
Zero-speed control
t
0
Motor torque
(Motor load)
(Regenerative load)
0
During run 2
ON
Holding brake operation
OPEN
OFF
CLOSE
Fig 6.89 Torque Compensation Time Chart (Lifting)
• Lowering
In the same way as for lifting, when the torque decreases, the analog signals corresponding to the load size are
input as torque compensation signals from before the Inverter starts until operation stops. (Factory setting: 10
V/100% torque)
Negative polarity is input for motor loads and positive polarity is input for regenerative loads.
The following diagram shows the time chart for lowering.
6-178
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
DOWN (Forward)
ON
HIGH/LOW
ON
Torque compensation
signal: 0
OFF
OFF
(Regenerative load: Inputs positive polarity.)
(Motor load: Inputs negative polarity.)
Analog signals corresponding to load size
Same as above
0
t
Output frequency
Motor torque
(Regenerative load)
(Motor load)
0
ON
During run 2
Holding brake operation
OPEN
OFF
CLOSE
Fig 6.90 Torque Compensation Time Chart (Lowering)
IMPORTANT
1. For either increasing or decreasing torque, externally maintain the torque compensation signals during
operation to prevent them from fluctuating. Fluctuation in compensation signals during operation may result
in vibration.
2. If reverse run is used for lifting and forward run is used for lowering, the torque compensation signal polarity must be reversed.
Analog Input Filter Time Constant
If noise enters the analog frequency reference during operation using analog frequency reference (b1-01 = 1),
and operation becomes rough, implement noise countermeasures and also set H3-12 (Analog input filter time
constant) to between 0.01 and 0.10 s.
Confirming Startup Current and Reducing Carrier Frequency
When performing a trial operation, set L8-41 (Current Alarm) to 1 (Enabled) and check the motor current
using the peak hold current monitoring function (U1-83) of the Digital Operator or a clamp ammeter, with and
without a mechanical load. An extremely high current will flow if the motor torque at start is insufficient, or if
timing is not correct and the motor locks with the holding brake.
If a current exceeding 150% of the Inverter rated current flows, the IGBT in the Inverter will be subject to heat
stress, resulting in a shortened life span.
In this case, take measures such as retuning and reduction of the load to reduce the current to a value less than
150% of the Inverter rated current.
Unless low noise operation is required, reduce the Inverter carrier frequency to a value between 2 kHz and 2.5
kHz to reduce the influence of heat stress.
6-179
Overvoltage Inhibit Function
Leave L3-11 (Overvoltage inhibit function selection) set to 0 (disabled). This function is used to prevent overvoltage tripping when the braking resistor is not used with a regenerative load. When this function is enabled,
the torque reference on the regenerative side is automatically inhibited in the Inverter during regeneration.
Using this function in elevating machines is dangerous because the elevator may slip and fall.
Contact your Yaskawa representative for details on applications such as high-speed elevators (speed: 2 m/s or higher),
direct-drive elevators, or Inverters designed for cranes.
6-180
Current Alarm Function
Current Alarm Function
This function displays a current alarm (HCA) on the Digital Operator and outputs a minor fault contact
signal* when the Inverter output current exceeds 150% (effective value) of the rated output current. Use
this function to check the current during trial operation for machines that increase Inverter output current,
such as elevating machines.
*To output a minor failure contact signal from a multi-function contact terminal, set H2- to 10 (Minor failure).
If a current alarm occurs frequently, reduce the Inverter load.
Use the peak hold current monitoring function (U1-83 and U1-84) when performing retuning to reduce
the Inverter output current to 150% of the rated output current. Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation for
details.
For applications where a high current flows because of frequent start and stop operations, such as cranes, set L8-41 to 1
(Enabled).
IMPORTANT
If a current alarm occurs frequently, take measures such as:
• Reducing the frequency of operation and loading.
• Adjusting open/close timing of holding brake.
• Increasing acceleration/deceleration time.
• Taking enough time to produce motor magnetic flux (As described below).
■Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
Current alarm
L8-41
*
HC Alarm Sel
Description
Setting
Range
Allows or restricts an alarm from
being triggered when the relative
output current rises above 150%.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled (alarm will be
output).
0 or 1
Change
Factory during
Setting Operation
0
No
Control Methods
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
MEMO
BUS
Register
4F2H
* Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1039 or later
If load is applied to an induction motor at startup before motor magnetic flux has been produced (as when
acceleration starts while the motor is locked by a brake mechanism or acceleration is too sudden), a high starting current may flow.
In this case, use the following functions and constants to accelerate the motor after the magnetic flux is produced.
Startup current can be reduced by producing motor magnetic flux.
• Magnetic flux compensation function (See related constants b2-02 and b2-08)
• Dwell function (See related constants b6-01 and b6-02)
• Initial excitation function (See the setting 60 of the multi-function contact input H1)
For flux loop vector control, a multi-function input terminal can be used for initial excitation by setting
H1- to 60.
• Field forcing function (See related constant d6-03)
6-181
Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function
This function saves the peak value (effective value) of the Inverter output current and displays it on the
Digital Operator for monitoring (U1-83). The Inverter output frequency at the moment the peak current
value is saved can be also monitored (U1-84).
At trial operation, perform adjustments so that the Inverter output current is limited to 150% of the rated
current checking the constants U1-83 and U1-84 of this function.
The values of peak current and output frequency during peak hold will be cleared when the Inverter stops and then starts,
or when the power is turned OFF and then ON. They will be retained while being baseblocked (stopped).
IMPORTANT
■Related Status Monitoring Constants
Name
Constant
Number
U1-83
*1
U1-84
*1
Display
Peak hold
current
Current
PeakHold
Output
frequency
during
peak hold
Freq@ I
PeakHold
Control Methods
Description
Output Signal Level
During Multi-Function
Analog Output
Displays the peak value of the
current during run. “Peak
Hold” refers to the moment
that the peak value is saved.
10V: Inverter rated output
current
(-10 to 10V absolute value
output)
Displays the frequency value
when the output current
reached its peak value.
10V: Max frequency
(-10V to 10V)
Min.
Unit
0.01
A
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
7CFH
A
A
A
A
A
7D0H
*2
0.01
Hz
*3
* 1. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
* 2. The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity. (0.01 A for Inverter of 0.4 kW to 7.5 kW, and 0.1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more)
* 3. The setting unit can be selected in o1-03.
Related Fault Tracing Constants
The peak hold values are saved in the fault trace memory when a fault occurs.
Name
Constant
Number
U2-21
*1
U2-22
*1
Display
Peak hold
current at
fault
Current
PeakHold
Peak hold
output
frequency at
fault
Freq@ I
PeakHold
Description
Output Signal
Level During
Multi-Function
Analog Output
Displays the peak hold current
when the last fault occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
Displays the frequency value at
the moment the current reached
its peak value when the last fault
occurred.
(Cannot be output.)
Control Methods
Min.
Unit
0.01
A*2
0.01
Hz
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
A
A
A
A
A
7E6H
A
A
A
A
A
7E7H
* 1. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
* 2. The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity. (0.01 A for Inverter of 0.4 kW to 7.5 kW, and 0.1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more)
6-182
Maintenance Timer Display Function
Maintenance Timer Display Function
This function indicates that the estimated performance life of the cooling fan and electrolytic capacitor
have been reached.
The maintenance time periods displayed in the monitors as a percentage to the total life are only an estimate, not an exact
prediction of actual performance life.
IMPORTANT
Use them as guidelines for replacement.
Settings Required to Use Maintenance Timer Display Function
Set H2- to 2F to use a multi-function contact output for this function and display an alarm on the Digital
Operator (the constants U1-61 and U1-63).
Multi-function Contact Outputs (H2-01 to H2-03)
The maintenance time period for the cooling fan or electrolytic capacitor can be output from the multi-function contact terminal by setting H2- to 2F. Minor faults will not be output.
Control Methods
Setting
Value
Function
2F*
Maintenance Time
ON: The operation time of either the electrolytic capacitors or the cooling fan has
reached the specified maintenance time.
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
* Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1039 or later.
Refer to Multi-function Contact Outputs: H2 in Chapter 5 User Constants for information on multi-function
contact outputs.
Related Status Monitoring Constants
Name
Constant
Number
U1-40
U1-61
*
U1-63
*
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
Monitors the total operating time
of the cooling fan. The time can
be set in o2-10.
(Cannot be
output.)
1
hr
Electrolytic
For maintenance purposes, this
capacitor main- timer shows the amount of time
tenance
the electrolytic capacitors have
been operating. Capacitors should
C Maintenance be replaced when the monitor
Fan
reaches 100%.
(Cannot be
output.)
(Cannot be
output.)
Display
Cooling fan
operating time
FAN Elapsed
Time
Cooling fan
maintenance
Maintenance
This monitor displays the amount
of time the cooling fan has been
operating. Replace the cooling fan
when the display reads 100%.
Control Methods
MEMO
BUS
Register
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
Open
Loop
Vector
2
A
A
A
A
A
A
67H
1%
A
A
A
A
A
A
7CH
1%
A
A
A
A
A
A
7EH
* Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
6-183
Related Alarm Displays
When setting a multi-function contact output H2- to 2F, the alarm is displayed on the Digital Operator as
shown below.
Display
LT-C
(blinking)
C Maintenance
Meaning
Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance Timer
Monitor U1-61 has reached
100%.
Cooling Fan Maintenance
Timer
(blinking)
Monitor U1-63 has reached
Fan Maintenance
100%.
LT-F
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
The electrolytic capacitors have
Reset constant o2-18 to “0%” after
reached their estimated maintenance
replacing the electrolytic capacitors.
time period.
The cooling fan has reached its estimated maintenance time period.
Replace the cooling fan and set constant o2-10 to “0H”.
Settings Required After Replacement of Cooling Fan or Electrolytic
Capacitor
• Set o2-10 to 0 after replacing the cooling fan.
• Set o2-18 to 0 after replacing the electrolytic bus capacitor.
Refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection for the replacement procedure.
Related Constants
Name
Constant
Number
Display
o2-10
Fan operation time setting
*
o2-18
*
Control Methods
Description
Set the initial value of the fan
operation time using time
units.
Fan ON Time The operation time accumulates from the set value.
Set
Capacitor
maintenance
setting
C MaintenanceSet
Allows the user to set the
maintenance time for the
electrolytic capacitors (U161). The user can reset the
accumulated operation time
back to zero, or to some other
desired value.
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Change
during
Operation
0 to
65535
0 hr
0 to
150
0%
* Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1039 or later.
6-184
Open MEMOBUS
Loop
Vec- Register
tor
2
V/f
V/f
with
PG
Open
Loop
Vector
1
Flux
Vector
No
A
A
A
A
A
50EH
No
A
A
A
A
A
51DH
7
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Inverter and motor problems and countermeasures.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions ...........................7-2
Troubleshooting .........................................................7-25
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter. The alarm functions include fault detection,
alarm detection, operation error detection, and autotuning error detection.
Fault Detection
When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing
the motor to coast to a stop. (The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping
method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
When a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault.
Use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restarting the Inverter:
• Set a multi-function contact input (H1-01 to H1-05) to 14 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the fault reset signal.
• Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator.
• Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
• A short-circuit or ground fault
occurred at the Inverter output. (A
short or ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
• The load is too large or the acceleration/deceleration time is too short.
• A special-purpose motor or motor
with a capacity too large for the
Inverter is being used.
• A magnetic contactor was switched
at the Inverter output.
Reset the fault after correcting its
cause.
Note) Before turning the power
ON again, make sure that no
short-circuit or ground fault
occurs at the Inverter output.
Overcurrent
OC
The Inverter output current exceeded
Over Curthe overcurrent detection level. (200% There is a break in the PG wiring.
rent
of rated current)
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring
has not been done.
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
• Check the resistance and wirAC terminals occurred.
ing for the frequency setting
• Overload in the control circuit terpotentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
GF
Ground
Fault
Ground Fault*
The ground fault current at the
Inverter output exceeded approximately 50% of the Inverter rated output current.
A ground fault occurred at the Inverter
output. (A ground fault can be caused
by motor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.)
Reset the fault after correcting its
cause.
Note) Before turning the power
ON again, make sure that no
short-circuit or ground fault
occurs at the Inverter output.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring
has not been done.
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
• Check the resistance and wirAC terminals occurred.
ing for the frequency setting
• Overload in the control circuit terpotentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
* The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases.
y A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
y A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
7-2
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
PUF
Main IGBT Fuse Blown
Fuse
The fuse in the main circuit is blown.
Blown
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
The output transistor has failed
because of a short-circuit or ground
fault at the Inverter output.
Check whether there is a short-circuit
between the following terminals. A
short-circuit will damage the output
transistor:
B1 ( 3) ←→ U, V, W
←→ U, V, W
Replace the Inverter after correcting the cause.
Increase the deceleration time or
connect a braking resistor (or
The deceleration time is too short and
Braking Resistor Unit). Alternathe regenerative energy from the
tively, enable (set to 1) the stall
motor is too large.
prevention selection during deceleration (L3-04).
OV
DC Bus
Overvolt
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
the overvoltage detection level.
200 V Class: Approx. 410 V
400 V Class: Approx. 820 V
(E1-01 ≥ 400 V)
Approx. 720 V
(E1-01 &lt; 400 V)
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The main circuit DC voltage is below
the Undervoltage Detection Level
(L2-05).
200 V Class: Approx. 190 V
400 V Class: Approx. 380 V
UV1
DC Bus Main Circuit Magnetic Connector
Undervolt Operation Failure
The magnetic connector stopped
responding during Inverter operation.
Applicable Inverter Capacities
200 V Class: 37 to 110 kW
400 V Class: 75 to 300 kW
Motor ground fault
(Ground fault current flowed to the
capacitor in the control circuit of the
Inverter through the power supply.)
Check the output cable, relay terminal, or motor terminal box and
correct the cause of ground fault.
Incorrect constant setting for speed
search
(The speed search can be performed
during momentary power loss recovery and auto restart after a fault.)
• Use the speed search function.
• Adjust the settings of the Speed
search operating current (b3-02)
and Speed search deceleration
time (b3-03).
• Use the estimated speed search
function. (Perform stationary
autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.)
Improper PG cable connection
(PG noise, PG disconnection)
Check to see if the PG cable is
connected properly.
The regenerative energy when an
overshoot occurs after acceleration is
completed is too large.
In vector control, enable (set to 1)
the overvoltage inhibit selection
(L3-11).
The power supply voltage is too high.
Decrease the voltage so it’s within
specifications.
• An open-phase occurred with the
input power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input
power supply are loose.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
power supply are too large.
• A fault occurred in the surge prevention circuit.
• The magnetic contactor in the control circuit was released (Contact
failure in the auxiliary contact).
• The contact of the magnetic contactor in the control circuit was corroded due to environmental dust or
gas.
• Reset the fault after correcting
its cause.
• Improve the power supply environment. (Check to see if the
correct power tap is selected.)
• Improve the operating environment.
• Replace the Inverter.
7-3
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
UV2
Control Power Fault
CTL PS The control power supply voltage
Undervolt dropped.
Corrective Actions
• The wiring of the control power circuit is incorrect.
• A Backup Capacitor Unit for
• Try turning the power supply
Momentary Power Loss is not
off and on.
attached to a 200 V/400 V Class
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
Inverter of 7.5 kW or less and the
continues to occur.
value of the Momentary power loss • Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit
ridethru time (L2-02) factory setting
for Momentary Power Loss.
has been changed to the larger
value.
UV3
MC
Answerback
Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault
A fault occurred in the surge preven• The magnetic contactor in the main • Try turning the power supply
tion circuit.
circuit failed.
off and on.
The magnetic contactor did not
• The magnetic contactor excitation • Replace the Inverter if the fault
respond for 10 s even though the magcoil is burned out.
continues to occur.
netic contactor ON signal has been
output.
PF
Input Pha
Loss
Main Circuit Voltage Fault
The main circuit DC voltage oscillates
unusually (not when regenerating).
This fault is detected if a load is
greater than approximately 80% of the
maximum motor capacity.
This fault is detected when L8-05 is
set to 1.
Output Open-phase
An open-phase occurred at the
LF
Output Pha Inverter output.
This fault is detected when L8-07 is
Loss
set to 1 or 2
OH
(OH1)
Heatsnk
Overtemp
(Heatsnk
MAX
Temp)
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-02
or the overheat protection level.
OH: The temperature exceeded the
setting in L8-02 (Stopping method can
be changed by L8-03.).
OH1: The temperature exceeded
100&deg;C (Stopping method: Coast to
stop).
Inverter's Cooling Fan Fault
(200 V Class: 7.5 kW or more,
400 V Class: 5.5 kW or more)
This fault is detected when L8-32 is
set to 1.
7-4
Probable Causes
• An open-phase occurred in the input
power supply.
• A momentary power loss occurred.
• The wiring terminals for the input
Reset the fault after correcting its
power supply are loose.
cause.
• The voltage fluctuations in the input
power supply are too large.
• The voltage balance between phases
is bad.
• There is a broken wire in the output
cable.
Reset the fault after correcting its
• There is a broken wire in the motorcause.
winding.
• The output terminals are loose.
The motor being used has a capacity
less than 5% of the rated output current.
Check the motor and Inverter
capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
Install a cooling unit.
There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source.
The Inverter's cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
our sales representative.)
• Make sure that incorrect wiring
has not been done.
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
• Check the resistance and wirAC terminals occurred.
ing for the frequency setting
• Overload in the control circuit terpotentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
• The Inverter's cooling fan has
stopped.
• The heatsink is clogged.
• Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.)
• Clean the heatsink.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
FAN
Cooling
Fan Fault
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault
An Inverter’s cooling fan fault was
detected, and the Inverter-overload
protection was activated based on the
internal electric thermal value.
This fault is detected when L8-32 is
set to 0.
Probable Causes
The Inverter continued running with
an overload after the cooling fan
stopped.
Motor Overheating Alarm
OH3
The Inverter will stop or will continue
Motor
The motor has overheated.
to operate according to the setting of
Overheat 1
L1-03.
OH4
Motor Overheating Fault
Motor
The Inverter will stop according to the The motor has overheated.
Overheat 2 setting of L1-04.
Corrective Actions
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact
our sales representative.)
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
•
The deceleration time is too short and
the regenerative energy from the
motor is too large.
•
RH
DynBrk
Resistor
Installed Braking Resistor Overheating
Braking resistor protection function
set in L8-01 has operated.
RR
DynBrk
Transistr
Internal Braking Transistor Fault
• The braking transistor is damaged.
The braking transistor is not operating • The Inverter’s control circuits are
properly.
faulty.
Reduce the load, increase the
deceleration time, or reduce the
motor speed.
Change to a Braking Resistor
Unit.
• Try turning the power supply
off and on.
• Replace the Inverter if the fault
continues to occur.
7-5
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
The load is too heavy. The acceleraCheck the size of the load and the
tion time, deceleration time, and cycle length of the acceleration, decelertime are too short.
ation, and cycle times.
The constant setting for speed search
is incorrect.
(Motor overload occurred due to
motor hunting and vibration.)
• Use the speed search function.
• Adjust the settings of the Speed
search operating current (b3-02)
and Speed search deceleration
time (b3-03).
• Use the estimated speed search
function. (Perform stationary
autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.)
• Motor overload occurred when running at low speed. (If a general-purpose motor is used, motor overload
can occur when running at low
• Check the size of the load.
speed even if running within the
• Check the setting of L1-01.
rated current.)
• Increase the frame size of the
Motor Overload
• Motor protection selection (L1-01)
Inverter.
OL1
The motor overload protection funcis set to general-purpose motor proMotor
tion has operated based on the internal
tection (1) when an Inverter duty
Overloaded
electronic thermal value.
motor is used.
• Correct the PG wiring.
The directions of the motor and PG
• Correct the motor wiring.
are different. (Only in flux vector con• Change the setting of PG rotatrol)
tion (F1-05).
The V/f characteristics voltage is too
high.
Check the V/f characteristics.
The Motor Rated Current (E2-01) is
incorrect.
Check the Motor Rated Current
(E2-01).
• Make sure that incorrect wiring
has not been done.
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
• Check the resistance and wirAC terminals occurred.
ing for the frequency setting
• Overload in the control circuit terpotentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
7-6
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
The load is too heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle
time are too short.
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
The constant setting for speed search
is incorrect.
(Motor overload occurred due to
motor hunting and vibration.)
• Use the speed search function.
• Adjust the settings of the Speed
search operating current (b3-02)
and Speed search deceleration
time (b3-03).
• Use the estimated speed search
function. (Perform stationary
autotuning for line-to-line resistance only.)
• Correct the PG wiring.
The directions of the motor and PG
• Correct the motor wiring.
are different. (Only in flux vector con• Change the setting of PG rotaInverter Overload
trol)
OL2
tion (F1-05).
The Inverter overload protection funcInv Overtion has operated based on the internal
The V/f characteristics voltage is too
loaded
Check the V/f characteristics.
electronic thermal value.
high.
The Inverter capacity is too low.
Replace the Inverter with one that
has a larger capacity.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring
has not been done.
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
• Check the resistance and wirAC terminals occurred.
ing for the frequency setting
• Overload in the control circuit terpotentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
Overtorque Detected 1
OL3
There has been a current greater than
Overtorque
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
Det 1
setting in L6-03.
Overtorque Detected 2
OL4
There has been a current greater than
Overtorque
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
Det 2
setting in L6-06.
OL7
HSB-OL
High-slip Braking OL
The output frequency did not change
for longer than the time set in N3-04.
Inverter overload occurred when running at a low speed of 6 Hz or less.
• Reduce the load.
• Increase the frame size of the
Inverter.
• Lower the carrier frequency.
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
The inertia returned to the load is too
large.
• Make sure the load is an inertial
load.
• Set the system so that the deceleration time that does not produce overvoltages is 120 s or
less.
7-7
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Undertorque Detected 1
UL3
There has been a current less than the
Undertorq
setting in L6-02 for longer than the
Det 1
setting in L6-03.
Undertorque Detected 2
UL4
There has been a current less than the
Undertorq
setting in L6-05 for longer than the
Det 2
setting in L6-06.
Overspeed
OS
The speed has been greater than the
Overspeed
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
Det
setting in F1-09.
PGO
PG Open
DEV
Speed
Deviation
PG Disconnection Detected
PG pulses were input when the
Inverter was outputting a frequency.
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the setting in F1-11.
Probable Causes
-
• Make sure that the settings in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in
L6-06 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system
and correct the cause of the
overtorque.
Overshooting/Undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and
reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't Check the settings in F1-08 and
appropriate.
F1-09.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
Fix the wiring.
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Brake is applied to the motor.
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
The load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration Lengthen the acceleration time
time are too short.
and deceleration time.
The load is locked.
FBL
Feedback
Loss
7-8
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't Check the settings in F1-10 and
appropriate.
F1-11.
Brake is applied to the motor.
CF
Out of
Control
Corrective Actions
Control Fault
The torque limit was reached continuMotor constant settings are not corously for 3 seconds or longer during a
rect.
deceleration stop during open-loop
vector 1 control.
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
• Check the motor constants.
• Perform autotuning.
An error occurred in the speed estimation calculation for open-loop vector 2 Refer to Corrective Actions for Control Faults (CF) on page 7-14.
control.
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was
detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-13 (PID
feedback loss detection level) for
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
The settings in b5-13 and b5-14 aren’t Check the settings in b5-13 and
appropriate.
b5-14.
The wiring of the PID feedback circuit
Fix the wiring.
is incorrect.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
EF0
External Fault Input from CommuOpt Externications Option Board
nal Flt
EF3
Ext Fault
S3
External Fault (Input Terminal 3)
EF4
Ext Fault
S4
External Fault (Input Terminal 4)
EF5
Ext Fault
S5
External Fault (Input Terminal 5)
EF6
Ext Fault
S6
External Fault (Input Terminal 6)
EF7
Ext Fault
S7
External Fault (Input Terminal 7)
EF8
Ext Fault
S8
External Fault (Input Terminal 8)
EF9
Ext Fault
S9
External Fault (Input Terminal 9)
EF10
Ext Fault
S10
External Fault (Input Terminal 10)
EF11
Ext Fault
S11
External Fault (Input Terminal 11)
EF12
Ext Fault
S12
External Fault (Input Terminal 12)
SVE
Zero-servo Fault
Zero Servo The rotation position moved during
Fault
zero-servo operation.
SER
Search
Retrials
Fault
Exceeded Allowable Number of
Speed Search Retrials
The speed search has been retried
more than the number of times set in
b3-19 (Number of speed search retrials).
OPR
Oper Disconnect
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The connection to the Digital Operator
was broken during operation for a Run
Command from the Digital Operator.
Probable Causes
-
Corrective Actions
Check the Communications
Option Board and communications signals.
An “external fault” was input from a
multi-function input terminal.
• Reset external fault inputs to the
multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external fault.
The torque limit is too small.
Increase the limit.
The load torque is too large.
Reduce the load torque.
-
Check for signal noise.
The settings in b3-17 and b3-18 aren’t Make sure that the settings in b3appropriate.
17 and b3-18 are appropriate.
-
Check the connection to the Digital Operator.
7-9
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
CE
Memobus
Com Err
MEMOBUS Communications Error
A normal reception was not possible
for 2 s or longer after control data was
received once.
BUS
Option
Com Err
Option Communications Error
A communications error was detected
during a Run Command or while setting a frequency reference from a
Communications Option Board.
E5
SI-T Watchdog Error
SI-T WDT Consistency error of received control
Err
data
E-15
SI-F/G
Com Err
SI-F/G Communications Error
Detected
A communications error was detected
when a Run Command or frequency
reference was set from an option
board and continuous operation was
set for the E-15 operation selection.
Probable Causes
-
-
CPU External RAM Fault
CPF01
COM-ERR
(OP &amp;
INV)
Digital Operator Communications
Error 2
After communications were established, there was a communications
error with the Digital Operator for
more than 2 seconds.
CPF02
BB Circuit Baseblock Circuit Error
Err
-
7-10
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
Check the communications signals.
Disconnect and then reconnect the
Digital Operator.
Replace the Inverter.
The Digital Operator's connector isn't
connected properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
-
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuits were destroyed.
Replace the Inverter.
The Digital Operator isn't connected
properly.
Disconnect the Digital Operator
and then connect it again.
The Inverter's control circuits are
faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
The control circuit is damaged.
-
CPF03
EEPROM EEPROM Error
Error
Check the communications
devices and communications signals.
Check the communications timing such as communications cycle.
Synchronization error between master
Refer to MECHATROLINK COMcontroller and Inverter for control
MUNICATIONS INTERFACE
data.
CARD INSTRUCTIONS
(TOBPC73060008) for details.
E-10
Digital Operator connection is faulty.
SI-F/G Option Board CPU Failure
SI-F/G
SI-F/G Option Board operation failed.
CPU down
Inverter control circuit is faulty.
Digital Operator Communications
Error 1
Communications with the Digital
Operator were not established within 5
CPF00
COM-ERR seconds after the power was turned
on.
(OP &amp;
INV)
Corrective Actions
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The Inverter power supply was shut
off while writing data to the Inverter
constants.
Initialize the constant settings
(A1-03).
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
The control circuit is damaged.
CPF04
Internal
A/D Err
CPU Internal A/D Converter Error
The control circuit is damaged.
CPF06
Option
error
CPF07
RAM-Err
CPF08
WAT-Err
CPU External A/D Converter Error
Option Board Connection Error
ASIC Internal RAM Fault
CPU-ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault
CPF10
ASIC-Err
ASIC Version Fault
CPF20
Option
A/D error
Communications Option Board A/
D Converter Error
CPF21
Communications Option Board
Option
Self Diagnostic Error
CPU down
CPF22
Option
Type Err
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
The option board is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
board again.
The Inverter or option board is faulty.
Replace the option board or the
Inverter.
-
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
CPF09
CPU-Err
Replace the Inverter.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring
has not been done.
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
• Check the resistance and wirAC terminals occurred.
ing for the frequency setting
• Overload in the control circuit terpotentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
The control circuit is damaged.
Watchdog Timer Fault
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
• Make sure that incorrect wiring
has not been done.
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
• Check the resistance and wirAC terminals occurred.
ing for the frequency setting
• Overload in the control circuit terpotentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
-
CPF05
External
A/D Err
Corrective Actions
-
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
Replace the Inverter.
Try turning the power supply off
and on again.
The control circuit is damaged.
Replace the Inverter.
The Inverter control circuit is faulty
Replace the Inverter.
The option board is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
board again.
The option board's A/D converter is
faulty.
Replace the Communications
Option Board.
Communications Option Board fault.
Replace the option board.
Communications Option Board
Model Code Error
7-11
Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Communications Option Board fault.
CPF23
Option
DPRAM
Err
VCF
Vcn Failure
Communications Option Board
DPRAM Error
Main Circuit Capacitor Neutral
Point Potential Error
An excessive imbalance occurred in
the main circuit capacitor’s neutral
point potential.
Corrective Actions
Replace the option board.
• Use the copy function off-line.
The copy function of the Digital Oper• Use the copy function with an
ator was used during communications.
option board removed.
The option board is not connected
properly.
Turn off the power and insert the
board again.
A loss in capacity due to aging of the
main circuit capacitor.
Replace the main circuit capacitor.
(Consult your YASKAWA representative.)
The Inverter parts are faulty.
Replace the Inverter.
An open phase was detected for an
output.
Refer to LF (output open phase) in
this table.
Carrier frequency set value (C6-03,
C6-04) is unsuitable.
Check the set values for C6-03
and C6-04. The maximum output
frequency that can be set for 400
V Class Inverters is restricted by
the carrier frequency setting.
Refer to page 6-45.
• Reduce the load.
In V/f or open-loop vector control, the
• Increase the acceleration time.
motor consecutively loses synchro• Check the settings for V/f connism (the output current exceeds
trol.
200% of the Inverter rated current).
• Use larger capacity Inverter.
OPERATOR ERR
RAM
CHECK
ERR
Operator Error (Internal RAM
Fault)
At power ON, an error was detected
from the results of the internal RAM
Write/Read check.
OPERATOR ERR
ROM
CHECK
ERR
Operator Error (CPU Internal ROM
Fault)
At power ON and during operation, an
error was detected when the internal
ROM was checked.
OPERATOR ERR
DATA
SEND
ERR
Operator Error (Transmission Circuit Fault)
During operation, send processing did
not complete within 500 ms continuously at least 10 times.
OPERATOR ERR
RAM
CHECK
ERR
Operator Error (Internal RAM
Fault)
During operation, an error was
detected when the display pattern for
the character code 80 to 8F recorded
in the internal RAM was checked.
OPERAOperator Error (Watchdog Error)
TOR ERR
During operation, an error was
WATCHdetected in the program execution.
DOG ERR
7-12
---
Replace the Operator.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.2 Causes and Corrective Actions When the Digital Operator Goes Dark
Display
Meaning
Probable Causes
Corrective Actions
• Make sure that incorrect wiring
has not been done.
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
• Check the resistance and wirAC terminals occurred.
ing for the frequency setting
• Overload in the control circuit terpotentiometer, etc. (Check that
minal.
the current for terminals +V and
–V is 20 mA or less.)
The short-circuit bar between +1 and
+2 terminals in the main circuit has
been removed.
Attach the short-circuit bar.
• Check the wiring for the Braking Unit, including cables conP terminal and N terminal of the BrakThere was a drop in control power
nected to the Braking Unit and
No display
ing Unit are connected in reverse.
voltage.
relay terminals.
• Replace the Inverter.
Control power circuit failure
Charge indicator is lit:
• Replace the Digital Operator.
• Replace the board or the
Inverter.
Charge indicator is not lit:
• Check the input power supply
voltage.
• Replace the Inverter.
Malfunction occurred in the control
power circuit.
Turn OFF the power, wait for 5
minutes, and turn ON the power
again.
7-13
Corrective Actions for Control Faults (CF)
CF occurs
No
Are the motor and
Inverter connected
properly?
Fix the wiring.
Yes
U1-50 = 01,02
No
Execute autotuning for the
Are the motor
constants set
correctly?
motor constants.
Refer to Autotuning on page
4-9. Execute autotuning after
the control method is
changed.
Yes
Has autotuning been
executed for line-to-line
resistance?
U1-50 = 00,01,
No
02,08 Execute autotuning for the
line-to-line resistance.
Refer to Autotuning on page
4-9. Execute autotuning
after changing cables.
Yes
Are the torque limit settings (L7-01
to L7-04, analog input) or the torque
reference input too small?
No
Is the stopping
method appropriate?
Increase the torque limit
or torque reference until
is it within the allowable
range for the machine.
Yes
U1-50 = 00 If deceleration stop is not
No
possible or unnecessary
for the machine, set b1-03
to 1 (coast to stop).
Yes
U1-50 = 02 &middot; Input the operation reference
Is an operation reference
being input while the motor
is coasting?
Yes
after the motor stops.
&middot; Set b3-01 to 1 or 3 (speed
search enabled).
Refer to Torque Limits: L7
on page 5-65. In particular, if
the regenerative torque limit
has been reduced to prevent
overvoltages, set L3-11 to 1
and set the regenerative
torque limit to a large value.
Refer to Speed Search
on page 6-64.
No
U1-50 = 04
What is the CF error
code (U1-50)?
U1-50 = 08
Adjust the speed estimator's
integral time (N4-07) or
proportional gain (N4-08).
Refer to Procedure for
Increasing the Speed
Response (PRG: 102 only)
on page 4-21.
If the machine rotates only in the
same direction as the sign of the
speed limit, set b1-10 to 1.
U1-50 = 10 &middot; If the machine rotates only in the
same direction as the sign of the
speed limit (winding operation), set
d5-07 to 1.
&middot; Ensure that the motor's speed is
not 0 or that it does not rotate in
the opposite direction.
U1-50 = 20
Use in open loop vector 1 control.
&middot; If the machine rotates in the
opposite direction to the sign of
the speed limit (rewinding
operation), set d5-07 to 0.
&middot; Start with speed control and then
switch to torque control when the
frequency exceeds 3 Hz.
Meaning of CR Error Codes
U1-50
7-14
Meaning
00
Stop error
01
Magnetic flux calculation error 1
02
Magnetic flux calculation error 2
04
Speed estimator gain adjustment fault
08
Low-speed regeneration fault
10
Zero-speed fault
20
Rotation direction limit fault
Refer to Speed/Torque
Control Switching Function
on page 6-134.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Alarm Detection
Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The
system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
The Digital Operator display blinks and an alarm is sent from the multi-function outputs (H2-01 to H2-05) if
selected.
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing
Display
Meaning
Forward/Reverse Run Commands
Input Together
(blinking)
Both the forward and Reverse Run
External
Commands have been ON for more
Fault
than 0.5 s.
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
-
Check the sequence of the forward and
Reverse Run Commands.
Since the rotational direction is
unknown, the motor will be decelerated to a stop when this minor fault
occurs.
EF
Main Circuit Undervoltage
The following conditions occurred
when there was no Run signal.
UV
• The main circuit DC voltage was
(blinking)
below the Undervoltage Detection
DC Bus
Level Setting (L2-05).
Under• The surge current limiting magvolt
netic contactor opened.
• The control power supply voltage
when below the CUV level.
See causes for UV1, UV2, and UV3
faults in the previous table.
See corrective actions for UV1, UV2,
and UV3 faults in the previous table.
Main Circuit Overvoltage
The main circuit DC voltage exceeded
(blinking)
Decrease the voltage so it's within
the overvoltage detection level.
The power supply voltage is too high.
DC Bus
specifications.
200 V Class: Approx. 410 V
Overvolt
400 V Class: Approx. 820 V
OV
OH
(blinking)
Heatsink
Overtemp
FAN
(blinking)
Cooling
Fan
Fault
Cooling Fin Overheating
The temperature of the Inverter's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-02.
Inverter’s Cooling Fan Fault
An Inverter’s cooling fan fault was
detected.
This fault is detected when L8-32 is
set to 0.
Inverter Overheating Pre-alarm
An OH2 alarm signal (Inverter over(blinking)
heating alarm signal) was input from a
Over
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
Heat 2
S7).
The ambient temperature is too high.
Install a cooling unit.
There is a heat source nearby.
Remove the heat source
The Inverter cooling fan has stopped.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your
Yaskawa representative.)
• Make sure that incorrect wiring has
• A short-circuit between +V, −V, and
not been done.
AC terminals occurred.
• Check the resistance and wiring for
• Overload in the control circuit terthe frequency setting potentiometer,
minal.
etc. (Check that the current for terminals +V and –V is 20 mA or less.)
The Inverter’s cooling fan has
stopped.
Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our
sales representative.)
OH2
-
Clear the multi-function input terminal's overheating alarm input.
7-15
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
OH3
(blinking)
Motor
Overheat 1
OL3
(blinking)
Overtorque
Det 1
OL4
(blinking)
Overtorque
Det 2
Meaning
Probable causes
Motor Overheating
E was set for H3-09 and the motor
The motor has overheated.
temperature thermistor input exceeded
the alarm detection level.
Overtorque 1
There has been a current greater than
the setting in L6-02 for longer than the
setting in L6-03.
Overtorque 2
There has been a current greater than
the setting in L6-05 for longer than the
setting in L6-06.
-
-
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
-
• Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
UL4
(blinking)
Overspeed
Det
Overspeed
The speed has been greater than the
setting in F1-08 for longer than the
setting in F1-09.
Overshooting/undershooting are
occurring.
Adjust the gain again.
The reference speed is too high.
Check the reference circuit and reference gain.
The settings in F1-08 and F1-09 aren't
Check the settings in F1-08 and F1-09.
appropriate.
There is a break in the PG wiring.
The PG is wired incorrectly.
The PG is Disconnected
(blinking) The Inverter is outputting a frequency,
Power isn't being supplied to the PG.
PG Open but PG pulses aren't being input.
PGO
DEV
(blinking)
Speed
Deviation
Excessive Speed Deviation
The speed deviation has been greater
than the setting in F1-10 for longer
than the setting in F1-11.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
Fix the wiring.
Supply power to the PG properly.
Brake is applied to the motor.
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
The load is too large.
Reduce the load.
The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short.
Lengthen the acceleration time and
deceleration time.
The load is locked.
Check the mechanical system.
The settings in F1-10 and F1-11 aren't
Check the settings in F1-10 and F1-11.
appropriate.
Brake is applied to the motor.
7-16
Check the motor temperature input on
terminals A1 and A2.
• Make sure that the current setting in
L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are
appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
(blinking)
OS
Check the V/f characteristics.
-
(blinking)
Undertorque 2
There has been a current less than the
Undersetting in L6-05 for longer than the
torq Det
setting in L6-06.
2
Check the size of the load and the
length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
• Make sure that the settings in L6-02
and L6-03 are appropriate.
• Check the mechanical system and
correct the cause of the overtorque.
UL3
Undertorque 1
There has been a current less than the
Undersetting in L6-02 for longer than the
torq Det
setting in L6-03.
1
Corrective Actions
Check for open circuit when using
brake (motor).
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
External Fault Detected for Communications Board Other Than
(blinking)
SI-K2
Opt
Continuing operation was specified
External
for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external
Flt
fault was input from the option board.
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
-
Remove the cause of the external fault.
EF0
EF3
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S3
External Fault (Input Terminal S3)
EF4
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S4
External Fault (Input Terminal S4)
EF5
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S5
External Fault (Input Terminal S5)
EF6
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S6
External Fault (Input Terminal S6)
EF7
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S7
External Fault (Input Terminal S7)
An external fault was input from a
multi-function input terminal (S3 to
S7).
EF8
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S8
External Fault (Input Terminal S8)
• Reset external fault inputs to the
multi-function inputs.
• Remove the cause of the external
fault.
EF9
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S9
External Fault (Input Terminal S9)
EF10
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S10
External Fault (Input Terminal S10)
EF11
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S11
External Fault (Input Terminal S11)
EF12
(blinking)
Ext Fault
S12
External Fault (Input Terminal S12)
PID Feedback Reference Lost
A PID feedback reference loss was
(blinking) detected (b5-12 = 2) and the PID feedFeed- back input was less than b5-13 (PID
back
feedback loss detection level) for
Loss
longer than the time set in b5-14 (PID
feedback loss detection time).
FBL
The settings in b5-13 and b5-14 aren’t
Check the settings in b5-13 and b5-14.
appropriate.
The wiring of the PID feedback circuit is incorrect.
Fix the wiring.
7-17
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
CE
MEMOBUS Communications Error
Normal reception was not possible for
MEMO
2 s or longer after received control
BUS
data.
Com Err
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Option Board Communications
Error
(blinking) A communications error occurred in a
Option mode where the Run Command or a
Com Err frequency reference is set from an
Communications Option Board.
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Communications on Standby
Control data was not normally
received when power was turned ON.
-
Check the communications devices
and signals.
Reset during Run Command Input
Error
(blinking)
The reset signal was input during Run
Ext Run
Command input from an external terActive
minal or other source.
-
Check that a Run Command is not
being input from an external terminal
or other source.
(blinking)
BUS
CALL
(blinking)
Com
Call
RUNC
E5
(blinking)
SI-T
WDT
Err
SI-T Watchdog Error Detected
A Watchdog error was detected when
Synchronization error between master Check the communications timing
the Run Command or a frequency refcontroller and Inverter for control
erence was set from an option board
such as communications cycle. *1
data.
and continuous operation was set for
the E5 operation selection.
AEr
(blinkSI-T Station Number Setting Error
ing)
Station number of SI-T option board
SI-T
was out of setting range.
Address
Err
7-18
Station number setting error.
Check the setting of the station number. *1
Circuit of SI-T option board is faulty.
Check the communications devices
and signals. *1
CyC
(blinking)
SI-T
Cycle
Err
SI-T Communications Cycle SetCommunications cycle of SI-T option Check the communication cycle of SIting Error
board set in master controller was out T option board set in master controlCommunications cycle of SI-T option
of range.
ler.*1
board was out of range.
BB
(blinking)
Baseblock
Receiving External Baseblock
Command
An external baseblock signal was
input from a multi-function input terminal, and the Inverter output was
shut down.
An external baseblock signal was
input from a multi-function input terminal.
Check the external sequence.
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.3 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
The load is too heavy or the accel/
decel time is too short.
HCA
(blinking)
High
Current
Alarm
Either a specialized motor or an
Current Alarm
excessively large motor is being used.
The output current has exceeded the
overcurrent alarm level (over 150% of
the rated current).
The current has risen too high while
performing speed search either during
a momentary loss in power or during
a fault restart.
Corrective Actions
Increase the acceleration/deceleration
time.
Verify the setting for the Inverter
capacity.
Momentary losses in power or fault
restarts may occasionally trigger an
overcurrent alarm, and are not necessarily indicators of an overcurrent
problem.
LT-C
(blinkElectrolytic Capacitor Maintenance The electrolytic capacitors have
ing)
Timer
reached their estimated maintenance
C
Monitor U1-61 has reached 100%.
time period.
Maintenance
Reset constant o2-18 to “0%” after
replacing *2 the electrolytic capacitors.
LT-F
(blinking)
Cooling Fan Maintenance Timer
Fan
Monitor U1-63 has reached 100%.
Maintenance
Replace the cooling fan *2 and set constant o2-10 to “0H”.
The cooling fan has reached its estimated maintenance time period.
* 1. Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC73060008) for details.
* 2. For details on replacement, refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection
7-19
Operation Errors
An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings. It
won't be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault
contact outputs will not operate either.)
When an operation error has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the
errors.
Table 7.4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
Display
OPE01
kVA Selection
OPE02
Limit
Meaning
Incorrect Inverter
Capacity Setting
The Inverter capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.)
Constant Setting Range The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range. Press the ENTER Key on
Error
the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant (U1-34).
OPE03
Terminal
Multi-function Input
Selection Error
One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H1-01 to H110) settings:
• The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs.
• An up or down command was selected independently. (They must be used
together.)
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were
selected at the same time.
• Speed Search 1 (61, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search 2 (62. set frequency) were selected at the same time.
• The up/down commands (10 and 11) were selected while PID Control Method
Selection (b5-01) was enabled.
• Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time.
• The emergency Stop Command NO and NC have been set at the same time.
OPE05
Sequence
Select
Option Board Selection
Error
The option board was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1-01 to
3, but an option board isn't connected (C option).
OPE06
Control Method SelecPG Opt Misstion Error
ing
V/f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1-02 to 1, but a PG Speed
Control Board isn't connected.
Multi-function Analog
Input Selection Error
The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID function selection.
• H3-09 = B and H6-01 = 1
• H3-09 = C and H6-01 = 2
b1-01 (Reference Selection) is set to 4 (pulse input) and H6-01 (Pulse Train Input
Function Selection) is set to a value other than 0 (frequency reference).
OPE08
Constant Selection
Error
A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Ex.: A
function used only with open-loop vector control was selected for V/f control. Press
the ENTER Key on the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant (U1-34).
OPE09
PID Control Selection
Error
The following settings have been made at the same time.
• b5-01 (PID Control Method Selection) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b5-15 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set to a value other than 0.
• b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) has been set to 2 or 3.
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Set- V/f Data Setting Error
ting
Constants E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, and E1-09 do not satisfy the following conditions:
• E1-04 (FMAX) ≥ E1-06 (FA) &gt; E1-07 (FB) ≥ E1-09 (FMIN)
• E3-02 (FMAX) ≥ E3-04 (FA) &gt; E3-05 (FB) ≥ E3-07 (FMIN)
OPE07
Analog
Selection
7-20
Incorrect settings
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings (Continued)
Display
Meaning
Incorrect settings
OPE11
Carr Freq/
On-Delay
Constant Setting Error
One of the following constant setting errors exists.
• C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Gain) &gt; 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04)
&gt; the Carrier Frequency Gain (C6-05)
• Upper/lower limit error in C6-03 to 05.
• C6-02 is 7 to E.
ERR
EEPROM
R/W Err
EEPROM Write Error
A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM.
• Try turning the power supply off and on again.
• Try setting the constants again.
Note If the settings for the constants of an Inverter with a different version of software are copied, an OPE error can occur. Contact your Yaskawa representative if
wanting to copy the settings with a different software version.
7-21
Errors During Autotuning
The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the motor
will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. The error contact output and
alarm output will not function.
Table 7.5 Errors During Autotuning
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
Data Invalid
Motor data error
There is an error in the data input for
autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship
• Check the input data.
between the motor output and the motor
• Check the capacity of the Inverter and
rated current.
motor.
The is an error between the no-load cur• Check the motor rated current and norent setting and the input motor rated
load current.
current (when autotuning for only lineto-line resistance is performed for vector
control).
Minor Fault
Alarm
A minor fault occurred during
autotuning (xxx).
STOP key
STOP key input
The STOP Key was pressed to cancel
autotuning.
Resistance
Line-to-line resistance error
No-Load Current
Rated Slip
Accelerate
Autotuning was not completed in the
specified time.
No-load current error The results of autotuning has exceeded
the setting range for a user constant.
Rated slip error
• Check the input data.
• Check motor wiring.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
Acceleration error
• Increase L7-01 and L7-02 (Reverse
The motor did not accelerate in the spec(detected only for
Torque Limits) if they are low.
ified time.
rotational autotuning)
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• Check the PG wiring.
There is a faulty connection between the
• Check the motor wiring.
Inverter and PC (A or B phase) or the
• Check the PG rotation direction and
Inverter and Motor (U, V, or W).
F1-05 (PG rotation).
PG Direction
Motor Direction
Error
Motor Speed
Motor speed error
The torque reference was too high
(detected only for
(100%) during acceleration (for openrotational autotuning)
loop vector control only).
The current flow exceeded the motor
rated current.
I-det. Circuit
• Check the input data.
• Check wiring and the machine.
• Check the load.
Current detection
error
The detected current sign was the opposite of what it should be.
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
• Increase C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
• Check the input data (particularly the
number of PG pulses and the number
of motor poles).
Check the current detection circuit,
motor wiring, current detector, and
installation methods.
There is a phase fault for U, V, or W.
Leakage inductance
error
Autotuning was not completed in the
specified time.
Check motor wiring.
PG Open
PG Disconnection
Detected
PG pulses were input when the Inverter
was outputting a frequency.
Fix the broken/disconnected wiring.
V/f Over Setting
V/f settings excessive*
The torque reference exceeded 100%
and the no-load torque exceeded 70%
during autotuning.
• Check and correct the settings.
• Disconnect the load from the motor.
Leak Inductance
7-22
Protective and Diagnostic Functions
Table 7.5 Errors During Autotuning (Continued)
Display
Saturation
Rated FLA Alm
Adjusted Slip
Value
Meaning
Probable causes
Corrective Actions
Motor core saturation error (detected
only for rotational
autotuning)*
The results of autotuning has exceeded • Check the input data.
the setting range for a user constant so a • Check motor wiring.
temporary setting was made for the
• If the motor is connected to the
machine, disconnect it.
motor core saturation coefficient.
Rated current setting
alarm*
The rated current is set high.
As a result of stationary autotuning 1,
Adjusted slip value
the slip value has fallen to 0.2 Hz or
fell below lower limit
below.
Check the input data (particularly the
motor output current and motor rated
current).
Check the input data.
If rotational autotuning is possible, perform it. If impossible, perform stationary
autotuning 2.
* Displayed after autotuning has been completed. For constants in which no error is detected, the settings are reset to the values determined by autotuning.
Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function
The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following
table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator. If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an
error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-01 will be displayed. The error contact output
and alarm output will not function.
Table 7.6 Errors during Copy Function
Function
Read
Display
Meaning
Probable causes
PRE
Digital Operator
READ
write-protected
IMPOSSIBLE
o3-01 was set to 1 to write a constant
when the Digital Operator was writeprotected (o3-02 = 0).
IFE
READ DATA
ERROR
The read data length does not agree.
Illegal read data
RDE
Illegal write status
DATA ERROR
The write data is incorrect.
Corrective Actions
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing constants with the Digital Operator.
Repeat the read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
Replace the Digital Operator.
A low Inverter voltage has been
An attempted write of a constant to
detected.
EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed. Repeat the read.
Replace the Digital Operator.
7-23
Table 7.6 Errors during Copy Function
Function
Display
Meaning
CPE
ID not matched
ID UNMATCH
Copy
The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same
number is different.
product code and software number.
Inverter capacity
matched
The capacity of the Inverter being
copied and the capacity in the Digital
Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
Inverter capacity.
CRE
CONTROL
UNMATCH
Control method
matched
The control method of the Inverter
being copied and the control method
in the Digital Operator are different.
Use the copy function for the same
control method.
CYE
Verify error
COPY ERROR
VYE
VERIFY
ERROR
Verify error
CPE
ID not matched
ID UNMATCH
7-24
Corrective Actions
VAE
INV. KVA
UNMATCH
CSE
SUM CHECK Checksum error
ERROR
Verify
Probable causes
The constant written to the Inverter
was compared with the constant in the
Retry the copy.
Digital Operator and they were different.
The checksum in the Inverter constant
area was compared with the checksum
Retry the copy.
in the Digital Operator constant area
and they were different.
The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same
number is different.
product code and software number.
The Digital Operator and Inverter setRetry the copy and verify again.
tings do not agree.
The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same
number is different.
product code and software number.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Due to constant setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as
expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the
appropriate measures.
If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions.
If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if an Inverter constant cannot be set.
The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is operating (drive mode).
There are some constants that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings.
Constant write enable is input.
This occurs when “constant write enable” (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H1-01 to
H1-10). If the constant write enable input is OFF, the constants cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the
constants.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the constant A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the constants for the
initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and
the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password
in constant A1-04.)
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the constant is wrong. Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the
Inverter may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
7-25
If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.
The motor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible.
IMPORTANT
If the Inverter is not in drive mode and the DRIVE indicator on the Digital Operator (JVOP-161) does not light
up, the Inverter will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key to display the drive mode,
and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. “-Rdy-” will be displayed when drive mode is
entered.
The operation method setting is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (Operation Method Selection) is set to 1 (control circuit terminal), the motor will not operate
when the Run Key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* to switch to Digital Operator operation or set b1-02 to 0 (Digital Operator).
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate.
Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the
frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct.
The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input.
The following causes are possible.
The Inverter is not in drive mode.
If the Inverter is not in drive mode and the DRIVE indicator on the Digital Operator (JVOP-161) does not
light up, the Inverter will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU Key to make the DRIVE
indicator flash, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. “-Rdy-” will be displayed when
drive mode is entered.
7-26
Troubleshooting
The operation method selection is wrong.
If constant b1-02 (reference selection) is set to 0 (Digital Operator), the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input. Set b1-02 to 1 (control circuit terminal) and try again.
Similarly, the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE Key has been pressed to switch to Digital
Operator operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* again to return to the original setting.
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o2-01 to 1 and disabled by setting o2-01 to 2. It is enabled
when the drive mode is entered.
INFO
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/stop and reverse/stop (2wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable
for forward run/stop and reverse run/stop is turned ON.
When using a 3-wire sequence, refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals.
When using a 2-wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H1-01 through H1-10, terminals S3 to
S11) to a value other than 0.
The frequency reference is too low.
If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Inverter
will not operate. Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency.
There is a multi-function analog input setting error.
If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Selection) and H3-09
(Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection) are set to 1 (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current)
is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value
are correct.
The Inverter does not operate.
When the motor does not operate, and there is no fault or alarm indication, check the items listed below to find
the cause and take corrective action.
Table 7.7 Troubleshooting when Motor Does Not Operate
Probable Causes
Descriptions
Corrective Actions
Run command is not sent.
If the indicator on the RUN Key is not lit,
Inverter does not operate if a Run command
the Run Command is not sent. Input the
is not sent.
Run Command.
The operation method
selection is wrong.
b1-02 has to be set according to the Run
Command input method to be used.
b1-02=
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (factory setting)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
The frequency reference is
too low.
If the indicator on the STOP Key is flashThe frequency reference has to be set above ing, check the frequency reference monithe frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Out- tor (U1-01) and set the frequency
put Frequency).
reference above the frequency set in E109.
Set b1-02 according to the Run Command
input method to be used.
7-27
Table 7.7 Troubleshooting when Motor Does Not Operate (Continued)
Probable Causes
The frequency reference
selection is wrong.
The MENU Key was
pressed.
The ESC Key was pressed
twice.
The LOCAL/REMOTE Key
was pressed.
The STOP Key was
pressed.
Descriptions
Corrective Actions
b1-01 has to be set according to the frequency reference input method to be used.
b1-01=
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminal (factory setting)
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Option board
4: Pulse train input
Set b1-01 according to the frequency reference input method to be used.
• Press the DATA/ENTER Key.
If the MENU Key is pressed once or the
• Try turning the power supply off and on
ESC Key is pressed twice, the Inverter will
again.
exit the drive mode and will not operate. If • Set b8-01 (Run Command selection in
the MENU Key is pressed during operation,
programming modes) to 1(Cannot operthe Inverter will not start even if the Run
ate) to remain in the drive mode and
Command is sent at the next operation.
continue operation even if the MENU
Key or ESC Key is pressed.
If the LOCAL/REMOTE Key is pressed
while the Inverter is stopped, the Inverter
will switch to Digital Operator operation
and cannot be operated with the external
input terminals.
• Press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key.
• Try turning the power supply off and on
again.
• Set o2-01 (LOCAL/REMOTE Key
enable/disable) to 0 (Disabled) to disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key.
If the STOP Key is pressed during operation, the Inverter will decelerate to a stop.
• Turn the Run Command off and then on
again.
• Set o2-02 (STOP key during control circuit terminal operation) to 0 (Disabled)
to disable the STOP Key.
Wrong selection of a 2-wire If 0 is set to one of H1-01 to H1-10, a 3or a 3-wire sequence.
wire sequence is set.
Make sure that H1-01 to H1-10 are set to a
value other than 0 to use a 2-wire
sequence.
“Reverse run prohibited” is
selected.
If b1-04 (Prohibition of reverse operation)
is set to 1 (Reverse disabled), the motor will
Check the setting of b1-04.
not start if the Reverse Run Command is
sent.
Autotuning has just been
completed.
The Inverter remains in the autotuning
mode right after autotuning has been completed and cannot be operated even if the
Run Command is sent.
Press the MENU Key to display the drive
mode on the Digital Operator and press
the DATA/ENTER Key to enter the drive
mode.
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too heavy. The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy.
Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The motor does not accelerate.
If the torque limit settings (L7-01 to L7-04) or the torque reference input (torque control) are too small, the
motor may not be able to accelerate. Check the settings and input values. Also, for operation with open-loop
vector 2 control, refer to Corrective Actions for Control Faults (CF) on page 7-14.
7-28
Troubleshooting
The motor only rotates in one direction.
“Reverse run prohibited” is selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the Inverter will not receive Reverse Run Commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set
b1-04 to 0.
If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor operates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is faulty. When the Inverter T1 (U), T2
(V), and T3 (W) are properly connected to the motor T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W), the motor operates in a forward direction when a Forward Run Command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among T1 (U), T2 (V), and T3 (W).
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
Use the following information if the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This
can cause the torque to be insufficient, or the acceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value
set for the torque limit is suitable.
If torque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05 or H3-09 = 10 to 12 or 15), check to
be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is too low, the acceleration time will be
too long. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the speed will drop before outputting torque. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control (0 or 1).
If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference
Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference.
7-29
The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong).
The frequency reference bias set in constant H3-03 is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that
the set value is suitable.
A signal is being input to the frequency reference (current) terminal A2 or A3.
When 0 (Add to terminal A1) is set for constant H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function
Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection), a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 or A3 input voltage (current) is added to the frequency reference. Check to be sure that
the set value and analog input value are suitable.
If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision
If speed control accuracy is low for the slip compensation function, the slip compensation limit has been
reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensation limit set in constant C3-03. Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in Openloop Vector Control Method
The motor's rated voltage is high.
The Inverter's maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 200 VAC is input,
then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC.) If, as a result of vector control, the output voltage reference value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Use
a motor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special motor for use with vector control), or change to flux vector
control.
If Motor Deceleration is Slow
Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow.
The deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected.
The following causes are possible.
“Stall prevention during deceleration enabled” is set.
When braking resistor is connected, set constant L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) to 0
(disabled) or 3 (with braking resistor). When this constant is set to 1 (enabled, the factory setting), braking
resistor does not fully function.
The deceleration time setting is too long.
Check the deceleration time setting (constants C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, and C1-08).
Motor torque is insufficient.
If the constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the motor's power is limited. Consider
increasing the motor capacity.
7-30
Troubleshooting
The torque limit has been reached.
When a torque limit has been set in constants L7-01 to L7-04, no torque will be output beyond that limit. This
can cause the deceleration time to be too long. Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suitable.
If H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog
Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set to 10, 11, 12 or 15 (positive and negative torque limit), check to
be sure that the analog input value is suitable.
If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied
The sequence is incorrect. The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration
is completed. (This is the factory-set default.)
To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection 2 (H2-01 = 5) for the multi-function contact output terminals (M1 and Mw) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-01 (3.0
to 5.0 Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-01.)
There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-02 = 2.0 Hz). Change the
setting to approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during stop. Do not use the multi-function contact output run
signal (H2-01 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal.
If the Motor Overheats
Take the following steps if the motor overheats.
The load is too big.
If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor's rated
torque, the motor will overheat. Some motor rating are given for short period performance and are not continuous ratings. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn
out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating
temperature is exceeded. Lower the motor's ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating
temperature range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Inverter output, a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and
the motor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter's input power supply voltage
(i.e., 1,200 V for 400 V Class). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that
is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 400 V Class Inverter, use a special
motor for Inverters.
Autotuning has not been performed for vector control
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning, or set the motor
constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A1-02) to V/f control (0
or 1).
7-31
If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio
If noise is generated by Inverter switching, implement the following countermeasures:
• Change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to
some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching.
• Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply input area.
• Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter's power supply output area.
• Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Inverter with metal (steel).
• Ground the Inverter and motor.
• Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run
The Inverter performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the
ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Change to a ground fault interrupter with a
high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit, with an operating time of
0.1 s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Inverters). It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the
carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened.
If There is Mechanical Oscillation
Use the following information when there is mechanical oscillation.
The machinery is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the
carrier frequency.
If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may
indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with constants
C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Inverter.
To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3-01 to d3-04 or install
rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector 1 control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(torque compensation time constant), C2-01 (S-curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start), and C3-02
(Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time
setting.
7-32
Troubleshooting
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the control method selection (A102) to V/f control (0 or 1).
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4-02
(Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant), N1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain), and C3-02 (Slip
Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f w/PG control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain.
If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (constant N1-01) to 0
(disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vector 2 control.
Adjust the control constants with reference to Adjusted User Constants on page 18 in Chapter 4 Trial Operation. If autotuning has not been performed, or the control method has been changed since last performing autotuning, perform autotuning. If the problem occurs after performing stationary autotuning, perform rotational
autotuning.
If oscillation and hunting occur under the following special conditions, perform the adjustments described
here.
Low-speed regenerative load (PRG: 102 only)
• If oscillation occurs during low-speed regeneration, increase the setting of N4-30 (low-speed regeneration
stability coefficient 2). Increase the setting in intervals of approximately 0.2. The larger the setting, the
greater the ratio of the speed increase relative to the regenerative load will be.
Operating frequency between 6 and 10 Hz (PRG: 102 only)
• Accelerate the motor gradually, set N4-32 (speed estimator gain fluctuation frequency 1) to the lowest
speed at which oscillation occurs and set N4-33 (speed estimator gain fluctuation frequency 2) to the highest. Then, reduce the setting of N4-34 (speed estimator gain fluctuation rate) until the oscillation stops.
Adjust N4-34 in intervals of approximately 5% in the range 50% to 100%.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with flux vector control.
The gain adjustment is insufficient. Adjust the various gains for speed control (ASR). If the oscillation points
overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the primary delay time constant for
speed control (ASR) in C5-06 and then readjust the gains.
If autotuning is not performed, proper performance cannot be achieved for vector control. Perform autotuning
or set the motor constants according to calculations.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I,
and D constants. (Refer to page 6-110.)
7-33
Autotuning has not been performed with vector control.
Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed. Perform autotuning separately for the
motor, or set the motor constants through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection
(A1-02) to V/f control.
If the Torque Generated for the Motor is Insufficient (Insufficient Power)
If autotuning has not been performed, or the control method has been changed since last performing
autotuning, perform autotuning. If the problem occurs after performing stationary autotuning, perform rotational autotuning.
The torque is insufficient with open-loop vector 2 control (insufficient power).
In particular, if there is insufficient power at low speeds, make adjustments using the following methods.
Low-speed Electromotive Load (PRG: 102 only)
Increase the setting of N4-29 (torque adjustment gain 2). Increase the setting in intervals of approximately
0.05. If the setting is too high, it may have the opposite effect and so do not change the setting by a large
amount.
Low-speed Regenerative Load (PRG: 102 only)
Increase the setting of N4-15 (low-speed regeneration stability coefficient 1). Increase the setting in intervals
of approximately 0.1. If the setting is too large, the torque reference monitor and the actual torque accuracy
may deteriorate and so do not change the setting by a large amount.
If the Torque Reference (U1-09) at Low Speeds in Open-loop Vector 2
Control is Large Compared to That at Medium and High Speeds
If the torque reference (U1-09) at low speeds is large compared to that at medium and high speeds for the
same load conditions, make adjustments in the way described below.
• Reduce the setting for N4-17 (torque adjustment gain).
• If the problem still occurs after making the above adjustment, linearize the V/f characteristics. This means
making the ratios E1-10/E1-09 and E1-08/E1-07 closer to the ratio E1-13/E1-06. Linearizing the V/f characteristics will, however, reduce the power and so check that the power is sufficient after changing the settings. Do not change the settings more than necessary.
If Shock Occurs Near the Speed Estimator Switching Frequency in Openloop Vector 2 Control (PRG: 102 only)
The switching frequency refers to the frequency range near the N4-11 setting during acceleration and near the
N4-28 setting during deceleration. In open-loop vector 2 control, two speed estimators are switched between
and there may be instances of shock occurring at the switchover. If switching shock is a problem, make the
adjustments described below.
• If shock occurs during acceleration:
• Increase the acceleration time within the allowable range. Alternatively, reduce the torque limit.
7-34
Troubleshooting
• Reduce the setting for N4-11 to a value less than the factory setting. Reduce the setting in intervals of
approximately 5 Hz.
• If shock occurs during deceleration:
• Increase the deceleration time within the allowable range. Alternatively, reduce the torque limit.
• Reduce the setting for N4-28 to a value less than the factory setting. Reduce the setting in intervals of
approximately 5 Hz.
The factory settings for N4-11 (speed estimator switching frequency) and N4-28 (speed estimator switching
frequency 2) are 70 Hz and 50 Hz respectively. If the problem still occurs after making the above adjustments,
use open-loop vector 1 control (A1-02 = 2).
If Torque Ripple Occurs at Very Low Speeds in Open-loop Vector 2 Control (PRG: 102 only)
Either increase the operating frequency or use open-loop vector 1 control (A1-02 = 2).
If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the
motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been
executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking
as follows:
• Increase the constant b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
• Increase the constant b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
If OV is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls
Generation of OV (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started. The DC
injection braking is insufficient when starting.
This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the
constant b2-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting.
If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference
Use the following information if the output frequency does not rise to the frequency reference.
The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency
range. Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency (constants d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (constant d3-04) settings are suitable.
7-35
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:
Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) &times; Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100
Check to be sure that the constant E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
Acoustic Noise From the Motor
The carrier frequency is automatically reduced if a current exceeding 110% of the Inverter rated current flows
while the Inverter output frequency is low. When the carrier frequency is reduced, acoustic noise form the
motor will change.
If acoustic noise from the motor causes a problem, change L8-38 (Carrier frequency reduction selection) to 0
(Disabled). However, for mechanical loads that require repetitive high torque, such as with cranes, leave L838 to 1 (Enabled) without changing.
Acoustic noise from the motor can be changed by changing the setting of L8-39 (Reduced carrier frequency).
(The minimum set value is 1.0 kHz for open-loop vector control.)
7-36
8
Maintenance and
Inspection
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter.
Maintenance and Inspection........................................8-2
Maintenance and Inspection
Outline of Warranty
The warranty period of the Inverter is as follows:
Warranty Period: This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa's customer or
if applicable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa's factory whichever comes first.
Daily Inspection
Check the following items with the system in operation.
• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
• There should be no abnormal heat generation.
• The ambient temperature should not be too high.
• The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal.
• The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally.
Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LCD and LED indicators on
the front cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the
inspection. Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in
electric shock.
Table 8.1 Periodic Inspections
Item
Inspection
External terminals,
Are all screws and bolts tight?
mounting bolts, connecAre connectors tight?
tors, etc.
Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Reconnect the loose connectors.
Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Cooling fan
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or
has the total operating time exceeded
Replace the cooling fan.
20,000 hours?
Power elements
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on
the elements?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
dry air at a pressure of 39.2 x 104 to 58.8 x 104 Pa
(4 to 6 kg•cm2).
Smoothing capacitor
Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitor or Inverter.
Heatsinks
8-2
Corrective Procedure
Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Maintenance of Parts
The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use
of the Inverter functions.
Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform
period inspections and replace parts according to their service life.
Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter's installation environment and usage conditions.
The Inverter's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference.
Refer to Cooling Fan Replacement Outline (Page 8-6) for replacing a cooling fan and Circulation Fan
Replacement Outline (Page 8-16) for replacing a circulation fan.
To replace other parts, contact your Yaskawa representative or YASKAWA ELECTRIC ENGINEERING
CORPORATION for details on preventive maintenance for Inverters.
Table 8.2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Part
Cooling fan
Smoothing capacitor
Breaker relays
Standard Replacement Period
2 to 3 years
5 years
-
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
Replace with new part. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Determine need by inspection.
Fuses
10 years
Replace with new part.
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs
5 years
Replace with new board. (Determine need by
inspection.)
Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature:Yearly average of 30&deg;C
Load factor: 80% max.
Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board
Perform the following operations before adjusting the constants.
• For 400-V class Inverters of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC: E or later, take safety measures such as the
installation of an emergency-stop switch. Failure to do so may result in injury caused by the motor accidentally rotating during stationary autotuning performed by the Inverter when the constants are adjusted.
• Before replacing the control board, first use the COPY function of the Digital Operator to copy the settings
of the constants of board from the Inverter to the Digital Operator.
When using the copy function of the Digital Operator, check that the following settings are the same between
the Inverter and the Digital Operator. Note the setting of A1-02 (Control method selection).
• Inverter product and type
• Software number
• Inverter capacity and voltage
• Control method
After replacing the board, use the following procedure to adjust the constants.
Steps 4 and 5 are not required for 400-V class Inverters of 0.4 kW to 45 kW, 400-V class Inverters of 55 kW to
300 kW with SPEC: A to C, and all models of 200-V class Inverters regardless of capacity. If using a 400-V
class Inverter of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC: E or later, use a control board, version ETC618046-S1033 or
later, and then perform steps 4 and 5.
Contact your Yaskawa representative if a motor cannot be connected, the motor being used is two frames
smaller than the Inverter, or a control board with older version is used.
8-3
Step No.
Digital Operator Display
Description
-ADV-
Inverter Model #
1
o2-04=2F
Set o2-04 (kVA selection) to the capacity of the Inverter that you use.
4055
&quot;0&quot;
-ADV-
2
Initialization
A1-02=2 *2*
Open Loop Vector
-ADV-
Init Parameters
3
A1-03=2220 *0*
2 WIRE Initial
&quot;0&quot;
-DRIVE-
Mtr Rated Power
4
T1-02=55.00kW
(2.00 650.00)
&quot;55.00kW&quot;
-DRIVE-
Shipping Adjust
5
0Hz/ 0.0A
Tuning Ready ?
Press Run Key
6
-
Set A1-02 to the control method to be used. The value of the control method
should be set to the same value as when the constants were copied from the
Inverter to the Digital Operator.
Set A1-03 (Initialize) to 2220 (2-wire initialization) or 3330 (3-wire initialization).
This example is a typical setting for initialization by a 2-wire sequence.
If the mode is switched to the DRIVE after initialization has been completed,
the motor power setting display appears. Set T1-02 (Motor output power) to
the motor capacity of the connected motor.
This example is the setting for a 55 kW motor.
Press the Increment Key to view the shipping adjustment display. After confirming that the motor has been connected, press the RUN Key to start autotuning.
Note: Do not touch the motor terminals. Although the motor does not rotate,
voltage is being supplied to the motor though the motor is not rotating.
After autotuning has been completed, use the copy function of the Operator to
copy the settings of the constants of the control board from the Operator to the
Inverter before replacing the board.
If the copy function is not available, change the setting of the constants manually.
-DRIVE-
Frequency Ref
7
U1-01=0.00Hz
U1-02= 0.00Hz
U1-03= 0.0A
If the mode is switched to the DRIVE, the frequency setting display appears,
and the operation becomes enabled.
Procedure for Changing Constants through Communications
For 400-V class Inverters of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC: E or later, take safety measures such as the installation of an emergency-stop switch before adjusting constants. Failure to do so may result in injury caused by
the motor accidentally rotating during stationary autotuning performed by the Inverter when the constants are
adjusted.
After replacing the control board, write in all of the constants to the new board with MEMOBUS communications or a Communications Option Board.
Next, be sure to perform autotuning to make adjustments after shipping.
Step No.
Digital Operator Display
Description
-A.TUNE-
Tuning Mode Sel
1
T1-01=3
Set T1-01 (Autotuning mode selection) to 3 (Shipping adjustment).
Shipping Ajust
&quot;2&quot;
-DRIVE-
Mtr Rated Power
2
T1-02=55.00kW
(3.00 650.00)
&quot;55.00kW&quot;
Press the Increment Key to view the motor rated power display. Set T1-02
(Motor output power) to the capacity of the connected motor.
-DRIVE-
Rated Current
3
T1-04=95.0A
(16.5㨪330.0)
&quot;95.0A&quot;
-DRIVE-
Shipping Adjust
4
0Hz/ 0.0A
Tuning Ready ?
Press RUN Key
8-4
Press the Increment Key to view the motor rated current display. Set T1-04
(Motor rated current) to the value of motor rated current.
Press the Increment Key to view the shipping adjustment display.
After confirming that the motor has been connected, press the RUN Key to
start autotuning.
Note: Do not touch the motor terminals. Although the motor does not rotate,
voltage is being supplied to the motor though the motor is not rotating.
Maintenance and Inspection
Types and Number of Cooling Fans Used in the Drive
Cooling fans used for the Drive has two types; Heatsink cooling fan and heatsink circulation fan. Heatsink
cooling fan blows air to the Drive cooling fin. Heatsink circulation fan stirs up the air inside the Drive unit.
Table 8.3 shows the number of cooling fans used in the Drive. For more information on models and specifications of cooling fans, contact your Yaskawa representative or YASKAWA ELECTRIC ENGINEERING CORPORATION.
When replacing the fan, use the specified type of the fan. If the inapplicable fans are used, performance of the
Drive will not be fully obtained.
Table 8.3 Number of Cooling Fans to be Used
Maximum Motor
Capacity
(kW)
200 V Class
Heatsink Cooling
Heatsink Circulation
Fan
Fan
400 V Class
Heatsink Cooling
Heatsink Circulation
Fan
Fan
0.4
-
-
-
-
0.75
-
-
-
-
1.5
-
-
1
-
2.2
1
-
1
-
3.7
1
-
1
-
1
-
4.0
-
5.5
2
-
2
1
7.5
2
1
2
1
11
2
-
2
1
15
2
1
2
1
18.5
2
-
2
-
22
2
-
2
-
30
2
1
2
-
37
2
1
2
-
45
2
1
2
-
55
2
1
2
1
75
2
1
2
1
90
2
1
2
1
110
2
1
2
1
132
2
1
160
2
1
4
2
220
4
2
300
5
2
185
-
8-5
Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 15 kW or Less
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter.
If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter, the cooling fan can be replaced
without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and pull the fan out in the
direction of arrow 2.
2. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector.
3. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the airflow direction indicated by the arrows above
faces into the Inverter.
2. Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Inverter. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on
the Inverter.
1
Airflow direction
2
1
Fan cover
Fig 8.1 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 3.7 kW)
8-6
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter.
The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel.
200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the control board bracket to which the boards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the
controller. The cables connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed at the same time by
removing them together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page 8-21)
3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connector (CN26 and CN27) from the gate drive board positioned at
the back of the control board.
4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Airflow direction
Control board bracket
Fan cover
Control board
Connector
Gate drive board
Fig 8.2 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW)
8-7
200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW, 45 kW, 55 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW to 75 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Pull the cooling fan power cable connector that extends from the fan cover cable hole out of the cooling
fan power relay board.
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components. Refer to the
next page for attaching the fan cover.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Front cover mounting screws
Front cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
mounting screws
Fan cable pullout position
Circulation fan
Airflow direction
Fan support
mounting screws
Fan support
Fan support
Airflow
direction
Cooling fans
Fan power relay board
Cooling fans
Cooling fan mounting screws
Cooling fan mounting screws
Fan power cable pullout position
Fig 8.3 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 45 kW and 55 kW)
8-8
Maintenance and Inspection
Attaching the Fan Cover
1. Tilt the fan cover toward the bottom of the Inverter as shown in Fig 8.4 and insert it to the mounting hole
until it meets with A.
Fan cover
A
Bottom Inverter
Cooling fan
Top Inverter
Fig 8.4
2. Push the fan cover toward the top of the Inverter.
Fig 8.5
3. Make sure that there is no gap between the fan cover and A. Then screw it in place with the three screws.
Make sure that
there is no gap.
NG
A
A
Fig 8.6
8-9
200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW and 37 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the panel to which the control board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan power relay board
are mounted. Remove any cables that are connected to the control board, the gate drive board, and the
cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed
together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page 8-21)
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Fan support mounting screws
Fan cover
Panel mounting screws
Front cover mounting screws Cooling fan power relay board
Gate drive
board
Front cover
Panel
mounting
screws
Capacitor
Terminal cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Terminal
board
Circulation fan mounting screws
Pay attention to
the protruding part
of the fan cable.
Circulation fan
Cooling fans
Airflow direction
Fan cover
Cooling fan
mounting screws
Fig 8.7 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW and 37 kW)
8-10
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V Class Inverters of 75 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the panel to which the control board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan power relay board
are mounted. Remove any cables that are connected to the control board, the gate drive board, and the
cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed
together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page 8-21)
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Front cover mounting screws
Front cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Fan power relay board
Fan cover
mounting screws
Fan cover
Control board mounting panel
Circulation fan
mounting screws
Control board mounting
panel
Control board mounting
panel mounting screws
Circulation fan
Cooling fan
power connector Cooling fan airflow direction
(CN26)
Fan cover
Gate drive
board
Cooling fan
Control circuit terminal board
Cooling fan mounting screws
Finger guard
Cooling fan
airflow direction
Note: A finger guard is not provided on Inverters with slits.
Fig 8.8 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 75 kW)
8-11
400 V Class Inverters of 90 kW and 110 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the panel to which the control board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan power relay board
are mounted. Remove any cables that are connected to the control board, the gate drive board, and the
cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed
together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page 8-21)
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Front cover mounting screws
Front cover
Terminal cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
Cooling fan power relay board
Fan cover mounting screws
Airflow direction
Circulation fan
mounting screws
Circulation fan
Circulation fan
power connector
Cooling fan mounting screws
Fig 8.9 Cooling Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 90 kW and 110 kW)
8-12
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V Class Inverters of 90 kW and 110 kW/400 V Class Inverters of 132 kW and 160 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove the panel to which the control board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan power relay board
are mounted. Remove any cables that are connected to the control board, the gate drive board, and the
cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed
together with the control circuit terminal board. (Refer to page 8-21)
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Front cover mounting screws
Fan cover
Fan cover mounting screws
Fan power
relay board
Gate drive
board
Front cover
Control board
Terminal
cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
Circulation fan mounting screws
Circulation fan
airflow direction
Fan cover mounting screws
Fan cover
Fan cover
Fan airflow
direction
Fan power relay board
Fan mounting
screws
Finger guard*1
Cooling fan
Fan ground cable*2
* 1. There is no finger guard mounted to the fan for some capacities. (There is a guard on the Inverter side.)
* 2. There is no fan ground cable for the capacities without a finger guard.
Fig 8.10 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 90 kW and 110 kW)
8-13
400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board.
3. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan covers from the Inverter.
4. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the fan cover, be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter.
Make sure that the fan cable and the fan ground cable are not tangled or pinched.
Fan cover
Front cover mounting screws
Fan power relay
board
Fan cover
Top front
cover
Terminal
cover
Bottom
front
cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Fan cable
Fan ground
cable
Fan cover mounting screws
Enlarged view
Fan airflow
direction
Fan cover mounting screws
Colling fan
Cooling fan mounting screws
Finger guard
Fig 8.11 Cooling Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW)
8-14
Maintenance and Inspection
400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW
Removing the Cooling Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, Inverter cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Inverter.
2. Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board. The cable that is connected to
the terminal board can be removed together with the terminal board.
3. Remove the fan unit screws and pull out the fan units from the Inverter.
4. Replace the fan units with new ones.
And, remove the screws for the fan power relay board and attach this board to the new unit.
Mounting the Cooling Fan
After attaching a new cooling fan unit, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
Front cover mounting screws
Fan power relay
board
Fan cover
Fan cover
Top front
cover
Bottom
front
cover
Terminal
cover
Terminal cover mounting screws
Relay board mounting screws
Fan cover mounting screws
Fan power relay
board
Enlarged
view
Fan cover mounting screws
Fan units
Fan airflow
derection
Fig 8.12 Cooling Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW)
8-15
Circulation Fan Replacement Outline
With some capacities, there is a small fan installed inside the Inverter for the purpose of increasing circulation
in areas where heat has built up. These fans have built-in fan sensors that output an alarm when the rotation
rate of the fan drops to indicate that replacement is necessary.
200 V Class Inverters of 7.5 kW/400 V Class Inverters of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW
The circulation fan is installed behind the control circuit terminal board inside the Inverter.
The circulation fan can be replaced by removing the control circuit terminal board.
Removing the Circulation Fan
1. Remove the Digital Operator, the terminal cover, and the front cover.
2. Remove the control circuit terminal board. Remove the cables connected to the terminals if necessary.
3. While pushing the two tabs (A) in direction 1, pull the fan out in direction 2.
4. Remove the relay connector connected to the fan.
Mounting the Circulation Fan
Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows towards the top of the Inverter (direction indicated by the arrow).
Mount the fan securely using the tabs (A).
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
Control Board
2
1
Airflow direction
Tabs (A)
Circulation fan
Inverter with Control Circuit Terminal Board Removed
Fig 8.13 Circulation Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 7.5 kW/400 V Class Inverters of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW)
8-16
Maintenance and Inspection
200 V Class Inverters of 15 kW/400 V Class Inverters of 11 kW and 15 kW
The circulation fan is installed at the top-left corner of the Inverter interior.
Removing the Circulation Fan
1. Remove the Digital Operator, the terminal cover, and the front cover.
2. While pushing the relay connector tab (A) in direction 1, pull the relay connector out in direction 2.
3. While pushing the fan tabs (B) in direction 3, pull the fan out in direction 2.
4. Remove the relay connector connected to the fan.
Mounting the Circulation Fan
Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows towards the bottom of the Inverter (direction indicated by the
arrow).
Mount the fan securely using the fan tabs (B).
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
4
Circulation fan
2
1
Relay connector tab (A)
Fan tabs (B)
3
Airflow
direction
Fig 8.14 Circulation Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 15 kW/400 V Class Inverters of 11 kW and 15 kW)
200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW or More/400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or More
The circulation fan is installed in front of the fan cover inside the Inverter. Remove the circulation fan using
the procedure for replacing the cooling fan and replace it with the new fan. (The installation position for 200 V
Class Inverters of 75 kW is different.)
200 V Class Inverters of 75 kW
The circulation fan is installed behind the control board mounting panel. Do not subject the fan to shock during replacement.
Removing the Circulation Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover, the Inverter cover, the Digital Operator, and the control board cover.
8-17
2. Pull out the cables connected to the control circuit terminal board, the gate drive board, and the cooling fan
power relay board.
3. Remove the control board mounting panel.
4. Replace the circulation fan installed behind the control board mounting panel.
Mounting the Circulation Fan
Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows in the direction indicated by the arrow in the corresponding diagram.
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
Refer to Fig 8.8 Cooling Fan Replacement (200 V Class Inverters of 75 kW) for details.
8-18
Maintenance and Inspection
400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW
Two circulation fans are installed as described in the following sections.
Removing the Circulation Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers.
2. Unscrew the frame fixing screws and take off the frame.
3. Remove the relay connector connected to the fan.
4. Remove the fan cover mounting screws and pull the fan cover out.
5. Remove the fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Circulation Fan
Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows in the direction indicated by the arrow in the corresponding diagram.
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
Fan cable
Fix the fan cable with lnsulok ties
Frame fixing screws
Frame
Fan airflow
direction
Enlarged view
Fan cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
Fan airflow
direction
Fan cover mounting
screws
Enlarged view
Fan cable
Fig 8.15 Circulation Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW)
8-19
400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW
Two circulation fans are installed as described in the following sections.
Removing the Circulation Fan
1. Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers.
2. Unscrew the frame fixing screws and takeoff the frame.
3. Remove the relay connector connected to the fan.
4. Remove the fan cover mounting screws and pull the fan cover out.
5. Remove the fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one.
Mounting the Circulation Fan
Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan.
Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows in the direction indicated by the arrow in the corresponding diagram.
Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan’s rotating parts.
Fan cable
Fix the fan cable with Insulok ties
Frame
Frame fixing screws
Fan airflow
direction
Enlarged view
Fan cover mounting screws
Circulation fan
Fan airflow
direction
Enlarged view
Fix the fan cable
with Insulok ties
Fan cable
Fan cover mounting scerws
Fig 8.16 Circulation Fan Replacement (400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW)
8-20
Maintenance and Inspection
Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board
The control circuit terminal board can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables.
Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal
board.
IMPORTANT
Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Board
1. Remove the Digital Operator and front cover.
2. Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal board.
3. Loosen the mounting screws (1) on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is
not necessary to remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.)
4. Pull the terminal board out sideways (in direction 2) with the screws sticking out from the board.
Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board
Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal board.
Confirm that the control circuit terminal board and the control board properly meet at connector CN5 before
pressing in on the board.
The connector pins may be bent if the board is forced into place, possibly preventing correct Inverter operation.
Removing and Mounting the
Control Circuit Terminal Board
FE NC
Fig 8.17 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Board
8-21
9
Specifications
This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and
peripheral devices.
Standard Inverter Specifications .................................. 9-2
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices .......9-6
Standard Inverter Specifications
The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables.
Specifications by Model
Specifications are given by model in the following tables.
200 V Class
Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-G7A
Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)
Rated input current (A)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
25P5
27P5
2011
2015
2018
2022
2030
2037
2045
2055
2075
2090
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
3.8
7.2
9.6
14.4
22
32
40
59
79
88
106
143
176
201
246
330
394
457
1.2
2.3
3.0
4.6
6.9
10
13
19
25
30
37
50
61
70
85
110
140
160
3.2
6
8
12
18
27
34
49
66
80
96
130
3-phase; 200, 208, 220, 230, or 240 VAC
(Proportional to input voltage.)
160
183
224
300
358
415
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant setting
3-phase, 200/208/220/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz*2
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
2110
&plusmn;5%
Optional
Built in
Not possible
Possible*3
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. The voltage of the cooling fan for 200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW is three-phase, 200, 208, or 220 V at 50 Hz or 200, 208, 220, or 230 V at 60 Hz.
* 3. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9-2
Standard Inverter Specifications
400 V Class
Table 9.2 400 V Class Inverters
Model Number CIMR-G7A
Power supply characteristics
Output ratings
Max. applicable motor output
(kW) *1
Rated input current (A)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
4.1
5.8
3.7
4.7
1.4
2.6
1.8
3.4
41P5
42P2
43P7
45P5
47P5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
7.4
10.8
18
25
6.9
11
16
21
Allowable frequency fluctuation
&plusmn;5%
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
Max. output frequency
(Hz)
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
11
15
18.5
32
40
46
26
32
34
42
Optional
Built in
Possible*2
4022
4030
4037
4045
4055
4075
4090
4110
4132
4160
4185
4220
4300
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
185
220
300
57
72
88
107
141
182
215
264
297
332
407
495
666
40
50
61
74
98
130
150
180
210
230
280
340
460
52
65
80
97
128
165
195
240
270
302
370
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
450
605
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant setting
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation
&plusmn;5%
DC reactor
12-phase rectification
4018
Not possible
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
4015
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC, 50/60 Hz
+ 10%, - 15%
Model Number CIMR-G7A
4011
4.8
6.2
9
15
21
27
3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant setting
Allowable voltage fluctuation
Max. applicable motor output
(kW)*1
Rated input current (A)
Rated output capacity
(kVA)
Rated output current (A)
Max. output voltage (V)
Output ratings
40P7
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
Power supply characteristics
40P4
Built in
Possible*2
* 1. The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa motor. When selecting the actual motor and Inverter, be sure that the Inverter's
rated current is applicable for the motor's rated current.
* 2. A 3-wire transformer (optional) is required on the power supply for 12-phase rectification.
9-3
Common Specifications
The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters.
Table 9.3 Common Specifications
Model Number
CIMR-G7A
Specification
Sine wave PWM
Flux vector control, open-loop vector 1/2 control, V/f control, V/f with PG control (switched by constant setting)
Control method
150%/0.3 Hz (Open-loop vector 2 control), 150%/0 min−1 (Flux vector control)*1
Torque characteristics
1:200 (Open-loop vector 2 control), 1:1000 (Flux vector control)*1
Speed control range
Speed control accuracy
*4
Speed control response
Torque limits
Torque accuracy
Control characteristics
Frequency control range
Frequency accuracy (temperature characteristics)
&plusmn;5%
0.01 to 400 Hz*3
Digital references: &plusmn; 0.01% (-10&deg;C to +40&deg;C)
Analog references: &plusmn;0.1% (25&deg;C &plusmn;10&deg;C)
Digital references: 0.01 Hz, Analog references: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bit with no sign)
Output frequency resolution
0.001 Hz
Overload capacity and
maximum current*2
150% of rated output current per minute*5 *8
Frequency setting signal
-10 to 10 V, 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, pulse train
Acceleration/Deceleration time
0.01 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Main control functions
Approximately 20% (Approximately 125% with Braking Resistor option, braking transformer built into 200 V and 400 V Class
Inverters for 15 kW or less.)*2
Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overtorque detection, torque limits, 16-speed control (maximum), acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire sequence, autotuning (rotational or stationary), dwell
functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for
frequency references, DC braking for starting and stopping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving
control, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, function copying, droop control (flux vector control only) torque control, speed/torque control switching, etc.
Motor protection
Protection by electronic thermal overload relay.
Instantaneous overcurrent
protection
Stops at approx. 200% of rated output current.
Fuse blown protection
Overload protection
Protective functions
10 Hz (Open-loop vector 2 control), 30 Hz (Flux vector control)
Provided for vector control only (4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings.)
Frequency setting resolution
Braking torque
Stops for fuse blown.
150% of rated output current per minute
Overvoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately above 410 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately above 820 V.
Undervoltage protection
200 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately below 190 V.
400 Class Inverter: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately below 380 V.
Momentary power loss
ridethrough *7
Stops for 15 ms or more.
With a suitable constant setting, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s.
Cooling fin overheating
Stall prevention
Grounding protection*6
Charge indicator
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient operating humidity
Storage temperature
Environment
&plusmn;0.2% (Open-loop vector 2 control, 25&deg;C &plusmn; 10&deg;C), &plusmn;0.02% (Flux vector control, 25&deg;C &plusmn; 10&deg;C)
Application site
Protection by thermistor.
Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running.
Protection by electronic circuits. (Overcurrent level)
Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more.
-10&deg;C to 40&deg;C (Enclosed wall-mounted type)
10&deg;C to 45&deg;C (Open chassis type)
95% max. (with no condensation)
- 20&deg;C to + 60&deg;C (short-term temperature during transportation)
Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude
1000 m max.
Vibration
200 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 37 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 45 kW
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2
200 V Class Inverters of 45 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW
10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
20 to 55 Hz: 2.0 m/s2
* 1. Rotational autotuning must be performed to ensure obtaining the specifications given for flux or open-loop vector 1/2 control.
9-4
Standard Inverter Specifications
* 2. When connecting a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit, set L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) to 0 (disabled). Stopping may not be possible in the specified deceleration time if this function is not disabled.
* 3. The maximum output frequency for open-loop vector 2 control is 66 Hz (for PRG: 103, 132 Hz).
* 4. The speed control accuracy depends on the installation conditions and type of motor used. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
* 5. Derating is required for applications that use repetitive loads. (Refer to page 10-6 for details.)
* 6. The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases.
y A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
y A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
* 7. Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2.0 seconds is required for 200 V/400 V Class
Inverters with outputs of 0.4 to 7.5 kW.
* 8. If running at a speed of 6 Hz or less, the overload protection function can operate even if running within 150% of rated output current per minute.
9-5
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter. Select them according to the
application.
Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices
Purpose
Name
Protect Inverter wiring
MCCB or Ground
Fault Interrupter*1
Prevents burning when
a Braking Resistor is
used.
Magnetic
Contactor
Model (Code)
Descriptions
NF
Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to protect
Inverter wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable for high
frequencies.
SC series
Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out when
one is used. Always attach a surge absorber to the coil.
Contains switching
surge
Surge Absorber
DCR2-
Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control relays.
Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors and relays
near the Inverter.
Isolates I/O signals
Isolator
DGP
Isolates the I/O signals of the Inverter and is effective against
inductive noise.
Improve the input
power factor of the
Inverter
DC Reactor
AC Reactor
UZDA-
UZBA-
Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter. All
Inverters of 18.5 kW or higher contain built-in DC reactors.
These are optional for Inverters of 15 kW or less. Install DC
and AC reactors for applications with a large power supply
capacity (600 kVA or higher).
Input Noise Filter
LNFD-
FN-
Reduces noise coming into the Inverter from the power supply
line and to reduce noise flowing from the Inverter into the
power supply line. Connect as close to the Inverter as possible.
Reduce the affects of
radio and control device
noise
Enable stopping the
machine in a set time
Operates the Inverter
externally
Finemet zerophase reactor to
reduce radio
noise*2
Magnetic contactor (MC)
AC reactor for power
factor improvement
Zero phase reactor
Braking resistor
F11080GB
(FIL001097)
Reduces noise from the line that sneaks into the Inverter input
power system. Insert as close to the Inverter as possible.
Can be use on both the input side and output side.
Input noise filter
F200160BP
(300-001-041)
Inverter
Output Noise Filter
LF-
Reduces noise generated by the Inverter. Connect as close to
the Inverter as possible.
Braking Resistor
ERF-150WJ
(R00)
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED).
Braking Resistor
Unit
LKEB-
(75600-K0)
Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to
reduce deceleration time (use rate: 10% ED).
Braking Unit
CDBR-
(72600-R0)
Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration
time of the motor.
VS Operator
(small plastic
Operator)
JVOP-95•
(73041-0905X-)
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation
control to be performed by analog references from a remote
location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 60/120 Hz, 90/180Hz
VS Operator
(Standard steelplate Operator)
JVOP-96•
(73041-0906X-)
Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation
control to be performed by analog references from a remote
location (50 m max.).
Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 150 Hz, 220 Hz
Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely.
Cable length: 1 m or 3 m
Controls an Inverter
system
VS System Module
JGSM-
A system controller that can be match to the automatic control
system to produce an optimum system configuration.
Provides Inverter
momentary power loss
recovery time
Momentary Power
Loss Recovery
Unit
P000
(73600-P000)
Handles momentary power losses for the control power supply
for models 7.5 kW or less (maintains power for 2 s).
Frequency Meter
DCF-6A
Frequency Setter
RV30YN20S (2 kΩ)
Frequency Setter
Knob
CM-3S
Output Voltmeter
SCF-12NH
Varispeed F7
DC reactor
for power
factor
improvement
Ground
Output noise filter
Zero phase
reactor
Motor
Ground
1 m cable: (72606WV001)
3 m cable: (72606WV003)
Variable Resistor
Board for FreCorrect frequency refer- quency Reference
ence input, frequency
Frequency Meter
meter, ammeter scales
Scale Correction
Resistor
Molded-case
circuit breaker
or ground fault
interrupter
F6045GB
(FIL001098)
Digital Operator
Connection Cable
Set/monitor frequencies and voltages externally.
Power supply
Devices to set or monitor frequencies externally.
Measures the output voltage externally and designed for use
with a PWM Inverter.
2 kΩ (ETX003270) Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a frequency
20 kΩ (ETX003120) reference.
(RH000850)
Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters.
* 1. Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0.1 s minimum to prevent operating errors. The interrupter
must be suitable for high-frequency operation.
Example: NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 1988)
EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 1984)
* 2. The finement zero-phase reactor is manufactured by Hitachi Metals.
9-6
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
The following option boards are available
Table 9.5 Option Boards
Type
Name
Document
Number
73600C001X
TOE-C73630.13
73600C002X
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog
speed references.
• Input signal ranges: -10 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (500 Ω), 3 channels
• Input resolution:
13-bit + sign (1/8192)
TOE-C73630.14
73600C003X
Enables 8-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 8-bit binary
2-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
TOE-C73630.15
73600C016X
Enables 16-bit digital setting of speed references.
• Input signal: 16-bit binary
4-digit BCD + sign signal + set signal
• Input voltage: +24 V (isolated)
• Input current: 8 mA
With 16-bit/12-bit switch.
TOE-C73640.7
73600D001X
Converts analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.) to absolute values and
outputs them.
• Output resolution: 8 bits (1/256)
• Output voltage: 0 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
TOE-C73630.21
73600D002X
Output analog signals to monitor the Inverter's output status
(output frequency, output current, etc.).
• Output resolution: 11 bits (1/2048) + sign
• Output voltage: -10 to +10 V (not insulated)
• Output channels: 2 channels
TOE-C73630.22
Digital Output Board
DO-08
73600D004X
Outputs isolated digital signals to monitor the Inverters operating status (alarm signals, zero-speed detection, etc.)
Output form: Photocoupler output, 6 channels
(48 V, 50 mA max.)
Relay contact outputs, 2 channels
(250 VAC: 1 A max., 30VDC: 1 A max.)
TOE-C73630.24
2C-Relay
Output Board
DO-02C
73600D007X
Provides two multi-function outputs (DPDT relay contacts) in
addition to those provided by the Inverter.
TOE-C73640.8
Analog Reference Board
AI-14B
Speed
(Frequency)
Reference
Digital ReferOption
ence Board
Boards
DI-08
Digital Reference Board
DI-16H2
Analog Monitor Board
AO-08
Monitoring
Option
Boards
Function
Enables high-precision, high-resolution setting of analog
speed references.
• Input signal ranges: 0 to 10 V (20 kΩ), 1 channel
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 1 channel
• Input resolution:
14-bit (1/16384)
Analog Reference Board
AI-14U
Built-in
(connect to
connector)
Code Number
Analog Monitor Board
AO-12
9-7
Table 9.5 Option Boards (Continued)
Type
Name
PG-A2
Built-in
(connect to
connector)
PG
Speed
Control
Boards
PG-B2
PG-D2
PG-X2
9-8
Code Number
Function
Document
Number
73600A012X
Used for V/f with PG control. Speed feedback is performed
using the PG attached to the motor to compensate for speed
fluctuations caused by slipping.
• A-phase pulse (single pulse) input (voltage, complementary, open-collector input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: +12 V, 20 mA
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TOE-C73640.1
73600A013X
• Used for V/f control with PG and flux vector control.
• A-, B-phase input (complimentary input)
• Maximum input frequency: 32767 Hz
• Pulse monitor output: Open-collector
(PG power supply output: +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TOE-C73640.2
73600A014X
• Differential input.
• A-phase pulse (differential pulse) input, for V/f control
• Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
• Input: Conforms to RS-422
• Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TOE-C73640.3
73600A015X
•
•
•
•
A-, B-, Z-phase pulse (differential pulse) input
Maximum input frequency: 300 kHz
Input: Conforms to RS-422
Pulse monitor output: RS-422
(PG power supply output: +5 or +12 V, 200 mA max.)
TOE-C73640.4
Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices
Table 9.5 Option Boards (Continued)
Type
Name
Code Number
Function
Document
Number
DeviceNet
Communications Interface Board
SI-N
73600C021X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using DeviceNet communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
ProfiBus-DP
Communications Interface Board
SI-P
73600C022X
ProfiBus-DP
Communications Interface Board
SI-P1
-
73600C033X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using ProfiBus-DP communications to start/stop Inverter
operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
*1
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using InterBus-S communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
*1
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using CANopen communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
ControlNet
Communications Interface Board
SI-U
*1
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using ControlNet communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
CC-Link
Communications Interface Board
SI-C
73600C032X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using CC-Link communications to start/stop Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
LONWORKS
Communications Interface Board
SI-J
73600C035X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using LONWORKS communications to start/stop Inverter
operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
73600C034X
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using LONWORKS communications to start/stop Inverter
operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor constants
(output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
With Display Data Channel (DDC) function.
-
InterBus-S
Communications Interface Board
SI-R
Built-in Com(conmuninected cations
to con- Option
nector) Boards
CANopen
Communications Interface Board
SI-S1
LONWORKS
Communications Interface Board
SI-W1
MECHATROLINKCommunications Interface Board
SI-T *2
Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer
using MECHATROLINK communications to start/stop
100-017-994
Inverter operation, read/set parameters, and read/set monitor
constants (output frequencies, output currents, etc.).
-
* 1. Under development.
* 2. Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: S1038 or later
9-9
10
Appendix
This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter, motor, and peripheral devices and also provides lists of constants.
Varispeed G7 Control Methods..................................10-2
Inverter Application Precautions ................................ 10-6
Motor Application Precautions ...................................10-9
Conformance to UL Standard .................................. 10-11
Conformance to CE Markings..................................10-13
Wiring Examples ......................................................10-20
User Constants ........................................................10-29
10
Varispeed G7 Control Methods
Details of the Varispeed G7-Series Inverter control methods and their features are provided in this section.
Control Methods and Features
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters support the following five control methods, allowing the selection of a control
method to suit the required purpose. Table 10.1 provides an overview of the control methods and their features.
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Methods
Control Method
Constant Setting
Basic Control
Main Applications
PG Speed Control Board
(Option)
Basic
Performance
V/f Control with
PG
Open-loop Vector 1 Control
Flux Vector Control
Open-loop Vector 2 Control
A1-02 = 0
A1-02 = 1
A1-02 = 2
(factory setting)
A1-02 = 3
A1-02 = 4
Current vector
control with a PG
Current vector
control without a
PG using a highperformance magnetic flux and
speed estimator
(software)
Voltage/frequency
fixed ratio control
Voltage/frequency
with speed comfixed ratio control
pensation using a
PG
Current vector
control without a
PG
Variable speed
control, particuApplications
larly for control of
requiring highmultiple motors
precision speed
with a single
control using a PG
Inverter and for
on the machine
replacing existing
side
Inverters
Very high-performance control
Variable speed
Very high-perfor- without a PG on
control, applicamance control
the motor side
tions requiring
with a PG on the
(such as simple
high performance
motor side (simservodrives,
without a PG on
ple servodrives, torque control, and
the motor side,
high-precision
torque limiting),
and for replacing
speed control,
and function appliopen-loop vector
torque control, and cations between
control of the pretorque limiting)
flux vector and
vious VS-616G5.
open-loop vector 1
control.
Not required.
Required (PG-A2
or PG-D2).
Not required.
Required (PG-B2
or PG-X2).
Not required.
Speed Control
Range*1
1:40
1:40
1:100
1:1000
1:200 (1:10 on
regenerative side)
Speed Control
Accuracy*2
&plusmn;2 to 3%
&plusmn;0.03%
&plusmn;0.2%
&plusmn;0.02%
&plusmn;0.2%
Speed
Response*3
Approx. 1 Hz
Approx. 1 Hz
5 Hz
40 Hz
10 Hz
Maximum
Output Frequency
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
400 Hz
60 Hz, 120 Hz
150%/3 Hz
150%/3 Hz
150%/1 Hz
150%/0 min−1
150%/0.3 Hz
Starting
Torque*4
10-2
V/f Control
Varispeed G7 Control Methods
Table 10.1 Overview and Features of Control Methods (Continued)
Control Method
Autotuning
Torque Limiting*5
Torque Control*6
Application
Functions
V/f Control
Line-to-line resistance (Normally
not required.)
No
No
V/f Control with
PG
Open-loop Vector 1 Control
Flux Vector Control
Open-loop Vector 2 Control
Rotational
Rotational
Rotational
autotuning, staautotuning, staautotuning, staLine-to-line resis- tionary autotuning, tionary autotuning, tionary autotuning,
tance (Normally
stationary
stationary
stationary
not required.)
autotuning for
autotuning for
autotuning for
line-to-line resis- line-to-line resis- line-to-line resistance only
tance only
tance only
No
No
Yes (except during acceleration/
deceleration,
below minimum
frequency, or during reverse rotation)
Yes
Yes (except below
minimum frequency and during reverse
rotation)
No
Yes
Yes (except below
minimum frequency and during reverse
rotation)
Yes (Except below
minimum frequency and during reverse
rotation)
Droop Control*7
No
No
No
Yes (except for
0 min−1 and during reverse rotation)
Zero-servo
Control*8
No
No
No
Yes
No
Speed Estimation (Detection)
Instantaneous
Speed
Search*9
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
estimation)
Yes (speed detection and rotation
direction estimation)
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
estimation)
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
detection)
Yes (speed and
rotation direction
estimation)
Automatic
Energy-saving Control*10
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
High-slip
Braking*11
Yes
Yes
(Under development)
(Under development)
(Under development)
Feed Forward Control*12
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
10
* 1. The variable speed control range. (For continuous operation, the motor's temperature rise must be considered.)
* 2. The speed deviation in relation to the maximum speed with a rated load and when the load is stable. (For open-loop vector 1 and 2 control, the motor temperature
must be 25 &deg;C &plusmn; 10 &deg;C.)
* 3. The speed response guidelines indicating the extent of the motor's actual speed gain in proportion to the speed reference, which changes in a sinusoidal wave
form, within a range where motor torque does not become saturated.
* 4. A guideline for the motor torque that can be generated when started at a low speed and its output frequency (rotations) at that time.
* 5. This function limits the maximum motor torque to protect the machine and the load.
* 6. This function directly controls the amount of torque being generated at the motor and its rotation direction, e.g., to control force.
* 7. This function controls the amount of motor slip that occurs to prevent mechanical shock, when replacing a torque motor, etc.
* 8. This function performs simple positioning control (servo lock), without using an external positioning control device.
* 9. This function instantaneously estimates (or detects) the speed and rotation direction of a coasting motor, and quickly starts it without subjecting it to shock.
* 10.This function automatically adjusts the voltage applied to the motor to optimize the motor's efficiency with light loads.
* 11.This function improves the deceleration time without using a braking resistor by making the motor winding absorb regenerative power. As a standard, this function is effective with a motor running on 160 kW or less with a high-inertia load.
* 12.This function enables proportional gain in relation to changes in the speed reference, even for low rigidity (corresponds to the servo's model gain control).
* 13.Set the maximum output frequency (E1-04) for open-loop vector 2 control to 60 Hz max. (120 Hz max. for PRG: 102). For torque control on the regenerative
side, use in the speed range 1:10.
10-3
Application Function Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the application functions.
• Perform rotational autotuning during trial operation whenever it is possible to separate the motor and
machine. To achieve the characteristics of vector control described in Table 10.1, the control must be
adjusted within a range that the machine will not vibrate after rotational autotuning has been performed.
• With vector control, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. Vector control is not possible when
multiple motors are connected to a single Inverter. Select an Inverter capacity so the rated motor current is
50% to 100% of the rated Inverter current.
• For estimated speed searching, the motor and Inverter must be connected 1:1. The speed search must be
performed at a frequency of 130 Hz or less and with a motor with the same number of frames as or one
frame less than the Inverter capacity.
• During high-slip braking, motor loss increases, so use a high-slip braking frequency of 5% ED or less, and
a braking time of 90 seconds or less. Once high-slip braking has started, the motor cannot be restarted until
it has stopped.
• Feed forward control is a function that improves the proportional gain of the motor speed in relation to the
change in the speed reference. Adjust the response to interference loads using the speed controller (ASR)
constants.
• The torque limit function will not operate during acceleration or deceleration (during soft start transition)
when using a control method such as open-loop vector 1 control. Even if the motor speed drops due to
torque limiting while set to a fixed speed, the speed will not fall below the minimum frequency and the
motor will not slip into reverse rotation. These conditions also apply to open-loop vector 2 control and
other application functions.
Precautions for Open-loop Vector 2 Control (PRG: 102 only)
In open-loop vector 2 control, two speed estimators are switched between and, if used at a maximum frequency exceeding 70 Hz, there may be instances of shock occurring at the switchover. If switching shock is a
problem, reduce the switching frequency (N4-11 and N4-28). If the problem still occurs after making this
adjustment, use open-loop vector 1 control.
Do not use open-loop vector 2 control for elevating machines. Any other control method can be used.
Control Methods and Applications
Application examples for the Inverter control methods are provided here.
V/f Control (A1-02 = 0)
V/f control is suitable for applications where multiple motors are operated with a single Inverter, such as with
multi-motor drives.
(Thermal relay)
Inverter
M1
M2
M3
Fig 10.1
10-4
Varispeed G7 Control Methods
V/f Control with PG (A1-02 = 1)
V/f control with a PG enables precise control of machine line speed. Speed control using the speed feedback
of the machine shaft is possible in this mode.
Conveyor
Inverter
M
PG
PG Speed Control Board
(PG-A2 or PG-D2)
Fig 10.2
Open-loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2 or 4)
Open-loop vector control enables the use of high-performance drives without a speed detector. PG (pulse generator) wiring is not required.
Inverter
M
Fig 10.3
Flux Vector Control (A1-02 = 3)
Flux vector control is suitable for applications using high-precision drives with PG feedback. High-precision
positioning, zero-speed control, and torque control are possible with this mode.
Inverter
M
PG
PG Speed Control Board
(PG-B2 or PG-X2)
Fig 10.4
10
10-5
Inverter Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for selecting, installing, setting, and handling Inverters.
Selection
Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter.
Installing Reactors
A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity
power transformer (600 kVA or higher) or when switching a phase advancing capacitor. Excessive peak current can destroy the convertor section. To prevent this, install a DC or AC reactor (optional) to improve the
power supply power factor.
DC reactors are built into 200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 to 300
kW.
If a thyristor convertor, such as a DC drive, is connected in the same power supply system, connect a DC or
AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram.
Power supply
capacity (kVA)
DC or AC reactor
Required
DC or AC reactor
Not required
Inverter capacity (kVA)
Fig 10.5
Inverter Capacity
When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter, select the Inverter capacity so
that the rated output current of the Inverter is 1.1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents.
Applications with Repetitive Loads
Applications with repetitive loads (cranes, elevators, presses, washing machines, etc.) using Inverters require
derating for the repetitive load [reducing carrier frequency and current (changing accel/decel timing, increasing the frame size of the Inverter)]. Refer to Current Alarm Function and Peak Hold Current Monitoring
Function in Chapter 6 to confirm the output current during startup.
Initial Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the
Inverter that is driving the motor. The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when starting using a normal commercial power supply. If a large initial torque is required, select an Inverter with a
somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the Inverter.
Emergency Stop
Although the Inverter's protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs, the motor will not stop
immediately. Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emergency stop.
10-6
Inverter Application Precautions
Options
Terminals B1, B2, , 1, 2, 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa.
Never connect any other devices to these terminals.
Installation
Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter.
Installation in Enclosures
Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist, air-bourne matter, dust, and other contaminants, or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel. Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel
space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature. Do not
install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials.
Installation Direction
Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface.
Settings
Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter.
Upper Limits
The Digital Operator can be used to set high-speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz (depends on the carrier frequency). Incorrect settings can be dangerous. Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set
upper limits. (The maximum output frequency is factory-set to 60 Hz.)
DC Injection Braking
The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value.
Acceleration/Deceleration Times
The motor's acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor, the load
10
(GD2/4).
torque, and the load's inertial moment
If the stall prevention functions are activated during acceleration or deceleration, increase the acceleration or deceleration time. The stall prevention functions will increase
the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active.
To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times, increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter.
10-7
Handling
Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter.
Wiring Check
The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U, V, or W.
Check wring for any mistakes before supplying power. Check all wiring and sequences carefully.
Magnetic Contactor Installation
Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line. Doing
so can cause the Inverter to malfunction. Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more
than one time every 30 minutes.
Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper (400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or Higher)
If the jumper is inserted into a power tap that does not match the actual power supply voltage, the lifetime of
the transformer for the power supply or the wind capacity of the cooling fan may be reduced.
If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too low for the actual power supply, a power surge may
occur on the transformer for the power supply and reduce the lifetime of the transformer.
If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too high for the actual power supply, the wind capacity of
the cooling fan is reduced.
Insert the jumper into the power tap with the voltage setting nearest to the voltage of the actual power supply.
Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation for the procedure.
Maintenance and Inspections
After turn OFF the main circuit power supply, always confirm that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before
performing maintenance or inspections. The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock.
10-8
Motor Application Precautions
Motor Application Precautions
This section provides precautions for motor application.
Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor
When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a
commercial power supply. Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard
motor.
Low Speed Ranges
Cooling effects diminish in the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore,
the motor torque should be reduced in the low-speed range whenever using a motor not made by Yaskawa. If
100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special Inverter or vector motor.
Installation Withstand Voltage
If the input voltage is higher than the motor rated voltage or the wiring distance is long, the motor insulation
voltage must be considered. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
High-speed Operation
When using the motor at a speed higher than the rated speed, problems may arise in dynamic balance and
bearing durability. Contact your Yaskawa representative for details.
Torque Characteristics
The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the
motor to set a proper V/f pattern.
Vibration
The Inverter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration. (A constant can be set to select low carrier,
PWM modulation control as well.) When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the
same as when operated with a commercial power supply.
Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.
Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System
10
Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed
mode. If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function
to skip any frequency resonating the machine.
Imbalanced Rotor
Take special care when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed.
Noise
Noise varies with the carrier frequency. At high carrier frequencies, the noise is almost the same when the
motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is
operated at a speed higher than the rated speed.
10-9
Using the Inverter for Special Motors
Observe the following precautions when using a special motor.
Pole-changing Motor
The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an
appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used. Before changing the
number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped. Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.
Submersible Motor
The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select
an Inverter by checking its rated output current. When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use
a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.
Explosion-proof Motor
When an explosion-proof motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with
the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosion-proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.
Since the Inverter itself is, however, not explosion-proof, always install it in a safe place.
Gearmotor
The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer.
In particular, continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If
the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than the rated speed, consult with the manufacturer.
Synchronous Motor
A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control. If a group of synchronous motors is individually
turned ON and OFF, synchronism may be lost.
Single-phase Motor
Do not use an Inverter for a single-phase motor. The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)
If an oil-lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will
be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will
make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher
than the rated speed.
10-10
Conformance to UL Standard
Conformance to UL Standard
To comply with UL standard, follow the appropriate installation instructions.
Installation Site
Install the Inverter in a pollution degree 2 environment or equivalent.
Specification of Closed-Loop Connector
The closed-loop connectors must be installed on conductors before installing to terminal blocks.
Use UL Listed closed-loop connectors shown below.
Table 10.2 JST Closed-Loop Connector Model
JST Kit P/N
Inverter
Model CIMR-G7A
Input
Output
27P5
14-5
14-5
2015
38-8
38-8
2018
60-8
38-8
2022
60-8
60-8
2030
80-10
80-10
2037
100-10
100-10
2045
60-10 (2perPh)
60-10 (2perPh)
2055
80-12 (2perPh)
80-10 (2perPh)
2075
150-12 (2perPh)
100-12 (2perPh)
2090
150-12 (2perPh)
150-12 (2perPh)
2110
200-12 (2perPh)
150-12 (2perPh)
4011
8-5
8-5
4015
14-5
14-5
4018
14-6
14-6
4022
22-6
22-6
4030
38-8
22-8
4037
38-8
38-8
4045
60-8
60-8
10
10-11
Control Circuit Terminal
A UL Listed, Class 2 power supply must be used for the control circuits. See below table.
.
Table 10.3 Power Supply for Control Circuits
Input/Output
Terminal
Open Collector Outputs
P1, P2, P3, P4
PC, C3, C4
Digital Inputs
S1, S2, S3, S4,
S5, S6, S7, S8,
S9, S10, S11,
S12, SC
Analog Inputs
RP, +V, -V, A1,
A2, A3, AC
Power Supply
Class 2 power supply
LVLC power supply when using
internal power supply. Class 2
power supply when using external power supply.
Interrupting Rating
Varispeed F7 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes, 240 VAC maximum (200 V Class) and 480 VAC maximum (400 V Class).
Use a circuit breaker or fuses having an interrupting rating not less than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes,
600 VAC maximum.
Motor Overheat Protection
To protect the motor from overheating, set the E2-01 constant in the Inverter to the same value as the level of
the motor rated current.
10-12
Conformance to CE Markings
Conformance to CE Markings
Points regarding conformance to CE markings are given below.
CE Markings
CE markings indicate conformance to safety and environmental standards that apply to business transactions
(including production, imports, and sales) in Europe. There are unified European standards for mechanical
products (Machine Directive), electrical products (Low Voltage Directive), and electrical noise (EMC Directive). CE markings are required for business transactions in Europe (including production, imports, and sales).
The Varispeed G7-Series Inverters bear CE markings indicating conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
and the EMC Directive.
• Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
• EMC Directive:
89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
Machinery and installations that incorporate the Inverter are also subject to CE markings. It is ultimately the
responsibility of customers making products incorporating the Inverter to attach CE markings to the finished
products. The customer must confirm that the finished products (machines or installations) conform to the
European Standards.
Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings
Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive under the conditions described in European Standard EN50178.
Requirements for Conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters must satisfy the following conditions in order to conform to the Low Voltage
Directive.
• It must be used under conditions corresponding to overvoltage category 3 or less and pollution degree 2 or
less as specified in IEC664.
• Input fuses:
For details on selecting fuses, refer to Table 10.4 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples.
10
• With Inverters CIMR-G7A2018 to 2110 and CIMR-G7A4018 to 4300, an enclosure preventing foreign
matter from entering from the top or front sides is required (IP4X or higher: panel installation).
10-13
Wiring Example
This example shows wiring for conforming to undervoltage reference.
Thermal switch
contact
Braking Unit
3
(optional)
Fuse 1MCCB
4
+
1
+0
-0
Level
detector
2MCCB
MC
+1
B
Motor
*1
-
+3
2
P
Braking Resistor Unit
(optional)
FU
-
FU
FV
FW
Noise
filter
Thermal relay
trip contact
Cooling fan
IM
FV
FW
3-phase power R
200 to 240 V S
50/60 Hz
T
Inverter
R/L1
S/L2
U
U/T1
CIMR-G7A2018
V
V/T2
T/L3
IM
W
W/T3
Vm
2MCCB THRX
OFF
ON
MC
MC
Forward Run/Stop
SA
PG-B2
S1
(optional)
Thermal relay trip contact
for Braking Resistor Unit
1
2
Thermal relay trip contact
for motor cooling fan
1
THRX
Reverse Run/Stop
SA
Thermal switch contact
for Braking Unit
External fault
S2
3
4
S3
TA1
1
2
3
4
5
6
C
H
B
G
A
F
TA3
2
MC
TRX
Fault reset
SA
Multi-step speed reference 1
(Main speed switching)
S4
MC
D
Shielded twisted-pair
wires
TA2
1
S5
TRX
2
Pulse A
Pulse monitor output
30 mA max.
3
MA
Multi-function
contact inputs
Factory
settings
4
S6
reference 2
Multi-step speed
Jog frequency
selection
Fault contact
Pulse B
Wiring distance:
d
30 m max.
S7
External
baseblock command
S8
MP
Multi-step speed
reference 3
S9
AC
Multi-step speed
reference 4
S10
Acc/dec time 1
S11
Emergency stop
(NO)
S12
Pulse train output
0 to 32 kHz (2.2 kΩ)
Default: Output
frequency
Ammeter adjustment
AM
20k Ω
-
CN5 (NPN setting)
+24V 8mA
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
AM +
Default: Output current
0 to +10 V
Ammeter adjustment
FM
SC
20k Ω
-
AC
FM
+
Multi-function analog output 1
-10 to 10 V 2 mA
+24V
Shield wire
connection
terminal
E (G)
Pulse train input
RP Master speed
pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
Frequency setting
2kΩ adjustment
Frequency
setter
3
External
frequency
references
PG
2kΩ
0 to +10V
2
1
4 to 20mA
0 to +10V
P
P
P
+V
Frequency setting power
+15 V, 20 mA
A1
A2
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
[0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input]
A3
Multi-function anlog input
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
AC
0V
Terminating
resistance
MEMOBUS
communications
RS-485/422
E(G)
*2
MA
R+
RS+
MA
Error contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
MB
MC
M1
M2
MC
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Default: Running
signal
P1
Factory setting:
Not used
-V ( -15V 20mA)
Default: Output frequency
0 to +10 V
Open collector 1
Default: Zerospeed
P2
PC
P3
C3
S-
P4
IG
C4
Open collector 2
Multi-function
open-collector outputs
48 VDC 50 mA max.
Default: Frequency
agree signal
Open collector 3
Factory setting:
Inverter operation
ready
Open collector 4
Factory setting:
minor fault
*3
* 1. The main circuit is separated from the terminal cover for safety reasons.
* 2. The contact output circuit is separated from the main circuit and the control circuit by reinforced insulation.
It can be connected to extra-low voltage circuits or circuits that are 250 VAC 1 A, 30 VDC 1 A or less.
* 3. The control circuit is an extra-low voltage circuit and separated from the main circuit and the contact output circuit by reinforced insulation. Always
connect it to extra-low voltage circuits.
Fig 10.6
10-14
Conformance to CE Markings
Input Fuses
In order to conform to the Low Voltage Directive, fuses must be provided for inputs. Use UL-compatible input
fuses with ratings higher than the voltages and currents, and fusing I2t specifications within the ranges shown
in the table below.
Table 10.4 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples
Voltage
Class
200 V
Class
Selection Requirements
Input Fuse (Examples)
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7A
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I2t
(A2sec)
20P4
240
10
12 to 25
A60Q12-2
FERRAZ
600V
12A
17
20P7
240
15
23 to 55
CR2LS-20/UL
FUJI
600V
12A
27
21P5
240
20
34 to 98
CR2LS-30/UL
FUJI
250V
20A
60
22P2
240
30
82 to 220
CR2LS-50/UL
FUJI
250V
30A
200
23P7
240
40
220 to 610
CR2LS-75/UL
FUJI
250V
50A
560
25P5
240
50
290 to 1300
CR2LS-75/UL
FUJI
250V
75A
560
27P5
240
60
450 to 5000
CR2LS-100/UL
FUJI
250V
75A
810
2011
240
90
1200 to 7200
CR2L-125/UL
FUJI
250V
100A
1570
2015
240
120
1800 to 7200
CR2L-150/UL
FUJI
250V
125A
2260
2018
240
140
870 to 16200
CR2L-150/UL
FUJI
250V
150A
2260
2022
240
160
1500 to 23000
CR2L-200/UL
FUJI
250V
150A
4010
2030
240
220
2100 to 19000
CR2L-260/UL
FUJI
250V
200A
7320
2037
240
270
2700 to 55000
CR2L-300/UL
FUJI
250V
260A
9630
2045
240
300
4000 to 55000
CR2L-300/UL
FUJI
250V
300A
9630
2055
240
370
7100 to 64000
CR2L-400/UL
FUJI
250V
350A
24000
2075
240
500
11000 to 64000
CR2L-500/UL
FUJI
250V
450A
40000
2090
240
600
13000 to 83000
CR2L-600/UL
FUJI
250V
600A
52000
2110
240
700
13000 to 83000
A50P700-4
FERRAZ
250V
600A
49000
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
Fusing
I2t
(A2sec)
10
10-15
Table 10.4 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples (Continued)
Voltage
Class
400 V
Class
10-16
Selection Requirements
Input Fuse (Examples)
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7A
Voltage
(V)
Current
(A)
Fusing I2t
(A2sec)
40P4
480
5
16 to 660
CR6L-20/UL
FUJI
600V
20A
26
40P7
480
10
19 to 660
CR6L-20/UL
FUJI
600V
20A
26
41P5
480
10
46 to 660
CR6L-30/UL
FUJI
600V
30A
59
42P2
480
15
78 to 660
CR6L-50/UL
FUJI
600V
50A
317
43P7
480
20
110 to 660
CR6L-50/UL
FUJI
600V
50A
317
44P0
480
30
220 to 660
CR6L-50/UL
FUJI
600V
50A
317
45P5
480
40
240 to 900
CR6L-50/UL
FUJI
600V
50A
317
47P5
480
50
320 to 900
CR6L-75/UL
FUJI
600V
75A
564
4011
480
50
1000 to 1800
CR6L-100/UL
FUJI
600V
100A
1022
4015
480
60
1500 to 4100
CR6L-150/UL
FUJI
600V
150A
3070
4018
480
70
530 to 5800
CR6L-150/UL
FUJI
600V
150A
3070
4022
480
90
1130 to 5800
CR6L-150/UL
FUJI
600V
150A
3070
4030
480
110
1700 to 5800
CR6L-150/UL
FUJI
600V
150A
3070
4037
480
140
2000 to 13000
CR6L-200/UL
FUJI
600V
200A
5200
4045
480
160
3000 to 13000
CR6L-200/UL
FUJI
600V
200A
5200
4055
480
220
6800 to 55000
CR6L-300/UL
FUJI
600V
300A
17700
4075
480
280
9000 to 55000
CR6L-300/UL
FUJI
600V
300A
17700
4090
480
330
12000 to 23000
A70P400-4
FERRAZ
700V
400A
19000
4110
480
400
18000 to 64000
A70P450-4
FERRAZ
700V
450A
24000
4132
480
450
28000 to 250000
A70P600-4
FERRAZ
700V
600A
43000
4160
480
540
40000 to 250000
A70P700-4
FERRAZ
700V
700A
59000
4185
480
620
43000 to 400000
A70P900-4
FERRAZ
700V
900A
97000
4220
480
750
63000 to 400000
A70P900-4
FERRAZ
700V
900A
97000
4300
480
1000
94000 to 920000
A70P1000-4
FERRAZ
700V
1000A
120000
Model Number Manufacturer Ratings
Fusing
I2t
(A2sec)
Conformance to CE Markings
EMC Directive
Varispeed G7-Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the EMC Directive under the conditions
described in European Standard EN61800-3.
Installation Method
In order to ensure that the machinery or installation incorporating the Inverter conforms to the EMC Directive,
perform installation according to the method below.
• Install a noise filter that conforms to European Standards on the input side. (Refer to Table 10.5 EMC
Noise Filters).
• Use a shielded line or metal piping for wiring between the Inverter and Motor. Make the wiring as short as
possible.
• To suppress harmonics, install a DC reactor in CIMR-G7A20P4, 20P7, 40P4, and 40P7 models. (Refer to
Table 10.6 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics.)
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
PE
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Inputs
Inverter
Filter
Outputs
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Wiring length: 20 m max.
Remove the paint on the ground side.
IM
Fig 10.7 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-G7A20P4 to 2015, 40P4 to 4015)
10
10-17
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
PE
Remove the paint on the ground side.
Inputs
Inverter
Filter
Outputs
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Wiring length:
40 cm max.
Metallic plate
Wiring length: 20 m max.
Remove the paint on the ground side.
IM
Fig 10.8 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter (CIMR-G7A2018 to 2110, 4018 to 4300)
Table 10.5 EMC Noise Filters
Voltage
Class
200V
Class
10-18
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7A
Noise Filter (Made by Shaffner)
Model Number
Rated Current (A)
Weight (kg)
Dimensions (mm)
20P4
FS5972-10-07
10
1.1
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
20P7
FS5972-10-07
10
1.1
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
21P5
FS5972-18-07
18
1.3
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
22P2
FS5973-35-07
35
1.4
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
23P7
FS5973-35-07
35
1.4
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
25P5
FS5973-60-07
60
3
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
27P5
FS5973-60-07
60
3
206 &times; 60 &times; 355
2011
FS5973-100-07
100
4.9
236 &times; 80 &times; 408
2015
FS5973-100-07
100
4.9
236 &times; 80 &times; 408
2018
FS5973-130-35
130
4.3
90 &times; 180 &times; 366
2022
FS5973-130-35
130
4.3
90 &times; 180 &times; 366
2030
FS5973-160-40
160
6
120 &times; 170 &times; 451
2037
FS5973-240-37
240
11
130 &times; 240 &times; 610
2045
FS5973-240-37
240
11
130 &times; 240 &times; 610
2055
FS5972-400-99
400
18.5
300 &times; 160 &times; 610
2075
FS5972-400-99
400
18.5
300 &times; 160 &times; 610
2090
2110
FS5972-460-99
460
19.5
300 &times; 160 &times; 610
Conformance to CE Markings
Table 10.5 EMC Noise Filters (Continued)
Voltage
Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7A
400V
Class
Noise Filter (Made by Shaffner)
Model Number
Rated Current (A)
Weight (kg)
Dimensions (mm)
40P4
FS5972-10-07
10
1.1
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
40P7
FS5972-10-07
10
1.1
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
41P5
FS5972-10-07
10
1.1
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
42P2
FS5972-18-07
18
1.3
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
43P7
FS5972-18-07
18
1.3
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
44P0
FS5972-18-07
18
1.3
141 &times; 46 &times; 330
45P5
FS5972-35-07
35
2.1
206 &times; 50 &times; 355
47P5
FS5972-35-07
35
2.1
206 &times; 50 &times; 355
4011
FS5972-60-07
60
4.0
236 &times; 65 &times; 408
4015
FS5972-60-07
60
4.0
236 &times; 65 &times; 408
4018
FS5972-70-52
70
3.4
80 &times; 185 &times; 329
4022
FS5972-70-52
70
3.4
80 &times; 185 &times; 329
4030
FS5972-130-35
130
4.7
90 &times; 180 &times; 366
4037
FS5972-130-35
130
4.7
90 &times; 180 &times; 366
4045
FS5972-130-35
130
4.7
90 &times; 180 &times; 366
4055
FS5972-170-40
170
6
120 &times; 170 &times; 451
4075
FS5972-170-40
170
6
120 &times; 170 &times; 451
4090
FS5972-250-37
250
11
130 &times; 240 &times; 610
4110
FS5972-250-37
250
11
130 &times; 240 &times; 610
4132
FS5972-410-99
410
10.5
260 &times; 115 &times; 386
4160
FS5972-410-99
410
10.5
260 &times; 115 &times; 386
4185
FS5972-600-99
600
18.5
260 &times; 135 &times; 386
4220
FS5972-800-99
800
31
300 &times; 160 &times; 716
4300
FS5972-800-99
800
31
300 &times; 160 &times; 716
Table 10.6 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics
Voltage Class
200 V Class
400 V Class
Inverter Model
Number
CIMR-G7A
20P4
20P7
40P4
40P7
DC Reactor
Model Number
Manufacturer
Ratings
Code Number
10
UZDA-B
YASKAWA
5.4 A 8 mH
X010084
UZDA-B
YASKAWA
3.2 A 28 mH
X010052
10-19
Wiring Examples
This section provides wiring examples to connect a Braking Unit and other peripheral devices to the main
circuits, examples of wiring a transformer to Inverter I/O, and other aspects of Inverter wiring.
Using a Braking Resistor Unit
This example shows wiring for a Braking Resistor Unit.
CIMR-G7A20P4 to -G7A2015 (200 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW)
CIMR-G7A40P4 to -G7A4015 (400 V Class Inverters of 0.4 to 15 kW)
A sequence is required to turn
OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of
the Braking Resistor Unit.
Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
DC Reactor to
improve input
power factor
Braking Resistor Unit *3
(Optional)
Short-circuit bar
MC
3-phase power
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz
or 380 to 460 V
50/60 Hz
*4
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
Inverter
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Motor
200 V Class Inverters: Ground to
100 Ω max., 400 V Class Inverters:
Ground to 10 Ω max.)
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit
Fault contacts
* 1. A transformer is not required for 200 V Class
* 2. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and + 2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 3. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 and using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
* 4. When connecting a separately-installed type Braking Unit (model CDBR) to Inverters with built-in braking transistor (200 V/400 V 15 kW
or less), connect the B1 terminal of the Inverter to the + terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the - terminal of the Inverter to the - terminal of the Braking Unit. The B2 terminal is not used in this case.
Fig 10.9
10-20
Wiring Examples
Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit
When using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit, create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking
resistor and cut off the power supply to the Inverter.
CIMR-G7A2018, -G7A2022 (200 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW, 22 kW)
DC Reactor to
improve input
A sequence is required to turn
power factor
OFF the power supply for the
(Optional)
thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor
Unit.
Short-circuit bar
Braking Unit
(Optional)
Braking Resistor Unit*2
(Optional)
Level
detector
Braking Resistor overheating contacts
(Thermal overload relay trip contacts)
MCCB
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
3-phase power
200 to 230 V 50/60 Hz
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Motor
Inverter
Ground to 100 Ω max.
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit
Forward Run/Stop
Fault contacts
Reverse Run/Stop
Braking Unit
Forward Run Command (forward run when ON)
Reverse Run Command (reverse run when ON)
External fault
* 1. Remove the short-circuit bar (normally connected) from + 1 and + 2 when connecting a DC Reactor (Optional).
* 2. Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 when using a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Fig 10.10
10
10-21
Using Braking Units in Parallel
This example shows wiring for using two Braking Units in parallel.
There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave. Select “Master” for
the first Braking Unit only, and select “Slave” for all other Braking Units (i.e., from the second Unit onwards).
A sequence is required to turn OFF the
power supply for the thermal overload relay
trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
Thermal
protector
Braking
Resistor Unit
Braking
Resistor Unit
Level
detector
Thermal
protector
Braking Unit 2
Thermal switch
Thermal switch
MCCB
R/L1
3-phase power
200 to 220 V 50 Hz
200 to 230 V 60 Hz
Inverter
U/T1
S/L2
V/T2
T/L3
Cooling fan
W/T3
Motor
Ground to 100 Ω max.
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit
Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Braking Unit
Fault contact output
Forward Run Command (forward run
when ON)
Reverse Run Command (reverse run
when ON)
External fault
* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to Resistor Unit. The motor may
not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Fig 10.11
10-22
Wiring Examples
Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel
This example shows wiring for using three Braking Resistor Units in parallel.
Thermal
protector
Thermal
protector
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Level
detector
A sequence is required to turn OFF the
power supply for the thermal overload relay
trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit.
Thermal
protector
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking
Resistor
Unit
Braking Unit
Thermal switch
MCCB
R/L1
3-phase power
380 to 480 V
50/60 Hz
S/L2
Inverter
U/T1
Motor
V/T2
W/T3
T/L3
Cooling fan
Voltage
setting
Ground to 10 Ω max.
Overload relay trip contact
of Braking Resistor Unit
Fault contact output
Fault contacts
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Braking Unit
Forward Run Command (forward run
when ON)
Reverse Run Command (reverse run
when ON)
External fault
* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3-04 to Resistor Unit. The motor may
not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed.
Fig 10.12
10
10-23
Using a VS Operator
This example shows wiring for using a VS Operator. The VS Operator model number is JVOP-95• or
JVOP-96 •.
CIMR-G7A27P5 (200 V Class Inverters of 7.5 kW)
Short-circuit bar
(Standard)
MCCB
R/L1
3-phase power
S/L2
Inverter
U/T1
Motor
V/T2
W/T3
T/L3
JVOP-95•, C-96• VS Operator
Forward Run Command
(forward run when closed)
Reverse Run Command
(reverse run when closed)
Ground to 100 Ω max.
Multi-function contact inputs
Sequence common (0 V)
Shield terminal
Speed setting power (15 V, 20 mA)
Master speed (0 to 10 V, 20 kΩ)
Master speed (4 to 20 mA, 250 Ω)
Multi-function contact
output (Default: Running
signal)
Fault contact output
Open collector 1 (Default:
Zero-speed signal)
Frequency meter
Multi-function
analog output
Multi-function
analog output
(Default: Output
frequency)
Fig 10.13
10-24
Open collector 2 (Default:
Speed agreement signal)
Multi-function output
common
Multi-function opencollector output 48 V,
50 mA max.
Wiring Examples
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode
with an Internal Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control board to NPN as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN transistor for an input signal (0-V command and sinking mode) and an internal +24-V power supply.
+1
+2
-
B1
B2
MCCB
3-phase power
R
R/L1
U/T1
Motor
S
S/L2
V/T2
IM
T
T/L3
Inverter
W/T3
Ground
S1
Forward Run/Stop
S2
Reverse Run/Stop
S3
External fault
S4
Fault reset
S5
Multi-function
contact inputs
Factory
settings
Multi-step
speed setting 1
S12
CN5 (NPN setting)
Emergency stop
(NO contact)
+24 V 8 mA
SC
+24 V
E(G)
Pulse train input
Frequency setting
adjustment
2 kΩ
External
frequency
references
Frequency
setter
3
2 kΩ
0 to +10 V
2
1
4 to 20 mA
P
P
Shield wire
connection terminal
RP
Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
+V
Frequency setting power
+15 V 20 mA
A1
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
A2
AC
10
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input
0V
Fig 10.14
10-25
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a +24-V Common in Sourcing
Mode
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control board to PNP as shown below for a sequence that uses a PNP transistor for an input signal (+24-V common and sourcing mode) and an internal +24-V power supply.
+1
+2
-
B1
B2
MCCB
3-phase power
R
R/L1
S
S/L2
T
T/L3
Inverter
U/T1
Motor
V/T2
IM
W/T3
Ground
S1
Forward Run/Stop
S2
Reverse Run/Stop
S3
External fault
S4
Fault reset
S5
Multi-function
contact inputs
Factory
settings
Multi-step
speed setting 1
S12
Emergency stop
(NO contact)
CN5 (PNP setting)
+24 V 8 mA
SC
+24 V
E(G)
Pulse train input
Frequency setting
adjustment
2 kΩ
External
frequency
references
Frequency
3
setter
2 kΩ
0 to +10 V
2
1
4 to 20 mA
P
P
Shield wire
connection terminal
RP
Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
+V
Frequency setting power
+15 V 20 mA
A1
Master speed reference
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
A2
AC
Master speed reference
4 to 20 mA (250Ω)
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input
0V
Fig 10.15
10-26
Wiring Examples
Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0-V Common in Sinking Mode
with an External Power Supply
Set CN5 (shunt connector) on the control board to EXT as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN transistor for an input signal (0-V common and sinking mode) and an external +24-V power supply.
+1
+2
-
B1
B2
MCCB
3-phase power
R
R/L1
S
S/L2
T
T/L3
Inverter
U/T1
Motor
V/T2
IM
W/T3
Ground
S1
Forward Run/Stop
S2
Reverse Run/Stop
S3
External fault
S4
Fault reset
Multi-function
contact inputs
Factory
settings
S5
Multi-step
speed setting 1
S12
Emergency stop
(NO contact)
CN5 (EXT setting)
+24 V 8 mA
External
+24V
SC
+24 V
E(G)
Pulse train input
RP
Frequency setting
adjustment
2 kΩ
External
frequency
references
Frequency
setter
3
2 kΩ
0 to +10 V
4 to 20 mA
Master speed pulse train
0 to 32 kHz (3 kΩ)
High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V input
2
1
Shield wire
connection terminal
+V
Frequency setting power
A1
Master speed reference
A2
AC
Master speed reference
+15 V 20 mA
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ)
P
P
10
4 to 20 mA (250 kΩ)
0 to 10 V (20 kΩ) input
0V
Note:
Set EXT as shown at the right even for
a PNP input signal transistor
sequence
connection
(+24-V
common/sourcing mode) with a +24-V
external power supply.
S12
External
+24V
CN5 (EXT setting)
+24 V 8 mA
SC
+24 V
Fig 10.16
10-27
Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs
This example shows wiring for contact outputs and open collector outputs.
The following example is for the CIMR-G7A25P5 (200 V Class Inverter for 5.5 kW).
+1
+2
B1
-
B2
MCCB
R
R/L1
3-phase power S
S/L2
T
T/L3
Inverter
U/T1
Motor
V/T2
IM
W/T3
Ground
FM
Ammeter scale adjustment resistor
20 k
Multi-function analog output 2
-10 to +10 V 2 mA
Default: Ouput current,
AM
0 to +10 V
Frequency meter scale adjustment resistor
20 k
AC
FM
AM
Multi-function analog output 1
-10 to +10 V 2 mA
Default: Output frequency,
0 to +10 V
E(G)
Sequence
Surge
absorber
MA
MB
MC
Error contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
Multi-function contact output
250 VAC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
30 VDC, 10 mA min. 1 A max.
(Default: RUN)
250 VAC max.
30 VDC max.
Flywheel
diode
M1
M2
48 VDC max.
E(G)
Flywheel
diode
P1
Open collector 1
(Default: zero speed)
P2
PC
48 VDC max.
Flywheel
diode
Open collector 2
(Default: Freq agree)
Multi-function
open collector output
48 VDC 50 mA max.
Sequence external power
supply
Fig 10.17
10-28
User Constants
User Constants
Factory settings are given in the following table.
Table 10.7 User Constants
No.
Name
A1-00
Language selection for Digital
Operator display
A1-01
Constant access level
A1-02
Control method selection
A1-03
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
1*1
b3-05
Speed search wait time
0.2
2
b3-10
Speed search detection compensation gain (speed calculation)
1.10
2*1
b3-13
Proportional gain of the speed estimator during speed search
1.0
Initialize
0
b3-14
Rotation direction search selection
1
A1-04
Password
0
b3-17*18 Speed search retrial current level
150
A1-05
Password setting
0
b3-18*18 Speed search retrial detection time
0.10
-
b3-19*18 Number of speed search retrials
A2-01 to
User setting constants
A2-32
Setting
0
b1-01
Reference selection
1
b4-01
Timer function ON-delay time
0.0
b1-02
Operation method selection
1
b4-02
Timer function OFF-delay time
0.0
b1-03
Stopping method selection
0
b5-01
PID control method selection
b1-04
Prohibition of reverse operation
0
b5-02
Proportional gain (P)
1.00
b1-05
Operation selection for setting E109 or less
0
b5-03
Integral (I) time
1.0
b1-06
Read sequence input twice
1
b5-04
Integral (I) limit
100.0
b1-07
Operation selection after switching
to remote mode
0
b5-05
Derivative (D) time
0.00
b1-08
Run Command selection in programming modes
0
b5-06
PID upper limit
100.0
b1-10
Mode selection for zero-speed
0
b5-07
PID offset adjustment
0.0
b2-01
Zero-speed level (DC injection
braking starting frequency)
0.5
b5-08
PID first order lag time constant
0.00
50
b5-09
PID output characteristics selection
0
0
b2-02
DC injection braking current
b2-03
DC injection braking time at start
0.00
b5-10
PID output gain
b2-04
DC injection braking time at stop
0.50
b5-11
PID reverse output selection
0
b2-08
Magnetic flux compensation volume
0
b5-12
Selection of PID feedback command loss detection
0
b3-01
Speed search selection
2*2
b5-13
PID feedback command loss detection level
0
b3-02
Speed search operating current
100*2
b5-14
PID feedback command loss detection time
1.0
b3-03
Speed search deceleration time
2.0
b5-15
PID sleep function operation level
0.0
10
1.0
10-29
Table 10.7 User Constants (Continued)
No.
10-30
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
b5-16
PID sleep operation delay time
0.0
C1-10
Accel/decel time setting unit
b5-17
Accel/decel time for PID reference
0.0
C1-11
Accel/decel time switching frequency
0.0
b6-01
Dwell frequency at start
0.0
C2-01
S-curve characteristic time at
acceleration start
0.20
b6-02
Dwell time at start
0.0
C2-02
S-curve characteristic time at
acceleration end
0.20
b6-03
Dwell frequency at stop
0.0
C2-03
S-curve characteristic time at
deceleration start
0.20
b6-04
Dwell time at stop
0.0
C2-04
S-curve characteristic time at
deceleration end
0.00
b7-01
Droop control gain
0.0
C3-01
Slip compensation gain
1.0*2
b7-02
Droop control delay time
0.05
C3-02
Slip compensation primary delay
time
200*2
b8-01
Energy-saving mode selection
0
C3-03
Slip compensation limit
b8-02
Energy-saving gain
0.7*3
C3-04
Slip compensation selection during
regeneration
0
b8-03
Energy-saving filter time constant
0.50*4
C3-05
Output voltage limit operation
selection
0
b8-04
Energy-saving coefficient
C4-01
Torque compensation gain
1.00
b8-05
Power detection filter time constant
20
C4-02
Torque compensation primary
delay time constant
20*2
b8-06
Search operation voltage limiter
0
C4-03
Forward starting torque
0.0
b9-01
Zero-servo gain
5
C4-04
Reverse starting torque
0.0
b9-02
Zero-servo completion width
10
C4-05
Starting torque time constant
10
C1-01
Acceleration time 1
10.0
C5-01
ASR proportional (P) gain 1
20.00*7
C1-02
Deceleration time 1
10.0
C5-02
ASR integral (I) time 1
0.500*7
C1-03
Acceleration time 2
10.0
C5-03
ASR proportional (P) gain 2
20.00*7
C1-04
Deceleration time 2
10.0
C5-04
ASR integral (I) time 2
0.500*7
C1-05
Acceleration time 3
10.0
C5-05
ASR limit
C1-06
Deceleration time 3
10.0
C5-06
ASR primary delay time
0.004*7
C1-07
Acceleration time 4
10.0
C5-07
ASR switching frequency
0.0
C1-08
Deceleration time 4
10.0
C5-08
ASR integral (I) limit
400
C1-09
Emergency stop time
10.0
C5-10
ASR primary delay time 2
288.20
*5 *6
1
200
5.0
0.010
Setting
User Constants
Table 10.7 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
6*6
d3-01
Jump frequency 1
0.0
C6-03*8 Carrier frequency upper limit
15.0*6
d3-02
Jump frequency 2
0.0
C6-04*8 Carrier frequency lower limit
15.0*6
d3-03
Jump frequency 3
0.0
Carrier frequency proportional
C6-05*8 gain
00
d3-04
Jump frequency width
1.0
C6-02
Carrier frequency selection
C6-11
Carrier frequency for open-loop
vector 2 control
4*6
d4-01
Frequency reference hold function
selection
0
d1-01
Frequency reference 1
0.00
d4-02
+ - Speed limits
10
d1-02
Frequency reference 2
0.00
d5-01
Torque control selection
0
d1-03
Frequency reference 3
0.00
d5-02
Torque reference delay time
d1-04
Frequency reference 4
0.00
d5-03
Speed limit selection
1
d1-05
Frequency reference 5
0.00
d5-04
Speed limit
0
d1-06
Frequency reference 6
0.00
d5-05
Speed limit bias
10
d1-07
Frequency reference 7
0.00
d5-06
Speed/torque control switching
timer
0
d1-08
Frequency reference 8
0.00
d5-07
Rotation direction limit operation
selection
1
d1-09
Frequency reference 9
0.00
d6-01
Field weakening level
80
d1-10
Frequency reference 10
0.00
d6-02
Field frequency
0.0
d1-11
Frequency reference 11
0.00
d6-03
Field forcing function selection
d1-12
Frequency reference 12
0.00
d6-05
AφR time constant
1.00
d1-13
Frequency reference 13
0.00
d6-06
Field forcing limit
400
d1-14
Frequency reference 14
0.00
E1-01
Input voltage setting
200*9
d1-15
Frequency reference 15
0.00
E1-03
V/f pattern selection
F
d1-16
Frequency reference 16
0.00
E1-04
Max. output frequency
d1-17
Jog frequency reference
6.00
E1-05
Max. voltage
d2-01
Frequency reference upper limit
100.0
E1-06
Base frequency
60.0*2
d2-02
Frequency reference lower limit
0.0
E1-07
Mid. output frequency
3.0*2
d2-03
Master speed reference lower limit
0.0
E1-08
Mid. output frequency voltage
Setting
0*7
0
10
60.0*2
200.0
*2 *9
11.0*2 *9
10-31
Table 10.7 User Constants (Continued)
No.
10-32
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
0.5*2
E4-01
Motor 2 rated current
1.90 *6
2.0*2 *9
E4-02
Motor 2 rated slip
2.90 *6
Mid. output frequency 2
0.0*10
E4-03
Motor 2 no-load current
1.20 *6
E1-12
Mid. output frequency voltage 2
0.0*10
E4-04
Motor 2 number of poles (number
of poles)
E1-13
Base voltage
0.0*11
E4-05
Motor 2 line-to-line resistance
9.842*6
E2-01
Motor rated current
1.90*6
E4-06
Motor 2 leak inductance
18.2*6
E2-02
Motor rated slip
2.90*6
E4-07
Motor 2 rated capacity
0.40*12
E2-03
Motor no-load current
1.20*6
F1-01
PG constant
E2-04
Number of motor poles
4
F1-02
Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO)
1
E2-05
Motor line-to-line resistance
9.842*6
F1-03
Operation selection at overspeed
(OS)
1
E2-06
Motor leak inductance
18.2*6
F1-04
Operation selection at deviation
3
E2-07
Motor iron saturation coefficient 1
0.50
F1-05
PG rotation
0
E2-08
Motor iron saturation coefficient 2
0.75
F1-06
PG division rate (PG pulse monitor)
1
E2-09
Motor mechanical loss
0.0
F1-07
Integral value during accel/decel
enable/disable
0
E2-10
Motor iron loss for torque compensation
14*6
F1-08
Overspeed detection level
115
E2-11
Motor rated output
0.40*12
F1-09
Overspeed detection delay time
0.0*7
E2-12
Motor iron saturation coefficient 3
1.30
F1-10
Excessive speed deviation detection level
10
E3-01
Motor 2 control method selection
2
F1-11
Excessive speed deviation detection delay time
0.5
E3-02
Motor 2 max. output frequency
(FMAX)
60.0
F1-12
Number of PG gear teeth 1
0
E3-03
Motor 2 max. voltage (VMAX)
200.0*2
F1-13
Number of PG gear teeth 2
0
E3-04
Motor 2 max. voltage frequency
(FA)
60.0
F1-14
PG open-circuit detection time
E3-05
Motor 2 mid. output frequency 1
(FB)
3.0 *2
F2-01
Bi-polar or uni-polar input selection
0
E3-06
Motor 2 mid. output frequency
voltage 1 (VC)
11.0 *9
F3-01
Digital input option
0
E3-07
Motor 2 min. output frequency
(FMIN)
0.5 *2
F4-01
Channel 1 monitor selection
2
E3-08
Motor 2 min. output frequency
voltage (VMIN)
2.0 *9
F4-02
Channel 1 gain
E1-09
Min. output frequency
E1-10
Min. output frequency voltage
E1-11
4
600
2.0
1.00
Setting
User Constants
Table 10.7 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
3
H1-03
Terminal S5 function selection
3 (0)*14
Channel 2 gain
0.50
H1-04
Terminal S6 function selection
4 (3)*14
F4-05
Channel 1 output monitor bias
0.0
H1-05
Terminal S7 function selection
6 (4)*14
F4-06
Channel 2 output monitor bias
0.0
H1-06
Terminal S8 function selection
8 (6)*14
F4-07
Analog output signal level for
channel 1
0
H1-07
Terminal S9 function selection
5
F4-08
Analog output signal level for
channel 2
0
H1-08
Terminal S10 function selection
32
F5-01
Channel 1 output selection
0
H1-09
Terminal S11 function selection
7
F5-02
Channel 2 output selection
1
H1-10
Terminal S12 function selection
15
F5-03
Channel 3 output selection
2
H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 function selection (contact)
0
F5-04
Channel 4 output selection
4
H2-02
Terminal P1 function selection
(open collector)
1
F5-05
Channel 5 output selection
6
H2-03
Terminal P2 function selection
(open collector)
2
F5-06
Channel 6 output selection
37
H2-04
Terminal P3 function selection
(open-collector)
6
F5-07
Channel 7 output selection
0F
H2-05
Terminal P4 function selection
(open-collector)
10
F5-08
Channel 8 output selection
0F
H3-01
Signal level selection (terminal
A1)
0
F5-09
DO-08 output mode selection
0
H3-02
Gain (terminal A1)
100.0
F6-01
Operation selection after communications error
1
H3-03
Bias (terminal A1)
0.0
F6-02
Input level of external fault from
Communications Option Board
0
H3-04
Signal level selection (terminal
A3)
0
H3-05
1
Multi-function analog input (terminal A3) function selection
2
F6-03
Stopping method for external fault
from Communications Option
Board
H3-06
Gain (terminal A3)
100.0
F6-04
Trace sampling from Communications Option Board
0
H3-07
Bias (terminal A3)
0.0
F6-06
Torque reference/torque limit
selection from optical option
0
H3-08
Signal level selection (terminal
A2)
2
Operation selection after SI-T
F6-08∗13 WDT error
1
H3-09
Multi-function analog input (terminal A2) function selection
0
Number of SI-T BUS error detecF6-09∗13 tion
2
H3-10
Gain (terminal A2)
100.0
F4-03
Channel 2 monitor selection
F4-04
H1-01
Terminal S3 function selection
24
H3-11
Bias (terminal A2)
0.0
H1-02
Terminal S4 function selection
14
H3-12
Analog input filter time constant
0.03
Setting
10
10-33
Table 10.7 User Constants (Continued)
No.
10-34
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
2
L1-03
Alarm operation selection during
motor overheating
3
Gain (terminal FM)
1.00
L1-04
Motor overheating operation selection
1
H4-03
Bias (terminal FM)
0.0
L1-05
Motor temperature input filter time
constant
0.20
H4-04
Monitor selection (terminal AM)
3
L2-01
Momentary power loss detection
0
H4-05
Gain (terminal AM)
0.50
L2-02
Momentary power loss ridethru
time
0.1*6
H4-06
Bias (terminal AM)
0.0
L2-03
Min. baseblock time
0.2*6
H4-07
Analog output 1 signal level selection
0
L2-04
Voltage recovery time
0.3*6
H4-08
Analog output 2 signal level selection
0
L2-05
Undervoltage detection level
190*9
H5-01
Slave address
1F
L2-06
KEB deceleration time
0.0
H5-02
Communication speed selection
3
L2-07
Momentary recovery time
0*15
H5-03
Communication parity selection
0
L2-08
Frequency reduction gain at KEB
start
100
H5-04
Stopping method after communication error
3
L3-01
Stall prevention selection during
accel
1
H5-05
Communication error detection
selection
1
L3-02
Stall prevention level during accel
150
H5-06
Send wait time
5
L3-03
Stall prevention limit during accel
50
H5-07
RTS control ON/OFF
1
L3-04
Stall prevention selection during
decel
1
Unit Selection for MEMOBUS
H5-10*18 Register 0025H
0
L3-05
Stall prevention selection during
running
1
0
L3-06
Stall prevention level during running
160
H4-01
Monitor selection (terminal FM)
H4-02
H6-01
Pulse train input function selection
H6-02
Pulse train input scaling
1440
L3-11
Overvoltage inhibit selection
H6-03
Pulse train input gain
100.0
L3-12
Overvoltage inhibit voltage level
380*9
H6-04
Pulse train input bias
0.0
L4-01
Speed agreement detection level
0.0
H6-05
Pulse train input filter time
0.10
L4-02
Speed agreement detection width
2.0
H6-06
Pulse train monitor selection
2
L4-03
Speed agreement detection level
(+/-)
0.0
H6-07
Pulse train monitor scaling
1440
L4-04
Speed agreement detection width
(+/-)
2.0
L1-01
Motor protection selection
1
L4-05
Operation when frequency reference is missing
0
L1-02
Motor protection time constant
1.0
L5-01
Number of auto restart attempts
0
0
Setting
User Constants
Table 10.7 User Constants (Continued)
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
L5-02
Auto restart operation selection
0
OH1 detection of Inverter’s coolL8-32*16 ing fan
1
L6-01
Torque detection selection 1
0
Carrier frequency reduction selecL8-38*18 tion
1*19
L6-02
Torque detection level 1
150
L8-39*18 Reduced carrier frequency
L6-03
Torque detection time 1
0.1
L8-41*18 Current alarm
L6-04
Torque detection selection 2
L6-05
2.0
*6 *19
0
0
N1-01
Hunting-prevention function selection
Torque detection level 2
150
N1-02
Hunting-prevention gain
1.00
L6-06
Torque detection time 2
0.1
N1-03*17 Hunting-prevention time constant
10*6
L7-01
Forward drive torque limit
200
N2-01
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) gain
1.00
L7-02
Reverse drive torque limit
200
N2-02
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant
50
L7-03
Forward regenerative torque limit
200
N2-03
Speed feedback detection control
(AFR) time constant 2
750
L7-04
Reverse regenerative torque limit
200
N3-01
High-slip braking deceleration frequency width
L7-06
Integral time setting for torque
limit
200
N3-02
High-slip braking current limit
150
Control method selection for
torque limit during acceleration
deceleration
N3-03
High-slip braking stop dwell time
1.0
L7-07
0
N3-04
High-slip braking OL time
40
Protect selection for internal DB
resistor (Type ERF)
0
N4-07
Integral time of speed estimator
L8-01
Setting
1
5
0.060
95*6
0.030
L8-02
Overheat pre-alarm level
L8-03
Operation selection after overheat
pre-alarm
3
N4-08
Proportional gain of speed estimator
L8-05
Input open-phase protection selection
0
N4-10
High-speed proportional gain of
speed estimator
L8-07
Output open-phase protection
selection
0
N4-11
Speed estimator switching frequency
70
L8-09
Ground protection selection
1
N4-15
Low-speed regeneration stability
coefficient 1
0.3
L8-10
Cooling fan control selection
0
N4-17
Torque adjustment gain
0.8
L8-11
Cooling fan control delay time
60
N4-18
Feeder resistance adjustment gain
1.00
L8-12
Ambient temperature
45
N4-28
Speed estimator switching frequency 2
L8-15
OL2 characteristics selection at
low speeds
1
N4-29
Torque adjustment gain 2
0.10
L8-18
Soft CLA selection
1
N4-30
Low-speed regeneration stability
coefficient 2
1.00
15
15.0
10
50
10-35
Table 10.7 User Constants (Continued)
No.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
10-36
Name
Factory
Setting
Setting
No.
Name
Factory
Setting
N4-32
Speed estimator gain fluctuation
frequency 1
5.0
o2-08
Cumulative operation time selection
0
N4-33
Speed estimator gain fluctuation
frequency 2
20.0
o2-10
Fan operation time setting
0
N4-34
Speed estimator gain fluctuation
rate
200.0
o2-12
Fault trace/fault history clear function
0
N5-01
Feed forward control selection
0*7
o2-14
Output power monitor clear selection
0
N5-02
Motor acceleration time
N5-03
Feed forward proportional gain
o1-01
0.178*6
o2-18*18 Capacitor maintenance setting
0
1.0
o3-01
Copy function selection
0
Monitor selection
6
o3-02
Read permitted selection
0
o1-02
Monitor selection after power up
1
T1-00
Motor 1/2 selection
1
o1-03
Frequency units of reference setting and monitor
0
T1-01
Autotuning mode selection
o1-04
Setting unit for frequency constants related to V/f characteristics
0
T1-02
Motor output power
0.40*6
o1-05
LCD brightness adjustment
3
T1-03
Motor rated voltage
200.0*9
o2-01
LOCAL/REMOTE key enable/disable
1
T1-04
Motor rated current
1.90*6
o2-02
STOP key during control circuit
terminal operation
1
T1-05
Motor base frequency
60.0
o2-03
User constant initial value
0
T1-06
Number of motor poles
4
o2-04
kVA selection
0*6
T1-07
Motor base speed
1750
o2-05
Frequency reference setting
method selection
0
T1-08
PG pulses per revolution for teaching
600
o2-06
Operation selection when digital
operator is disconnected
0
o2-07
Cumulative operation time setting
0
1.
2.
3.
4.
T1-09*18 Motor no-load current
0*2
1.20*6
Not initialized. (Japanese standard specifications: A1-00 = 1, A1-02 = 2)
When the control method is changed, the factory setting will change. The open-loop vector 1 factory settings are given.
The factory setting is 1.0 when using flux vector control.
The factory setting is 2.00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min.
The factory setting will change when the control method is changed. The open-loop vector 1 factory setting is given.
5. By setting E2-11 (Motor rated output) the appropriate value will be set.
6. The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity. The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0.4 kW are given.
7. When the control method is changed, the factory settings will change. The flux vector factory settings are given.
8. This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.
9. These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter. Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double.
10.E1-11 and E1-12 are disregarded when set to 0.0.
11.E1-13 is set to the same value as E1-05 by autotuning.
12.The same capacity as that of the Inverter will be set if the constants are initialized.
13.Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1038 and later. Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD
INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC73060008) for details.
14.The factory settings in the parentheses are for 3-wire sequence.
Setting
User Constants
*
*
*
*
*
15.If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed for the specified acceleration time (C1-01 to C1-08).
16.Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG: 1038 and later.
17.Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions RPG: 1034 or later.
18.Applicable for G7-Series Inverters with software versions PRG:1039 or later.
19.If a current exceeding 110% of the Inverter rated current flows through the unit, the carrier frequency will automatically decrease and electromagnetic noise will
occur.
10
10-37
Index
INDEX
digital operator connection fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-9
digital output cards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-162
drive mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5, 3-7
dwell function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-22
Symbols
+/- speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-82
Numerics
2-wire sequence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-10
3-wire sequence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-11
A
AC reactor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-17
acceleration and deceleration times - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-18
advanced programming mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5, 3-10
ASIC internal RAM fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-11
ASIC version fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-11
auto restart - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-72
autotuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9
autotuning mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5, 3-14
B
baseblock circuit error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-10
braking resistor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-21
braking resistor unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-21, 10-20
braking unit- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-21
BUS Option Com Err - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-10, 7-18
C
CALL Com Call - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-18
CE MEMOBUS Com Err - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-18
CE Memobus Com Err - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-10
CF out of control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
circuit breaker - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-16
common specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4
communications on standby - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-18
communications option board A/D converter error - - - - - - - - -7-11
communications option card DPRAM error - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-12
communications option card model code error - - - - - - - - - - - -7-11
communications option card self diagnostic error - - - - - - - - - -7-11
constant selection error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-20
constant setting error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-21
constant setting range error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-20
control circuit terminals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-22
control fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
control method - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
control method selection error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-20
control power fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4
cooling fin overheating - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4
CPF00 CPF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-10
CPF01 CPF01 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-10
CPU internal A/D converter error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-11
CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-11
crimp terminals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6, 2-22, 2-38
D
daily inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
DC reactor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -2-17
detecting motor overspeed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-161
detecting motor torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-53
detecting PG open circuit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-161
DEV Speed Deviation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-16
digital operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
digital operator communications error 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-10
digital operator communications error 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-10
Index-1
E
EEPROM error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10
EEPROM write error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
EF External Fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
EF0 Opt External Flt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9, 7-17
emergency stop - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-17
enclosed wall-mounted type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-4
energy-saving - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-115
ERR EEPROM R/W Err - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
excessive speed deviation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8, 7-16
external fault function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-85
F
FBL Feedback Loss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8, 7-17
FJOG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-84
forward/reverse run commands input together - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
frequency reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2, 6-28
fuse blown - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-3
G
ground fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-2
ground fault interrupter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-16
ground wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-20
H
high-slip braking OL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-7
hunting-prevention function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-40
I
incorrect inverter capacity setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
inductive noise - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-19
inrush prevention circuit fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-4
installation site - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-9
installed braking resistor overheating - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-5
internal braking transistor fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-5
inverter input voltage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-121
inverter overload - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-7
J
jump frequency function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-31
L
limiting motor rotation direction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-62
loaded operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16
M
magnetic contactor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
main circuit overvoltage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-3
main circuit undervoltage - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-3, 7-15
main circuit voltage fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-4
maintenance and inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -8-1
MEMOBUS communications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-92
MEMOBUS communications error - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-10, 7-18
modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -3-5
motor constants - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-117
motor overheating - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
motor overheating alarm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-5
motor overheating fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-5
motor overload - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -7-6
motor protection operation time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-59
mounting dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -1-6
Index
multi-function analog input - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-47
multi-function analog input selection error - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
multi-function input selection error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
multi-speed operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
N
noise filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
no-load operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-16
number of gear teeth between PG and motor - - - - - - - - - - - -6-161
number of PG pulses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-160
O
OH Heatsink Overtemp - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
OH2 Over Heat 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
OH3 Motor Overheat 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
OL3 Overtorque Det 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
OL4 Overtorque Det 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
OPE01 kVA Selection- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
OPE011 Carr Freq/On-Delay - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
OPE02 Limit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
OPE03 Terminal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
OPE05 Sequence Select - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
OPE06 PG Opt Missing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
OPE07 Analog Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
OPE08 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
OPE09 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
OPE10 V/f Ptrn Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
open chassis type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-4
open-loop vector control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9
operation errors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
OPR Oper Disconnect - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
option card communications error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18
option card connection error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
option card selection error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
option communications error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10
OS Overspeed Det - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
output open-phase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4
OV DC Bus Overvolt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
overcurrent - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
overspeed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8, 7-16
overtorque 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
overtorque detected 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
overtorque detected 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
P
password - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17, 6-156
periodic inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
periodic maintenance of parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-3
PG (encoder) pulses - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-39
PG disconnection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
PG disconnection detected - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
PG pulse monitor output dividing ratio - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-161
PG rotation direction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-160
PG speed control card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-160
PG speed control cards - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-31
PGO PG Open - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
PID control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-106
PID control selection error - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
PID feedback reference lost - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8, 7-17
power ON - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
rated current - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-58
RJOG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-84
run command - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-10
S
S-curve characteristics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-21
setting speed limit bias - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-132
slip compensation function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-36
speed control with PG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-158
stabilizing speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-41
stall prevention function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-23, 6-25, 6-50
standard connection diagrams - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-15
standard inverter specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2
stopping methods - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-12
straight solderless terminals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-23, 2-38
surge absorber - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-17
switching motors when the power supply is ON - - - - - - - - - -6-149
T
terminal block - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
thermal overload relay - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-19
tightening torque - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-38
timer function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-105
torque compensation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-38
torque limit function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-46
trial operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-1
troubleshooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-1, 7-25
U
UL3 Undertorq Det 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
UL4 Undertorq Det 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
undertorque 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
undertorque 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
undertorque detected 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
undertorque detected 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
user constant access levels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
UV DC Bus Undervolt - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
V
V/f control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
V/f control with PG - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
V/f pattern - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -6-120, 6-122
verify mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5, 3-13
VS operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -10-24
W
watchdog timer fault - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-11
wire size - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-22
wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-1
Q
quick programming mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5, 3-8
R
radio interference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-20
Index-2
Revision History
The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the bottom of the back cover.
MANUAL NO.‫ޓ‬TOE-S616-60.1B
Published in Japan
March 200301-05
1
Revision number
Date of
Date of original
publication publication
Date of
Publication
Rev.
No.
−
−
First edition
March 2003
1
−
Addition: Constants for the Inverters with software version PRG:102, description of replacing
cooling fan and circulation fan, etc.
April 2003
2
Back cover
Revision: Address
July 2003
3
Chapter 4
Revision: Stationary Autotuning (T1-01=1)
Addition: Precautions After Using Rotational and Stationary Autotuning
January 2004
4
Chapter 2
Addition: Note 12 to connection diagram.
Note after main circuit configuration diagrams for C1MR-G7A2030 to 2110.
Explanation of I/O circuit configuration diagram for PG-B2.
Chapter 5
Addition: Values for 400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW under Factory Settings that Change with the
Inverter Capacity.
Note 5 for carrier frequency C6-03 to C6-05.
Chapter 6
Revision: Multi-function contact input terminals S7, S8 for multi-step operation to S9, S7.
Addition: Output Terminal Function
Explanation of restrictions on maximum output frequency depending on carrier frequency under Reducing Noise and Leakage Current.
Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
Chapter 7
Revision: Main circuit capacitor neutral point potential error causes and corrective action under
Fault Detection.
Addition: Operator errors in table under Fault Detection.
Reset during Run Command input error under Alarm Detection.
Chapter 9
Revision: Input noise filter model numbers under Specifications of Options and Peripheral
Devices.
Addition: Notes 4 and 5 under Common Specifications.
Chapter 10
Revision: Precautions for Open-loop Vector 2 Control.
Addition: Applications with Repetitive Loads
Preface
Addition: Warranty Information
May 2001
September 2004
5
Section
Revised Content
Chapter 1
Addition: Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover
Chapter 2
Revision: Inverter main circuit configuration diagrams for models CIMR-F7A2037 to 2110 and
CIMR-F7A4075 to 4300
Addition: LONWORKS Communications Boards SI-J and SI-W1 in Table 2.14 Option Board
Specifications
Chapter 4
Addition: Setting 3 for Constant T1-01
Chapter 5
Chapter 5
Addition: Constant N1-03
Chapter 6
Chapter 10
January 2005
September 2005
6
7
Chapter 6
Deletion: Speed Limit Bias Setting under Torque Control
Chapter 7
Addition: PG Direction and PG Open in Table 7.4 Errors During Autotuning
Chapter 8
Addition: Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board
Chapter 9
Addition: LONWORKS Communications Boards SI-J and SI-W1 in Table 9.5 Option Boards
Chapter 3
Addition: y DATA/ENTER Key is invalid when UV is detected.
y Table 3.2 Relation of Inverter to RUN and STOP Indicators
Chapter 7
Revision: Note about GF in Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing.
Addition: Note about OC and GF in the Meaning column in Table 7.1 Fault Displays and Processing.
Back cover
Revision: Address
Date of
Publication
June 2006
Rev.
No.
8
Section
Revised Content
Preface
Addition: Safety Precautions
• Setting User Constants
Stationary autotuning precautions
• Trial Operation
Inverter settings precautions
• Maintenance and Inspection
Precaution about using an Inverter with an elevator
Precaution about times when a holding brake is necessary
Chapter 1
Revision: Fig1.9 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7A23P7 Shown Above)
Chapter 2
Addition: • Note in Table 2.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
• IMPORTANT 12, 13, and 14 in Connection Diagram
• IMPORTANT in Standard Connection Diagrams
• Table 2.14 Option Board Specifications
MECHATROLINK Communication Board
• Fig 2.22 Cutting the Front Cover
Revision: • IMPORTANT 2 in Connection Diagram
• Factory setting for multi-function photo-coupler output 4 frequency detection 2 →
minor fault
• Table 2.2 400 V Class Wire Sizes
Following recommended wire sizes:G7A4185, G7A4220, G7A4300
• Description of installing a ground fault interrupter in Wiring the Main Circuits
• Fig 2.24 Wiring an Open-collector Input
Chapter 4
Addition: • Precautions for precision settings
• Description of stationary autotuning 2
Revision: • Fig 4.1 Trial Operation Flowchart
• Fig 4.3 Settings According to the Control Method
• Checking Operating Status under Loaded Operation
Chapter 5
Addition: • Following constants
b3-17, b3-18, b3-19, F6-08, F6-09, H5-10, L8-32, L8-39, L8-41, U1-61, U1-63, U1-83,
U1-84, U2-21, U2-22, o2-18, T1-09
• 2 setting of b1-08
• 4 setting of T1-01
• Note in the table of L2 constants
• Note *2 in the table of U2 constants
• 2F, 36, and 3D settings of multi-function output terminal
• Note *5 about C4-02 in the table in Factory Settings that Change with the Control
Method (A1-02)
• L8-39 in the table in Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity (o2-04)
Revision: • Note *2 about E2-01
• Note *3 about E2-03 and E4-03
• Note *8 about T1-09
Chapter 6
Addition: • Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only (Current Input) in Frequency
Reference
• Following items in Continuing Operation
• IMPORTANT in Speed Search
• Additional description of master speed analog input in Continuing Operation at
Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost
• Varispeed F7 Function Block
• Frequency Detection 5 in Using Frequency Detection
• Setting the V/f Pattern
Description about the changes in the OV and BTR levels that depend on the input voltage in Setting the V/f Pattern.
• Torque Control
Description of setting speed limit bias
• Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values (VERIFY)
under Digital Operator Functions
Description of error display CPE
• Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
• Description about frequency detection 5, which is an Inverter output signal to engage
a holding brake
• IMPORTANT about precautions on trial operation
• IMPORTANT in Brake ON/OFF Sequence
• Current Alarm Function
• Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function
• Maintenance Timer Display Function
Date of
Publication
June 2006
Rev.
No.
8
Section
Revised Content
Chapter 6
Revision: • Restarting Operation After Transient Fault (Auto Restart Function) under Continuing
Operation
• Description of OH1 detection of Inverter’s cooling fan fault
• Fig 6.50 Baseblock Commands
• Fig 6.64 PID Control Block
• Torque Control under Individual Operation
Example Diagrams of winding and rewinding operation during torque control
• Application precautions in Copying Constants
• Using Inverters for Elevating Machines
• Fig 6.85 Brake ON/OFF Sequence Circuit Configuration
• Description in Confirming Startup Current and Reducing Carrier Frequency
Chapter 7
Addition: • Fault Detections
Descriptions of FAN, SER, and E5
• Alarm Detections
Descriptions of FAN, E5, AEr, CyC, BB, HCA, LT-F, and LT-C
• Table 7.2 Causes and Corrective Actions for When the Digital Operator Goes Dark
• Note in Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings
• Adjusted Silp Value in Table 7.5 Errors During Autotuning
• CPE in Table 7.6 Errors during Copy Function
• Following descriptions in Troubleshooting
• The Inverter does not operate
• Acoustic Noise from the Motor Changes
Revision: • Probable causes and corrective actions for the OC, GF, PUF, OV, UV1, UV2, UV3, OH
(OH1), OL1, OL2, PGO, DEV, CPF03 to CPF05 and CPF23 faults and OH, FBL,
PGO, and DEV alarms
Deletion: • Alarm Detections
Descriptions of E-15
Chapter 8
Addition: • Descriptions in Periodic Maintenance of Parts
• Description of how to attach the fan cover for 200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW, 45 kW,
55 kW, 400 V Class Inverters of 18.5 kW to 75 kW
• Description of how to replace the cooing fan and circulation fan for 400 V Class
Inverters of 185 kW, 220 kW, and 300 kW
Revision: Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board
Chapter 9
Addition: • Rated input current in Table 9.1 200 V Class Inverters and Table 9.2 400 V Class
Inverters
• Notes *7 and *8 in Table 9.3 Common Specifications
• MECHATROLINK Communications Interface Board SI-T in Table 9.5 Option Boards
Chapter 10
Addition: • Conformance to UL standard
• Conformance to CE markings
• Note *4 in Fig 10.9
November 2007
9
Back cover
Revision: Address
March 2008
10
Back cover
Revision: Address
11
Back cover
Revision: Address
June 2008
Varispeed G7
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER (SOLUTION CENTER)
480, Kamifujisawa, Iruma, Saitama 358-8555, Japan
Phone 81-4-2962-5696 Fax 81-4-2962-6138
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone 1-847-887-7000 Fax 1-847-887-7370
YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL LTDA.
Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Sao Paulo-SP CEP 04304-000, Brazil
Phone 55-11-3585-1100 Fax 55-11-5581-8795
YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH
Hauptstraβe 185, 65760 Eschborn, Germany
Phone 49-6196-569-300 Fax 49-6196-569-398
YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.
1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, United Kingdom
Phone 44-1236-735000 Fax 44-1236-458182
YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION
7F, Doore Bldg. 24, Yeoido-dong, Youngdungpo-Ku, Seoul 150-877, Korea
Phone 82-2-784-7844 Fax 82-2-784-8495
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.
151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park 556741, Singapore
Phone 65-6282-3003 Fax 65-6289-3003
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD.
No.18 Xizang Zhong Road. Room 1702-1707, Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 200001, China
Phone 86-21-5385-2200 Fax 86-21-5385-3299
YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SHANGHAI) CO., LTD. BEIJING OFFICE
Room 1011A, Tower W3 Oriental Plaza, No.1 East Chang An Ave.,
Dong Cheng District, Beijing 100738, China
Phone 86-10-8518-4086 Fax 86-10-8518-4082
YASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION
9F, 16, Nanking E. Rd., Sec. 3, Taipei, Taiwan
Phone 886-2-2502-5003 Fax 886-2-2505-1280
YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
YASKAWA
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be
employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under
the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade
Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant
documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply.
Specifications are subject to change without notice
for ongoing product modifications and improvements.
&copy; 2001-2008 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
MANUAL NO. TOE-S616-60.1E
Published in Japan June 2008 01-5 11 -0
08-5-10
">

Здравейте! Аз съм AI чатбот, специално обучен да ви помага с YASKAWA CIMR-G7A4055 Instruction manual. Аз съм прегледал задълбочено документа и мога да ви помогна да намерите точната информация, която ви е необходима, или да обясня съдържанието на ясни и прости термини. Независимо дали търсите насоки за конкретни функции, стъпки за отстраняване на неизправности или обща употреба, не се колебайте да задавате въпросите си. Колкото повече подробности предоставите за вашите притеснения или нужди, толкова по-точно и ефективно мога да ви помогна!

Асистентът пише

Асистентът не е на клавиатурата. Моля, опитайте отново по-късно.

Изглежда, че сте достигнали документ, който е написан на няколко езика, включително такъв, който не е вашият роден език. Можете да използвате следните връзки, за да скриете временно страници без езика, който предпочитате.